Extron electronics RGB 202 VS2 Instruction manual

båÅçêÉ=mêÉëÉåí~íáçå=póëíÉã
rëÉêÛë=dìáÇÉ
•
•
Manual # 26-0313000-00
Revision B
båÅçêÉ=mêÉëÉåí~íáçå=póëíÉã=›=rëÉêÛë=dìáÇÉ
`çéóêáÖÜí
© Barco, Inc. October 24, 2006
All rights reserved. No part of this document may be copied, reproduced or translated. It
shall not otherwise be recorded, transmitted or stored in a retrieval system without the prior
written consent of Barco.
kçíáÅÉ
Barco provides this manual “as is” without warranty of any kind, either expressed or
implied, including but not limited to the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for
a particular purpose. Barco may make improvements and/or changes to the product(s) and/
or the program(s) described in this publication at any time without notice.
This publication could contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are
periodically made to the information in this publication; these changes are incorporated in
new editions of this publication.
cÉÇÉê~ä=`çããìåáÅ~íáçåë=`çããáëëáçå=Ec``F=pí~íÉãÉåí
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class A digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a
commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area may cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be responsible for
correcting any interference.
dì~ê~åíÉÉ=~åÇ=`çãéÉåë~íáçå
Barco provides a guarantee relating to perfect manufacturing as part of the legally
stipulated terms of guarantee. On receipt, the purchaser must immediately inspect all
delivered goods for damage incurred during transport, as well as for material and
manufacturing faults Barco must be informed immediately in writing of any complaints.
The period of guarantee begins on the date of transfer of risks, in the case of special
systems and software on the date of commissioning, at latest 30 days after the transfer of
risks. In the event of justified notice of compliant, Barco can repair the fault or provide a
replacement at its own discretion within an appropriate period. If this measure proves to be
impossible or unsuccessful, the purchaser can demand a reduction in the purchase price or
cancellation of the contract. All other claims, in particular those relating to compensation for
direct or indirect damage, and also damage attributed to the operation of software as well
as to other services provided by Barco, being a component of the system or independent
service, will be deemed invalid provided the damage is not proven to be attributed to the
absence of properties guaranteed in writing or due to the intent or gross negligence or part
of Barco.
If the purchaser or a third party carries out modifications or repairs on goods delivered by
Barco, or if the goods are handled incorrectly, in particular if the systems are commissioned
operated incorrectly or if, after the transfer of risks, the goods are subject to influences not
2
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
agreed upon in the contract, all guarantee claims of the purchaser will be rendered invalid.
Not included in the guarantee coverage are system failures which are attributed to
programs or special electronic circuitry provided by the purchaser, e.g. interfaces. Normal
wear as well as normal maintenance are not subject to the guarantee provided by Barco
either.
The environmental conditions as well as the servicing and maintenance regulations
specified in this manual must be complied with by the customer.
qê~ÇÉã~êâë
Brand and product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks, registered
trademarks or copyrights of their respective holders. All brand and product names
mentioned in this manual serve as comments or examples and are not to be understood as
advertising for the products or their manufactures.
`çãé~åó=^ÇÇêÉëë
Barco Media and Entertainment
11101 Trade Center Drive
Rancho Cordova, California 95670
USA
•
•
•
Phone: (916) 859-2500
Fax: (916) 859-2515
Website: www.barco.com
Barco N.V.
Noordlaan 5
8520 Kuurne
BELGIUM
•
•
•
Phone: +32 56.36.82.11
Fax: +32 56.35.16.51
Website: www.barco.com
Technical Support
•
•
Tech Line: (866) 374-7878 — 24 hours per day, 7 days per week
E-mail: folsomsupport@barco.com
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
3
léÉê~íçêë=p~ÑÉíó=pìãã~êó
The general safety information in this summary is for operating personnel.
aç=kçí=oÉãçîÉ=`çîÉêë=çê=m~åÉäë
There are no user-serviceable parts within the unit. Removal of the top cover will expose
dangerous voltages. To avoid personal injury, do not remove the top cover. Do not operate
the unit without the cover installed.
mçïÉê=pçìêÅÉ
This product is intended to operate from a power source that will not apply more than 230
volts rms between the supply conductors or between both supply conductor and ground. A
protective ground connection by way of grounding conductor in the power cord is essential
for safe operation.
dêçìåÇáåÖ=íÜÉ=mêçÇìÅí
This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord. To avoid
electrical shock, plug the power cord into a properly wired receptacle before connecting to
the product input or output terminals. A protective-ground connection by way of the
grounding conductor in the power cord is essential for safe operation.
rëÉ=íÜÉ=mêçéÉê=mçïÉê=`çêÇ
Use only the power cord and connector specified for your product. Use only a power cord
that is in good condition. Refer cord and connector changes to qualified service personnel.
rëÉ=íÜÉ=mêçéÉê=cìëÉ
To avoid fire hazard, use only the fuse having identical type, voltage rating, and current
rating characteristics. Refer fuse replacement to qualified service personnel.
aç=kçí=léÉê~íÉ=áå=bñéäçëáîÉ=^íãçëéÜÉêÉë
To avoid explosion, do not operate this product in an explosive atmosphere.
4
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
qÉêãë=få=qÜáë=j~åì~ä=~åÇ=bèìáéãÉåí=j~êâáåÖ=
t^okfkd
Highlights an operating procedure, practice, condition, statement, etc., which, if not strictly
observed, could result in injury to or death of personnel.
Note
Highlights an essential operating procedure, condition or
statement.
`^rqflk
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature
accompanying the appliance.
^sboqfppbjbkq>
Le point d´exclamation dans un triangle equilatéral signale à alerter l´utilisateur qu´il y a
des instructions d´operation et d´entretien tres importantes dans la litérature qui
accompagne l´appareil.
slopf`eq
Ein Ausrufungszeichen innerhalb eines gleichwinkeligen Dreiecks dient dazu, den
Benutzer auf wichtige Bedienungs-und Wartungsanweisungen in der Dem Great
beiliegenden Literatur aufmerksam zu machen.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5
`Ü~åÖÉ=eáëíçêó
The table below lists the changes to the Encore Presentation System User’s Guide.
Table 0-1. Change History
Rev
6
Date
ECO #
Description
Approved By
A
12/10/04
1360
Released
R. Pellicano
B
10/24/06
1704
Updated features and menus
R. Pellicano
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
q~ÄäÉ=çÑ=`çåíÉåíë
`Ü~éíÉê=N
fåíêçÇìÅíáçå =K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=NT
Chapter Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Use This Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents and Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terms and Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Video Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Encore Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Encore Video Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Flexibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scaling and Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Flexibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Word About Layers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Word About Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effect Combinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Mixer Effects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Mixer Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Triple Mixer Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integration with Signal Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Event Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Encore Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Barco Backup and Restore Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Differentiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What’s New in the User’s Guide, Rev. B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
`Ü~éíÉê=O
18
19
19
19
19
20
20
22
22
23
24
24
24
25
25
26
27
27
29
30
32
32
32
32
32
33
34
e~êÇï~êÉ=lêáÉåí~íáçå =K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=PV
In This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video Processor Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video Processor Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Word About M/E Connector Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M/E Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M/E Input Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Output Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Input Flexibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller Rear Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
39
40
41
44
45
47
48
48
49
7
Table of Contents
`Ü~éíÉê=P
e~êÇï~êÉ=fåëí~ää~íáçå=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=RN
In This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unpacking and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rack-Mount Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable and Adapter Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Screen Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Triple Screen Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wide Screen Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wide Screen Configuration Plus Wide Screen Preview . . . . . . . . . . .
Completing Wide Screen Preview Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Screen Stack Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wide Screen Stack Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Connection Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Blank Connection Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Router I/O Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Encore Input Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Encore Destination Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program and Source Link Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Edge-Blending Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Content Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Projector Setup and System Adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Program and Source Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Left Justified Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center Justified Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
`Ü~éíÉê=Q
51
52
52
52
52
53
54
55
58
62
67
69
71
75
80
82
83
83
87
88
89
89
89
91
92
93
93
95
`çåíêçääÉê=lêáÉåí~íáçåK=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=VT
In This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Controller LC Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Controller SC Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Use of Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Controller Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Touch Screen Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
System Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Alphanumeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Joystick Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Machine Control Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Console Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Preset Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Destination Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Source Selection Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Layer Control Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Layer Functions Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Live Switch Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Transition Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Group Control Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
8
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Program Preset Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Layer/Aux Control Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transition Functions Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Key Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
`Ü~éíÉê=R
129
130
132
134
jÉåì=lêáÉåí~íáçå=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=KNPR
In This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Global Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Home Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Menu Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Sub Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aspect Ratio Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizing Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1:1 Sizing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oversample Sizing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Color Balance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Menu Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Sub Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Genlock Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Pattern Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wide Screen Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Menu Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Sub Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Reset Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software Version Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Widescreen Link Diagnostics Menu . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotary Encoder Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TBar & Joystick Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Detect Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Destination Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aux Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Setup Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Source Patch Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Router Specification Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comm Setup Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-232 Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lantronix Setup Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Patch Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
135
136
137
138
138
139
140
143
143
144
145
145
146
147
148
148
149
150
150
151
152
153
154
156
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
168
171
172
174
175
175
176
177
178
179
9
Table of Contents
Miscellaneous Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous Menu Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous Sub Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console Port Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lockout Code Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EDID DVI Input Format Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video Processors ID Definition Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LCD Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Preference Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backup/Restore Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Backup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effects Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy Setup Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Key Copy Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIP Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIP Adjustment Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIP Adjustment Menu Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIP Adjustment Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIP Joystick Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIP Adjustment Sub Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clone Setup Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Border Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shadow Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Image Effects Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Menu Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luma Key Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Color Key Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cut + Fill Key Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Sub Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Matte Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Joystick Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Crop Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Source Adjustment Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Source Adjustment Menu Trees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Source Adjustment Menu Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Source Adjustment Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Source Joystick Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background Input Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background Input Setup Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shared Background Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background Menu Functions — Matte Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BG Matte Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background (and DSK) Menu Functions — DVI Type. . . . . . . . . . . .
Background (and DSK) Menu Functions — Analog Type . . . . . . . . .
Background (and DSK) Menu Functions — FG Type . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame Grab Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame Grab Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
179
180
181
181
182
183
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
194
195
195
196
196
197
199
200
201
203
203
204
204
205
205
206
207
207
208
209
210
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
225
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Frame Grab Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame Grab Menu Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame Grab Sub Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame Grab Name Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame Erase Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame Save Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame Delete Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame Recall Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSK Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSK Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSK Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSK Luma Key Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSK Color Key Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSK Input Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
`Ü~éíÉê=S
226
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
233
234
234
235
237
póëíÉã=pÉíìéK=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=KOPV
In This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Setup Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ID Setup and Remote Enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peripheral Power Up and Status Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Downloading Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return to Factory Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Touch Screen Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming EDID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restore from Flash Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Router Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D/A Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Patching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Destination Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard and Stack Destination Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ScreenPRO-II Destination Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX Destination Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aux Destination Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aux Destination Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ImagePRO or PrePRO-II Aux Destination Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aux Destination Setup Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Format Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sync Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Genlock Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Projector Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Screen Projector Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wide Screen Projector Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Setup — Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Setup — Comprehensive Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Setup Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSK Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving the Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backup to Flash Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
239
240
241
242
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
254
255
257
257
258
259
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
266
267
269
271
271
271
274
274
277
278
11
Table of Contents
`Ü~éíÉê=T
léÉê~íáçåë =K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=KOTV
In This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operational Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitor Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Touch Screen Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wide Screen Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lookahead Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding Raster Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Word About LOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting User Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding Input File Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Alphanumeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the PS/2 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Learning a Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding or Removing Destinations from a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activating a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clearing a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlearning a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activating and Deactivating Destinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clearing Destinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Routing Sources to Aux Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pending and Completing an Aux Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Live Switch Aux Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program/Preview Aux Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Aux Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding Split and Mix Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Split Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mix Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with PIPs in Split Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with PIPs in Mix Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying PIPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with Keys in Split Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with Keys in Mix Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Cut & Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clearing Layers from Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying Layers On Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with Layer Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Layer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Full Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Clone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Swap Z-order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Black Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
279
280
281
281
282
283
284
285
286
286
287
288
289
290
290
291
291
291
292
292
293
293
293
294
294
295
295
296
297
297
298
299
299
299
300
301
301
302
303
303
304
305
306
307
307
307
308
308
309
309
310
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Using Ext Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Source Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Join Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Move. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Moves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program a Move on Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program a Move on Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pending and Triggering Moves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pend on Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pend on Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Move Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with Live Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Live Switch Program/Preview Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Live Switch Source Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Live Mode Source Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wipe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Word About Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recalling Presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Next and Previous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Presets and Moves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preset Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Layer and Aux Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with User Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing User Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applying User Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Key Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with Tallies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enable/Disable Controller Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Backup and Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with Frame Grabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame Capture Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capturing Frames from a Background or DSK Input . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capturing Frames from a Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving Frames in Permanent Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Naming a Saved Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Erasing and Deleting Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with the DSK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
^ééÉåÇáñ=^=
310
310
311
311
313
313
313
314
314
314
315
315
317
317
318
319
320
320
320
321
321
322
322
323
324
324
324
325
325
326
327
327
327
327
328
329
330
330
331
332
332
334
335
336
337
337
339
péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåëK=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=KPQN
In This Appendix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
13
Table of Contents
Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical and Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DVI Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DVI-I Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog 15-pin D Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tally Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input and Output Resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
^ééÉåÇáñ=_=
`çåí~Åí=fåÑçêã~íáçå=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=KPRT
In This Appendix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return Material Authorization (RMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
^ééÉåÇáñ=`=
359
360
360
360
361
361
361
362
364
365
tçêâáåÖ=táíÜ=aÉëíáå~íáçåë =K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=KPST
In This Appendix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ScreenPRO-II Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Router Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Serial Router Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Ethernet Router Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Serial and Ethernet Router Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PresentationPRO-II Aux Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ImagePRO Aux Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
^ééÉåÇáñ=b=
357
357
357
358
réÖê~ÇáåÖ=pçÑíï~êÉK=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=KPRV
In This Appendix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software Upgrade Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Downloading Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Via FTP Site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Via Web Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Upgrade Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Upgrade Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Ethernet Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
^ééÉåÇáñ=a=
342
343
344
345
346
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
355
367
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
^ééäáÅ~íáçå=kçíÉë K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=KPTR
In This Appendix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
14
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Encore Controller to Router Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXT COMM Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Connection — Straight Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Connection — Null Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lantronix Ethernet to Serial Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Router Connection Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Router Interface Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extron Router Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DVILink and DPI Router Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sierra Video Systems Router Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leitch Router Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
fåÇÉñ
376
377
378
379
380
381
383
383
383
383
383
=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=KPUR
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
15
Table of Contents
16
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå
This chapter is designed to introduce you to the Encore Presentation System. Areas to be
covered are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Chapter Structure
How to Use This Guide
Conventions
Terms and Definitions
System Overview
What’s New in the User’s Guide, Rev. B
Note
Once you have reviewed all of the sections in this chapter,
please continue with Chapter 2, “Hardware Orientation” on
page 39.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
17
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå
Chapter Structure
`Ü~éíÉê=píêìÅíìêÉ
The following chapters provide instructions for all aspects of Encore Presentation System
operations:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
18
Chapter 1, “Introduction” provides a system overview, and a list of important new
features in this version of the User’s Guide.
Chapter 2, “Hardware Orientation” on page 39 explains the Encore Presentation
System’s video processor hardware in detail.
Chapter 3, “Hardware Installation” on page 51 provides comprehensive system
installation instructions.
Chapter 4, “Controller Orientation” on page 97 describes each section of the
system’s two controllers — the models LC and SC.
Chapter 5, “Menu Orientation” on page 135 explains the system’s configuration,
setup and adjustment menus, and provides basic menu “navigation” procedures.
Chapter 6, “System Setup” on page 239 outlines procedures for setting up and
configuring the Encore Presentation System.
Chapter 7, “Operations” on page 279 provides basic operating instructions.
Appendix A, “Specifications” on page 341 lists the Encore Presentation System’s
input, output, video, mechanical and power specifications.
Appendix B, “Contact Information” on page 357 lists important Barco contact,
RMA, warranty and technical support details.
Appendix C, “Upgrading Software” on page 359 provides a detailed procedure
for upgrading Encore Presentation System software.
Appendix D, “Working With Destinations” on page 367 outlines the steps
required when Encore is connected to external destinations.
Appendix E, “Application Notes” on page 375 provides important applicationrelated information regarding system setup and operations.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå
How to Use This Guide
eçï=íç=rëÉ=qÜáë=dìáÇÉ
Following are important tips for streamlining your use of this User’s Guide in its electronic
“PDF” form.
k~îáÖ~íáåÖ
Use Acrobat Reader’s “bookmarks” to navigate to the desired location. All chapter files
have the same bookmark structure for instant navigation to any section. Please note:
• Extensive hyperlinks are provided within the chapters.
•
•
•
Use Acrobat’s “Go to Previous View” and “Return to Next View” buttons to trace
your complete navigational path.
Use the “Previous Page” and “Next Page” buttons to go to the previous or next
page within a file.
Use Acrobat’s extensive search capabilities, such as the “Find” tool and “Search
Index” tool to perform comprehensive searches as required.
q~ÄäÉ=çÑ=`çåíÉåíë=~åÇ=fåÇÉñ
Use the Table of Contents bookmarks to navigate a desired topic. Click any item to
instantly jump to that section of the guide. You can also use the Index to jump to specific
topics within a chapter. Each page number in the Index is a hyperlink.
dÉåÉê~ä=léÉê~íáçåë
To ensure trouble-free operation, please follow all procedures as listed below:
•
•
•
For detailed installation instructions, refer to Chapter 3, “Hardware Installation”
on page 51.
For system setup instructions, refer to Chapter 6, “System Setup” on page 239.
For operating instructions, refer to Chapter 7, “Operations” on page 279.
Should you have any questions regarding the installation or operation of the Encore
Presentation System, please consult with the factory. Refer to Appendix B, “Contact
Information” on page 357 for contact information.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
19
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå
Conventions
`çåîÉåíáçåë=
The following conventions are used throughout this guide:
•
•
•
The symbol „ denotes an operations procedure.
The symbol S denotes an example.
Entries written in bold-face letters denote physical Controller buttons or chassis
(Video Processor) connectors.
S Press Split to ...
•
When two buttons together are required for an operation or function, the plus (+)
sign is used between the buttons. This procedure requires that you hold down the
first button, then press the second.
S Learn + 12 (hold down Learn, then press the button labeled 12)
•
Button labels on the Touch Screen menus are shown in bold uppercase letters
between braces.
S Press {BORDER} to …
qÉêãë=~åÇ=aÉÑáåáíáçåë
The following terms and definitions are used throughout this guide:
•
•
A “Background” is an unscaled source (typically originating from a computer’s
multi-head graphics card), or a frame grab from a scaled source. Encore provides
two background sources (BG A and BG B), each of which appears at the
system’s lowest priority — visually in back or underneath all other sources.
A “Destination” is a location to which you can route the output of Encore. A
destination can be configured as:
~
~
~
~
•
•
•
•
multiple screens (such as a wide screen application)
an “Aux” destination (such as a monitor, a PresentationPRO-II or an
ImagePRO system)
an external processor (such as a ScreenPRO-II)
A “Key” is an electronic (and visual) process whereby one image is electronically
superimposed over another source or background. Keys are typically used for
titles, logos, and banners.
A “Layer” is an image display element (such as a PIP, Key or Background) that
has an associated visual priority — either in front (or in back) of another layer.
A “Mixer” is the electronic circuitry that enables you to transition (and scale) PIPs
and Keys over a background.
“M/E” (Mix/Effects) is synonymous with “mixer.” Each Encore M/E is capable of
layering either two PIPs, two keys, or one of each.
~
20
a single screen (one projector)
When discussing system hardware, the term “M/E” will be used to
describe the Processor’s physical input boards.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå
Terms and Definitions
~
When discussing Encore operations, the term “mixer” will be used —
specifically because the term “mixer” is silk-screened on the panel.
Mixer 1
1
A
1
B
Split
Figure 1-1. Mixer Label in the Layer Control Section
•
•
•
•
•
•
“Operator” refers to the person who uses the system.
“PIP” refers to Picture-in-Picture, an on-screen setup in which one picture
(typically of reduced size) is positioned over another background image — or
another PIP. PIPs can be reduced, enlarged, bordered, shadowed, and mixed on
and off Program. PIPs can overlap each other, depending on their visual priority.
A “Preset” is a register in which you can store (and recall) the entire Controller’s
configuration or “look.” On the Controller LC, 900 presets are available. On the
Controller SC, 64 are available. Dedicated “Preset” buttons are provided.
“Screen” and “Menu” both refer to the Touch Screen menus.
“System” refers to the Encore Presentation System.
A “Scaler” is the electronic circuitry that enables you to reduce or enlarge source
images, thus creating PIPs and Keys that can be positioned (and transitioned).
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
21
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå
System Overview
póëíÉã=lîÉêîáÉï
The following topics are discussed in this section:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Advanced Video Processing
Encore Features
The Encore Video Processor
A Word About Layers
A Word About Destinations
Effect Combinations
Integration with Signal Routers
Event Management
Configuration Applications
Product Differentiation
^Çî~åÅÉÇ=sáÇÉç=mêçÅÉëëáåÖ
The Encore Presentation System is the most advanced video processing and presentation
control system on the market today. The system provides source selection, advanced
windowing, seamless switching, video effects and integrated control for professional video
presentations. Encore's modular, scalable architecture allows the system to support a wide
variety of show configurations. The system can efficiently support from 1-32 screens (or
“destinations”) with any combination of independent display or seamless wide screen
display elements.
The Encore Presentation System incorporates universal inputs that accept both analog and
digital video. Motion adaptive de-interlacing is provided for both standard and HD source
video. Incoming video is processed by Barco Folsom's proprietary Athena scaler, which
supports smooth real-time PIP (Picture-In-Picture) movements and re-sizing based upon
user specified key frames.
A fully-loaded Encore configuration supports six independent PIP or Key images, or three
transitioning PIP images. Seamless transition effects, Z-order control, window borders,
drop shadows and a variety of keying effects are fully supported. Two un-scaled
background channels provide a high resolution backdrop that also supports seamless
transition effects. Downstream Key (DSK) effects are supported by a third un-scaled highresolution input channel.
Two different Encore System Controllers models are offered:
•
•
The Encore Controller SC supports 24 inputs and controls 1 to 6 destinations.
The Encore Controller LC supports 64 inputs and controls 1 to 32 destinations.
Both controllers can control external routers for external source selection and Encore Video
Processor units to provide high-performance real-time video effects. The controllers can
also be used with Barco Events Manager software to synchronize operation with external
devices and to run pre-programmed show sequences. The controllers use an embedded
Real-Time Operating System (RTOS) to provide high reliability, rapid power-up and true
real-time performance for critical video processing sequences.
Refer to the “Event Management” section on page 32 for more information on Barco
Events Manager.
22
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå
System Overview
båÅçêÉ=cÉ~íìêÉë
Following is a detailed list of Encore Presentation System features:
•
•
•
12 independent windows or 6 windows with seamless transitions.
Two native high resolution background channels provide background video
underneath PIPs and Keys. Background transitions are standard.
PIP effects, including:
~
~
~
~
~
•
•
PIP clone mode (mirror and offset).
Luminance keys.
Invert keys (key source luminance video inverted).
Color keys (using absolute luminance values of Red Green And Blue).
Split keys (key cut and fill).
“Join” mode to lock mixer layers together (e.g., key cut and fill).
10-bit processing, with 1:1 pixel sampling.
Motion adaptive de-interlacing (SD & HD).
3:2 and 2:2 pull down detection.
Image cropping and aspect ratio correction.
Low video delay — less than 3 input fields.
60ms @ 50Hz
50ms @ 60Hz
Athena proprietary high-performance scaling.
Z-order control for assigning overlay priorities to each PIP or key.
Dynamically re-assignable mixer layers:
~
~
•
•
•
Adjustable PIP borders, including drop shadows and soft edge.
Superior video processing:
~
~
•
•
•
Adjustable PIP aspect ratio.
One native high resolution Downstream Key (DSK) channel, independent of the
PIP/KEY processing channels.
~
~
~
~
•
Smooth PIP moves, with keyframe-controlled sizing and positioning.
Keying effects, including:
~
~
~
~
~
•
A full range of transitions, such as dissolves and wipes.
In Mix mode, a mixer’s two layers are ganged together.
In Split mode, a mixer’s two layers operate independently.
Frame grab “captures” for use as backgrounds and downstream key sources.
Complete lookahead preview.
Blended wide screen projection support.
~
~
~
~
10-bit processing
Variable overlap
Supports standard and pre-overlapped background sources
Edge blending (feathering)
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
23
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå
System Overview
•
•
Multiple output synchronization modes: free-run or vertically locked to NTSC/PAL
black burst.
Optional “Extended Frame Grab” feature stores up to 100 “captured” frames.
qÜÉ=båÅçêÉ=sáÇÉç=mêçÅÉëëçê
The Encore Video Processor is a 3RU rack-mount unit that can be configured with one, two
or three M/E (mixer) boards. One or two M/E systems can be easily upgraded with
additional M/E boards.
fåéìí=cäÉñáÄáäáíó
Each M/E board provides two independent Athena scalers with universal inputs that handle
both analog and digital video sources.
M/E Board
Analog
HD/SDI
DVI
Scaler A
Background Channel
Mixer
Analog
HD/SDI
DVI
Scaler B
Background Channel
Figure 1-2. M/E Board Block Diagram
The Video Processor accepts the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Standard component and composite analog video formats (NTSC, PAL, SECAM)
SDI video
Computer input resolutions up to 1920 x 1200
Analog HD formats including 720p, 1080I, 1080p
HD-SDI Video
2048 x 1080p Digital Cinema video
Plasma display resolutions
pÅ~äáåÖ=~åÇ=hÉóáåÖ
The Athena scaler features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
24
1:1 pixel sampling
Motion adaptive de-interlacing for both standard and high definition sources
3:2 and 2:2 pull down detection
Aspect ratio correction and image cropping
Real-time window resizing and positioning
Full support for seamless transitions, window borders, drop shadows and keying
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå
System Overview
lìíéìí=cäÉñáÄáäáíó
Each Encore Video Processor incorporates one output board, which provides all output
interface functions as well as the blending and data-doubling functions required to support
wide screen applications. Supported output resolutions include:
•
•
•
•
•
Computer output resolutions up to 1600 x 1200
Analog HDTV resolutions including 720p, 1080I, 1080p
HDSDI Video
2048 x 1080p Digital Cinema video
Plasma display resolutions.
Output synchronization is supported to lock the output frame rate to an externally applied
NTSC/PAL black burst signal.
^=tçêÇ=^Äçìí=i~óÉêë
Within the Encore system, each mixer has two layers, A and B. For complete flexibility,
each layer can be assigned to either PIP or Key functionality.
A typical single mixer application (plus DSK) is illustrated below.
Background
Layer A: PIP
Nature
Layer B: Key
DSK
Wilderness
Figure 1-3. Layer Illustration — Background, Single Mixer + DSK
Please note the following important points:
•
•
•
•
•
The Downstream Key (DSK) is the highest priority layer, using an unscaled DVI
input or a scaled frame grab. The DSK visually appears over all other images
(PIPs and keys) on all mixers.
The high resolution Background layer has the lowest priority, using an unscaled
DVI input or a scaled frame grab. This layer visually appears behind all other
PIPs, keys, and the DSK. The system can transition between two background
sources — both of which must be at the projector’s native resolution.
On any mixer, a PIP layer appears over backgrounds and under the DSK. Effects
include mixes and wipes, smooth moves and resizing, adjustable aspect ratio,
borders, drop shadows and soft edges, and PIP “clone” mode (mirror and offset).
On any mixer, a Key layer also appears over backgrounds and under the DSK.
Key effects include luminance keys, split keys (key alpha and fill), invert keys and
color keys (graphics).
Within a single mixer, layer B has priority over layer A, but you can change that
priority as desired by pressing the Swap Z-Order button.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
25
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå
System Overview
•
•
On a triple mixer system, up to six inputs can be scaled to produce PIP or Key
images that can be transitioned independently or in pairs.
Between mixers, the hierarchy of priorities is easy:
Background
M/E 1 (Mixer 1)
M/E 2 (Mixer 2)
M/E 3 (Mixer 3)
DSK
Figure 1-4. Mixer Priority
~
~
~
~
~
The Background layer is always at the bottom.
All effects on Mixer 1 are visually in front of the background.
All effects on Mixer 2 are in front of Mixer 1.
All effects on Mixer 3 are in front of Mixers 1 and 2.
The DSK is visually in front of Mixers 1, 2, 3 and background.
^=tçêÇ=^Äçìí=aÉëíáå~íáçåë
The Encore Presentation System offers complete flexibility with regard to destinations.
Examples of each destination “type” are listed below:
•
•
•
•
•
•
26
Single Screen Destination — this is a “single projector” destination that takes its
input from a Video Processor.
Wide Screen Destination — this is a “multiple projector” destination that takes its
inputs from two (or more) Video Processors.
ScreenPRO-II Destination — this is a standalone ScreenPRO-II that takes its
inputs either via direct connections or via routers. When the ScreenPRO-II output
is connected to a “side” projector (or monitor), its “look” can be controlled from the
Encore Controller as a unique destination.
Aux Destination — this is a monitor that takes its input from a router output (in a
single format). When you select an Aux destination and a source on the
Controller, you are talking directly to a router output via RS-232 or Ethernet
communications — and making the selected source-to-destination connection.
ImagePRO Aux Destination — this is an ImagePRO that takes its input(s) from
multiple routers in multiple formats. When connected to a monitor or projector, a
scaled signal is provided in one format. Whereas an Aux Destination’s input is
single format, an ImagePRO Aux Destination’s input is multi-format.
PresentationPRO-II Aux Destination — this is a PresentationPRO-II that takes
its input(s) from up to two routers — one analog and one SDI. When connected to
a single monitor or projector, a scaled signal is provided in one format. The
transition “type” between sources (e.g., cut, dissolve) is selected on the
PresentationPRO-II itself.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå
System Overview
In Chapter 6, refer to the “Destination Setup” section on page 257 for details on standard
destination setup procedures. Refer to the “AUX Destination Setup” section on page 259
for details on Aux destination setup procedures.
bÑÑÉÅí=`çãÄáå~íáçåë
A fully-loaded Encore Video Processor is a unit with three mixer (M/E) boards. A unit
configured in this way can scale six input sources to create PIPs and/or Keys. These in
turn can be sized and positioned on the screen in real-time.
This section illustrates the many (but not all) combinations of image effects that you can
create on 1, 2 and 3 mixer systems. Please note:
•
•
In the following illustrations, the specific layers used in creating each effect are
labeled (e.g., PIP 1A, PIP 1B). For example, 1A denotes the first PIP or key on
Mixer 1, 1B denotes the second PIP or key on Mixer 1, etc.
The symbol l denotes a PIP or a key that can transition. For example, PIP 2A
l2B indicates that you can dissolve between sources within the PIP.
The following topics are discussed:
•
•
•
Single Mixer Effects
Dual Mixer Effects
Triple Mixer Effects
páåÖäÉ=jáñÉê=bÑÑÉÅíë
A single Mixer Encore system provides two backgrounds, two scalable layers in the Mixer
plus an unscaled DSK. Please note:
•
•
If the DSK is in use, the background cannot transition between A and B — it’s all a
matter of “available resources.”
The DSK and backgrounds are unscaled, in all cases.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “A Word About Resources” section on page 322 for additional
information.
•
Single Mixer Effect 1
This effect includes a non-transitioning background (either A or B), one
transitioning PIP and the DSK.
Background
PIP
1A l1B
DSK
Figure 1-5. Single Mixer Effect 1 Diagram
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
27
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå
System Overview
•
Single Mixer Effect 2
This transition is similar to effect 1, but because the DSK is not in use, the
background can transition from source A to B, and the PIP can transition between
layers A and B.
Background A
lB
PIP
1A l1B
Figure 1-6. Single Mixer Effect 2 Diagram
•
Single Mixer Effect 3
In this effect, because the DSK is in use, the background cannot transition. Here,
you can independently fade (or cut) one scaled PIP and one scaled key, with
complete size and position flexibility.
Background
PIP
1A
Key 1B
DSK
Figure 1-7. Single Mixer Effect 3 Diagram
•
Single Mixer Effect 4
This transition is similar to effect 3, but because the DSK is not in use, the
background can transition between sources A and B. You can also independently
fade, cut, size and position both the PIP and the key.
Background A
PIP
1A
lB
Key 1B
Figure 1-8. Single Mixer Effect 4 Diagram
28
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå
System Overview
•
Single Mixer Effect 5
In this effect, because the DSK is in use, the background cannot transition — you
can use either A or B. Here, you can independently fade two scaled PIPs up and
down — with or without the DSK on screen.
Background
PIP
1A
PIP
1B
DSK
Figure 1-9. Single Mixer Effect 5 Diagram
•
Single Mixer Effect 6
This transition is similar to effect 5, but because the DSK is not in use, the
background can transition. You can also independently fade the two PIPs.
Background A
lB
PIP
1A
PIP
1B
Figure 1-10. Single Mixer Effect 6 Diagram
aì~ä=jáñÉê=bÑÑÉÅíë
A dual Mixer Encore system provides two backgrounds, a total of four scalable layers in the
two Mixers, plus an unscaled DSK.
•
Dual Mixer Effect 1
Using the capabilities of two Mixers, this effect enables you to transition
backgrounds, in addition to transitioning the PIPs on both Mixer 1 and 2 — with or
without the DSK on screen.
Background A l B
PIP
PIP
1A l1B 2A l2B
DSK
Figure 1-11. Dual Mixer Effect 1
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
29
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå
System Overview
•
Dual Mixer Effect 2
With this dual Mixer effect, you can transition backgrounds between sources A
and B, plus independently size, position, cut or fade a PIP and key on each Mixer.
Transitions within the PIPs cannot be performed. The DSK can be used without
restriction.
Background A
PIP
1A
Key 1B
lB
PIP
2A
Key 2B
DSK
Figure 1-12. Dual Mixer Effect 2
•
Dual Mixer Effect 3
This effect enables you to transition between backgrounds, and size/position four
PIPs on screen — with or without the DSK. In addition, any PIP could be
substituted for a key, but transitions within a PIP (or transitions between keys)
cannot be performed.
Background A
PIP 1A
lB
PIP 2A
PIP 1B
PIP 2B
DSK
Figure 1-13. Dual Mixer Effect 3
qêáéäÉ=jáñÉê=bÑÑÉÅíë
A triple Mixer Encore system provides two backgrounds, a total of six scalable layers in the
three Mixers plus an unscaled DSK.
•
Triple Mixer Effect 1
With this three Mixer effect, you can transition between backgrounds, fade or cut
the DSK as desired, and independently transition within three PIPs.
Background A
lB
PIP
PIP
3A l3B
1A l1B PIP
2A l2B
DSK
Figure 1-14. Triple Mixer Effect 1
30
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå
System Overview
•
Triple Mixer Effect 2
This effect enables you to transition between backgrounds sources, plus
independently size, position, cut or fade a PIP and key on each of the three
Mixers. Transitions within the PIPs or transitions between keys cannot be
performed.
Background A
lB
PIP 3A
PIP 1A
Key 1B
PIP 2A
Key 3B
Key 2B
DSK
Figure 1-15. Triple Mixer Effect 2
•
Triple Mixer Effect 3
Here, you can transition between backgrounds, and size/position six PIPs on
screen — with or without the DSK. Any PIP can be substituted for a key, but
transitions within PIPs (or transitions between keys) cannot be performed.
Background A
PIP
PIP 1B
1A
DSK
lB
PIP
2A
PIP
3B
PIP 2B
PIP
3A
Figure 1-16. Triple Mixer Effect 3
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
31
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå
System Overview
fåíÉÖê~íáçå=ïáíÜ=páÖå~ä=oçìíÉêë
The use of high quality routers (routing switchers) is an integral part of the Encore system.
Barco offers a complete line of routers for use with Encore, including models in analog,
SDI, HD/SDI and DVI formats. All of our routers are designed and tested to ensure quality,
reliability, and ease of use.
Encore is also compatible with other manufacturers' routers. In Chapter 5, refer to the
“Router Specification Menu” section on page 174 for details on other manufacturers with
which the Encore system currently interfaces.
bîÉåí=j~å~ÖÉãÉåí
The Encore Presentation System has been designed to be compatible with Barco Events
Manager software. The Events Manager software complements Encore’s real-time control
features by supporting enhanced external device control and sophisticated preprogrammed control sequences. Please note:
•
•
•
Barco Events Manager treats Encore as a peripheral device and sends
commands to the controller to execute timeline programmed sequences. This
allows Encore’s functions to be fully integrated with other show effects.
Because there is bi-directional communications between Barco Events Manager
and Encore, the Encore system can also trigger the Events Manager software.
The range of external devices that can be controlled is greatly increased,
permitting users to automate entire shows. The Events Manager software also
supports the management of digital media sources.
`çåÑáÖìê~íáçå=^ééäáÅ~íáçåë
Two configuration applications are available to assist with system setup, backup and
restore functions.
•
•
Encore Configurator
Barco Backup and Restore Utility
båÅçêÉ=`çåÑáÖìê~íçê
The Encore Configurator enables you to create basic Encore system setups offline, such
as defining wide and single screen parameters, router patching, basic input setup and
basic destination setup. Once complete, the “configuration” can be sent to the Controller,
saving overall setup time with a high degree of convenience. The application also enables
you to remotely access the Encore Configuration Loader.
_~êÅç=_~Åâìé=~åÇ=oÉëíçêÉ=ríáäáíó=
The Barco Backup and Restore Utility enables you to perform complete system backup
and restore operations to a PC (or laptop) connected via Ethernet. Backup and restore
functions include both the Controller and the Video Processor(s).
32
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå
System Overview
mêçÇìÅí=aáÑÑÉêÉåíá~íáçå
The table below illustrates the differences between the small (SC) and large (LC) Encore
controllers.
Table 1-1. Product differentiation between SC and LC controllers
Feature
Small Controller (SC)
Large Controller (LC)
Encore Processors supported
32
32
Wide screen support
Yes
Yes
External Router Control
Yes
Yes
Inputs supported
24
64
Destinations supported
6
32
Available Presets
64
900
Layers supported
1 DSK
6 Scaled Inputs (PIP or Key)
1 Transitioning background
1 DSK
12 Scaled Inputs (PIP or Key)
1 Transitioning background
User-selectable Transitions
Yes
Yes
Available Groups
4
8
Available User-definable keys
None
100
Joystick and T-Bar
Yes
Yes
Machine control
No
Yes
320 x 240 Graphic displays
1
2
Light sticks
2
3
PS/2 Keyboard support
Yes
Yes
Communication
Ethernet, RS-232
Ethernet, RS-232
Program sequencing
Yes
Yes
Field Upgradable
Yes
Yes
Ethernet Control Interfaces
Yes
Yes
Tally Support
8
8
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
33
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå
What’s New in the User’s Guide, Rev. B
tÜ~íÛë=kÉï=áå=íÜÉ=rëÉêÛë=dìáÇÉI=oÉîK=_
This section lists the new Encore features that have been implemented since the last
revision of the Encore Presentation System User’s Guide. Reference links are provided.
•
Wide Screen Preview Configuration
Instructions are provided for configuring a system with a fourth Video Processor,
which is then used to create a combined wide screen program/preview display. In
Chapter 3, refer to the “Wide Screen Configuration Plus Wide Screen Preview”
section on page 67 for details.
•
Live Switch Modes
Two Live Switch modes are available:
~
~
The Live Switch "Source" mode turns both rows of the Source
Selection Bus into a live “Program” bus. In Chapter 7, refer to the
“Using Live Switch Source Mode” section on page 318.
The Live Switch "Program/Preview" mode turns both rows of the
Source Selection Bus into a live “Program/Preview” bus, with the top
row acting as Program, and the bottom row acting as Preview. In
Chapter 7, refer to the “Using Live Switch Program/Preview Mode”
section on page 317 for details.
Note
Program
In the Controller’s Live Switch Section, the Program/
Preview button replaces the previous Layer button.
Preview
•
Tally Mapping
Using the Input Patch menu, you can assign any of the eight available tallies to
any input source. In Chapter 5, refer to the “Input Source Patch Menu” section
on page 172 for details.
•
Invalid Video and LOS
New methods have been implemented to handle invalid video signals and LOS
(loss of video) conditions. In Chapter 5, refer to the “User Preference Menu”
section on page 187, and in Chapter 7, refer to the “A Word About LOS” section
on page 286 for details.
•
Wide Screen Definition Flexibility
You can create wide screen destinations using Video Processors that do not
contain the same number of M/E boards. In Chapter 6, refer to the “Destination
Setup” section on page 257 for details.
•
Frame Grabs
The Frame Grab button accesses the Frame Grab Menu, which enables you to
store up to three frames per destination. Frames can be captured from any layer
(including the Background and DSK), for use on Program in either the
Background or DSK channels. If the “Extended Frame Grab” option is installed,
you can store/recall up to 100 frames internally. In Chapter 7, refer to the
“Working with Frame Grabs” section on page 332 for details.
34
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå
What’s New in the User’s Guide, Rev. B
•
Destination Flexibility
The Encore system offers comprehensive destination flexibility. In addition to
standard single screen and wide screen destinations (Video Processors), you can
configure ScreenPRO-II units as destinations, plus three types of Aux
destinations: standard Aux (monitors), ImagePRO Aux and PresentationPRO-II
Aux. Refer to Appendix D, “Working With Destinations” on page 367 for details.
•
Support for Video Processor IDs 17 - 32
Using the Miscellaneous Menu, you can re-define Video Processor IDs using
numbers 17 - 32. Only Video Processors that are not currently defined as
destinations can be re-defined. In Chapter 5, refer to the “Miscellaneous Menu”
section on page 179 for details.
•
External Trigger Function
When Encore is used in conjunction with Barco Events Manager, the following
functionality is provided:
~
~
Timeline tasks can be triggered when specific Presets are recalled.
Playback of a paused timeline can be resumed (using Ext Trigger).
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Using Ext Trigger” section on page 310 for details.
Note
Ext
Trigger
•
In the Transition Functions Section, the new Ext Trigger
button replaces the previous blank button to the left of the
Black Preview button.
Wide Screen Link Diagnostics
The Diagnostics Menu contains a {LINKS} softkey that accesses the Wide
Screen Link Diagnostics Menu. This menu enables you to test the Program and
Source link cables that are required for wide screen operation. In Chapter 5, refer
to the “Diagnostics Setup Menu” section on page 161.
•
Third Party Router Support
Additional third party serial and Ethernet routers are supported in the Encore
Controller. In Chapter 5, refer to the “Router Specification Menu” section on
page 174 for details.
•
Copy Function
The copy function enables you to copy PIP and Key parameters between mixers.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Using Copy” section on page 309 for details.
•
Downstream Key (DSK)
Encore’s DSK function enables you to use an unscaled DVI source or a scaled
frame grab as the downstream key. The DSK Setup Menu allows you to set up
either a Luma or Color DSK. In Chapter 7, refer to the “Modifying Keys” section
on page 304 for details.
•
Color Keying using the Color Picker
Color Keying enables you to key off a color instead of a luminance value. The
color can be selected via RGB parameters or by using the “Pick Color” option. In
Chapter 7, refer to the “Modifying Keys” section on page 304 for details.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
35
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå
What’s New in the User’s Guide, Rev. B
•
Keyframe Effects for Moves
Numerous predefined keyframe effects are available for “moves,” including linear,
linear accelerations, arches and boomerangs motion types. In Chapter 7, refer to
the “Using Move” section on page 313 for details.
•
Clone Function
For wide screen configurations (only), the Clone function enables you to clone a
PIP or a Key on a particular M/E, creating a copy of the effect on the opposite
screen. All attributes are cloned, including size, source, border and shadow. In
Chapter 7, refer to the “Using Clone” section on page 308 for details.
•
LCD Calibration
The LCD calibration function improves the accuracy of the Touch Screens. In
Chapter 7, refer to the “Touch Screen Calibration” section on page 282.
•
Support for Analog Backgrounds
Using the Background Input Setup Menu, you can choose between Analog, DVI
Matte and “frame grab” backgrounds. In Chapter 5, refer to the “Background
Input Setup Menu” section on page 217 for details.
•
Support for Two Separate Matte Colors
Two separate matte colors can be defined, one for BG A and one for BG B. In
Chapter 5, refer to the “Background Menu Functions — Matte Type” section on
page 220 for details.
•
EDID
The EDID (Extended Display Identification Data) programming procedure is a
prerequisite for background and DSK setup. The procedure guarantees proper
communications at the preferred resolution between Encore’s DVI inputs and your
external equipment. In Chapter 6, refer to the “Programming EDID” section on
page 248 for details.
•
User Keys
On the Controller LC, User Keys are available when you press User Copy (a new
button next to the Copy button). This action accesses the User Key Copy Setup
Menu, which enables you to select all (or a portion) of the current effect’s
attributes, such as border color, PIP size, aspect ratio, etc. In Chapter 7, refer to
the “Working with User Keys” section on page 327 for operating instructions.
•
Group Buttons
All Group buttons operate with “toggle” functionality rather than “additive”
functionality. In Chapter 7, refer to the “Working with Groups” section on
page 290 for instructions.
•
Layer Join Mode
The “Join” mode enables you to create a fixed relationship between a mixer’s two
layers. Whenever the mixer is selected, the two layers size, position, and move
as one. In Chapter 7, refer to the “Using Join Mode” section on page 311 for
instructions.
•
Key Cut and Fill
The “Key Cut and Fill” function enables you to cut a key in Layer B and fill it with
video from Layer A — within the same Mixer. The two Layers can be
manipulated independently or joined using the “Join” function. In Chapter 7, refer
to the “Using Cut & Fill” section on page 303 for instructions.
36
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå
What’s New in the User’s Guide, Rev. B
•
Source Preview
For any selected Layer, press Source Preview in the Layer Functions Section
to quickly focus or “isolate” that layer for sizing and adjustment purposes in
Preview only. In Chapter 7, refer to the “Using Source Preview” section on
page 310 for instructions.
•
Alphanumeric Keypad
On the Controller LC only, the Alphanumeric Keypad enables you to enter and
change numeric fields (on the Touch Screen) without having to use a rotary knob.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Using the Alphanumeric Keypad” section on
page 288 for instructions.
•
PS/2 Keyboard
Standard PS/2 style keyboards can be used with both Controllers for numeric
entry and “naming” of certain functions (such as frame grabs). In Chapter 7, refer
to the “Using the PS/2 Keyboard” section on page 289 for details.
•
Programmable Controller Lockout
You can lock the Controller, thus preventing key presses from changing the
system. While locked, serial commands can still be sent via the Console Port. To
unlock the Controller, a lockout code is required. In Chapter 7, refer to the
“Enable/Disable Controller Lockout” section on page 329 for instructions.
•
Programmable Raster Box Size
In the Settings Menu, users can adjust the size of the raster box that surrounds
PIPs and Keys — on a destination by destination basis. In Chapter 5, refer to the
“Settings Menu” section on page 152 for details.
•
Flicker Reduction for Interlaced Formats
When using Encore to output an interlaced format, a Flicker Reduce option
appears in the Settings Menu. The range is OFF (no reduction) or 1 (minimum
reduction) through 20 (maximum reduction). In Chapter 5, refer to the “Settings
Menu” section on page 152 for details.
•
Output Formats
Additional output formats are available. In Appendix A, refer to the “Input and
Output Resolutions” section on page 352 for details.
•
Video Processor Stacking
“Stacking” is a system configuration method that provides access to six mixers,
with the ability to display up to 12 PIPs simultaneously. Video Processors can be
stacked in single or wide screen configurations as desired, and Controller
operations are identical to “non-stacked” systems. Stacking is only available with
the Controller LC. In Chapter 3, refer to the “Installation” section on page 54 for
installation details. In Chapter 6, refer to the “Destination Setup” section on
page 257 for setup details.
•
Destination Based Effects Menu
The Effects Menu allows you to modify and manage effects on a destination-bydestination basis, including the ability to define key frames, transition rates, paths
and effect properties. In Chapter 5, refer to the “Effects Menu” section on
page 190 for details.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
37
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå
What’s New in the User’s Guide, Rev. B
38
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
OK==e~êÇï~êÉ=lêáÉåí~íáçå
få=qÜáë=`Ü~éíÉê
This chapter provides detailed information about Encore’s Video Processor hardware.
The following topics are discussed:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Video Processor Front Panel
Video Processor Rear Panel
M/E Connectors
M/E Input Notes
Program Output Notes
Analog Input Flexibility
Controller Rear Panels
Note
Once you have reviewed all of the sections in this chapter,
please continue with Chapter 3, “Hardware Installation” on
page 51.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
39
2. Hardware Orientation
Video Processor Front Panel
sáÇÉç=mêçÅÉëëçê=cêçåí=m~åÉä
The figure below illustrates the Video Processor front panel:
1
2
2
1
Visibly yours
Folsom
ENCORE
3
Figure 2-1. Video Processor Front Panel
1)
Chassis Handles
2)
Air Intake Ports
3)
Status LED
Following are descriptions of each front panel control feature:
1)
Chassis Handles
Two Chassis Handles are provided for ease of installation and transportation.
Important
2)
When you transport the chassis by its handles, do not set the
chassis down with the rear connector panel towards the
ground. If you do, this will greatly increase the chance of
damaging the rear connectors.
Air Intake Ports
Two Air Intake Ports are provided for chassis cooling. The direction of airflow is
from the front to the rear. To prevent overheating, do not block the air intake ports.
3)
Status LED
The Status LED, located behind the right-hand Air Intake Port, provides the
following indications:
~
~
~
40
Solid Red: the unit is initializing
Solid Green: the unit is ready for use
Blinking Red: an error has occurred
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
2. Hardware Orientation
Video Processor Rear Panel
sáÇÉç=mêçÅÉëëçê=oÉ~ê=m~åÉä
The figure below illustrates the Video Processor rear panel:
1
DVI
12
2
PREVIEW
Hol
es
ANALOG
3
Hol
es
Hol
es
ANALOG
ANALOG
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
ETHERNET
GENLOCK IN
Hol
es
PROGRAM 2
DVI
DVI
PROGRAM 1
ANALOG
HD / SDI
HD / SDI
OUT
HD / SDI
DVI
INPUT 1A
9
OUT
SOURCE LINK 1
IN
DVI
INPUT 1B
PROGRAM LINK
IN
Hol
es
ANALOG
1
UNIT ID
13
14
Hol
es
ANALOG
Hol
es
ANALOG
HD / SDI
HD / SDI
INPUT 2A
DVI
OUT
SOURCE LINK 2
IN
DVI
INPUT 2B
DVI
OUT
SOURCE LINK 3
IN
DVI
INPUT 3B
HD / SDI
HD / SDI
INPUT 3A
Hol
es
ANALOG
SERIAL
Hol
es
ANALOG
15
16
17
Figure 2-2. Video Processor Rear Panel
1)
Preview Out DVI
7)
Program Out HD/SDI
13)
M/E 2 Connectors
2)
Preview Out Analog
8)
Program Link Out
14)
M/E 3 Connectors
3)
Program 2 Out Analog
9)
Program Link In
15)
Unit ID Selector
4)
Program 2 Out DVI
10)
Ethernet Port
16)
Serial Port
5)
Program 1 Out DVI
11)
Genlock
17)
AC Connector
6)
Program 1 Out Analog
12)
M/E 1 Connectors
Please note:
•
•
•
Connectors 1 through 11 are part of the Video Processor’s output board.
All output connections are standard with the exception of the optional HD/SDI
output (connector 7).
All program and preview DVI output connectors are digital only, and do not include
analog pins.
Following are descriptions of each rear panel connector and section.
1)
Preview Out DVI
One DVI connector is provided for Digital Preview Output. Connect to a DVIcapable monitor. In Appendix A, refer to the “DVI Connector Pinouts” section on
page 346 for pinouts.
2)
Preview Out Analog
One 15-pin D connector is provided for Analog Preview Output. Connect to a
standard VGA monitor. In Appendix A, refer to the “Analog 15-pin D Connector”
section on page 348 for pinouts.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
41
2. Hardware Orientation
Video Processor Rear Panel
3)
Program 2 Out Analog
One 15-pin D connector is provided for the Analog Program 2 Output. Connect
to a standard VGA monitor for analog program monitoring at the Controller’s
location. This output is identical to the analog Program 1 Output, except that it
does not include edge feathering and data doubling components. In Appendix A,
see the “Analog 15-pin D Connector” section on page 348 for pinouts.
4)
Program 2 Out DVI
One DVI connector is provided for the Digital Program 2 Output. Connect to a
DVI-capable monitor for digital program monitoring at the Controller. This output
is identical to the digital Program 1 Output, except that it does not include edge
feathering and data doubling components. In Appendix A, refer to the “DVI
Connector Pinouts” section on page 346 for pinouts.
5)
Program 1 Out DVI
One DVI connector is provided for the Digital Program 1 Output. This output
includes all edge feathering and data doubling components, and is designed for a
digital connection to your projector. In Appendix A, refer to the “DVI Connector
Pinouts” section on page 346 for pinouts.
6)
Program 1 Out Analog
One 15-pin D connector is provided for the Analog Program 1 Output. This
output includes all edge feathering and data doubling components, and is
designed for an analog connection to your projector. In Appendix A, see the
“Analog 15-pin D Connector” section on page 348 for pinouts.
7)
Program Out HD/SDI
One BNC connector is provided for the optional HD/SDI (High Definition/Serial
Digital Interface) output. Connect to an SDI or HDTV monitor, or to video
distribution equipment. Refer to the “Program Output Notes” section on page 48
for additional information on video outputs.
8)
Program Link Out
One DVI connector is provided for the Program Link Output. To ensure proper
data doubling in wide screen configurations, this output connects to the Program
Link Input on another Processor.
~
~
9)
In Chapter 3, refer to the “Program and Source Link Connections”
section on page 89 for details on the proper use of the connectors in
wide screen configurations.
In Appendix A, refer to the “DVI Connector Pinouts” section on
page 346 for pinouts.
Program Link In
One DVI connector is provided for the Program Link Input. To ensure proper
data doubling in wide screen configurations, this input connects to the Program
Link Output from another Encore Processor.
~
~
42
In Chapter 3, refer to the “Program and Source Link Connections”
section on page 89 for details on the proper use of the connectors in
wide screen configurations.
In Appendix A, refer to the “DVI Connector Pinouts” section on
page 346 for pinouts.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
2. Hardware Orientation
Video Processor Rear Panel
10) Ethernet Port
One RJ-45 connector is provided for 10/100BaseT Ethernet communications with
the Controller. For multiple Ethernet connections in an Encore system, a standard
Ethernet switch on an isolated network is recommended. In Appendix A, see the
“Ethernet Connector” section on page 349 for pinouts.
11) Genlock
One BNC connector is provided for an analog Genlock connection. PAL or NTSC
black burst or composite sync signals are recommended. Please note:
~
~
~
In wide screen applications, all Processors must be locked together. If
you provide Genlock to the first Processor in your configuration, Genlock
is distributed to the other Processors via the Program Link connections.
If you do not use Genlock in a wide screen application, Encore
automatically makes the first Processor in your configuration the master.
Genlock is recommended in configurations that use camera sources.
12) M/E 1 Connectors
13) M/E 2 Connectors
14) M/E 3 Connectors
Six analog and digital connectors are provided for each M/E. Please note:
~
~
All M/E boards are identical. Refer to the “M/E Connectors” section on
page 45 for details.
Refer to the “A Word About M/E Connector Priority” section on
page 44 for information on M/E connector priority in different Encore
Processor configurations.
15) Unit ID Selector
One 16-position selector (with physical digits 0 - 15) is provided for setting each
Processor’s unique ID. The selector enables you to assign logical IDs 1 to 16.
Note
Physical digit 0 equates to logical ID 16.
By default, a Processor is configured to be a DHCP Client, and it will
automatically obtain an IP address when it sees a DHCP Server. Controller
Models SC and LC are configured (by default) to be DHCP Servers.
Note
Always ensure that each Processor has a unique ID. During
system setup, the ID will be used during various important
configuration procedures.
S In a single Processor setup, set the ID to 1. In a three-chassis
setup, set the IDs to 1, 2 and 3, respectively.
Note
Using the Miscellaneous Menu, you can re-define IDs using
numbers 17 - 32. In Chapter 5, refer to the “Miscellaneous
Menu” section on page 179 for details.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
43
2. Hardware Orientation
Video Processor Rear Panel
16) Serial Port
One 9-pin D connector is provided for RS-232 serial communications with the
Encore Processor. In Appendix A, refer to the “Serial Connector” section on
page 350 for pinouts.
17) AC Connector
One AC Connector is provided to connect the Processor to your AC source.
Refer to the “Program Output Notes” section on page 48 for additional information on
Processor outputs.
^=tçêÇ=^Äçìí=jLb=`çååÉÅíçê=mêáçêáíó
Depending on your Processor configuration, the M/E connectors on the rear of the
Processor do not necessarily relate 1:1 to the layer buttons in the Controller’s Layer
Control Section. Please note:
•
•
•
The Controller’s layer buttons are arranged left-to-right in order of visual priority,
from the lowest (Mixer 1) to the highest (Mixer 3).
The M/E boards are arranged in order of electronic priority, from the lowest (M/E
3) to the highest (M/E 1).
Electronic priority does not equate 1:1 to visual priority, with regard to the silkscreened labels on the Controller.
With this in mind, the information below lists how the physical connectors relate to the
various mixers on different Processor configurations. Keep this correlation in mind when
you are making rear-panel connections.
•
In a 3 M/E system:
~
~
~
•
M/E 2 connectors have middle priority. They appear as Mixer 2.
M/E 3 connectors are the lowest priority. They appear as Mixer 1.
Background sources will be connected to the M/E 3 board.
In a 2 M/E system:
~
~
~
•
M/E 1 connectors are the highest priority. They appear as Mixer 3 on
the Controller. The DSK will be connected to the M/E 1 board.
M/E 1 connectors are the highest priority, and appear as Mixer 2. The
DSK will be connected to the M/E 1 board.
M/E 2 connectors are the lowest priority, and appear as Mixer 1.
Background sources will be connected to the M/E 2 board.
M/E 3 connectors are not installed.
In a 1 M/E system:
~
M/E 1 connector priorities are relative to the connectors being used:
•
The DVI Input A or Analog Input A connector could be set up
as a Background input (lowest priority).
•
The DVI Input B or Analog Input B connector could be setup
as a DSK input (highest priority).
This leaves the other connectors to fall in between Background and
DSK. The rule stating that “A” connectors are lower in priority than “B”
connectors still holds.
~
44
M/E 2 and 3 connectors are not installed.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
2. Hardware Orientation
Video Processor Rear Panel
jLb=`çååÉÅíçêë
The figure below illustrates a close-up of the M/E connectors. The figure uses M/E 1’s
board, but all M/E connections are identical.
a
Hol
es
ANALOG
b
c
d
e
f
HD / SDI
g
HD / SDI
INPUT 1A
DVI
OUT
SOURCE LINK 1
IN
DVI
INPUT 1B
h
Hol
es
ANALOG
Figure 2-3. M/E Connectors
a)
Analog Input A
d)
Source Link Out
g)
HD/SDI Input B
b)
HD/SDI Input A
e)
Source Link In
h)
Analog Input B
c)
DVI Input A
f)
DVI Input B
On each M/E, three input connections are provided for layer A, three are provided for layer
B, and two “Link” connectors are provided for inter-Processor communications.
Following are descriptions of each M/E connector.
a)
Analog Input A
One 15-pin D connector is provided for the input to the M/E’s Layer A — visually,
the lower priority of the two layers. Connect a VGA source directly, or connect the
output of a VGA router. This input can also be used for composite and component
video. See the “M/E Input Notes” section on page 47 for additional information.
In Appendix A, see the “Analog 15-pin D Connector” section on page 348 for
pinout details.
b)
HD/SDI Input A
One BNC connector is provided for the HD/SDI input to Layer A. Connect an SDI
or HDTV source directly, or connect the output of an SDI or HDTV router. Refer to
the “M/E Input Notes” section on page 47 for additional information.
c)
DVI Input A
One DVI-I connector is provided for both digital and analog inputs to the M/E’s
Layer A — visually, the lower priority of the two by default
~
~
Digital — connect a digital graphics source directly, or connect the
output of a digital graphics router.
Analog — using the appropriate adapter cable, connect an analog VGA
source directly, or connect the output of a VGA router.
Refer to the “M/E Input Notes” section on page 47 for important details on the use
of this connector’s analog component. In Appendix A, refer to the “DVI-I
Connector Pinouts” section on page 347 for pinout details.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
45
2. Hardware Orientation
Video Processor Rear Panel
d)
Source Link Out
One DVI connector is provided for the M/E’s Source Link Output. For wide
screen and multi-screen applications, this connector loops your inputs to the next
Processor in the chain. Because all analog and digital inputs reside in the digital
domain once inside the Processor, each Link Output loops those inputs to the
next Processor’s scalers.
An M/E’s Source Link Output must always be connected to its associated M/E
Source Link Input on the next chassis, and never cross-routed.
S Connect M/E 2’s Source Link Output on Processor 1 to M/E 2’s
Source Link Input on Processor 2.
Please note:
~
~
In a multi-chassis configuration, the link can extend to all chassis.
In all cases, the looped inputs are “pre-scaler.”
In Chapter 3, refer to the “Program and Source Link Connections” section on
page 89 for details on proper connector usage in wide screen configurations.
In Appendix A, refer to the “DVI Connector Pinouts” section on page 346 for
pinout details.
e)
Source Link In
One DVI connector is provided for the M/E’s Source Link Input. For wide screen
and multi-screen applications, this connector accepts the looped outputs from the
previous Processor in the chain. An M/E’s Source Link Input must always be
connected to its associated M/E Source Link Output on the previous chassis,
and never cross-routed.
In Chapter 3, refer to the “Program and Source Link Connections” section on
page 89 for details on proper connector usage in wide screen configurations.
In Appendix A, refer to the “DVI Connector Pinouts” section on page 346 for
pinout details.
f)
DVI Input B
One DVI-I connector is provided for both digital and analog inputs to the M/E’s
Layer B — visually, the higher priority of the two layers by default.
~
~
Digital — connect a digital graphics source directly to this input, or more
typically, connect the output of a digital graphics router.
Analog — using the appropriate adapter cable, connect an analog VGA
source directly to this input, or more typically, connect the output of a
VGA router.
Refer to the “M/E Input Notes” section on page 47 for details on the use of this
connector’s analog component. In Appendix A, refer to the “DVI-I Connector
Pinouts” section on page 347 for pinout details.
g)
HD/SDI Input B
One BNC connector is provided for the HD/SDI input to Layer B. Connect an SDI
or HDTV source directly, or connect the output of an SDI or HDTV router. Refer to
the “M/E Input Notes” section on page 47 for additional information.
46
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
2. Hardware Orientation
M/E Input Notes
h)
Analog Input B
One 15-pin D connector is provided for the input to the M/E’s Layer B — visually,
the higher priority of the two by default. Connect a VGA source directly, or
connect the output of a VGA router. This input can also be used for composite
and component video. See the “M/E Input Notes” section on page 47 for
additional information about video inputs.
In Appendix A, see the “Analog 15-pin D Connector” section on page 348 for
pinout details.
jLb=fåéìí=kçíÉë
Please note the following important points regarding M/E inputs:
•
Single Processor Configurations — Inputs are connected to the Processor in
the normal manner. You can connect a total of six inputs to each M/E:
~
~
Three inputs can connect to layer A (HD/SDI, analog and DVI)
Three inputs can connect to layer B (HD/SDI, analog and DVI)
Using the setup menus, each input can be assigned to a source button on the
Controller, but only two inputs can be used “on air” from an M/E at a time — the
one assigned to layer A and the one assigned to layer B.
Thus, in a three-M/E configuration, you can populate all 18 physical inputs, but
only six PIPs can be used “on air” — using both layers on each mixer.
•
•
•
•
Multiple Processor Configurations — In these configurations, you only need to
connect inputs to the first Processor. Inputs are automatically looped to all other
Processors via the Source Link connections.
Routers — You can connect sources directly to the M/E inputs, or for the greatest
flexibility, you to connect router outputs to the M/E inputs. In this manner, one
Processor input represents any number of video or graphic sources.
HD/SDI Inputs — For the two HD/SDI input connectors on an M/E, you can set
the input to accept SDI (SMPTE 259M-C, NTSC or PAL) or HD-SDI (SMPTE
292M, HDTV).
DVI-I Connectors — There are two DVI-I input connectors for each M/E (A and
B), and each contains both a digital and an analog input. Depending upon your
application (and the location of the M/E), you can use the input for a scaled or an
unscaled source:
~
~
The “digital” side accepts connections from a standard DVI output or
digital graphic router. This side of the input can be used as both a scaled
input source or as an unscaled Background / DSK source.
Using an optional breakout cable, the “analog” side accepts connections
from a VGA output or VGA router. This side is designed for inputting the
system’s unscaled sources — Background and DSK.
•
The lowest priority M/E in your system must be used for
inputting the Background source.
•
The highest priority M/E in your system must be used for
inputting the DSK source.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
47
2. Hardware Orientation
Program Output Notes
mêçÖê~ã=lìíéìí=kçíÉë
Please note the following important points regarding the Processor’s program outputs:
•
•
•
HD/SDI Outputs — For the optional HD/SDI output connector, you can set the
output to be SDI (SMPTE 259M-C, NTSC or PAL) or HD-SDI (SMPTE 292M,
HDTV). When you set this output resolutions, all output connectors will output
that same resolution.
DVI Program Outputs — DVI Program outputs are digital only. They do not have
analog connections.
Program 1 Outputs — Edge feathering and data doubling are present on all
Program 1 Outputs, provided that those features are enabled in the system’s
Output Menu.
^å~äçÖ=fåéìí=cäÉñáÄáäáíó
Each M/E’s Analog Input connectors (A and B) accept a variety of analog formats including
VGA, low-resolution composite video, S-video and YUV component video.
•
•
For RGB with H and V sync, use the VGA connector directly.
Using a (customer supplied) VGA to 5xBNC breakout cable, five input
combinations are possible. Cells with check marks denote the connections
required for the indicated format.
Table 2-1. Analog Input Combinations using Breakout Cable
Breakout Cable
Wire Color
Composite
Video
R
G
B
H Sync
V Sync
48
3
S-Video
(Y/C)
YUV
(YPbPr)
RGB
Sync on Green
RGB
Comp Sync
RGB
Separate H V
3 (Chrom)
3 (Pr)
3
3
3
3 (Lum)
3 (Lum)
3
3
3
3 (Pb)
3
3
3
3
3
3
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
2. Hardware Orientation
Controller Rear Panels
`çåíêçääÉê=oÉ~ê=m~åÉäë
The figure below illustrates the rear panel connectors on both Controllers (SC and LC).
The panels are identical on both models.
4
8
100-240 V
47-63Hz, 2.75A
ETHERNET
KEYBOARD
EXT COMM
USB B
MultiMedia Card
1
3
2
CONSOLE
TALLY
6
7
5
Figure 2-4. Controller Rear Panel Connectors
1)
Keyboard Port
4)
Ethernet Port
7)
Tally Connector
2)
USB B Port
5)
Ext Comm
8)
AC Power
3)
MultiMedia Card Slot
6)
Console Port
Following are descriptions of each rear panel connector:
1)
Keyboard Port
One standard PS/2 connector is provided for the Keyboard Port. When a
customer-supplied PS/2 style keyboard is connected, certain numeric entry and
“naming” functions can be performed. In Chapter 7, refer to the “Using the PS/2
Keyboard” section on page 289 for details.
2)
USB B Port
Note
This connector’s functionality is currently not implemented.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
49
2. Hardware Orientation
Controller Rear Panels
3)
MultiMedia Card Slot
One MultiMedia Card Slot is provided for a Flash Memory Card connection to the
Controller. The flash card enables you to store and recall system configurations,
and transfer them between Controllers as required. In Chapter 5, refer to the
“Miscellaneous Menu” section on page 179 for details on backup and restore.
4)
Ethernet Port
One RJ-45 connector is provided for 10/100BaseT Ethernet communications with
the Encore Processor. The Ethernet connector is compatible with:
~
~
Standard RJ-45 Ethernet cables
Neutrik EtherCon® series cables
For multiple Ethernet connections in an Encore system, a standard Ethernet
switch on an isolated network is recommended. In Appendix A, refer to the
“Ethernet Connector” section on page 349 for pinout details.
5)
Ext Comm
One 9-pin D connector is provided for RS-232 serial communications with a serial
device, such as a router. In Appendix A, refer to the “Serial Connector” section
on page 350 for pinout details.
6)
Console Port
One 9-pin D connector is provided for RS-232 serial communications with an
ASCII terminal for command-line control of the Encore system. In Appendix A,
refer to the “Serial Connector” section on page 350 for pinout details.
7)
Tally Connector
One 25-pin D connector is provided for issuing tally “relay closure” commands to
external devices such as cameras. Eight tally circuits are provided. In
Appendix A, refer to the “Tally Connector” section on page 351 for pinout details.
8)
AC Power
Use the AC Power connector to connect the Controller to your facility’s AC power
source. The integral switch turns the Controller on and off.
50
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
PK==e~êÇï~êÉ=fåëí~ää~íáçå
få=qÜáë=`Ü~éíÉê
This chapter provides comprehensive installation instructions for the Encore system’s
hardware. The following topics are discussed:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Safety Precautions
Unpacking and Inspection
Site Preparation
Rack-Mount Installation
Cable and Adapter Information
Installation
Connection Charts
Program and Source Link Connections
Note
Once you have reviewed all of the sections in this chapter,
please continue with Chapter 4, “Controller Orientation” on
page 97.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
51
3. Hardware Installation
Safety Precautions
p~ÑÉíó=mêÉÅ~ìíáçåë=
For all Encore Presentation System installation procedures, observe the following
important safety and handling rules to avoid damage to yourself and the equipment:
•
•
To protect users from electric shock, ensure that the power supplies for each
Processor and Control Panel connect to earth via the ground wire provided in the
AC power Cord.
The AC Socket-outlet should be installed near the equipment and be easily
accessible.
råé~ÅâáåÖ=~åÇ=fåëéÉÅíáçå=
Before opening the boxes, inspect them for damage. If you find any damage, notify the
shipping carrier immediately for all claims adjustments. As you open each box, compare its
contents against the packing slips. If you find any shortages, contact your Barco sales
representative.
Once you have removed all the components from their packaging and checked that all the
listed components are present, visually inspect each Controller and Processor to ensure
there was no damage during shipping. If there is damage, notify the shipping carrier
immediately for all claims adjustments.
páíÉ=mêÉé~ê~íáçå=
The environment in which you install your Encore Presentation System should be clean,
properly lit, free from static, and have adequate power, ventilation, and space for all
components.
o~ÅâJjçìåí=fåëí~ää~íáçå
Encore Processors are designed to be rack mounted and are supplied with front rackmount hardware. Rear rack-mount brackets are available as a kit, and are recommended
when units are mounted in transit cases.
When rack mounting Processors, please remember the following important points:
•
•
•
•
•
52
Maximum ambient operating temperature for the unit is 40 degrees C.
Leave at least one inch of space (front and rear) to ensure that the airflow through
the fan and vent holes is not restricted.
Distribute the units evenly to prevent hazardous conditions that may be created by
uneven weight distribution.
Rack mount the units from the front rack ears using four rack screws (not
supplied). Threads may be metric or otherwise — depending upon the rack type.
Install the lower of the two mounting holes first.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
3. Hardware Installation
Cable and Adapter Information
`~ÄäÉ=~åÇ=^Ç~éíÉê=fåÑçêã~íáçå
The table below provides cable and adapter information:
Table 3-1. Encore Presentation System Cables and Adapters
Cable
Description
DVI-to-VGA Analog Adapter Plugs
Included *
DVI Program and Source Link Cables
Included, DVI-M to DVI-M, 1 Meter length *
Analog Input Cables
Customer Supplied
DVI Input Cables
Customer Supplied
Analog Breakout Cables
Customer Supplied
RJ-45 Ethernet Cable
Customer Supplied
Ethernet Switch
Customer Supplied
Additional DVI-to-VGA Adapter Plugs
Optional
DVI Extension Cables
Optional, 1.5 ft. length
DVI to 5xBNC Breakout Cable
Optional
*
Cable and adapter quantities depend on the number of M/Es
purchased in each Video Processor.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
53
3. Hardware Installation
Installation
fåëí~ää~íáçå
Detailed installation procedures are provided for the Encore configurations listed below.
Select the desired configuration, and follow all procedures as listed in the section:
•
•
•
•
•
•
54
Single Screen Configuration
Triple Screen Configuration
Wide Screen Configuration
Wide Screen Configuration Plus Wide Screen Preview
Single Screen Stack Configuration
Wide Screen Stack Configuration
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
3. Hardware Installation
Installation
páåÖäÉ=pÅêÉÉå=`çåÑáÖìê~íáçå
The figure below illustrates a block diagram of a single screen Encore configuration. Aux
destinations are not shown. Use this diagram for reference in the following procedure.
Program
M/E Inputs
Preview
Projector
Encore Video Processor
Scaled
Sources
PG 2
PVW
Unscaled
Sources
PG 1
To:
Routers
ScreenPRO-II
PresentationPRO-II
ImagePRO
Ethernet Switch
Controller SC or LC
Figure 3-1. Block Diagram, Single Screen Encore Configuration
For this configuration, you will need:
Table 3-2. Equipment List, Single Screen Encore Configuration
Qty.
Item
Note
1
Encore Video Processor
1
Encore Controller
Model LC or SC
1
Video Projector
Customer supplied
2
DVI or Analog Monitors
Program and Preview (customer supplied)
1
Ethernet Switch
Customer supplied
2
Ethernet cables
Customer supplied. Additional cables required for routers.
TBD
Dedicated sources
Analog, Video and/or DVI as required (customer supplied)
TBD
Routers
Analog, Video and/or DVI as required (customer supplied)
TBD
Interconnect cables
Analog, Video and/or DVI as required (customer supplied)
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
55
3. Hardware Installation
Installation
„ Use the following steps to install a single screen Encore configuration:
1.
Follow the unpacking procedures as listed in the “Unpacking and Inspection”
section on page 52.
2.
In Appendix A, refer to the “Physical and Electrical Specifications” section on
page 344 for electrical and mechanical details.
3.
In Chapter 2, refer to the “Video Processor Rear Panel” section on page 41 and
the “Controller Rear Panels” section on page 49 for all connector locations.
4.
For the Processor, follow the rack mount procedures as outlined in the “RackMount Installation” section on page 52.
5.
Ethernet Connections — a totally “local” network connection is recommended,
without IP connections to the outside world. Using Ethernet cables:
6.
7.
8.
a.
Connect the Processor and Controller to the Ethernet Switch.
b.
Connect router(s) to the Switch.
c.
As required, connect ScreenPRO-II, PresentationPRO-II and ImagePRO
systems to the Switch.
Direct Source Connections — if you elect to use direct connections, in place of
(or in addition to) router connections:
a.
As an important prerequisite, complete your “Connection Charts” on
page 80 to streamline your source installation procedure.
b.
Using the information from the chart, connect the desired “direct”
sources to each M/E’s input connectors as required.
c.
As required, connect unscaled background and DSK sources, as
provided from a PC’s single head graphics card.
D/A Connections —
a.
If your system includes analog, SDI or DVI D/As, connect video inputs to
the D/As as required.
b.
Connect D/A outputs to the to the desired M/E input connectors.
Router Connections — if you elect to use router connections, in place of (or in
addition to) direct connections:
a.
56
For Ethernet controlled routers:
•
Ensure that the router(s) are connected to the same Ethernet
Switch as the Controller and Processor.
•
Ensure that each router has a unique IP address.
b.
To connect a single serial controlled router, use an RS-232 cable to
connect the router to the Controller’s EXT COMM port. In Chapter 2,
refer to the “Controller Rear Panels” section on page 49 for details.
c.
To connect two (or more) serial routers, a third-party Ethernet-to-Serial
converter is required, such as the Lantronix model UDS100 or UDS200
(http://www.lantronix.com/pdf/UDS200_PB.pdf). Note that each
UDS200 can control two serial routers.
•
Using RS-232 cables, connect each router to the UDS200.
•
Set up a static IP address on the Lantronix. The recommended
range is 192.168.0.191 - 192.168.0.240 — so as not to conflict
with Encore devices. See the Lantronix User’s Guide.
•
Using an Ethernet cable, connect the UDS200 to the same
Ethernet Switch as the Controller and Processor(s).
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
3. Hardware Installation
Installation
9.
d.
Ensure that all sources are properly connected to your router(s).
e.
Connect all selected router outputs to the desired M/E inputs.
ScreenPRO-II Connections — if your system includes one (or more)
ScreenPRO-II units as unique destinations, you can configure the ScreenPRO-II
for internal or external source routing:
a.
When External routers are used, connect two outputs from an Analog
router to any two HD-15 inputs on the ScreenPRO-II. An SDI router
can also be connected to BNC inputs 1 and 2. During setup, these
specific patches will be defined using the Output Patch Menu.
b.
When Internal routing is used, connect Analog sources to inputs 1 - 8 on
the HD-15 connectors, and SDI sources to BNC inputs 1 and 2. During
setup, these patches will be defined using the Input Patch Menu.
10. Output Connections —
a.
Connect the Processor’s analog or digital Preview Output to the input of
your Preview Monitor.
b.
Connect the Processor’s analog or digital Program 2 Output to the input
of your Program Monitor.
c.
Connect the analog or digital Program 1 Output to the projector input.
d.
(Optional) If your system is configured with the HD/SDI output, connect
the Program Out HD/SDI connector to an SDI or HDTV monitor, or to
the proper video distribution equipment.
Note
This output will only work if the selected output resolution is a
valid SDI or HD/SDI format.
11. Aux Destinations — you can configure three types of Aux destinations: Aux
(monitors), ImagePRO Aux and PresentationPRO-II Aux. Refer to Appendix D,
“Working With Destinations” on page 367 for interconnection details.
12. Power Connection — connect AC power cords to the AC Power Connectors on
the rear of the Processor and Controller, and then to AC outlets. Connect AC
Power cords (or AC adapters) to all peripheral equipment. Please note:
~
~
Connect each unit only to a properly rated supply circuit.
Reliable grounding of rack-mounted equipment should be maintained.
13. Tally Connection — the Controller provides one 25-pin D connector for issuing
“relay closure” commands to external devices. Eight circuits are provided. In
Appendix A, refer to the “Tally Connector” section on page 351 for details.
14. System ID — Using the Unit ID Selector, set the ID of the Processor to 1.
Note
Using the Miscellaneous Menu, you can redefine IDs using
numbers 17 - 32. In Chapter 5, refer to the “Miscellaneous
Menu” section on page 179 for details.
15. If your system includes remote destinations such as ScreenPRO-II units, refer to
Appendix D, “Working With Destinations” on page 367 for connection details.
16. Power On — all power on instructions are covered in Chapter 6.
Please continue with Chapter 4, “Controller Orientation” on page 97.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
57
3. Hardware Installation
Installation
qêáéäÉ=pÅêÉÉå=`çåÑáÖìê~íáçå
The figure below illustrates a block diagram of a triple screen Encore configuration. Aux
destinations are not shown. This diagram can be used as reference in the procedure.
Note
Program #1
Program #2
Preview #1
M/E Inputs
This procedure can be used for Encore configurations
consisting of from 2 to 32 screens.
Projector #1
Program #3
Preview #2
Projector #2
Projector #3
Preview #3
Encore Video Processor #1
Scaled
Sources
PG 2
PVW
Unscaled
Sources
PG 1
Encore Video Processor #2
Scaled
Sources
PG 2
PVW
Unscaled
Sources
PG 1
Encore Video Processor #3
Scaled
Sources
PG 2
PVW
Unscaled
Sources
PG 1
To:
Routers
ScreenPRO-II
PresentationPRO-II
ImagePRO
Controller SC or LC
Ethernet Switch
Figure 3-2. Block Diagram, Triple Screen Encore Configuration
For this configuration, you will need:
Table 3-3. Equipment List, Triple Screen Encore Configuration
Qty.
58
Item
Note
3
Encore Video Processors
Use 2 for double screen application, 4 for quad screen, etc.
1
Encore Controller
Model LC or SC
3
Video Projectors
Customer supplied.
6
DVI or Analog Monitors
Program and Preview (customer supplied).
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
3. Hardware Installation
Installation
Table 3-3. Equipment List, Triple Screen Encore Configuration (Continued)
Qty.
Item
Note
1
Ethernet Switch
Customer supplied
4
Ethernet cables
Customer supplied. Additional cables required for routers.
TBD
Dedicated sources
Analog, Video and/or DVI as required (customer supplied)
TBD
Routers
Analog, Video and/or DVI as required (customer supplied)
TBD
Interconnect cables
Analog, Video and/or DVI as required (customer supplied)
„ Use the following steps to install a triple screen Encore configuration:
1.
Follow the unpacking procedures as listed in the “Unpacking and Inspection”
section on page 52.
2.
In Appendix A, refer to the “Physical and Electrical Specifications” section on
page 344 for electrical and mechanical details.
3.
In Chapter 2, refer to the “Video Processor Rear Panel” section on page 41 and
the “Controller Rear Panels” section on page 49 for all connector locations.
4.
For each Processor, follow the rack mount procedures as outlined in the “RackMount Installation” section on page 52.
5.
Ethernet Connections — a totally “local” network connection is recommended,
without IP connections to the outside world. Using Ethernet cables:
6.
7.
8.
a.
Connect the Processors and Controller to the Ethernet Switch.
b.
Connect router(s) to the Switch.
c.
As required, connect ScreenPRO-II, PresentationPRO-II and ImagePRO
systems to the Switch.
Direct Source Connections — if you elect to use direct connections, in place of
(or in addition to) router connections:
a.
As an important prerequisite, complete your “Connection Charts” on
page 80 to streamline your source installation procedure.
b.
Using information from the chart, connect the desired “direct” sources to
each M/E’s input connectors as required — on each Processor.
c.
As required, connect unscaled background and DSK sources, as
provided from a PC’s single head graphics card.
D/A Connections —
a.
If your system includes analog, SDI or DVI D/As, connect video inputs to
the D/As as required.
b.
Connect D/A outputs to the to the desired M/E input connectors.
Router Connections — if you elect to use router connections, in place of (or in
addition to) direct connections:
a.
For Ethernet controlled routers:
•
Ensure that the router(s) are connected to the same Ethernet
Switch as the Controller and Processors.
•
Ensure that each router has an unique IP address.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
59
3. Hardware Installation
Installation
9.
b.
To connect a single serial controlled router, use an RS-232 cable to
connect the router to the Controller’s EXT COMM port. In Chapter 2,
refer to the “Controller Rear Panels” section on page 49 for details.
c.
To connect two (or more) serial routers, a third-party Ethernet-to-Serial
converter is required, such as the Lantronix model UDS100 or UDS200
(http://www.lantronix.com/pdf/UDS200_PB.pdf). Note that each
UDS200 can control two serial routers.
•
Using RS-232 cables, connect each router to the UDS200.
•
Set up a static IP address on the Lantronix. The recommended
range is 192.168.0.191 - 192.168.0.240 — so as not to conflict
with Encore devices. See the Lantronix User’s Guide.
•
Using an Ethernet cable, connect the UDS200 to the same
Ethernet Switch as the Controller and Processors.
d.
Ensure that all sources are connected to your router(s).
e.
Connect all selected router outputs to the desired M/E inputs.
ScreenPRO-II Connections — if your system includes one (or more)
ScreenPRO-II units as unique destinations, you can configure the ScreenPRO-II
for internal or external source routing:
a.
When External routers are used, connect two outputs from an Analog
router to any two HD-15 inputs on the ScreenPRO-II. An SDI router
can also be connected to BNC inputs 1 and 2. During setup, these
specific patches will be defined using the Output Patch Menu.
b.
When Internal routing is used, connect Analog sources to inputs 1 - 8 on
the HD-15 connectors, and SDI sources to BNC inputs 1 and 2. During
setup, these patches will be defined using the Input Patch Menu.
10. Output Connections —
a.
For each Processor, connect the analog or digital Preview Output to the
input of the associated Preview Monitor.
b.
For each Processor, connect the analog or digital Program 2 Output to
the input of the associated Program Monitor.
c.
For each Processor, connect the analog or digital Program 1 Output to
the input of the associated projector.
d.
(Optional) If your Processors are configured with the HD/SDI output,
connect the Program Out HD/SDI connector to an SDI or HDTV monitor
as required, or to the proper video distribution equipment.
Note
This output will only work if the selected output resolution is a
valid SDI or HD/SDI format.
11. Aux Destinations — you can configure three types of Aux destinations: Aux
(monitors), ImagePRO Aux and PresentationPRO-II Aux. Refer to Appendix D,
“Working With Destinations” on page 367 for interconnection details.
12. Power Connection — connect AC power cords to the AC Power Connectors on
the rear of each Processor and Controller, and then to AC outlets. Connect AC
Power cords (or AC adapters) to all peripheral equipment. Please note:
~
~
60
Connect each unit only to a properly rated supply circuit.
Reliable grounding of rack-mounted equipment should be maintained.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
3. Hardware Installation
Installation
13. Tally Connection — the Controller provides one 25-pin D connector for issuing
tally “relay closure” commands to external devices. Eight circuits are provided. In
Appendix A, refer to the “Tally Connector” section on page 351 for details.
14. System ID — Using the Unit ID Selector, set the ID of Processor #1 to 1,
Processor #2 to 2, Processor #3 to 3. Each Processor must have a unique ID.
Note
Using the Miscellaneous Menu, you can redefine IDs using
numbers 17 - 32. In Chapter 5, refer to the “Miscellaneous
Menu” section on page 179 for details.
15. Power On — all power on instructions are covered in Chapter 6.
With all connections made, continue with Chapter 4, “Controller Orientation” on page 97.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
61
3. Hardware Installation
Installation
táÇÉ=pÅêÉÉå=`çåÑáÖìê~íáçå
The figure below illustrates a block diagram of a “triple” wide screen configuration. Aux
destinations are not shown. Use this diagram for reference in the following procedure.
Note
Program #1
Program #2
Preview #1
M/E Inputs
This procedure can be used for Encore wide screen
configurations consisting of from 2 to 32 screens.
Projector #1
Program #3
Preview #2
Projector #2
Projector #3
Preview #3
Encore Video Processor #1
Scaled
Sources
PG 2
PVW
Unscaled
Sources
PG 1
VP #2
Program
Link
Source
Link
PG 2
PVW
Unscaled
Sources
PG 1
VP #3
Program
Link
Source
Link
PG 2
PVW
Unscaled
Sources
PG 1
To:
Routers
ScreenPRO-II
PresentationPRO-II
ImagePRO
Ethernet Switch
Controller SC or LC
Figure 3-3. Block Diagram, Wide Screen Encore Configuration
For this procedure, you will need:
Table 3-4. Equipment List, Wide Screen Encore Configuration
Qty.
62
Item
Note
3
Encore Video Processors
Use 2 for a double wide screen application, 4 for a quad application, etc.
1
Encore Controller
Model LC or SC
3
Video Projectors
Customer supplied.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
3. Hardware Installation
Installation
Table 3-4. Equipment List, Wide Screen Encore Configuration (Continued)
Qty.
Item
Note
6
DVI or Analog Monitors
Program and Preview (customer supplied).
1
Ethernet Switch
Customer supplied
4
Ethernet cables
Customer supplied. Additional cables required for routers.
TBD
Dedicated sources
Analog, Video and/or DVI as required (customer supplied)
TBD
Program Link Cables
Use 1 for double wide screen application, left justification
Use 2 for triple wide screen application, left justification
Use 2 for double wide screen application, center justification
Use 3 for triple wide screen application, center justification
TDB
Source Link Cables
Dependent on the number of M/Es installed in the Processors
TBD
Routers
Analog, Video and/or DVI as required (customer supplied)
TBD
Interconnect cables
Analog, Video and/or DVI as required (customer supplied)
„ Use the following steps to install a wide screen Encore configuration:
1.
Follow the unpacking procedures as listed in the “Unpacking and Inspection”
section on page 52.
2.
In Appendix A, refer to the “Physical and Electrical Specifications” section on
page 344 for electrical and mechanical details.
3.
In Chapter 2, refer to the “Video Processor Rear Panel” section on page 41 and
the “Controller Rear Panels” section on page 49 for all connector locations.
4.
For each Processor, follow the rack mount procedures as outlined in the “RackMount Installation” section on page 52.
5.
Ethernet Connections — a totally “local” network connection is recommended,
without IP connections to the outside world. Using Ethernet cables:
6.
a.
Connect the Processors and Controller to the Ethernet Switch.
b.
Connect router(s) to the Switch.
c.
As required, connect ScreenPRO-II, PresentationPRO-II and ImagePRO
systems to the Switch.
Direct Source Connections — if you elect to use direct connections, in place of
(or in addition to) router connections:
a.
As an important prerequisite, complete your “Connection Charts” on
page 80 to streamline the source installation procedure.
b.
Connect the desired “direct” sources to each M/E’s input connectors on
each Processor. In a wide screen system, scaled sources only connect
to Processor 1. The “links” carry the signals to the other Processors.
c.
Unscaled Backgrounds must originate from computers with multi-head
graphics cards, and connect to the same input on each Processor.
S To connect an unscaled background source in a triple Processor
system (each Processor with three M/Es):
•
Connect the computer’s “head 1” to Processor 1, input 3A
•
Connect the computer’s “head 2” to Processor 2, input 3A
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
63
3. Hardware Installation
Installation
•
Note
d.
Connect the computer’s “head 3” to Processor 3, input 3A
Input 3A resides on the lowest priority M/E in a 3 M/E system.
To connect a second background, use input 3B.
The DSK source may originate from a computer with a multi-head
graphics card, but it is not a requirement.
S Connecting a single-head graphics card to Processor 3 only would
enable a bug to be placed only in that screen space.
Note
The DSK Setup Menu allows you to pick an individual ID
within a widescreen on which to perform DSK setup.
If you elect to use a multi-head graphics card for the DSK source, ensure
that you connect to the same input on each Processor — to the highest
priority M/E (M/E 1).
S To connect an unscaled DSK source in a triple Processor system
(each Processor with three M/Es):
•
Connect the computer’s “head 1” to Processor 1, input 1A
•
Connect the computer’s “head 2” to Processor 2, input 1A
•
Connect the computer’s “head 3” to Processor 3, input 1A
Note
7.
8.
D/A Connections —
a.
If your system includes analog, SDI or DVI D/As, connect video inputs to
the D/As as required.
b.
Connect D/A outputs to the to the desired M/E input connectors.
Router Connections — if you elect to use router connections, in place of (or in
addition to) direct connections:
a.
64
Input 1A resides on the highest priority M/E in a 3 M/E Encore
system. If you wish to connect a backup DSK, use input 1B.
For Ethernet controlled routers:
•
Ensure that the router(s) are connected to the same Ethernet
Switch as the Controller and Processors.
•
Ensure that each router has an unique IP address.
b.
To connect a single serial controlled router, use an RS-232 cable to
connect the router to the Controller’s EXT COMM port. In Chapter 2,
refer to the “Controller Rear Panels” section on page 49 for details.
c.
To connect two (or more) serial routers, a third-party Ethernet-to-Serial
converter is required, such as the Lantronix model UDS100 or UDS200
(http://www.lantronix.com/pdf/UDS200_PB.pdf). Note that each
UDS200 can control two serial routers.
•
Using RS-232 cables, connect each router to the UDS200.
•
Set up a static IP address on the Lantronix. The recommended
range is 192.168.0.191 - 192.168.0.240. Refer to the
Lantronix User’s Guide for instructions.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
3. Hardware Installation
Installation
•
9.
Using an Ethernet cable, connect the UDS200 to the same
Ethernet Switch as the Controller and Processors.
d.
Ensure that all sources are connected to your router(s).
e.
Connect all selected router outputs to the desired M/E inputs on
Processor 1.
ScreenPRO-II Connections — if your system includes one (or more)
ScreenPRO-II units as unique destinations, you can configure the ScreenPRO-II
for internal or external source routing:
a.
When External routers are used, connect two outputs from an Analog
router to any two HD-15 inputs on the ScreenPRO-II. An SDI router
can also be connected to BNC inputs 1 and 2. During setup, these
specific patches will be defined using the Output Patch Menu.
b.
When Internal routing is used, connect Analog sources to inputs 1 - 8 on
the HD-15 connectors, and SDI sources to BNC inputs 1 and 2. During
setup, these patches will be defined using the Input Patch Menu.
10. Output Connections —
a.
For each Processor, connect the analog or digital Preview Output to the
input of the associated Preview Monitor.
b.
For each Processor, connect the analog or digital Program 2 Output to
the input of the associated Program Monitor.
c.
For each processor, connect the analog or digital Program 1 Output to
the input of the associated projector.
d.
(Optional) If your Processors are configured with the HD/SDI output,
connect the Program Out HD/SDI connector to an SDI or HDTV monitor
as required, or to the proper video distribution equipment.
Note
This output will only work if the selected output resolution is a
valid SDI or HD/SDI format.
11. Link Connections — in a wide screen application, the Program Link and
Source Link connections are used to connect Processors together, and bridge
inputs and outputs for the proper “overlap” between projectors. Refer to the
“Program and Source Link Connections” section on page 89 for instructions.
12. Aux Destinations — you can configure three types of Aux destinations: Aux
(monitors), ImagePRO Aux and PresentationPRO-II Aux. Refer to Appendix D,
“Working With Destinations” on page 367 for interconnection details.
13. Power Connection — connect AC power cords to all Encore and peripheral
equipment, and then to AC outlets.
14. Tally Connection — the Controller provides one 25-pin D connector for issuing
“relay closure” commands to external devices. Eight circuits are provided. In
Appendix A, refer to the “Tally Connector” section on page 351 for details.
15. System ID — Using the Unit ID Selector, set the ID of Processor #1 to 1,
Processor #2 to 2, and Processor #3 to 3. Each must have a unique ID.
Note
Using the Miscellaneous Menu, you can redefine IDs using
numbers 17 - 32. In Chapter 5, refer to the “Miscellaneous
Menu” section on page 179 for details.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
65
3. Hardware Installation
Installation
16. Power On — all power on instructions are covered in Chapter 6.
With all connections made, continue with Chapter 4, “Controller Orientation” on page 97.
Note
66
You can create wide screen destinations using Video
Processors that do not contain the same number of M/E
boards. These procedures are covered in Chapter 6.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
3. Hardware Installation
Installation
táÇÉ=pÅêÉÉå=`çåÑáÖìê~íáçå=mäìë=táÇÉ=pÅêÉÉå=mêÉîáÉï
The figure below illustrates a “triple” wide screen configuration that includes a fourth
Processor, which is used to create a combined wide screen program/preview display.
Important
Because the fourth Video Processor provides up to 6 PIPs,
this procedure is ideal for displaying a double or triple wide
screen configuration on a single monitor. For configurations
using more than 3 Processors, additional dedicated “preview”
Processors may be required, along with additional monitors.
Projector #1
Program #1
Program #2
Preview #1
Program #3
Preview #2
Projector #2
Projector #3
Widescreen Program
Preview #3
Video Recorder
Widescreen Preview
ImagePRO
M/E Inputs
Encore Video Processor #1
PG 2 (Analog)
Scaled
Sources
PG 2 (DVI)
PVW (Analog)
Unscaled
Sources
PVW (DVI)
PG 1
VP #2
Program
Link
Source
Link
PG 2 (Analog)
PG 2 (DVI)
Scaler
Inputs
Encore Video Processor #4
1A
1B
2A
2B
3A
3B
PVW
PG 1
PVW (Analog)
Unscaled
Sources
PVW (DVI)
PG 1
VP #3
Program
Link
Source
Link
PG 2 (Analog)
PG 2 (DVI)
PVW (Analog)
Unscaled
Sources
PVW (DVI)
PG 1
To:
Routers
ScreenPRO-II
PresentationPRO-II
ImagePRO
Ethernet Switch
Controller SC or LC
Figure 3-4. Block Diagram, Wide Screen Encore Configuration with Wide Screen Preview
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
67
3. Hardware Installation
Installation
Please note the following points regarding this configuration:
•
Video Processor #4 receives DVI Program and Preview feeds from Video
Processors #1, #2 and #3.
•
Using Processor #4, three PIPs are scaled and positioned to create the wide
screen Program display, and three more are scaled to create the Preview display.
PIP 1A
PIP 2A
PIP 3A
Wide Screen
Program
Wide Screen
Preview
PIP 1B
PIP 2B
PIP 3B
Figure 3-5. Wide Screen Program/Preview Monitor PIPs
•
Processor #4’s Preview output is routed to the display for viewing the combined
wide screen program/preview output.
•
Processor #4’s Program output is routed to an ImagePRO for scaling, and then to
an SDI or HD-SDI recorder. This configuration enables you to record the
combined wide screen program/preview output.
In addition to all of the equipment listed in Table 3-4 on page 62, you will also need:
Table 3-5. Equipment List, Additional Wide Screen Program/Preview Requirements
Qty.
Item
Note
1
Encore Video Processor
Assigned as Video Processor #4
1
DVI or Analog Monitor
For wide screen program/preview display
1
Ethernet cable
Customer supplied
6
DVI interconnect cables
Inputs to video processor #4 (customer supplied)
2
Interconnect cables
Video processor #4 outputs (Analog, Video and/or DVI as required)
1
ImagePRO
Optional, for use as output scaler (customer supplied)
1
SDI or HD-SDI Video Recorder
Optional, to record combined wide screen output (customer supplied)
„ Use the following steps to install an Encore system that includes a combined wide
screen program/preview display:
68
1.
Follow all steps to install a Wide Screen Encore Application, as outlined in the
“Wide Screen Configuration” section on page 62.
2.
Rack mount Video Processor #4.
3.
Connect Ethernet from Processor #4 to the Ethernet Switch.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
3. Hardware Installation
Installation
4.
Source Connections — connect DVI outputs from Processors one, two and
three to Processor #4’s scaler inputs:
~
~
~
~
~
~
Note
5.
Connect Processor #1 DVI Program 2 Output to Processor #4 input 1A.
Connect Processor #1 DVI Preview 2 Output to Processor #4 input 1B.
Connect Processor #2 DVI Program 2 Output to Processor #4 input 2A.
Connect Processor #2 DVI Preview 2 Output to Processor #4 input 2B.
Connect Processor #3 DVI Program 2 Output to Processor #4 input 3A.
Connect Processor #3 DVI Preview 2 Output to Processor #4 input 3B.
The Program 2 Output is used because it is a clean feed,
without any edge feathering or data doubling information
present in the signal.
Output Connections —
~
~
Connect Processor #4’s analog or digital Preview Output to the input of
your “widescreen preview” monitor.
(Optional, for video recording) Connect Processor #4’s analog or digital
Program Output 1 or 2 to the input of the ImagePRO. Connect the
ImagePRO’s output to the input of your video recorder. Refer to the
“ImagePRO User’s Guide” for connection and setup details.
6.
Power Connection — connect AC power cords to the AC Power Connectors on
the rear of Processor #4, the monitor and the ImagePRO.
7.
System ID — Using the Unit ID Selector, set the ID of Processor #4 to 4.
Note
8.
Each Processor must have a unique ID.
Power On — all power on instructions are covered in Chapter 6.
With all connections made, continue with Chapter 4, “Controller Orientation” on page 97.
`çãéäÉíáåÖ=táÇÉ=pÅêÉÉå=mêÉîáÉï=pÉíìé
Once you are familiar with the Controller, with all system setup procedures and with basic
Encore operations, you must complete the following operational setup steps — in order to
properly configure Video Processor #4 and its Preview output.
Note
Two different methods are available for connecting Video
Processor sources: multi-button and single button.
„ Multi-button method — Use the following steps to complete your wide screen
preview setup, using six individual buttons for Video Processor sources:
1.
Set up Video Processor #4 as a unique Encore destination. In Chapter 6, refer to
the “Destination Setup” section on page 257.
2.
On the Controller, identify six buttons on the Source Selection Bus that you want
to use as the inputs from Processors 1, 2 and 3.
3.
Set up these designated inputs as direct DVI connections. In Chapter 6, refer to
the “Input Setup” section on page 271 for details.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
69
3. Hardware Installation
Installation
4.
Select the destination that you assigned to Video Processor #4.
5.
Scale and align three PIPs for the “Preview” portion of the display, and three PIPs
for the “Program” portion, as illustrated in Figure 3-5 on page 68.
„ Single-button method — Use the following steps to complete your wide screen
preview setup, using one button for all six Video Processor sources.
Note
1.
Set up Video Processor #4 as a unique Encore destination. In Chapter 6, refer to
the “Destination Setup” section on page 257.
2.
On the Controller, identify one button on the Source Selection Bus that you want
to use for all DVI D/A inputs to Processor #4.
Note
70
This method sets up a “phantom” DVI D/A router, which takes
advantage of the fact that all Processor DVI outputs have
identical resolutions — and thus only one input configuration
file will be required. This method uses one source button only
on the Controller, and does not tie up six buttons on the
Source Selection Bus.
Even though these inputs originate from Processors 1, 2 and
3, here you will be selecting an input configuration file only,
but selecting content with the layer buttons.
3.
In the Router Specification Menu, create a DVI D/A router. In Chapter 6, refer to
the “D/A Setup” section on page 254.
4.
On the “Number of Outputs” line, specify 6.
5.
Using the Output Patch Menu, patch all 6 outputs (from Processors 1, 2 and 3) to
Processor #4. In Chapter 6, refer to the “Router Setup” section on page 250.
6.
Using the Input Patch Menu, select the DVI D/A source button (as identified in
step 2 above), and patch it to the DVI D/A router. In Chapter 6, refer to the “Input
Patching” section on page 255.
7.
Select the destination that you assigned to Video Processor #4.
8.
In the Layer Control Section, select Layer 1A, then select the DVI D/A source.
Be sure to save an input configuration file for this source.
9.
Scale and align the first PIP for the “Preview” portion of the display, then repeat
this step for the remaining layers (2A through 3B). Use Figure 3-5 on page 68 for
reference.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
3. Hardware Installation
Installation
páåÖäÉ=pÅêÉÉå=pí~Åâ=`çåÑáÖìê~íáçå
“Stacking” is a configuration method that gives you access to six mixers, with the ability to
display up to 12 PIPs on screen simultaneously. Processors can be stacked in single or
wide screen configurations as desired. Stacking is only available with the Controller LC.
To make 12 PIPs available, Video Processors are combined in pairs. The first Processor’s
Program and Preview outputs are connected to the second Processor’s Background (BG)
A and B inputs. In this manner, two “Three M/E” systems are stacked to create a six M/E
Processor. Using the six PIPs from each Processor, 12 PIPs are available.
Note
7
This connection configuration does not add any additional
video delay to the system.
Video Processor #2 (3 M/Es)
8
9
1
2
3
7
8
10
11
12
PG 1
BG Input A
1
2
3
9
4
BG Input B
5
10
6
12
11
Video Processor #1 (3 M/Es)
4
PG 2 (DVI)
5
6
PVW (DVI)
Figure 3-6. Single Screen Stack with 12 PIPs
The figure below illustrates a block diagram of a single screen “stack” configuration. Aux
destinations are not shown. Use this diagram for reference in the following procedure.
Projector
M/E Inputs
Video Processor #2 (ID #2)
Program
Scaled Srcs 7 - 12
Top
Stack
(DSK) 1A, 1B
BG Input 3B
Preview
PG 2
PVW
PG 1
BG Input 3A
Video Processor #1 (ID #1)
Scaled Srcs 1 - 6
Bottom
Stack
Unscaled Srcs
(BG) 3A, 3B
PG 2 (DVI)
PVW (DVI)
To:
Routers
ScreenPRO-II
PresentationPRO-II
ImagePRO
Ethernet Switch
Controller LC Only
Figure 3-7. Block Diagram, Single Screen Stack Configuration
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
71
3. Hardware Installation
Installation
For this procedure, you will need:
Table 3-6. Equipment List, Single Screen Stack Configuration
Qty.
Item
Note
2
Encore Video Processors
The ID of the bottom stack Processor must always be lower than the ID
of the top stack Processor.
1
Encore Controller
Model LC only
1
Video Projector
Customer supplied
2
DVI or Analog Monitors
Program and Preview (customer supplied)
1
Ethernet Switch
Customer supplied
3
Ethernet cables
Customer supplied. Additional cables required for routers.
2
DVI Interconnect cables
Connects bottom stack Processor to top stack Processor
TBD
Dedicated sources
Analog, Video and/or DVI as required (customer supplied)
TBD
Routers
Analog, Video and/or DVI as required (customer supplied)
TBD
Interconnect cables
Analog, Video and/or DVI as required (customer supplied)
„ Use the following steps to install a single screen “stack” Encore configuration:
Important
1.
Follow the unpacking procedures as listed in the “Unpacking and Inspection”
section on page 52.
2.
In Appendix A, refer to the “Physical and Electrical Specifications” section on
page 344 for electrical and mechanical details.
3.
In Chapter 2, refer to the “Video Processor Rear Panel” section on page 41 and
the “Controller Rear Panels” section on page 49 for all connector locations.
4.
For each Processor, follow the rack mount procedures as outlined in the “RackMount Installation” section on page 52.
5.
Ethernet Connections — a totally “local” network connection is recommended,
without IP connections to the outside world. Using Ethernet cables:
6.
a.
Connect the Processors and Controller to the Ethernet Switch.
b.
Connect router(s) to the Switch.
c.
As required, connect ScreenPRO-II, PresentationPRO-II and ImagePRO
systems to the Switch.
Direct Source Connections — if you elect to use direct connections, in place of
(or in addition to) router connections:
a.
72
It is recommended that each stack consists of two “fully
loaded” Processors, each with three M/Es. If necessary, you
can use a mis-matched configuration (e.g., two M/Es in the
bottom stack, three in the top), but the top stack must always
have three M/Es installed. In this way, your stacked set will
never have anything less than four M/Es available.
As an important prerequisite, complete your “Connection Charts” on
page 80 to streamline your source installation procedure.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
3. Hardware Installation
Installation
b.
c.
d.
7.
8.
9.
Using the information from the chart:
•
Connect “direct” sources 1 - 6 to each M/E’s input connectors
on the “bottom stack” Processor.
•
Connect “direct” sources 7 - 12 to each M/E’s input connectors
on the “top stack” Processor.
Connect unscaled Background sources to the bottom stack:
•
Connect background source 1 to input 3A.
•
Connect background source 2 to input 3B.
Connect unscaled DSK sources to the top stack:
•
Connect DSK source 1 to input 1A.
•
Connect DSK source 2 to input 1B.
Stack Interconnections —
a.
Connect the bottom stack’s DVI Preview Output to the top stack’s
Background 1 input (3A).
b.
Connect the bottom stack’s DVI Program Output to the top stack’s
Background 2 input (3B).
D/A Connections —
a.
If your system includes analog, SDI or DVI D/As, connect video inputs to
the D/As as required.
b.
Connect D/A outputs to the to the desired M/E input connectors.
Router Connections — if you elect to use router connections, in place of (or in
addition to) direct connections:
a.
For Ethernet controlled routers:
•
Ensure that the router(s) are connected to the same Ethernet
Switch as the Controller and Processors.
•
Ensure that each router has an unique IP address.
b.
To connect a single serial controlled router, use an RS-232 cable to
connect the router to the Controller’s EXT COMM port. In Chapter 2,
refer to the “Controller Rear Panels” section on page 49 for details.
c.
To connect two (or more) serial routers, a third-party Ethernet-to-Serial
converter is required, such as the Lantronix model UDS100 or UDS200
(http://www.lantronix.com/pdf/UDS200_PB.pdf). Note that each
UDS200 can control two serial routers.
•
Using RS-232 cables, connect each router to the UDS200.
•
Set up a static IP address on the Lantronix. The recommended
range is 192.168.0.191 - 192.168.0.240.
•
Using an Ethernet cable, connect the UDS200 to the same
Ethernet Switch as the Controller and Processors.
d.
Ensure that all sources are connected to your router(s).
e.
Connect all selected router outputs to the desired M/E inputs:
•
For PIPs 1 - 6, connect router outputs to the desired M/E inputs
on the “bottom stack” Processor.
•
For PIPs 7 - 12, connect router outputs to the desired M/E
inputs on the “top stack” Processor.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
73
3. Hardware Installation
Installation
10. ScreenPRO-II Connections — if your system includes one (or more)
ScreenPRO-II units as unique destinations, you can configure the ScreenPRO-II
for internal or external source routing:
a.
When External routers are used, connect two outputs from an Analog
router to any two HD-15 inputs on the ScreenPRO-II. An SDI router
can also be connected to BNC inputs 1 and 2. During setup, these
specific patches will be defined using the Output Patch Menu.
b.
When Internal routing is used, connect Analog sources to inputs 1 - 8 on
the HD-15 connectors, and SDI sources to BNC inputs 1 and 2. During
setup, these patches will be defined using the Input Patch Menu.
11. Output Connections — all output monitor and projector connections originate
from the “top stack” Processor:
a.
Connect the analog or digital Preview Output to the input of the
associated Preview Monitor.
b.
Connect the analog or digital Program 2 Output to the input of the
associated Program Monitor.
c.
Connect the analog or digital Program 1 Output to the input of the
associated projector.
d.
(Optional) If your Processors are configured with the HD/SDI output,
connect the Program Out HD/SDI connector to an SDI or HDTV monitor
as required, or to the proper video distribution equipment.
Note
e.
This output will only work if the selected output resolution is a
valid SDI or HD/SDI format.
If you elect to output in an interlaced format (e.g., 1920 x 1080i), connect
the top stack’s H Sync Output signal (located on the Program 2 Out
Analog connector) to the Genlock input on the bottom stack.
Note
Using a (customer supplied) VGA to 5xBNC breakout cable,
the H Sync Output line is typically a white or gray cable.
12. Aux Destinations — you can configure three types of Aux destinations: Aux
(monitors), ImagePRO Aux and PresentationPRO-II Aux. Refer to Appendix D,
“Working With Destinations” on page 367 for interconnection details.
13. Power Connection — connect AC power cords to all Encore and peripheral
equipment, and then to AC outlets.
14. Tally Connection — the Controller provides one 25-pin D connector for issuing
“relay closure” commands to external devices. Eight circuits are provided. In
Appendix A, refer to the “Tally Connector” section on page 351 for details.
15. System ID — Using the Unit ID Selector, set the ID of the bottom stack
Processor to 1. Set the ID of the top stack Processor to 2.
Important
The ID of the bottom stack Processor must always be lower
than the ID of the top stack Processor.
16. Power On — all power on instructions are covered in Chapter 6.
With all connections made, continue with Chapter 4, “Controller Orientation” on page 97.
74
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
3. Hardware Installation
Installation
táÇÉ=pÅêÉÉå=pí~Åâ=`çåÑáÖìê~íáçå
The figure below illustrates a block diagram of a wide screen “stack” configuration. Aux
destinations are not shown. Use this diagram for reference in the following procedure.
Projector #1
Program #1
Preview #1
M/E Inputs
Preview #2
Video Processor #2 (ID #2)
Scaled Sources 7 - 12
M/E Inputs
Top
Stack
#1
Unscaled Srcs (DSK) 1A, 1B
Background (BG) Input 3B
Background (BG) Input 3A
Projector #2
Program #2
PG 2
(DSK) 1A, 1B
PVW
BG Input 3B
PG 1
BG Input 3A
Video Processor #4 (ID #4)
Top
Stack
#2
PG 2
PVW
PG 1
Program Link
Source Link
Video Processor #1 (ID #1)
Video Processor #3 (ID #3)
Bottom
Stack
#1
Scaled Sources 1 - 6
Unscaled Sources
(Backgrounds) 3A, 3B
Bottom
Stack
#2
PG 2 (DVI)
PVW (DVI)
(Backgrounds)
3A, 3B
PG 2 (DVI)
PVW (DVI)
Program Link
Source Link
To:
Routers
ScreenPRO-II
PresentationPRO-II
ImagePRO
Controller LC Only
Ethernet Switch
Figure 3-8. Block Diagram, Wide Screen Stack Configuration
For this procedure, you will need:
Table 3-7. Equipment List, Wide Screen Stack Configuration
Qty.
Item
Note
4
Encore Video Processors
The ID of the bottom stack Processor must always be lower than the ID
of the top stack Processor. Use 6 Processors for triple wide screen, use
8 for quadruple wide, etc.
1
Encore Controller
Model LC only
2
Video Projectors
Customer supplied
4
DVI or Analog Monitors
Program and Preview (customer supplied)
1
Ethernet Switch
Customer supplied
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
75
3. Hardware Installation
Installation
Table 3-7. Equipment List, Wide Screen Stack Configuration (Continued)
Qty.
Item
Note
5
Ethernet cables
Customer supplied. Additional cables required for routers.
TBD
Dedicated sources
Analog, Video and/or DVI as required (customer supplied)
TBD
Program Link Cables
Use 2 for double wide screen application, left justification
Use 4 for triple wide screen application, left justification
Use 4 for double wide screen application, center justification
Use 6 for triple wide screen application, center justification
TDB
Source Link Cables
Minimum 4 for double wide screen application.
TBD
Routers
Analog, Video and/or DVI as required (customer supplied)
TBD
Interconnect cables
Analog, Video and/or DVI as required (customer supplied)
„ Use the following steps to install a wide screen “stack” Encore configuration:
Important
1.
Follow the unpacking procedures as listed in the “Unpacking and Inspection”
section on page 52.
2.
In Appendix A, refer to the “Physical and Electrical Specifications” section on
page 344 for electrical and mechanical details.
3.
In Chapter 2, refer to the “Video Processor Rear Panel” section on page 41 and
the “Controller Rear Panels” section on page 49 for all connector locations.
4.
For each Processor, follow the rack mount procedures as outlined in the “RackMount Installation” section on page 52.
5.
Ethernet Connections — a totally “local” network connection is recommended,
without IP connections to the outside world. Using Ethernet cables:
6.
76
It is recommended that each stack consists of two “fully
loaded” Processors, each with three M/Es. If necessary, you
can use a mis-matched configuration (e.g., two M/Es in the
bottom stack, three in the top), but the top stack must always
have three M/Es installed. In this way, your stacked set will
never have anything less than four M/Es available.
a.
Connect the Processors and Controller to the Ethernet Switch.
b.
Connect router(s) to the Switch.
c.
As required, connect ScreenPRO-II, PresentationPRO-II and ImagePRO
systems to the Switch.
Direct Source Connections — if you elect to use direct connections, in place of
(or in addition to) router connections:
a.
As an important prerequisite, complete your “Connection Charts” on
page 80 to streamline the source installation procedure.
b.
Using information from the charts, connect the desired “direct” sources to
each M/E’s input connectors on each stack. Note that in a wide screen
stack system, scaled sources only connect to stack #1. The “link”
connections carry the signals to the other stacks:
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
3. Hardware Installation
Installation
c.
•
On stack #1 only, connect “direct” sources 1 - 6 to each M/E’s
input connectors on the “bottom stack” Processor.
•
On stack #1 only, connect “direct” sources 7 - 12 to each M/E’s
input connectors on the “top stack” Processor.
Unscaled Backgrounds must originate from computers with multi-head
graphics cards, and connect to the same input on each “bottom stack”
Processor.
S To connect an unscaled background source in a double widescreen
stack system (each Processor with three M/Es):
•
On the first stack, connect the computer’s “head 1” to the
bottom stack Processor, input 3A
•
On the second stack, connect the computer’s “head 2” to the
bottom stack Processor, input 3A
Note
d.
Input 3A resides on the lowest priority M/E in a 3 M/E system.
To connect a second background source, use input 3B on
both stacks.
The DSK source may originate from a computer with a multi-head
graphics card, but it is not a requirement.
S Connecting a single-head graphics card to Processor 4 only would
enable a bug to be placed only in that screen space.
The DSK Setup Menu allows you to pick an individual ID
within a widescreen on which to perform DSK setup.
Note
If you elect to use a multi-head graphics card for the DSK, ensure that
you connect to the same input on each Processor — to the highest
priority M/E.
S To connect an unscaled DSK source in a double widescreen stack
system (each Processor with three M/Es):
•
On the first stack, connect the computer’s “head 1” to the top
stack Processor, input 1A
•
On the second stack, connect the computer’s “head 2” to the
top stack Processor, input 1A
Input 1A resides on the highest priority M/E in a 3 M/E Encore
system. If you wish to connect a backup (or alternate) DSK,
use input 1B on both stacks.
Note
7.
Stack Interconnections —
a.
On the first stack:
•
Connect the bottom stack’s DVI Preview Output to the top
stack’s Background 1 input (3A).
•
Connect the bottom stack’s DVI Program Output to the top
stack’s Background 2 input (3B).
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
77
3. Hardware Installation
Installation
b.
8.
9.
On the second stack:
•
Connect the bottom stack’s DVI Preview Output to the top
stack’s Background 1 input (3A).
•
Connect the bottom stack’s DVI Program Output to the top
stack’s Background 2 input (3B).
D/A Connections —
a.
If your system includes analog, SDI or DVI D/As, connect video inputs to
the D/As as required.
b.
Connect D/A outputs to the to the desired M/E input connectors on the
first stack only.
Router Connections — if you elect to use router connections, in place of (or in
addition to) direct connections:
a.
For Ethernet controlled routers:
•
Ensure that the router(s) are connected to the same Ethernet
Switch as the Controller and Processors.
•
Ensure that each router has an unique IP address.
b.
To connect a single serial controlled router, use an RS-232 cable to
connect the router to the Controller’s EXT COMM port. In Chapter 2,
refer to the “Controller Rear Panels” section on page 49 for details.
c.
To connect two (or more) serial routers, a third-party Ethernet-to-Serial
converter is required, such as the Lantronix model UDS100 or UDS200
(http://www.lantronix.com/pdf/UDS200_PB.pdf). Note that each
UDS200 can control two serial routers.
•
Using RS-232 cables, connect each router to the UDS200.
•
Set up a static IP address on the Lantronix. The recommended
range is 192.168.0.191 - 192.168.0.240 — so as not to conflict
with other devices.
•
Using an Ethernet cable, connect the UDS200 to the same
Ethernet Switch as the Controller and Processors.
d.
Ensure that all sources are connected to your router(s).
e.
Connect all selected router outputs to the desired M/E inputs on the first
stack only:
f.
•
For PIPs 1 - 6, connect router outputs to the desired M/E inputs
on the “bottom stack” Processor.
•
For PIPs 7 - 12, connect router outputs to the desired M/E
inputs on the “top stack” Processor.
If your configuration includes one (or more) ScreenPRO-II units as
unique destinations, connect two outputs from each router to each
ScreenPRO-II.
10. ScreenPRO-II Connections — if your system includes one (or more)
ScreenPRO-II units as unique destinations, you can configure the ScreenPRO-II
for internal or external source routing:
a.
78
When External routers are used, connect two outputs from an Analog
router to any two HD-15 inputs on ScreenPRO-II. An SDI router can
also be connected to BNC inputs 1 and 2. During setup, these specific
patches will be defined using the Output Patch Menu.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
3. Hardware Installation
Installation
b.
When Internal routing is used, connect Analog sources to inputs 1 - 8 on
the HD-15 connectors, and SDI sources to BNC inputs 1 and 2. During
setup, these patches will be defined using the Input Patch Menu.
11. Output Connections — all output monitor and projector connections originate
from the “top stack” Processors:
a.
On each “top stack” Processor, connect the analog or digital Preview
Output to the input of the associated Preview Monitor.
b.
On each “top stack” Processor, connect the analog or digital Program 2
Output to the input of the associated Program Monitor.
c.
On each “top stack” Processor, connect the analog or digital Program 1
Output to the input of the associated projector.
d.
(Optional) If your Processors are configured with the HD/SDI output,
connect the “top stack” Program Out HD/SDI connector to an SDI or
HDTV monitor, or to the proper video distribution equipment.
Note
e.
This output will only work if the selected output resolution is a
valid SDI or HD/SDI format.
If you elect to output in an interlaced format (e.g., 1920 x 1080i), connect
each top stack’s H Sync Output signal (located on the Program 2 Out
Analog connector) to the Genlock input on the bottom stack.
Note
Using a (customer supplied) VGA to 5xBNC breakout cable,
the H Sync Output line is typically a white or gray cable.
12. Aux Destinations — you can configure three types of Aux destinations: Aux
(monitors), ImagePRO Aux and PresentationPRO-II Aux. Refer to Appendix D,
“Working With Destinations” on page 367 for interconnection details.
13. Power Connection — connect AC power cords to all Encore and peripheral
equipment, and then to AC outlets.
14. Tally Connection — the Controller provides one 25-pin D connector for issuing
“relay closure” commands to external devices. Eight circuits are provided. In
Appendix A, refer to the “Tally Connector” section on page 351 for details.
15. System ID — Using the Unit ID Selector:
a.
On the first stack, set the ID of the bottom stack Processor to 1. Set the
ID of the top stack Processor to 2.
b.
On the second stack, set the ID of the bottom stack Processor to 3. Set
the ID of the top stack Processor to 4.
Important
In each stack, the ID of the bottom stack Processor must
always be lower than the ID of the top stack Processor.
16. Power On — all power on instructions are covered in Chapter 6.
With all connections made, continue with Chapter 4, “Controller Orientation” on page 97.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
79
3. Hardware Installation
Connection Charts
`çååÉÅíáçå=`Ü~êíë=
A series of Connection Charts are provided on the following pages to assist with your
input connections. Please note the following points:
•
Each M/E has two scalers, each with three inputs: Analog, HD/SDI and DVI-I.
Additionally, the DVI-I connector has both an analog and a digital connection.
Note
•
The analog connection on the DVI connector can only be
used for unscaled inputs. It cannot be sent to the scaler. The
digital side can go to either the scaled or unscaled channel.
You can connect sources and assign them to Controller buttons — but only one
source can be assigned to a scaler at a time. For unscaled sources, connect a
maximum of two backgrounds and two DSK sources.
Two DSK sources can be connected to the system on 1A and
1B — but only one can be used at a time.
Note
•
•
•
•
You can connect a source directly to an input, or you can connect the output of a
router to an input. The use of routers offers less restrictions with regard to
assigning sources to layers.
Analog inputs can be used to connect composite, S-Video (Y/C) and component
video sources. Customer supplied breakout cables are required.
The DSK source always connects to one of the two DVI-I inputs on the M/E 1
board — electronically, the highest priority board in the system.
Background sources always connect to the lowest priority board in your system,
but that board varies depending upon the number of M/E boards present. In
Chapter 2, see the “A Word About M/E Connector Priority” section on page 44.
Chart instructions:
•
Router I/O Charts
Complete one chart for each video router in your system (up to the maximum 8).
~
~
~
Note
•
Column 1: list the sources that are connected to the router inputs.
Column 2: list the Encore button(s) to which the source will be patched.
Column 4: list where each router output will be connected.
These charts can also be used for D/A connections.
Direct Encore Input Chart
Complete the chart for any sources that will be connected directly to Encore.
~
~
~
~
80
Column 1: list the direct connection source name.
Column 2: list the Encore button(s) to which the source will be patched.
Column 3: list the Video Processor to which the source is connected.
Column 4: list the specific M/E input (and format) to which the source is
connected: DVI, HD-SDI or Analog.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
3. Hardware Installation
Connection Charts
•
Encore Destination Chart
Complete the chart for all Encore destinations.
~
~
~
~
Column 1: list the Video Processor(s) that comprise the destination.
Column 2: list the Encore destination assignment.
Column 3: list the screen to which the destination is routed.
Column 4: list any notes as necessary.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
81
3. Hardware Installation
Connection Charts
p~ãéäÉ=`çååÉÅíáçå=`Ü~êíë
Following are sample connection charts for an Encore system comprised of 1 x Analog
router, 2 x direct inputs, and 6 x destinations.
Table 3-8. Router I/O Chart #1 (sample)
Router #1
Router Type:
Source Name
Encore Input #
x
Analog
Digital
Router Input/Output
DVI
Connects to:
DVD A
1 / 33
1
VP 1 - 1A
DVD B
2 / 34
2
VP 1 - 1B
Flash CPU
3
3
VP 1 - 2A
4
VP 1 - 2B
4
5
VP 1 - 3A
Multi B
5
6
VP 1 - 3B
Multi C
6
7
ScreenPRO 5 - In 1
Multi D
7 / 39
8
ScreenPRO 5 - In 2
Key Dell 1
8
9
VP 3 - 2A
Key Dell 2
9
10
VP 3 - 2B
11
VP 3 - 3A
12
VP 3 - 3B
Multi A
ImagePRO 2
13
13
ImagePRO 1
14
14
ImagePRO 2 - In 3
ScreenPRO 2 Preview
15
15
ImagePRO 1 - In 2
BEM CPU
16
16
Bottom LC40
Table 3-9. Direct Encore Input Chart (sample)
Direct Encore Inputs
Source Name
Encore Input #
Video Processor
Encore Port
Comp 1
59
1
1A, DVI
Comp 2
60
1
1B, DVI
Table 3-10. Encore Destination Chart (sample)
Destination
Controller SC
1
82
Device
VP 1, VP 2
Screen
FLM Wide
Notes
DVI to FLM L and R
2
VP 3
XLM Single
DVI to XLM
3
VP 4
LC 40 Top
Pvw / Pgm Monitor
A-14, HD-16, D-1
4
ImagePRO 1
Any
5
SP 5
FLM Single
6
Router Aux 12
Downstage Mon
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
3. Hardware Installation
Connection Charts
_ä~åâ=`çååÉÅíáçå=`Ü~êíë=
The following blank connection charts are provided:
•
•
•
Router I/O Charts
Direct Encore Input Chart
Encore Destination Chart
oçìíÉê=fLl=`Ü~êíë=
Complete one chart for each video router in your system. Encore supports up to eight
routers. Note that these charts can also be used for D/As.
Table 3-11. Router I/O Chart #1
Router #1
Router Type:
Source
Analog
Router Input/Output
Digital
DVI
Destination
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
83
3. Hardware Installation
Connection Charts
Table 3-12. Router I/O Chart #2
Router #2
Router Type:
Source
Analog
Router Input/Output
Digital
DVI
Destination
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Table 3-13. Router I/O Chart #3
Router #3
Router Type:
Source
Analog
Router Input/Output
Digital
DVI
Destination
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
84
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
3. Hardware Installation
Connection Charts
Table 3-14. Router I/O Chart #4
Router #4
Router Type:
Source
Analog
Router Input/Output
Digital
DVI
Destination
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Table 3-15. Router I/O Chart #5
Router #5
Router Type:
Source
Analog
Router Input/Output
Digital
DVI
Destination
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
85
3. Hardware Installation
Connection Charts
Table 3-16. Router I/O Chart #6
Router #6
Router Type:
Source
Analog
Router Input/Output
Digital
DVI
Destination
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Table 3-17. Router I/O Chart #7
Router #7
Router Type:
Source
Analog
Router Input/Output
Digital
DVI
Destination
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
86
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
3. Hardware Installation
Connection Charts
Table 3-18. Router I/O Chart #8
Router #8
Router Type:
Source
Analog
Router Input/Output
Digital
DVI
Destination
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
aáêÉÅí=båÅçêÉ=fåéìí=`Ü~êí=
Complete the following chart for any sources that will be connected directly to Encore (such
as a computer for a DVI background).
Table 3-19. Direct Encore Input Chart
Direct Encore Inputs
Source
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
Video Processor
Encore Port
87
3. Hardware Installation
Connection Charts
båÅçêÉ=aÉëíáå~íáçå=`Ü~êí=
Complete the following chart for all Encore destinations.
Table 3-20. Encore Destination Chart
Destination
Device
Screen
Notes
Controller SC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Controller LC
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
88
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
3. Hardware Installation
Program and Source Link Connections
mêçÖê~ã=~åÇ=pçìêÅÉ=iáåâ=`çååÉÅíáçåë
The following topics are discussed in this section:
•
•
Overview of Edge-Blending Technology
Connecting Program and Source Links
lîÉêîáÉï=çÑ=bÇÖÉJ_äÉåÇáåÖ=qÉÅÜåçäçÖó
Edge-blending technology is becoming increasingly popular for supporting very large highresolution displays. The technology is very flexible and supports a wide range of screen
configurations. A typical three projector system is illustrated below. As shown in the figure,
multiple projectors are used to project on a common surface to create one high-resolution
image. The creation of a seamless image requires careful attention to detail. High quality
results are dependent upon a system-level approach that integrates content creation, video
processing, projector setup and system adjustments as described below.
Adjustable
Image Overlap
Projector #1
Output
Projector #2
Output
Projector #3
Output
Figure 3-9. Typical three projector system
`çåíÉåí=`êÉ~íáçå=
When projecting an image across a large screen, it is important to maintain sufficient
resolution to obtain a crisp, clear image from the perspective of the viewer. Generally, highresolution source material is used to maintain content that is pleasing to the eye. There are
two methods that are commonly used to generate wide-screen source material, each of
these methods is explained below.
•
Use of a Single High Definition Image
High Definition source material has a resolution of 1920 pixels x 1080 lines.
Images of this type can be reformatted to drive multiple screens. The reformatting
is usually performed by a seamless switching system such as the Encore
Presentation System.
Reformatting allows the resultant images to be processed for providing seamless
switching, integration of picture-in-picture video and keying features. Note that
the input image can be effectively spread to multiple screens, however, the
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
89
3. Hardware Installation
Program and Source Link Connections
inherent resolution of the output image remains that of the source material,
1920x1080 pixels.
1920
HDTV Image
1920 x 1080
båÅçêÉ
1080
1280
Image for
Projector 1
1280 x 1024
båÅç
1024
1280
Image for
Projector 2
1280 x 1024
ÅçêÉ
1024
1920
båÅçêÉ
1024
1
2
Figure 3-10. HD Source Material Formatting
•
Use Of Multi-Head Graphics Boards
Standard multi-head graphics boards can be used to directly generate image data
to drive multiple screens. In this case, the computer generates one very highresolution image and the image is output by multiple graphics heads. The inherent
resolution of the output image is limited only by the processing power of the multihead graphics board. Image resolutions with up to 10,000 pixels of horizontal
resolution can be achieved with current technology.
90
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
3. Hardware Installation
Program and Source Link Connections
sáÇÉç=mêçÅÉëëáåÖ
The purpose of the edge-blending process is to provide a smooth transition for the eye over
the blending region. To provide a smooth transition, identical image data from two different
projectors must be superimposed and the output from each projector must be edge
feathered to provide seamless optical mixing of the two source images. There are two
video processing functions that are required specifically to support wide-screen edge
blended displays: Image Overlap and Edge Feathering.
•
Image Overlap
Source images consist of a single HD image that has been split into multiple
channels, or a series of images from a multi-head graphics card. In either case,
the source images must be re-formatted to provide image overlap to support the
edge-blending process. The Image Overlap processing is illustrated below. The
width of the blending region determines the amount of required image overlap and
this must be programmable to support different applications.
1280
Original Image from
Multi-head Graphics Card
1024
Image for
Projector 1
1280
båÅçêÉ
Unused
Source
Material
båÅç
Image
Overlap
Region
ÅçêÉ
Image for
Projector 2
båÅçêÉ
1
2
Figure 3-11. Image Overlap and Data Doubling
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
91
3. Hardware Installation
Program and Source Link Connections
•
Edge Feathering
The overlapping image data in the blend region must be edge-feathered to
support a seamless optical blend. The transfer function must be programmable to
support blend regions of different widths and adjust to different video
characteristics. A typical blend function is illustrated below.
Blend Region
Image Intensity
for Image 2
Image Intensity
for Image 1
Figure 3-12. Typical Blend Function
mêçàÉÅíçê=pÉíìé=~åÇ=póëíÉã=^ÇàìëíãÉåíë
Accurate projector setup is essential for creating seamless images. Please note the
following important guidelines:
•
•
•
•
92
The projectors must be precisely aligned to overlap the adjacent blending regions.
The brightness, contrast and color balance of the projectors must be adjusted to
provide a uniform appearance across the entire screen.
Custom test patterns and an alignment procedure are used to simplify this
process and provide an optimal result.
Mixing and matching projectors is not recommended as it makes the adjustment
process much more difficult.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
3. Hardware Installation
Program and Source Link Connections
`çååÉÅíáåÖ=mêçÖê~ã=~åÇ=pçìêÅÉ=iáåâë
This section provides instructions for connecting Program Link and Source Link
connections in a variety of Encore configurations.
•
•
Left Justified Configuration
Center Justified Configuration
Important
Secure all cable connections tightly to ensure reliable
operation. This is important especially for the Program and
Source links — as box-to-box synchronization is relayed in
these cables for wide screen setups.
iÉÑí=gìëíáÑáÉÇ=`çåÑáÖìê~íáçå
Left justification means that the first pixels of the projected image begin immediately at the
left, and that unused source material is removed from the far right of the image. A twoprojector sample is illustrated below.
Projector 2
Image
Projector 1
Image
båÅçêÉ
Image
Overlap
Region
Unused
Source
Material
Figure 3-13. Left Justification
Please note:
•
•
Left justified systems are connected in daisy-chain fashion.
Up to 32 Encore Video Processors are supported.
„ Use the following steps to connect Program and Source Links for left justification:
1.
Program Link Connections
Connect the Program Link Out connector on Processor 1 to the Program Link
In connector on Processor 2, as illustrated below.
Processor 1
Program
Link In
Processor 2
Program
Link Out
Program
Link In
Program
Link Out
Processor [n]
Program
Link In
Program
Link Out
Figure 3-14. Program Link Connections
2.
Repeat the procedure for all remaining Processors in your configuration.
3.
For the last processor in the chain, do not connect the Program Link Out
connector.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
93
3. Hardware Installation
Program and Source Link Connections
4.
Source Link Connections
For Processor 1, connect each M/E’s Source Link Out connector to the
associated Source Link In connector on Processor 2, as illustrated below.
Processor 1
Processor 2
Processor [n]
Source Link
1 In
Source Link
1 Out
Source Link
1 In
Source Link
1 Out
Source Link
1 In
Source Link
1 Out
Source Link
2 In
Source Link
2 Out
Source Link
2 In
Source Link
2 Out
Source Link
2 In
Source Link
2 Out
Source Link
3 In
Source Link
3 Out
Source Link
3 In
Source Link
3 Out
Source Link
3 In
Source Link
3 Out
Figure 3-15. Source Link Connections
Important
94
An M/E’s Source Link Out must always be connected to its
associated M/E Source Link In on the next chassis, and
never cross-routed.
5.
Repeat the procedure for all remaining Processors in your configuration.
6.
For the last processor in the chain, do not connect the Source Link Out
connectors.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
3. Hardware Installation
Program and Source Link Connections
`ÉåíÉê=gìëíáÑáÉÇ=`çåÑáÖìê~íáçå
Center justification means that the projected image is properly centered within the available
number of pixels, and that unused source material is removed from the far left and far right
of the image. A two-projector sample is illustrated below.
Projector 2
Image
Projector 1
Image
båÅçêÉ
Unused
Source
Material
Image
Overlap
Region
Unused
Source
Material
Figure 3-16. Center Justification
Important
Center justified systems are only supported in two, three, and
four-projector configurations.
„ Use the following steps to connect Program and Source Links for left justification:
1.
Program Link Connections, Two Projectors
Use the following diagram for reference:
Processor 1
Program
Link In
Processor 2
Program
Link Out
Program
Link In
Program
Link Out
Figure 3-17. Program Link Connections, Two Projectors
Connect:
~
~
2.
Processor 1 Program Link Out > Processor 2 Program Link In
Processor 2 Program Link Out > Processor 1 Program Link In
Program Link Connections, Three Projectors
Use the following diagram for reference:
Processor 1
Program
Link In
Program
Link Out
Processor 2
Program
Link In
Program
Link Out
Processor 3
Program
Link In
Program
Link Out
Figure 3-18. Program Link Connections, Three Projectors
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
95
3. Hardware Installation
Program and Source Link Connections
Connect:
~
~
~
3.
Processor 1 Program Link Out > Processor 2 Program Link In
Processor 2 Program Link Out > Processor 3 Program Link In
Processor 3 Program Link Out > Processor 1 Program Link In
Program Link Connections, Four Projectors
Use the following diagram for reference:
Processor 1
Program
Link In
Processor 2
Program
Link Out
Program
Link In
Processor 3
Program
Link Out
Program
Link In
Program
Link Out
Processor 4
Program
Link In
Program
Link Out
Figure 3-19. Program Link Connections, Four Projectors
Connect:
~
~
~
~
4.
Processor 1 Program Link Out > Processor 3 Program Link In
Processor 2 Program Link Out > Processor 1 Program Link In
Processor 3 Program Link Out > Processor 4 Program Link In
Processor 4 Program Link Out > Processor 2 Program Link In
Source Link Connections, All Configurations
For Processor 1, connect each M/E’s Source Link Out connector to the
associated Source Link In connector on Processor 2, as illustrated below.
Processor 1
Processor 2
Processor [n]
Source Link
1 In
Source Link
1 Out
Source Link
1 In
Source Link
1 Out
Source Link
1 In
Source Link
1 Out
Source Link
2 In
Source Link
2 Out
Source Link
2 In
Source Link
2 Out
Source Link
2 In
Source Link
2 Out
Source Link
3 In
Source Link
3 Out
Source Link
3 In
Source Link
3 Out
Source Link
3 In
Source Link
3 Out
Figure 3-20. Source Link Connections
Important
An M/E’s Source Link Out must always be connected to its
associated M/E Source Link In on the next chassis, and
never cross-routed.
5.
Repeat the procedure for all remaining Processors in your configuration.
6.
For the last processor in the chain, do not connect the Source Link Out
connectors.
Once you have reviewed all of the sections in this chapter, please continue with Chapter 4,
“Controller Orientation” on page 97.
96
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
QK==`çåíêçääÉê=lêáÉåí~íáçå
få=qÜáë=`Ü~éíÉê
This chapter describes each section of the system’s two controllers — the models LC and
SC. The descriptions are designed to familiarize you with each section, the buttons within
the sections, and basic information about each button’s function. Full operating procedures
are provided in Chapter 7, and hyperlinks are provided where appropriate.
The following topics are discussed in this chapter:
•
•
•
•
Controller LC Front Panel
Controller SC Front Panel
Use of Color
Controller Sections
Note
If you are using the Controller LC panel, please start with the
“Controller LC Front Panel” section on page 98.
If you are using the Controller SC panel, please start with the
“Controller SC Front Panel” section on page 101.
Note
Once you have reviewed all of the sections in this chapter,
please continue with Chapter 5, “Menu Orientation” on
page 135.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
97
4. Controller Orientation
Controller LC Front Panel
`çåíêçääÉê=i`=cêçåí=m~åÉä
The figure below illustrates the Controller LC front panel:
1
2
1
3
4
5
6
Folsom
ENCORE
7
15
16
8
9
17
12
10
11
13
14
18
Figure 4-1. Controller LC Front Panel
1)
Touch Screen Section
7)
Preset Section
13)
Transition Section
2)
System Keypad
8)
Destination Bus
14)
Group Control Section
3)
Alphanumeric Keypad
9)
Source Selection Bus
15)
Program Preset Section
4)
Joystick Section
10)
Layer Control Section
16)
Layer/Aux Control Section
5)
Machine Control Section
11)
Layer Functions Section
17)
Transition Functions Section
6)
Console Lighting
12)
Live Switch Section
18)
User Key Section
Following are descriptions of each front panel section on the model LC Controller:
1)
Touch Screen Section
The Controller LC has two identical Touch Screen Sections. The left-hand
section is reserved for system configuration and setup functions, while the righthand section is reserved for operational adjustments. Refer to the “Touch Screen
Section” heading on page 105 for details.
2)
System Keypad
The System Keypad provides direct access to system configuration and setup
menus, as an alternate method to using the Touch Screen. Refer to the “System
Keypad” section on page 107 for details.
98
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
4. Controller Orientation
Controller LC Front Panel
3)
Alphanumeric Keypad
The Alphanumeric Keypad is reserved for numeric functions. This section is
only available on the LC Controller. Refer to the “Alphanumeric Keypad” section
on page 109 for additional details.
4)
Joystick Section
The Joystick Section includes a 3-axis joystick that enables you to adjust PIPs,
Keys and additional system parameters. The section also includes dedicated
buttons that change the Joystick’s function. Refer to the “Joystick Section”
heading on page 110 for details.
5)
Machine Control Section
The Machine Control Section is reserved for controlling external devices. This
functionality is only available on the Controller LC. Refer to the “Machine Control
Section” heading on page 112 for details.
6)
Console Lighting
The Console Lighting Section enables you to control the three low-voltage
“script” lights. Refer to the “Console Lighting” section on page 112 for details.
7)
Preset Section
The Preset Section enables you to store and recall Controller setups. Each
preset button represents a single “look” of the overall projected image. On the
Controller LC, you have access to 900 presets — 30 pages of 30 presets each.
Refer to the “Preset Section” heading on page 113 for details.
8)
Destination Bus
The Destination Bus enables you to route the Controller’s output to one or more
destinations, such as projectors, ScreenPRO-II units and auxiliary monitors. On
the Controller LC, 32 destinations are available. Refer to the “Destination Bus”
section on page 115 for details.
9)
Source Selection Bus
The Source Selection Bus allows you to choose the sources that are routed into
PIPs and Keys. On the Controller LC, up to 64 sources can be mapped to
buttons. Refer to the “Source Selection Bus” section on page 116 for details.
10) Layer Control Section
The Layer Control Section enables you to assign sources to PIPs and Keys on
each layer. Here, you control the overall look on Preview, prior to transitioning the
setup to Program. On the Controller LC, up to 12 layers on six mixers can be
controlled. Refer to the “Layer Control Section” heading on page 118 for details.
11) Layer Functions Section
When a layer is active (and blinking) in the Layer Control Section, all buttons in
the Layer Function Section now apply to that selected layer, enabling you to
change its mode and manipulate the source. Refer to the “Layer Functions
Section” heading on page 121 for details.
12) Live Switch Section
The two buttons in the Live Switch Section temporarily change the function of
the Source Selection Bus, enabling you to take sources “live” to Program. Refer
to the “Live Switch Section” heading on page 124 for details.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
99
4. Controller Orientation
Controller LC Front Panel
13) Transition Section
The Transition Section includes the T-Bar for manually mixing sources on and
off Program, plus dedicated buttons for cuts, auto-transitions and sequencing.
Refer to the “Transition Section” heading on page 125 for details.
14) Group Control Section
The Group Control Section enables you to take one or more destinations and
assign them to a single button, simplifying the task of selecting destinations. On
the Controller LC, eight Group buttons are available. Refer to the “Group
Control Section” heading on page 127 for details.
15) Program Preset Section
The buttons in the Program Preset Section allow you to take a preset directly to
Program, without first viewing it on Preview. Refer to the “Program Preset
Section” heading on page 129 for details.
16) Layer/Aux Control Section
The buttons in the Layer/Aux Control Section provide additional “on air” layer
control. Refer to the “Layer/Aux Control Section” heading on page 130 for
details.
17) Transition Functions Section
The buttons in the Transition Functions Section enable you to set a variety of
parameters for the current transition and mode. Refer to the “Transition
Functions Section” heading on page 132 for details.
18) User Key Section
The buttons in the User Key Section are programmable, and can be assigned to
map a set of stored parameters to the active PIP or Key. On the Controller LC
only, 100 user keys are available — 10 pages of 10 keys each. Refer to the “User
Key Section” heading on page 134 for details.
Please continue with the “Use of Color” section on page 103.
100
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
4. Controller Orientation
Controller SC Front Panel
`çåíêçääÉê=p`=cêçåí=m~åÉä
The figure below illustrates the Controller SC front panel. This panel includes many of the
same sections as the Controller LC — the difference is that the sections are more compact,
and some LC capabilities are not provided.
1
2
3
4
10
13
11
5
12
6
14
7
8
9
15
Figure 4-2. Controller SC Front Panel
1)
Touch Screen Section
6)
Group Control Section
11)
Program Preset Section
2)
System Keypad
7)
Source Selection Bus
12)
Layer/Aux Control Section
3)
Joystick Section
8)
Layer Functions Section
13)
Transition Functions Section
4)
Preset Section
9)
Live Switch Section
14)
Transition Section
5)
Destination Bus
10)
Console Lighting
15)
Layer Control Section
Following are descriptions of each front panel section on the model LC Controller:
1)
Touch Screen Section
The Controller SC has a single Touch Screen Section which is used for system
configuration, setup and operational adjustments. Refer to the “Touch Screen
Section” heading on page 105 for details.
2)
System Keypad
The System Keypad provides direct access to system configuration and setup
menus. Refer to the “System Keypad” section on page 107 for details.
3)
Joystick Section
The Joystick Section includes a 3-axis joystick that enables you to adjust PIPs,
Keys and additional system parameters. The section also includes buttons that
modify the assigned Joystick function. Refer to the “Joystick Section” heading
on page 110 for details.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
101
4. Controller Orientation
Controller SC Front Panel
4)
Preset Section
The Preset Section enables you to store and recall Controller setups. On the
Controller SC, you have access to 64 presets — 8 pages of 8 presets each. Refer
to the “Preset Section” heading on page 113 for details.
5)
Destination Bus
The Destination Bus allows you to route the Controller’s output to one or more
destinations. On the Controller SC, six destinations are available. Refer to the
“Destination Bus” section on page 115 for details.
6)
Group Control Section
The Group Control Section enables you to take one or more destinations and
assign them to a single button. On the Controller SC, four Group buttons are
available. See the “Group Control Section” heading on page 127.
7)
Source Selection Bus
The Source Selection Bus allows you to choose the sources that are routed into
PIPs and Keys. On the Controller SC, up to 24 sources can be mapped to
individual buttons. See the “Source Selection Bus” section on page 116.
8)
Layer Functions Section
When a layer is active in the Layer Control Section, all buttons in the Layer
Functions Section apply to that layer, enabling you to manipulate the source.
Refer to the “Layer Functions Section” heading on page 121 for details.
9)
Live Switch Section
The two buttons in the Live Switch section temporarily change the function of the
Source Selection Bus, enabling you to take sources “live” to Program. Refer to
the “Live Switch Section” heading on page 124 for details.
10) Console Lighting
The Console Lighting Section enables you to control the two low-voltage “script”
lights. See the “Console Lighting” section on page 112 for details.
11) Program Preset Section
The buttons in the Program Preset Section allow you to take a preset directly to
Program, without first viewing it on Preview. Refer to the “Program Preset
Section” heading on page 129 for details.
12) Layer/Aux Control Section
The buttons in the Layer/Aux Control Section provide additional “on air” layer
control. Refer to the “Layer/Aux Control Section” heading on page 130.
13) Transition Functions Section
The buttons in the Transition Functions Section enable you to manipulate the
current transition and mode. Refer to the “Transition Functions Section”
heading on page 132 for details.
14) Transition Section
The Transition Section includes the T-Bar for manually mixing sources on and
off Program, plus dedicated buttons for cuts, automatic transitions and
sequencing. Refer to the “Transition Section” heading on page 125 for details.
15) Layer Control Section
The Layer Control Section enables you to assign sources to PIPs and Keys on
each layer. On the Controller SC, six layers on three mixers can be controlled.
See the “Layer Control Section” heading on page 118 for details.
102
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
4. Controller Orientation
Use of Color
rëÉ=çÑ=`çäçê
Color plays an important role with each Controller’s array of buttons:
White buttons are used for sources, destinations, presets and user keys.
1
Gray buttons are used for softkeys (in the Touch Screen section) and for keypad buttons.
Input
Crop
Yellow buttons are almost exclusively reserved for “mode” control. They are used to
change the joystick mode, PIP and Key functions, the transition mode and the layer control
mode. They are also used for “group” functionality.
Orange buttons are used to control pages of presets and user keys, and for special Aux
control on the Controller LC.
Page
Learn
BG
A
Red buttons are designated “important.” They are most often used in dual-button
sequences such as shift, learn or delete, and also used in critical “live” situations where a
button affects Program directly — without first being used on Preview.
Green buttons indicate unscaled sources, such as backgrounds and the DSK source.
Green is also used for “play” in the Machine Control Section.
Blue buttons indicate scaled sources, in all cases.
1
A
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
103
4. Controller Orientation
Controller Sections
`çåíêçääÉê=pÉÅíáçåë
This section provides detailed descriptions of each Controller section. Illustrations for both
Controller models are provided, and the differences in functionality are clearly noted.
The following topics are discussed:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
104
Touch Screen Section
System Keypad
Alphanumeric Keypad
Joystick Section
Machine Control Section
Console Lighting
Preset Section
Destination Bus
Source Selection Bus
Layer Control Section
Layer Functions Section
Live Switch Section
Transition Section
Group Control Section
Program Preset Section
Layer/Aux Control Section
Transition Functions Section
User Key Section
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
4. Controller Orientation
Controller Sections
qçìÅÜ=pÅêÉÉå=pÉÅíáçå
The figure below illustrates the Touch Screen Section, which is identical on both
Controller models. The model LC has two Touch Screen sections, while the model SC has
one. A sample menu is shown below.
PIP ADJUSTMENT
B
O
R
D
E
R
H Size ( 34.6%)
788
V Size (68.8%)
528
H Position
-98
V Position
30
S
I
Z
E
H
P
O
S
S
H
A
D
O
W
2.0
Move Rate
Key Frame Effect
[ N/A ]
V
OPERATION:
E
F
X
P
O
S
JOY Z TO SIZE, X Y TO POSITION
H SIZE
TRACK
1
V SIZE
RATE
3
2
Figure 4-3. Touch Screen Section
1)
2)
Softkeys
Rotary Knobs
3)
Touch Screen
Following are descriptions of each area:
1)
Softkeys
Eight un-labeled softkeys are provided — four to the left of the Touch Screen and
four below. Softkey labels (when present) appear on the Touch Screen itself.
Press the adjacent softkey to access the menu or activate the indicated function.
2)
Rotary Knobs
Three Rotary Knobs are provided to the right of the Touch Screen. Each knob
controls (or adjusts) the function that is labeled on the Touch Screen itself,
immediately adjacent to the knob. Please note:
~
~
The Top Knob is generally assigned to navigating menu fields. For
example, turning the knob moves a highlight up and down a list of
parameters, allowing you to adjust the highlighted function. This knob
also adjusts adjacent parameters.
The Middle and Bottom knobs are generally assigned to adjusting the
adjacent parameters, as labeled on the Touch Screen.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
105
4. Controller Orientation
Controller Sections
3)
Touch Screen
All menus and functions can be accessed in a variety of ways:
~
~
~
~
~
Touch the desired label on the Touch Screen itself (for example, the
{BORDER} or {SHADOW} buttons) to access the menu as indicated.
Press a Softkey that is directly adjacent to a label.
Use the top NAV knob to move the highlight to the desired line, then use
the ADJ rotary knob (or the Joystick’s Z-Axis Knob) to adjust the value.
Touch a particular line to move the highlight to that line, then use the
ADJ rotary knob (or the Joystick’s Z-Axis Knob) to adjust the value.
Press a button in the System Keypad to jump directly to a top level
menu. Refer to the “System Keypad“section on page 107 for details.
Please note the following important points regarding the adjustment of parameters:
•
•
106
If you adjust a parameter using the ADJ knob or the Joystick’s Z-Axis Knob,
there is no Enter button. Using this method, the modified function, parameter or
value is immediately active in Preview.
If you adjust a parameter using the Alphanumeric Keypad (on the Controller LC
only), Enter must be pressed on the keypad itself for the value to take effect. In
Chapter 7, refer to the “Using the Alphanumeric Keypad” section on page 288
for details.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
4. Controller Orientation
Controller Sections
póëíÉã=hÉóé~Ç
The figure below illustrates the System Keypad, which provides direct access to system
configuration and setup menus. The keypads for the models LC and SC are slightly
different in functionality, as noted below.
Configuration Panel
Input
Output
System
Misc
Input
Output
System
Presets
Effects
Seqs
User
Keys
Presets
Effects
Seqs
Cancel
Save
Status
Misc
Machine
Control
Status
Controller LC
Cancel
Save
Controller SC
Figure 4-4. System Keypads for LC and SC Controllers
Following are descriptions of each button:
Input
Output
System
Misc
Input — press to display the Input Menu on the Touch Screen. This menu is used to
adjust physical sources connected to the Processor, and to set configuration options for the
selected input. In Chapter 5, refer to the “Input Menu” section on page 138 for details.
Output — press to display the Output Menu. This menu allows you to configure Encore’s
outputs (or Destinations). Setup parameters include screen resolution, wide screen setup,
overlap, feathering and test patterns. In Chapter 5, refer to the “Output Menu” section on
page 148 for details.
System — press to display the System Menu. This menu accesses system setup
functions such as destination setup, router control, network setup, input patching, system
diagnostics and system reset functions. In Chapter 5, refer to the “System Menu” section
on page 156 for details.
Misc — press to display the Miscellaneous Menu. This menu accesses a variety of
miscellaneous functions such as backup and restore, copy setups, display settings, Video
Processor IDs and EDID setup. In Chapter 5, refer to the “Miscellaneous Menu” section
on page 179 for details.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
107
4. Controller Orientation
Controller Sections
Presets
Effects
Presets — press to display the Preset Recall Options Menu, which enables you to recall
all (or part) of a stored preset. Each preset register is divided into three portions
(Background, DSK, and Border), which you can individually enable or disable for recall.
Note that the selected recall configuration (as set on the menu) is global. It affects all recall
functions from that point forward, until changed.
Effects — press to display the Effects Menu, which allows you to modify PIP and Key
transition effects, including the ability to define keyframes, paths and effect properties. In
Chapter 5, refer to the “Effects Menu” section on page 190 for details.
Seqs —
Seqs
Note
User
Keys
The Sequences Menu is currently not implemented.
User Keys — (Controller LC only) press to display the User Keys Menu, which enables
you to program, manage, modify, store and recall up to 100 user-defined operations. In
Chapter 5, refer to the “User Key Copy Setup Menu” section on page 192 for details.
Machine Control — (Controller LC only)
Machine
Control
Note
Status
The Machine Control Menu is currently not implemented.
Status — press to display the Status Menu, which provides a summary of connected
system hardware components, such as Video Processors, ScreenPRO-II units, ImagePRO
units, PresentationPRO-II units and Routers. In Chapter 5, refer to the “Status Menu”
section on page 193 for complete details.
Cancel —
Cancel
Note
108
The Cancel function is currently not implemented.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
4. Controller Orientation
Controller Sections
Save
Save — press to save the state of the Encore Controller in non-volatile memory. Once
pressed, the Touch Screen reads “Saving System Configuration.” If you cycle power, the
Controller will return to its state at the time of the “save.” In Chapter 6, refer to the “Saving
the Setup” section on page 277 for complete details.
^äéÜ~åìãÉêáÅ=hÉóé~Ç
The figure below shows the Alphanumeric Keypad which is used for certain numeric
functions on the Controller LC only.
1
ABC
2
DEF
3
Preset
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
Seq
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Time
Code
Clear
0
Enter
Figure 4-5. Alphanumeric Keypad, Controller LC
The Alphanumeric Keypad enables you to enter and change numeric fields (on the Touch
Screen) without having to use a rotary knob (e.g., ADJ), the Joystick’s Z-Axis Knob or a
customer supplied PS/2 Keyboard.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Using the Alphanumeric Keypad” section on page 288 for
detailed instructions.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
109
4. Controller Orientation
Controller Sections
gçóëíáÅâ=pÉÅíáçå
The figure below illustrates the Joystick Section, which is identical on both Controllers.
ADJUSTMENT PANEL
Source
Crop
Reset
Top
Left
Bottom
Right
Fine
Adjust
Figure 4-6. Joystick Section
When a PIP or Key is selected in the Layer Control Section, the buttons in the Joystick
Section are automatically assigned to manipulate that feature on Preview. When none of
the six function buttons are lit, the 3-axis Joystick has the following functions:
•
•
•
X-Axis Control — Move the Joystick left and right to move the PIP (or Key) left
and right respectively.
Y-Axis Control — Move the Joystick up and down to move the PIP (or Key) up
and down on Preview.
Z-Axis Control — Twist the Joystick’s top knob clockwise and counterclockwise
to size the PIP (or Key) larger or smaller.
Note
The Z-Axis Control can also be used to increase or
decrease the value of a highlighted parameter, such as a
matte color, key clip and gain, border size and much more.
Descriptions of each button in the Joystick Section are listed on the following page.
110
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
4. Controller Orientation
Controller Sections
Source — press to assign the Joystick to sizing and positioning the source image within
the PIP or Key boundaries. Please note:
Source
•
•
•
In Source mode, the PIP or Key’s placement on screen remains static, while the
image is adjusted within.
If a PIP is selected, the Input Source Adjustment Menu appears when Source
is enabled.
If a Key is selected, the Key Source Adjustment Menu appears when Source is
enabled.
To return to normal PIP adjustment, turn the button off. In Chapter 5, refer to the “Source
Adjustment Menus” section on page 212.
Crop
Reset
Crop — press to re-assign the Joystick to cropping the boundaries of the PIP or Key.
When enabled, the Top Left and Bottom Right buttons are also enabled, and the Crop
Adjustment Menu appears. To return to normal PIP adjustment, toggle the button off. In
Chapter 5, refer to the “Crop Menu” section on page 210 for details.
Reset — the Reset button is a momentary function. Press to reset the current effect (e.g.,
PIP, Key, crop, etc.) to a nominal default value. Think of this function as being “context
sensitive,” as it resets only the current effect, without affecting other modifications. In
Chapter 7, refer to the “Using Reset” section on page 311 for additional details.
Top Left — when the Crop button is lit, press to crop the PIP’s top and left edges:
Top
Left
•
•
Move the Joystick left and right to crop the left edge.
Move the Joystick up and down to crop the top edge.
In Chapter 5, refer to the “Crop Menu” section on page 210 for additional information.
Bottom Right — when Crop is lit, press to crop the PIP’s bottom and right edges:
Bottom
Right
•
•
Move the Joystick left and right to crop the right edge.
Move the Joystick up and down to crop the bottom edge.
In Chapter 5, refer to the “Crop Menu” section on page 210 for additional information.
Fine
Adjust
Fine Adjust — in any PIP or key adjustment mode, press to increase the precision of the
Joystick’s adjustment range.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
111
4. Controller Orientation
Controller Sections
j~ÅÜáåÉ=`çåíêçä=pÉÅíáçå
The figure below illustrates the Machine Control Section, which is reserved for controlling
external devices. The section is only available on the Controller LC.
MACHINE CONTROL
Rev Jog
Still
Rev
Fwd Jog
Stop
Fast
Fwd
Mark
In
Mark
Out
Cue
Load
Play
Gang
Roll
Figure 4-7. Machine Control Section
Note
The Machine Control Section’s functionality is currently not
implemented.
`çåëçäÉ=iáÖÜíáåÖ
The figure below illustrates the Console Lighting Section, which is slightly different on
each Controller model.
Left
Center
Controller LC
Right
Light
Controller SC
Figure 4-8. Console Lighting Sections
To adjust console lighting:
•
•
112
Controller LC — use the three knobs to individually adjust the brightness of the
left, center and right-hand console script lights, respectively.
Controller SC — use the single knob to simultaneously adjust the brightness of
the left and right-hand console script lights.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
4. Controller Orientation
Controller Sections
mêÉëÉí=pÉÅíáçå
The figures below illustrate the Preset Sections on each Controller model.
PRESETS
Page
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Learn
Delete
Next
Previous
Page
Figure 4-9. Preset Section, Controller SC
PRESETS
Page
1
2
3
4
3
29
30
Learn
Delete
Next
Previous
Page
Figure 4-10. Preset Section, Controller LC
A Preset is a register in which you can store and recall entire Controller setups. In basic
terms, one preset represents a single “look” of the Controller — including the current state
of all mixers, layers, sources, and the DSK. Please note the following points:
•
•
The Controller SC includes buttons for 64 Presets (8 pages of 8 presets each).
The Controller LC has buttons for 900 Presets (30 pages of 30 presets each).
Following are descriptions of each button’s function in the Preset Section.
Preset Buttons — press to recall a Preset to Preview. If “resources” are available, the
“look” stored with that preset will be recalled. If the button does not light, system resources
are not currently available to process the request.
4
When lit, the Red LED above each button indicates the currently selected page.
S If LED 3 and button 30 are lit, the 30th Preset on page 3 is active.
Important
All recall functions are affected by the current settings on the
Preset Recall Options Menu. This menu (accessed by
pressing Presets on the System Keypad) enables you to
select all or a portion of the stored Preset for recall.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “A Word About Resources” section on page 322 for additional
important information.
Learn — hold down Learn, then press the desired Preset button to store the overall look of
the Controller into that register.
Learn
S To store the Controller setup in preset register 2, press Learn + 2.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
113
4. Controller Orientation
Controller Sections
Delete — hold down Delete, then press the desired Preset button to delete that register
from memory.
Delete
S To delete preset 8 from memory, press Delete + 8.
Next — press to recall the next valid Preset in sequential order. Please note:
Next
•
•
If a Preset is undefined, it will be skipped when Next is pressed.
Next includes the ability to “wrap” to the next page (e.g., from Preset 30 on page 2
to Preset 1 on page 3, or from Preset 30 on page 30 to Preset 1 on page 1).
Previous — press to recall the previous valid Preset in sequential order. Please note:
Previous
•
•
If a Preset is undefined, it will be skipped when Previous is pressed.
Previous includes the ability to “wrap” to the previous page (e.g., from Preset 1
on page 3 to Preset 30 on page 2, or from Preset 1 on page 1 to Preset 30 on
page 30).
Page — hold down Page, then press the desired Preset button to switch to that page of
Presets. The Red LED above the button lights to indicate the selected page.
Page
S To switch to page 7, press Page + 7.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Working with Presets” section on page 322 for complete
instructions on all Preset modes.
114
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
4. Controller Orientation
Controller Sections
aÉëíáå~íáçå=_ìë
The figures below illustrate the Destination Bus on each Controller model.
DESTINATIONS
1
2
3
4
5
6
Clear
30
31
Figure 4-11. Destination Bus, Controller SC
DESTINATIONS
1
2
3
4
32
All
Clear
Figure 4-12. Destination Bus, Controller LC
Each button on the Destination Bus represents a location to which you can route some
form of Controller (or router) output. The transitions that you perform will affect only the
selected destinations, leaving the unselected destinations as they were. The Controller
SC provides six destinations — the Controller LC provides 32. All destinations are
assigned using the Destination Setup Menu. Please note:
•
•
•
In Chapter 1, refer to the “A Word About Destinations” section on page 26 for
examples of each destination “type.”
In Chapter 6, refer to the “Destination Setup” section on page 257 for details on
standard destination setup procedures.
In Chapter 6, refer to the “AUX Destination Setup” section on page 259 for
details on Aux destination setup procedures.
Following are descriptions of each button’s function on the Destination Bus.
1
Destination Buttons — press to select the desired destination. Any combination of
destinations can be selected — the buttons are not mutually exclusive. The transitions and
switches that you perform will affect only the selected destination(s).
Clear — hold down Clear, then press the desired button to remove it as a destination. The
next transition will not be routed to it.
Clear
S If destinations 1, 2 and 3 are lit, press Clear + 2 to remove destination 2 from
the group. The next transition will be routed to destinations 1 and 3 only.
All — (Controller LC only) press All to activate all valid destinations.
All
•
Press Clear + All to clear all valid destinations.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Working with Destinations” section on page 293 for complete
instructions on all destination modes.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
115
4. Controller Orientation
Controller Sections
pçìêÅÉ=pÉäÉÅíáçå=_ìë
The figures below illustrate the Source Selection Bus on each Controller model.
SOURCE SELECTION
Program
7
19
8
20
9
21
10
22
11
23
12
24
1
13
2
14
3
15
4
16
5
17
6
18
Shift
Program
Figure 4-13. Source Selection Bus, Controller SC
SOURCE SELECTION
Program
17
49
18
50
19
51
1
33
2
34
3
35
20
52
29
61
30
62
31
63
32
64
13
45
14
46
15
47
16
48
Shift
Program
Figure 4-14. Source Selection Bus, Controller LC
Please note the following important points:
•
•
Each numbered button represents two sources — one shifted and one un-shifted.
The Controller SC includes buttons for 24 sources.
~
~
•
Sources 13 - 24 are accessed by pressing Shift + source.
The Controller LC has buttons for 64 sources.
~
~
•
Sources 1 - 12 are accessed directly.
Sources 1 - 32 are accessed directly.
Sources 33 - 64 are accessed by pressing Shift + source.
Each source button represents an input that you can assign to a PIP or Key, or
route to a specified destination. Each input is either a “direct” connection to the
Processor or an assigned router input.
In Chapter 6, refer to the “Input Setup” section on page 271 for details on source setup
procedures.
116
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
4. Controller Orientation
Controller Sections
Following are descriptions of each button’s function on the Source Selection Bus.
Source Buttons — press to assign the source to the blinking “mixer” button in the Layer
Control Section.
17
49
•
When the source button is lit and blinking:
~
~
~
•
•
•
•
The source is on Preview.
The associated layer is active for modification.
The associated layer’s raster box is blinking on Preview.
When lit solid, the source is on Preview — but its associated layer is not active for
modification.
Multiple source buttons can be lit simultaneously, but only one source button can
be blinking — with its associated layer active for modification and the associated
raster box blinking on Preview.
When the Red LED above a source button is lit solid, the source is on Program.
When the Red LED above a source button is blinking:
~
~
~
The associated mixer is set to Mix Mode.
In the mixer, the blinking Red LED indicates the layer that is on Program.
In the associated mixer, the layer opposite to the blinking Red LED is
enabled for modification, with the associated raster box blinking.
S The Red LED above source 1 is blinking, and the Red LED above layer 1A is
blinking. This indicates that mixer 1 is set to Mix Mode, with source 1 on
Program in layer 1A and layer 1B active for modification.
Note
•
•
Without the blinking Red LEDs in Mix Mode, you would not
be able to tell which layer/source combination was on
Program in the selected mixer.
Multiple Red LEDs can be lit simultaneously, but only one Red LED can be
blinking — indicating a “Mix Mode” association.
Source buttons cannot be selected if they have not been assigned during the
source setup procedure. The button(s) will not light.
Source buttons are also used in the following modes:
•
•
Shift
Source buttons can be used to route inputs to selected Aux destinations. In
Chapter 7, refer to the “Routing Sources to Aux Destinations” section on
page 294 for details.
In “live switch” mode, source buttons can be used to switch the input to a PIP
directly on Program. In Chapter 7, refer to the “Working with Live Modes”
section on page 317 for complete instructions on all destination modes.
Shift — the Shift button is a toggle: press once to light, press again to turn off. When lit,
press the desired source button to access the second row of numbered sources (e.g., 13 24 on the Controller SC).
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Switching Sources” section on page 297 for additional details.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
117
4. Controller Orientation
Controller Sections
i~óÉê=`çåíêçä=pÉÅíáçå
The figures below illustrate the Layer Control Section on each Controller model. The
sections are essentially identical, except that the Controller LC can adjust up to six mixers
(in a “stack” configuration), while the model SC controls up to three mixers.
Background
Mixer 1
Mixer 2
Mixer 3
Program
BG
A
Layer
BG
B
1
A
1
B
2
A
Split
2
B
3
A
Split
3
B
DSK
Split
Figure 4-15. Layer Control Section, Controller SC
Background
Mixer 1
Mixer 2
Mixer 3
Mixer 4
Mixer 5
Mixer 6
Program
Layer
BG
A
BG
B
1
A
1
B
Split
2
A
2
B
3
A
Split
3
B
Split
4
A
4
B
Split
5
A
5
B
Split
6
A
6
B
DSK
Split
Figure 4-16. Layer Control Section, Controller LC
The buttons in the Layer Control Section enable you to select (on Preview) the sources
that will transition to or from Program — including backgrounds, individual layers and the
DSK. When you select a blue “layer” button, you are electronically selecting a scaler that
you want to assign as a PIP or Key, or modify in some manner. In this way, you control the
overall look on Preview before you transition that look to Program.
Please note the following points:
•
•
•
•
•
•
118
The Controller SC controls up to six layers on three mixers.
The Controller LC controls up the 12 layers on six mixers (in a “stack”
configuration).
Two background sources and one DSK are provided.
Each identical mixer is comprised of two layers (A and B) and a Split button.
The buttons are arranged left-to-right in order of visual priority — backgrounds
(lowest priority), mixers (in order of priority), and the DSK (highest priority).
Any combination of backgrounds, layers and DSK can be selected on Preview for
transition to or from Program, provided that resources are available. In Chapter 7,
refer to the “A Word About Resources” section on page 322 for more details.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
4. Controller Orientation
Controller Sections
Following are descriptions of each button’s function in the Layer Control Section.
Important
BG
A
Encore uses a “lookahead” Preview monitor that fully
represents how the Program output will appear next. By
selecting combinations of PIPs, Keys, backgrounds and the
DSK, you are composing a Preview image that will appear on
Program — after the next transition. A “lit” button does not
necessarily mean that the source will transition on or off — it
simply means that it is part of the “look” on Preview.
Background Buttons — press to select an unscaled background (A or B) on Preview for
transition to or from Program. The button blinks when selected, and the BG Input Setup
Menu appears. Here, you can select a DVI input, an analog input, a matte color or a
captured frame as the background source.
Please note:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
When blinking, the background is active for manipulation on Preview. When lit
solid, the background is on Preview — but it is not active for manipulation. It is,
however, ready to be transitioned to Program or cleared from Preview.
If the Red LED is lit, the selected background is on Program.
Both backgrounds cannot be on Program simultaneously.
If neither background is on Program, the matte color for the last selected
background is the on-air background source — but the Red LED will not be lit.
If a background is on Program and the same background is selected in Preview,
there will be no background change on the next transition.
To clear a background from Preview (so that it will transition off Program), press
the desired background, then press Clear Layer. This turns the button off, and if
the Red LED above the button is lit, the background will transition off Program.
Toggle mode affects background transitions. In Chapter 7, refer to the
“Background Transitions” section on page 298 for complete instructions.
Layer Buttons — press to select a layer on Preview for transition to or from Program. The
button blinks when selected, and either the PIP Adjustment Menu or Key Menu appears.
1
A
•
When lit and blinking:
~
~
~
•
•
•
The layer is active for modification, and its raster box blinks on Preview.
A source can be assigned to the layer from the Source Selection Bus.
The layer can be assigned as a PIP or Key using the buttons in the
Layer Function Section.
When lit solid, the layer is on Preview — but it is not active for manipulation. It is,
however, ready to be transitioned to Program or cleared from Preview.
When the Red LED above a layer button is lit, the layer is on Program.
When the Red LED above a layer button is blinking:
~
~
~
~
The associated mixer is set to Mix Mode.
The layer (with the blinking LED) is on Program.
On the Source Selection Bus, the blinking Red LED indicates the
associated source on Program.
In the mixer, the layer opposite to the blinking Red LED is enabled for
modification, and its associated raster box is blinking on Preview.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
119
4. Controller Orientation
Controller Sections
•
To clear a layer from Preview (so that it will transition off Program), press the
desired layer button, then press Clear Layer. This turns the button off, and if the
Red LED above the button is lit, the layer will transition off Program.
Split — this button determines how the mixer’s two layers work.
Split
•
Mix Mode — the Split button is off. In this mode, the two layers are ganged
together, offering a variety of additional transitions including the Toggle, Mix
Source and Swap functions.
~
~
•
•
Refer to the “Transition Functions Section” heading on page 132 for
details on the Toggle, Mix Source and Swap buttons.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Working with Layers” section on page 297 for
additional Mix Mode information.
Split Mode — the Split button is on. In this mode, each layer works
independently. You have the freedom to size, position, manipulate and transition
each one independently of the other. In Chapter 7, refer to the “Working with
Layers” section on page 297 for additional Split Mode information.
Join Mode — the Split button is on. The currently blinking layer button is
considered the “master.” Press and hold the Split button, then press the other
(non-blinking) layer button to “join” the two layers together. Both layer buttons
blink, and in this mode, both are now joined together.
~
~
Any manipulation that you perform to the “master” layer is also
performed to the joined layer. Both can be sized, positioned, moved and
manipulated as if they are one.
To separate the two layers, press and hold the Split button, then press
either Layer button.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Using Join Mode” section on page 311 for additional
information.
•
Blinking — if the Split button is blinking (after a Preset recall), the mixer will
change modes after the next transition.
DSK — press to select the unscaled DSK on Preview for transition to or from Program.
The button lights when selected. Please note:
DSK
•
•
•
Using the DSK Input Setup Menu, you can select a DVI input, an analog input or
a captured frame as the DSK source.
When the Red LED above the button is lit, the DSK is on Program.
To clear the DSK from Preview (so that it will transition off Program), select the
DSK then press Clear Layer. This action causes the button to turn off. If the red
led above the DSK button is lit, it will transition off of Program.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Modifying Keys” section on page 304 for additional DSK
information.
120
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
4. Controller Orientation
Controller Sections
i~óÉê=cìåÅíáçåë=pÉÅíáçå
The figures below illustrate the Layer Functions Section on each Controller model. The
sections are essentially identical, except that the Controller LC has additional functions.
LAYER FUNCTIONS
PIP
Clone
Source
Preview
Move
Setup
Key
Full
Screen
Swap
Z-order
Frame
Grab
Copy
Freeze
Clear
Layer
All
Figure 4-17. Layer Functions Section, Controller SC
LAYER FUNCTIONS
PIP
Border
Clone
Copy
User
Copy
Key
Full
Screen
Swap
Z-order
Source
Preview
Frame
Grab
Freeze
Move
Setup
Preview
OSD
Clear
Layer
All
Figure 4-18. Layer Functions Section, Controller LC
The buttons in the Layer Function Section enable you to modify the selected layer
(blinking) layer button in the Layer Control Section.
PIP
PIP — press to change the selected layer (in the Layer Control Section) and its
associated source to a PIP. The PIP Adjustment Menu appears on the Touch Screen. In
Chapter 5, refer to the “PIP Adjustment Menu” section on page 194 for details.
Key
Key — press to change the selected layer (in the Layer Control Section) and its
associated source to a Key. The Key Adjustment Menu appears on the Touch Screen. In
Chapter 5, refer to the “Key Menu” section on page 203 for details.
Border — (Controller LC only)
Border
•
•
Press to modify the PIP’s border. The Border Menu appears.
Double-punch to turn the border on or off for the selected layer.
In Chapter 5, refer to the “Border Menu” section on page 199 for information.
Full
Screen
Full Screen — press to take the active PIP or Key to full screen. In each case, the
source’s height is used to define the full screen size.
S If a source’s original dimension is 1280 x 1024, pressing Full Screen
expands (or reduces) that PIP to fill the output screen vertically. If borders
are ON, they will be taken into account so that they are visible.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
121
4. Controller Orientation
Controller Sections
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Using Full Screen” section on page 307 for instructions.
Clone
Clone — for widescreen configurations only, press to make an exact copy of a layer onto
the opposite screen. All parameters of the PIP or Key are cloned, including the source’s
shadow, key effects, border and size. Once cloned, you can select between a “mirror” or
an “offset” clone.
S In a three-screen configuration, if layer 1A is a PIP on screen 1, press Clone
to make an exact copy of the PIP on screen 3. When you adjust the PIP, both
the original and the “cloned” copy are adjusted simultaneously.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Using Clone” section on page 308 for instructions.
Swap
Z-order
Swap Z-order — press to change the visual priority (on Preview) of the two layers in a
given mixer. The PIPs or keys remain at their current locations, only the priority changes.
S If PIP 1B is visually on top of PIP 1A, press Swap Z-order to place PIP 1A on
top of 1B.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Using Swap Z-order” section on page 308 for instructions.
Copy
Copy — press to copy the properties of the active PIP or Key to another PIP or Key — on
the same (or different) mixer. The Copy Setup Menu appears on the Touch Screen. All
(or a portion) of the source image’s parameters can be copied. Copy differs from Clone,
because once the function has been performed, the two effects will not be locked together.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Using Copy” section on page 309 for instructions.
Source
Preview
Source Preview — For any selected Layer, press Source Preview to quickly isolate that
layer for sizing and adjustment purposes — in Preview only. All other PIPs and Keys are
hidden, the background switches to a neutral gray, and the Input Menu for the selected
source appears. When the button is toggled off, the previous “look” is restored. In
Chapter 7, refer to the “Using Source Preview” section on page 310 for instructions.
User
Copy
User Copy — (Controller LC only) press to display the User Key Copy Setup Menu,
which enables you to select all (or a portion) of the effect’s parameters that you wish to
store on one of the Controller’s 100 User Keys. By selecting a PIP or Key in Preview and
then pressing a user key, the stored parameters are instantly applied to the effect.
•
•
Frame
Grab
Refer to the “User Key Section” heading on page 134 for information on the User
Key section.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Working with User Keys” section on page 327 for
operational instructions.
Frame Grab — press to display the Frame Grab Menu, which enables you to capture
frames into the system’s three internal frame stores. Once captured, the frames can be
used as background or DSK sources. If the “Extended Frame Grab” option is installed,
you can store/recall up to 100 frames internally. In Chapter 7, refer to the “Working with
Frame Grabs” section on page 332 for instructions.
Move Setup —
Move
Setup
•
•
Press to set up a “move” that enables you to fly a PIP or Key from one location to
another on the next auto transition.
Double-punch to delete the move setup for the selected layer.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Using Move” section on page 313 for complete instructions.
122
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
4. Controller Orientation
Controller Sections
Preview OSD —
Preview
OSD
Note
Clear
Layer
All
The Preview OSD function is currently not implemented.
Clear Layer — press to remove the currently selected (blinking) layer from Preview — in
preparation for transitioning it off Program. The button can be used to clear backgrounds,
PIPs, Keys and the DSK. In Chapter 7, refer to the “Clearing Layers from Program”
section on page 305 for instructions.
All — press All + Clear Layer (or Clear Layer + All) to remove all layers from Preview —
in preparation for transitioning them all off Program. In Chapter 7, refer to the “Clearing
Layers from Program” section on page 305 for instructions.
Freeze — press to freeze a PIP or Key.
Freeze
•
•
In Split Mode, PIPs or Keys can be frozen on both Program and Preview.
In Mix Mode, PIPs or Keys can only be frozen on Preview — prior to transitioning
them to Program.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Using Freeze” section on page 309 for instructions.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
123
4. Controller Orientation
Controller Sections
iáîÉ=pïáíÅÜ=pÉÅíáçå
The figure below illustrates the Live Switch Section on both Controller models.
LIVE SWITCH
Source
Program
Preview
Figure 4-19. Live Switch Section
The buttons in the Live Switch Section enable you to enter two types of “live” modes,
temporarily bypassing Encore’s “lookahead” preview capability.
Source — press Shift + Source to activate the Live Switch Source mode, which turns
both rows of the Source Selection Bus into a live Program bus.
Source
•
•
Program
Preview
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Using Live Switch Source Mode” section on page 318
for complete details.
Program/Preview — Press Shift + Program/Preview to activate the Live Switch
Program/Preview mode, which turns both rows of the Source Selection Bus into a live
Program/Preview bus.
•
•
•
124
For the selected layer, when a source button is pressed, the layer cuts to the new
source within the selected layer.
In this mode, the top row acts as Program, and the bottom row acts as Preview.
For the selected layer, when a source is pressed on Program, the layer cuts to the
new source within the selected layer. However, you can also use the live Preview
bus in the normal way, and then transition to Program.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Using Live Switch Program/Preview Mode” section
on page 317 for details.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
4. Controller Orientation
Controller Sections
qê~åëáíáçå=pÉÅíáçå
The figures below illustrate the Transition Section on each Controller. The sections are
essentially identical.
SEQS
GO / +
Controller
SC
Cut
Auto
Trans
TRANSITIONS
GO / +
GO / -
Controller
LC
Cut
Auto
Trans
Figure 4-20. Transition Sections
Descriptions of each button and control are provided below:
T-Bar — enables you to perform smooth, manual transitions. Each time the T-Bar is
moved from limit to limit, the “look” on Preview transitions to Program using the selected
transition type (as chosen on the Effects Menu).
Cut — press to instantly cut the setup (or “look”) from Preview to Program.
Cut
Auto
Trans
Auto Trans — press to transition automatically from Preview to Program at a pre-defined
rate as chosen on the Effects Menu. In Chapter 5, refer to the “Effects Menu” section on
page 190 for menu details. In Chapter 7, refer to the “Working with Transitions” section
on page 320 for operational procedures.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
125
4. Controller Orientation
Controller Sections
Go / + —
GO / +
Note
The Go / + function is currently not implemented.
Note
The Go / - function is currently not implemented.
Go / - —
GO / -
126
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
4. Controller Orientation
Controller Sections
dêçìé=`çåíêçä=pÉÅíáçå
The figures below illustrate the Group Control Section on each Controller. The sections
are essentially identical, except that the Controller SC has fewer group buttons.
Group
1
Group
2
Group
3
Group
4
GROUPS
Figure 4-21. Group Control Section, Controller SC
GROUPS
Group
1
Group
2
Group
3
Group
4
Group
5
Group
6
Group
7
Group
8
All
Clear
Learn
Figure 4-22. Group Control Section, Controller LC
A single “group” button can be programmed to represent one or more destinations. This
feature greatly simplifies the method by which you activate destinations. Descriptions of
each button are provided below.
Group
1
Group Buttons — four groups are available on the Controller SC; eight on the Controller
LC. Any combination of Group buttons can be enabled, but all group selections (whether
individual or multiple) are mutually exclusive.
•
•
Press a numbered Group button by itself to enable the assigned destination(s)
and toggle all other groups (and destinations) off. When pressed, the assigned
destination buttons immediately light on the Destination Bus.
Press two or more Group buttons simultaneously to enable multiple groups of
destinations (e.g., Groups 1, 3 and 4), and toggle all other active groups (and
destinations) off.
All — (Controller LC only)
All
•
•
Press All to activate (enable) all assigned groups of destinations.
On the Controller SC, you must simultaneously press all assigned Group buttons
to perform the “all enable” function.
Clear — (Controller LC only)
Clear
•
•
•
Press Clear + a selected Group button to clear that one group only.
Press Clear + ALL to clear all active groups.
On the Controller SC, there are two ways to clear a group:
~
~
Press the group(s) that you wish to remain enabled (which will, in turn,
clear the other un-selected groups).
Press and hold the Clear button (on the Destination Bus), then press
the button(s) for the destination(s) that you wish to clear.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
127
4. Controller Orientation
Controller Sections
Learn — (Controller LC only)
Learn
•
•
To learn (program) a group button, activate the desired destinations on the
Destination Bus, press and hold Learn, then press the desired Group button.
This same method can be used to add (or remove) destinations from the group —
simply by re-learning the button with a new array of destinations.
To unlearn (completely clear) a group button so that it no longer lights, clear all
destinations on the Destination Bus (Clear + All), press and hold Learn, then
press the desired Group button. Here, you are essentially programming the
button with “no destinations.”
Learn — (Controller SC only)
•
•
•
To learn a group button, press and hold the desired Group button, then press the
desired destination button(s) on the Destination Bus.
To add a destination to an existing group, first select the group, press and hold the
Group button, then press the desired new destination.
To remove destinations from a group, first select the group, press and hold the
Group button, then press the lit destination button that you want to remove. This
method can also be used to unlearn (completely clear) a group button so that it no
longer lights.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Working with Groups” section on page 290 for instructions on
all group functions.
Please note the following important points regarding group buttons:
•
If you enable a group that fully contains all the destinations from another group,
both group buttons will light.
S Group 1 contains destinations 1 and 2, Group 2 contains destinations 3 and
4, and Group 3 contains destinations 1, 2, and 4. When you press the
Group 3 button by itself, it lights, and the Group 1 button also lights —
because both Group 1 destinations are fully included in Group 3.
128
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
4. Controller Orientation
Controller Sections
mêçÖê~ã=mêÉëÉí=pÉÅíáçå
The figures below illustrate the Program Preset Section on each Controller model. The
sections are essentially identical, except that the Controller SC has fewer presets, and the
Learn button is shared with the Preset Section.
PROGRAM PRESETS
Program
Preset
1
Presets
to
Program
Figure 4-23. Program Preset Section, Controller SC
PROGRAM
PRESETS
Program
Preset
1
Program
Preset
2
Program
Preset
3
Presets
to
Program
Figure 4-24. Program Preset Section, Controller LC
Program Presets function in the same way as the buttons in the Preset Section, except
that they go directly to Program when pressed — without the possibility of previewing the
look. The Controller LC has three program presets, the model SC has two.
Descriptions of each button are provided below:
Program Preset Buttons —
Program
Preset
1
Note
The functionality of Program Preset buttons 1, 2 and 3 is
currently not implemented.
Presets to Program —
Presets
to
Program
Note
The Presets to Program button is currently not implemented.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
129
4. Controller Orientation
Controller Sections
i~óÉêL^ìñ=`çåíêçä=pÉÅíáçå
The figures below illustrate the Layer/Aux Control section on each Controller model.
LAYER CONTROL
1
A
BG
1
B
2
A
2
B
3
A
3
B
DSK
Figure 4-25. Layer/Aux Control Section, Controller SC
LAYER / AUX CONTROL
BG
1
A
3
A
3
B
4
A
4
B
5
A
5
B
6
A
6
B
DSK
AUX
ALL
Figure 4-26. Layer/Aux Control Section, Controller LC
The buttons in the Layer/Aux Control Section provide additional “on air” layer control.
Descriptions of each button are provided below:
BG —
BG
Note
The BG button in the Layer/Aux Control Section is not
currently implemented.
Layer Buttons —
1
A
Note
The Layer Buttons in the Layer/Aux Control Section are
not currently implemented.
Note
The DSK button in the Layer/Aux Control Section is not
currently implemented.
DSK —
DSK
130
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
4. Controller Orientation
Controller Sections
AUX — (Controller LC only)
AUX
Note
The AUX button in the Layer/Aux Control Section is not
implemented.
All — (Controller LC only)
All
Note
The ALL button in the Layer/Aux Control Section is not
currently implemented.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
131
4. Controller Orientation
Controller Sections
qê~åëáíáçå=cìåÅíáçåë=pÉÅíáçå
The figures below illustrate the Transition Functions Section on each Controller.
Mix
User
Effect
Mix
Source
Swap
Toggle
Move
Shuffle
Ext
Trigger
Black
Preview
TRANSITION FUNCTIONS
Figure 4-27. Transition Functions Section, Controller SC
Mix
User
Trans
1
User
Trans
2
User
Trans
3
Mix
Source
Swap
Toggle
Move
Shuffle
Ext
Trigger
Black
Preview
TRANSITION FUNCTIONS
Figure 4-28. Transition Functions Section, Controller LC
The buttons in the Transition Functions Section enable you to manipulate the transition
itself. Descriptions of each button are provided below:
Mix —
Mix
Note
The Mix function is not currently implemented.
User Effect — (Controller SC only)
User
Effect
Note
The User Effect function is not currently implemented.
User Trans Buttons — (Controller LC only)
User
Trans
1
Note
132
The functionality of User Trans buttons 1, 2 and 3 is currently
not implemented.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
4. Controller Orientation
Controller Sections
Mix
Source
Mix Source — in “Mix Mode” for a given layer (with the Split button off), press Mix Source
to co-locate both PIPs in the mixer.
•
•
•
After a transition, layers A and B will be exactly the same size — in exactly the
same position.
Prior to a transition, the PIP on Preview can be changed in any manner — even if
the other side of the mixer is on Program.
Mix Source and Swap modes are mutually exclusive.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Understanding Split and Mix Modes” section on page 299 for
complete instructions on using mix mode.
Swap — in “Mix Mode” for a given layer (with the Split button off), press Swap to allow
both PIPs in the mixer to be located independently.
Swap
•
•
Layers A and B can be positioned and sized anywhere as desired.
Mix Source and Swap modes are mutually exclusive.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Understanding Split and Mix Modes” section on page 299 for
complete instructions.
Toggle — press to toggle sources back and forth with each transition. Once a source
transitions off of Program within a PIP, it “flip-flops” to Preview.
Toggle
•
Toggle is used with both the Mix Source and Swap modes, and also functions
with background transitions.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Understanding Split and Mix Modes” section on page 299 for
details on the Toggle mode.
Move
Move — press to pend a “move” for a PIP or key, enabling you to fly the PIP or key from
one location to another on the next auto transition. In Chapter 7, refer to the “Using Move”
section on page 313 for complete instructions.
Shuffle —
Shuffle
Note
Ext
Trigger
Black
Preview
The Shuffle function is currently not implemented.
Ext Trigger — This function is only used with the Barco Events Manager or Barco Stage
Manager applications. With these two products, operators can pause the timeline which in
turn causes the Ext Trigger button to flash. Pressing Ext Trigger starts the timeline again.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Using Ext Trigger” section on page 310 for details.
Black Preview — This function enables you to transition all layers, backgrounds and the
DSK to black, across all configured screens and all enabled destinations. The button is a
toggle — press to enable black on Preview, press again to restore the previous “look.” In
Chapter 7, refer to the “Using Black Preview” section on page 310 for details.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
133
4. Controller Orientation
Controller Sections
rëÉê=hÉó=pÉÅíáçå
The figure below illustrates the User Key section on the Controller LC. The Controller SC
does not have User Keys.
USER KEYS
Page
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Figure 4-29. User Key Section, Controller LC
The buttons in the User Key Section are programmable. On the Controller LC, 100 user
keys are available — 10 pages of 10 keys each.
When the User Copy button is pressed, the User Key Copy Setup Menu enables you to
select all (or a portion) of the current effect’s attributes (such as border color, size, aspect
ratio, effects, etc.) The selected attributes can be stored on a User Key — and
subsequently applied to any active layer.
Note
If the selected layer is a Key, when a User Key is learned, it
remembers the state of the Key (e.g., clip, gain, etc.) even
though those options are not listed in the menu. If you then
apply this User Key to a PIP, it changes to a Key.
Descriptions of each button are provided below:
Page — press and hold the Page button, then press the desired User Key (1 to 10) to
switch to that page of user keys.
Page
User Keys —
1
•
•
To store the current layer’s attributes in a user key, press and hold User Copy (in
the Layer Functions Section) then press the desired User Key. All or a portion
of an layer’s attributes can be selected on the User Key Copy Setup Menu.
To apply stored attributes to an active layer, activate the desired layer, then press
the desired User Key.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Working with User Keys” section on page 327 for additional
operating instructions.
Note
134
Once you have reviewed all of the sections in this chapter,
please continue with Chapter 5, “Menu Orientation” on
page 135.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
RK==jÉåì=lêáÉåí~íáçå
få=qÜáë=`Ü~éíÉê
This chapter describes all Encore system menus, including how they are accessed, the
functions that are available, and descriptions of each menu tree (in block diagram format).
The following topics are discussed:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Global Rules
Home Menu
Input Menu
Output Menu
System Menu
Miscellaneous Menu
Effects Menu
Copy Setup Menu
User Key Copy Setup Menu
Status Menu
PIP Adjustment Menu
Key Menu
Crop Menu
Source Adjustment Menus
Background Input Setup Menu
Frame Grab Menu
DSK Menus
Note
Softkey labels on the menus are shown in bold upper and
lowercase letters between brackets.
S Press {BORDR} to …
Note
Once you have reviewed all of the sections in this chapter,
please continue with Chapter 6, “System Setup” on
page 239.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
135
5. Menu Orientation
Global Rules
däçÄ~ä=oìäÉë
The following global rules apply to all menus:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Brackets — parameters and values displayed between brackets (e.g., [525])
cannot be changed.
ID “All” — For widescreen destinations, when the value “All” is shown for the ID
parameter, it represents the lowest numbered ID in the destination, as configured
(typically, number 1).
Alphanumeric Keypad — On the Controller LC, the Alphanumeric Keypad can
be used globally for certain numeric functions. In Chapter 7, refer to the “Using
the Alphanumeric Keypad” section on page 288 for detailed instructions.
PS/2 Keyboard — On both Controllers, a standard PS/2 style keyboards can be
used globally for numeric entry and “naming” of certain functions. In Chapter 7,
refer to the “Using the PS/2 Keyboard” section on page 289 for details.
Press {HOME} to return to the Home Menu.
Press {BACK} to return to the menu from which you accessed the current menu.
Note
136
The {HOME} and {BACK} buttons will not be explained again
in this chapter.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Home Menu
eçãÉ=jÉåì
The figure below illustrates the Home Menu (on the Controller LC):
ENCORE CONTROLLER
INPUT
OUTPUT
SYSTEM
MISC
PRESETS
EFFECTS
SEQS
USER
KEYS
MACHINE
CONTROL
Figure 5-1. Home Menu, Controller LC
The Home Menu is the system’s top level menu. To access a menu, press the desired
button on the Touch Screen or in the System Keypad. You can return to the Home Menu
by pressing the {HOME} softkey, which appears in the top left position of almost all menus.
Note
The USER KEYS and MACHINE CONTROL buttons are not
available on the Controller SC’s Home Menu.
The following menus can be accessed from the Home Menu:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press INPUT to access the Input Menu. Refer to the “Input Menu” section on
page 138 for details.
Press OUTPUT to access the Output Menu. Refer to the “Output Menu” section
on page 148 for details.
Press SYSTEM to access the System Menu. Refer to the “System Menu”
section on page 156 for details.
Press MISC to access the Miscellaneous Menu. Refer to the “Miscellaneous
Menu” section on page 179 for details.
Press PRESETS to access the Preset Recall Options Menu. In Chapter 4, refer
to the “System Keypad” section on page 107 for Preset button details.
Press EFFECTS to access the Effects Menu. Refer to the “Effects Menu”
section on page 190 for details.
Press USER KEYS to access the User Key Copy Setup Menu (Controller LC
only). See the “User Key Copy Setup Menu” section on page 192 for details.
The SEQS and MACHINE CONTROL menus are currently not implemented.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
137
5. Menu Orientation
Input Menu
fåéìí=jÉåì
The following topics are discussed in this section:
•
•
•
•
Input Menu Tree
Input Menu Description
Input Menu Functions
Input Sub Menus
fåéìí=jÉåì=qêÉÉ
The figure below illustrates the Input Menu Tree:
HOME MENU
INPUT
INPUT MENU
CFG
AR
Input
Configuration
Menu
Aspect
Ratio Menu
COLOR
BALANCE
SIZING
Destination
Input Connector
Format
Input Type
1:1 Sizing Menu
Oversample
Sizing Menu
RGB
Color Balance
Menu
Color Balance
Menu
Color Space
Sampling Mode
File Number
Mode
Clock Phase
Right Edge
Red Contrast
Contrast
File Name
Ratio
H Total
Left Edge
Red Brightness
Brightness
Delete Applies
H Active
Top Edge
Grn Contrast
SAVE
Gamma
Input Sync Type
SAVE
Pulldown Compensation
Sync Slice
H Position
V Active
DELETE
Bottom Edge
Grn Brightness
SAVE
Blue Brightness
FORCE
ACQUIRE
RESET ALL
V Total
V Position
Sharpness
Saturation
Hue
RESET ALL
Blue Contrast
SAVE
SAVE
SAVE
HOME
FORCE
ACQUIRE
SAVE
APPLY
FORMAT
FORCE
ACQUIRE
Figure 5-2. Input Menu Tree
All functions and sub menus are discussed in the following sections.
138
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Input Menu
fåéìí=jÉåì=aÉëÅêáéíáçå
The figure below illustrates the Input Menu:
INPUT MENU
H
O
M
E
SRC_1
Destination
1
Input Connector
HD-15
N
A
V
Format NTSC <480i>
C
F
G
Input Type
YPbPr
Color Space
A
R
S
A
V
E
[ SMPTE ]
Sampling Mode
[ 1:1 ]
Contrast < % >
100.0
Brightness < % >
100.0
Gamma
APPLY
FORMAT
A
D
J
1.0
SIZING
COLOR
BALANCE
FORCE
ACQUIRE
Figure 5-3. Input Menu (sample)
The Input Menu is used to adjust all parameters relating to both dedicated and routed
inputs, including the physical sources connected to the Processor. The menu enables you
to set all configuration options for the selected input.
To access the menu:
•
•
•
Press a layer button in the Layer Control Section (the button blinks).
Select an input on the Source Selection Bus (the button blinks).
Press INPUT on the Home Menu, or press Input in the Keypad Section.
Note
The menu cannot be accessed without a selected layer. An
error message will be shown.
The currently selected input appears in the menu’s upper right corner. The menu tracks the
selected input, thus, if you switch inputs on the Source Selection Bus, the menu is
immediately re-assigned to the new input.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
139
5. Menu Orientation
Input Menu
fåéìí=jÉåì=cìåÅíáçåë
The following Input Menu functions are provided:
•
•
Destination — indicates the destination on which you are currently working (as
selected on the Destination Bus). This field is for reference only, and cannot be
adjusted on this menu.
Input Connector — selects the physical connector to which the input is
connected on the M/E, either HD-15, DVI or BNC.
Note
•
The choice of available formats varies depending on the
selected connector. For example, when BNC is selected,
only Standard Definition and High Definition resolutions
can be selected.
Format — this line performs two functions:
~
~
Displays the resolution that is automatically determined by the FORCE
ACQUIRE function.
Enables you to manually set the resolution of the incoming source. Once
the format is selected, press {APPLY FORMAT} to accept.
In Appendix A, refer to the “Input and Output Resolutions“section on page 352
for details on all available resolutions.
Selecting a format manually automatically defaults the Input
Type and Color Space. In some cases, the Input Type
and Color Space cannot be changed due to the resolution.
Note
•
Input Type — sets the type of input connected to the M/E. Available choices
change depending on the selected Format, and the choice affects the Color
Space selection. Input types include:
~
~
~
~
~
~
•
•
Composite/S-Vid
HD SDI
SDI
DVI Digital
Sampling Mode — sets the sampling mode for the selected input.
~
When 1:1 Sampling is selected, the system provides pixel-for-pixel
sampling, and generally better image quality.
When Oversample is selected, the system performs multiple samples
for every pixel, with a resulting “softer” image.
Contrast — sets the input’s contrast.
~
140
YPbPr
Color Space — sets the input’s color space, either SMPTE or RGB. The system
automatically sets the Color Space based on the selected Format and/or Input
Connector and Input Type — but in some cases, color space can be changed.
~
•
RGB
Adjustment range: 75% to 125%
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Input Menu
•
Brightness — sets the input’s brightness.
~
•
Gamma — sets the input gamma, enabling you to match the source’s gamma.
~
•
•
Adjustment range: 1.0 to 3.0
Input Sync Type — sets the type of sync used by the source. Choices include:
~
~
~
~
•
Adjustment range: 75% to 125%
H/V
CSync (composite sync)
SOG (sync on green)
Auto
Pulldown Compensation — (On/Off) This function is applicable only for
standard video (component, s-video, composite) inputs. The default mode is off.
The feature should be turned on to process video derived from film material.
Sync Slice <mv> — This function selects the sync comparator threshold for
RGsB (RGB with Sync on Green) or YPbPr analog component video sources.
~
Adjustment range: from 20mV to 280mV, adjustable in steps of 10mV.
The default value is 160mV.
When Encore Presentation System detects Macrovision® copy protection on the
incoming YPbPr NTSC/PAL video, the Sync Slice value is repositioned to 60mV to
account for the reduced amplitude sync pulse.
Note
•
Sharpness — sets the input’s sharpness.
~
•
•
•
The default Sync Slice level has been optimized for virtually
all sources that will be encountered and should rarely, if ever,
require adjustment. However, you can adjust the level to
improve sync detection and synchronization in cases of
extremely noisy RGsB or YPbPr video signals.
Adjustment range: -10 (very smooth) to 10 (very sharp).
Press {CFG} to display the Input Configuration Menu. Refer to the “Input
Configuration Menu” section on page 143 for details.
Press {AR} to display the Aspect Ratio Menu. Refer to the “Aspect Ratio Menu”
section on page 144 for details.
Press {SAVE} to save the input in the designated input file. Using an automatic
“copy down” function, the saved file will be transferred to all active destinations.
Note
Every sub menu under the Input Menu includes a {SAVE}
button. This enables you to save the input at any point in the
adjustment process, regardless of your location within the
menu tree. The “save” uses the information selected on the
Input Configuration Menu.
Note
While in the Input Menu or any of its sub-menus, the SAVE
button in the System Keypad also saves the input
configuration.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
141
5. Menu Orientation
Input Menu
•
•
•
•
Press {APPLY FORMAT} to “accept” a manually selected input format. In
Appendix A, refer to the “Input and Output Resolutions” section on page 352 for
details on all available resolutions.
Press {SIZING} to display the Sizing Menu. Refer to the “Sizing Menu” section
on page 145 for details.
Press {COLOR BALANCE} to display the Color Balance Menu. Refer to the
“Color Balance Menu” section on page 147 for details.
Press {FORCE ACQUIRE} to force the system to perform the optimum image
setup. Use this feature as a good starting point for setup.
Note
142
FORCE ACQUIRE only works on the selected Input
Connector. Be sure to select the correct connector type
before issuing the FORCE ACQUIRE command.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Input Menu
fåéìí=pìÄ=jÉåìë
The following sub menus can be accessed from the Input Menu:
•
•
•
•
Input Configuration Menu
Aspect Ratio Menu
Sizing Menu
Color Balance Menu
fåéìí=`çåÑáÖìê~íáçå=jÉåì
From the Input Menu, press {CFG} to display the Input Configuration Menu.
INPUT CONFIGURATION
B
A
C
K
File Number
SRC_1
1
File Name
IFILE_001
Delete Applies To:
N
A
V
Dest 1
A
D
J
SAVE
DELETE
Figure 5-4. Input Configuration Menu (sample)
Each input has an associated file that stores all input parameters and settings. Each time
an input is selected on the Source Selection Bus, its associated file is recalled in the
instant before it appears on Preview.
The Input Configuration Menu enables you to save or delete the input’s associated file —
which guarantees that the exact parameters you set are those that are used on air.
The following functions are provided:
•
•
•
•
•
File Number — sets the file number into which data is stored. In the current
version, the file number defaults to the input number and cannot be changed.
File Name — sets the alphanumeric file name. In the current version, the file
name automatically defaults to the input name and cannot be changed.
Delete Applies To — because inputs may be set up differently depending upon
the destination, this parameter enables you to identify the destination from which
you want to delete the associated file.
Press {SAVE} to save the selected input in the designated input file.
Press {DELETE} to delete the selected input file from the designated destination.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
143
5. Menu Orientation
Input Menu
^ëéÉÅí=o~íáç=jÉåì
From the Input Menu, press {ASPECT RATIO} to display the Aspect Ratio Menu.
ASPECT RATIO
B
A
C
K
SRC_1
Mode
Custom
Ratio
1.118
N
A
V
A
D
J
S
A
V
E
Figure 5-5. Aspect Ratio Menu (sample)
The Aspect Ratio Menu enables you to change the image’s aspect ratio to pre-defined
configurations, or enter a “custom” configuration if desired.
•
•
144
Mode — select 16:9, 5:4, 4:3, 3:2, 1:1 or Custom aspect ratios.
Ratio — when Custom is selected in the Mode field, use the ADJ knob to enter a
custom aspect ratio. The field is hidden when pre-defined ratios are selected.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Input Menu
páòáåÖ=jÉåì
From the Input Menu, press {SIZING} to display one of two “context sensitive” Sizing
Menus — they change depending on the Sampling Mode selected on the Input Menu.
•
•
If 1:1 Sampling is selected, the 1:1 Sizing Menu appears.
If Oversample is selected, the Oversample Sizing Menu appears.
Each menu and function is described below.
1:1 Sizing Menu
The figure below illustrates the 1:1 Sizing Menu.
Note
The 1:1 Sizing Menu can also be accessed from the BG
Input Setup Menu, if “Analog” is the background type.
1:1 SIZING
B
A
C
K
SRC_1
Clock Phase
0
H Total
800
H Active
640
H Position
116
V Total
[ 525 ]
V Active
N
A
V
A
D
J
475
V Position
37
S
A
V
E
FORCE
ACQUIRE
Figure 5-6. 1:1 Sizing Menu (sample)
•
•
ID — this field appears only when the menu is accessed via the BG Input Setup
Menu, when “Analog” is selected as the input type. The field displays the ID(s) of
the selected destination’s associated Video Processor.
Clock Phase — sets the system’s A/D converter, allowing you to select where
pixels are sampled (ideally, on the pixel’s peak).
~
Adjustment range: -16 to 15
For optimum visual results when adjusting high-resolution sources, project a burst
test pattern and adjust the sampling for the minimum noise. Refer to the “Test
Pattern Menu” section on page 153 for information on test patterns.
•
H Total — sets the total pixel count per line.
Note
This field is not adjustable for digital sources, including digital
signals on the DVI and BNC input connectors. This field is
not adjustable for NTSC and PAL sources, regardless of
connection type.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
145
5. Menu Orientation
Input Menu
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
H Active — sets the width of the active area.
H Position — sets the start of the active area’s horizontal offset from H sync.
V Total — fixed value which cannot be adjusted.
V Active — sets the number of vertical lines in the image.
V Position — sets the start of the active area’s vertical offset from V sync.
Press {SAVE} to save the selected input in the designated input file.
Press {FORCE ACQUIRE} to force the system to perform the optimum image
setup. After the Force Acquire function is performed, the system remains on the
1:1 Sizing Menu.
Note
If you switch to another input and there is no valid input video,
the settings are not applicable and N/A is displayed.
Oversample Sizing Menu
The figure below illustrates the Oversample Sizing Menu.
OVERSAMPLE SIZING
B
A
C
K
SRC_1
Right Edge
4062
Left Edge
606
Top Edge
36
Bottom Edge
N
A
V
519
A
D
J
S
A
V
E
FORCE
ACQUIRE
Figure 5-7. Oversample Sizing Menu (sample)
With Oversample enabled, four timing parameters are provided that enable you to adjust
the image to properly fit the image’s raster box.
•
•
•
Select and adjust Right Edge, Left Edge, Top Edge or Bottom Edge as
required, to fit the image precisely in its raster box.
Press {SAVE} to save the selected input in the designated input file.
Press {FORCE ACQUIRE} to force the system to perform the optimum image
setup. After the Force Acquire function is performed, the system remains on the
Oversample Sizing Menu.
Note
146
If you switch to another input and there is no valid input video,
the settings are not applicable and N/A is displayed.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Input Menu
`çäçê=_~ä~åÅÉ=jÉåì
From the Input Menu, press {COLOR BALANCE} to display the Color Balance Menu.
Note
The Color Balance Menu can also be accessed from the BG
Input Setup Menu, if “Analog” is the selected background.
RGB COLOR BALANCE
B
A
C
K
SRC_1
Red Contrast < % >
0.0
Red Brightness < % >
0.0
Grn Contrast < % >
0.0
Grn Brightness < % >
0.0
Blue Contrast < % >
0.0
Blue Brightness < % >
0.0
N
A
V
A
D
J
S
A
V
E
RESET
ALL
Figure 5-8. Color Balance Menu (sample)
The Color Balance Menu changes depending on the selected Input Type.
•
•
ID — this field appears only when the menu is accessed via the BG Input Setup
Menu, when “Analog” is selected as the input type. The field displays the ID(s) of
the selected destination’s associated Video Processor.
When RGB sources are selected, the Color Balance Menu provides individual
contrast and brightness adjustments for red, green and blue.
~
•
When Composite, S-Video or YPbPr is selected, adjust Saturation and Hue:
~
~
Note
•
•
Adjustment range: -25% to +25%
Adjustment range (Saturation): 75% to 125%
Adjustment range (Hue): -90.0 to 90.0, in degrees
When the Input Type is YPbPr, the Hue field reads N/A
because Hue does not apply to this type of source.
Press {SAVE} to save the selected input in the designated input file.
Press {RESET ALL} to return all parameters to 0 (zero).
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
147
5. Menu Orientation
Output Menu
lìíéìí=jÉåì
The following topics are discussed in this section:
•
•
•
•
Output Menu Tree
Output Menu Description
Output Menu Functions
Output Sub Menus
lìíéìí=jÉåì=qêÉÉ
The figure below illustrates the Output Menu Tree:
HOME MENU
OUTPUT
OUTPUT MENU
GLCK
SETTINGS
TEST
PATTERN
WIDE
SCREEN
Genlock
Menu
Settings
Menu
Test Pattern
Menu
Wide Screen
Settings Menu
Destination
Format
Color Space
HOME
APPLY
FORMAT
Source
Output Monitor
Output Monitor
Total Projectors
Type
Sync Out
Mode
Total H Res
SOG
Type
Total V Res
Gamma
Raster Box
Background Frmt
Raster Box Size
Alignment Pattern
Marker Mode
Overlap Width
Alignment Pattern
Data Doubling
Justification
Feather Mode
Feather Gamma
Figure 5-9. Output Menu Tree
All functions and sub menus are discussed in the following sections.
148
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Output Menu
lìíéìí=jÉåì=aÉëÅêáéíáçå
The figure below illustrates the Output Menu:
OUTPUT MENU
H
O
M
E
Destination
Format
1
1024x768 @ 59.94
Color Space
N
A
V
RGB
A
D
J
Press SELECT FORMAT to select
the output resolution.
DVI EDID format can be adjusted
G
L
C
K
to match the output format
in the MISC > EDID menu.
APPLY
FORMAT
SETTINGS
TEST
PATTERN
WIDE
SCREEN
Figure 5-10. Output Menu (sample)
The Output Menu enables you to configure Video Processor and ScreenPRO-II outputs,
including the ability to set wide screen parameters and display test patterns.
To access the menu:
•
•
Select a destination on the Destination Bus.
Press OUTPUT on the Home Menu, or press Output in the Keypad Section.
The menu cannot be accessed unless a destination is selected. The currently selected
destination is shown in the menu’s upper right corner. The menu tracks the destination,
thus, if you switch destinations, the menu is immediately re-assigned.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
149
5. Menu Orientation
Output Menu
lìíéìí=jÉåì=cìåÅíáçåë
The following Output Menu functions are provided:
•
Destination — indicates the destination on which you are currently working (as
selected on the Destination Bus). If multiple destinations are active, you can
select one of them using this field.
Note
•
A selected Video Processor destination can be configured as
a single screen or multiple screens (in a wide screen
application). In this situation, all changes to the Output
Menu affect all Processors in a wide screen definition.
ScreenPRO-II destinations are single screen.
Format — sets the resolution and frame rate at which you want to drive your
projector(s). To minimize synchronization problems, select a frame rate that is
consistent with your input sources.
S If you are using 59.94 NTSC video inputs, run the output at the same rate in
order to reduce jutter artifacts.
After selecting a format, press {APPLY FORMAT} to accept the selection. In
Appendix A, refer to the “Input and Output Resolutions” section on page 352 for
details on all available resolutions.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Color Space — sets the output’s color space, either RGB or YPbPr — per the
specifics of your projector.
Press {GLCK} to display the Genlock Menu. Refer to the “Genlock Menu”
section on page 151 for details.
Press {APPLY FORMAT} to accept a selected output format. In Appendix A, refer
to the “Input and Output Resolutions” section on page 352 for details on all
available resolutions.
Press {SETTINGS} to display the Settings Menu. Refer to the “Settings Menu”
section on page 152 for details.
Press {TEST PATTERN} to display the Test Pattern Menu. Refer to the “Test
Pattern Menu” section on page 153 for details.
Press {WIDE SCREEN} to display the Wide Screen Menu. Refer to the “Wide
Screen Settings Menu” section on page 154 for details.
lìíéìí=pìÄ=jÉåìë
The following sub menus can be accessed from the Output Menu:
•
•
•
•
150
Genlock Menu
Settings Menu
Test Pattern Menu
Wide Screen Settings Menu
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Output Menu
dÉåäçÅâ=jÉåì
From the Output Menu, press {GLCK} to display the Genlock Menu.
GENLOCK
B
A
C
K
Source
Black Burst
[ V Lock ]
Type
N
A
V
A
D
J
Figure 5-11. Genlock Menu (sample)
The Genlock Menu tells the Video Processor which type of analog genlock signal is
connected to the Processor’s Genlock connector.
•
•
Source — sets the genlock source, either Black Burst, CSync or None.
Type — displays the type of genlock provided:
~
~
~
When Source = None, Type = [ Free-Run ]
When Source = Black Burst, Type = [ V Lock ]
When Source = CSync, Type = [ V Lock ]
Please note:
•
•
•
•
•
PAL or NTSC black burst or composite sync signals are recommended.
In wide screen applications, all Processors must be locked together. If you
provide genlock to the first Processor in your configuration, genlock is
automatically distributed to the other Processors via Program Link connections.
If you do not use genlock in a wide screen application, Encore automatically
makes the first Processor in your configuration the master.
In single screen applications, each Processor requires its own genlock signal.
Genlock is highly recommended in configurations that utilize camera sources.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
151
5. Menu Orientation
Output Menu
pÉííáåÖë=jÉåì
From the Output Menu, press {SETTINGS} to display the Settings Menu.
SETTINGS
B
A
C
K
Output Monitor
All
-H-V
Sync Out
SOG / Y
Off
Gamma
1.0
Raster Box Size
3
N
A
V
A
D
J
Figure 5-12. Settings Menu (sample)
The Settings Menu sets sync parameters for your system’s monitors and projectors.
•
•
•
•
•
Output Monitor — selects the monitor(s) that are affected by the sync settings,
either All, Program 1, Program 2 or Preview.
Sync Out — sets the desired sync value. Choose between +H+V, -H-V, +H-V, H+V or CSync.
SOG / Y — selects a specific “sync on green” signal. Choose between Off,
Standard or Tri-Level (for certain HD devices).
Gamma — sets the output gamma to match that of your projector(s).
Raster Box Size — sets the size of the raster box that appears around PIPs and
Keys.
~
•
Flicker Filter — this option only appears when an interlaced output format is
selected (e.g., 1920x1080i @ 60).
~
152
Adjustment range (in pixels): 0 to 8
Adjustment range: OFF (no reduction) or 1 (minimum reduction)
through 20 (maximum reduction).
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Output Menu
qÉëí=m~ííÉêå=jÉåì
From the Output Menu, press {TEST PATTERN} to display the Test Pattern Menu.
TEST PATTERN
B
A
C
K
Output Monitor
All
Mode
ON
Type
Burst
Raster Box
On
Alignment Test Pattern
Off
N
A
V
A
D
J
Figure 5-13. Test Pattern Menu (sample)
The Test Pattern Menu enables you to display test patterns for projector alignment.
•
•
•
•
Output Monitor — selects the monitor(s) that are affected by the test pattern
settings, either All, Program 1, Program 2 or Preview.
Mode — enables you to turn test patterns on or off.
Type — sets the test pattern. Choose between H Ramp, V Ramp, 100% Color
Bars, 16x16 Grid, 32x32 Grid, Burst, 75% Color Bars, 50% Gray, Gray Steps
1, Gray Steps 2, White, Black, Red, Green and Blue.
Raster Box — when enabled, displays a raster box defined by the exact outer
edges of the selected output resolution.
S If the output is set to 1024 x 768, the raster box will encapsulate that
exact format.
Please note:
~
~
•
The Burst test pattern is the only pattern that is smaller than the selected
output resolution. When the Raster Box is enabled, the Burst pattern
will appear within its boundaries.
The Raster Box can be enabled when the test pattern is Off.
Alignment Test Pattern — this field appears in wide screen mode only. It
enables you to turn the alignment test pattern on or off from this menu (in addition
to the Wide Screen Settings Menu).
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
153
5. Menu Orientation
Output Menu
táÇÉ=pÅêÉÉå=pÉííáåÖë=jÉåì
From the Output Menu, press {WIDE SCREEN} to display the Wide Screen Settings
Menu.
WIDE SCREEN SETTINGS
B
A
C
K
Total Projectors
[2]
Total H Res
1808
Total V Res
[ 768 ]
Background Format
N
A
V
Edge-Butted
Marker Mode
On
Overlap Width
240
Alignment Test Pattern
Off
Data Doubling
On
Justification
A
D
J
Center
Figure 5-14. Wide Screen Settings Menu (sample)
The Wide Screen Settings Menu provides tools for wide screen setup and adjustment.
Note that the {WIDE SCREEN} softkey only appears when the destination is configured as
a wide screen. Refer to the “Destination Setup Menu” section on page 166 for details.
The following functions are provided:
•
•
Total Projectors — indicates the total number of Video Processors as defined in
the wide screen configuration. This field is for information only.
Total H Res — sets the total number of horizontal pixels in the overall wide screen
display. The formula is:
# screens * horizontal output resolution (overlap width * (# screens - 1))
S If two screens are used, each with an output resolution of 1024 x 768 and an
overlap of 200 pixels, the Total H Res is:
2 * 1024 - (200 * 1) = 1848
As you adjust the Total H Res, the Overlap Width value tracks and the wide
screen markers adjust accordingly.
•
•
Total V Res — displays the vertical resolution. This field is fixed.
Background Format — selects the method by which your background graphics
were originally produced:
~
~
154
Edge-butted — choose this option if your background graphics were
produced with no pre-data doubling (e.g., typically from a multi-head
graphics card).
Overlapped — choose this option if your backgrounds were produced
using pre-data doubling (e.g., from a Dataton® Watchout system).
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Output Menu
•
•
•
•
•
Marker Mode — enables and disables the wide screen markers, to show the
boundaries of active data. In Chapter 7, refer to the “Wide Screen Markers”
section on page 283 for details.
Overlap Width — sets the overlap (in pixels) between projectors. As you adjust,
the Total H Res value tracks and the wide screen markers adjust accordingly.
Alignment Test Pattern — enables or disables the test pattern used for
performing projector lens shift and registration adjustments.
Data Doubling — enables or disables data doubling. Typically, the function is
only disabled when unscaled background sources are pre-data doubled. In
Chapter 3, refer to the “Overview of Edge-Blending Technology” section on
page 89 for more information.
Justification — sets the desired wide screen justification, either Center or Left.
Once set, wide screen markers adjust accordingly.
In the Feathering section:
•
•
Mode — enables or disables edge feathering.
Gamma — sets gamma for the feathered regions.
~
Note
Adjustment range: 1.0 to 5.0
Barco offers the Configurator application to assist with wide
screen setup.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
155
5. Menu Orientation
System Menu
póëíÉã=jÉåì
The following topics are discussed in this section:
•
•
•
System Menu Tree
System Menu Description
System Sub Menus
póëíÉã=jÉåì=qêÉÉ
The figure below illustrates the System Menu Tree:
HOME MENU
SYSTEM
SYSTEM MENU
RESET
SW
VER
DIAG
DEST
SETUP
System Reset
Menu
Software
Version Menu
Diagnostics
Setup Menu
Destination
Setup Menu
Modify Layers on PGM
Tally Mode
HOME
Device
Controller Ver
Test LED Module
Reset Option
VP Ver
Reset Rotary Enc
Reset Type
SP Ver
Destination
Type
VP to Add
LINKS
Diagnostic
VP to Remove
DOWNLOAD
CODE
TALLY
Diagnostic
REMOVE ALL
FORCE
DOWNLOAD
START
LED TEST
Diagnostic
ROTARY
ENCODER
Diagnostic
TBAR &
JOYSTICK
Diagnostic
PP Ver
AUX
SETUP
Aux Setup Menu
(Standard)
RESET
KEY
DETECT
NETWORK
SETUP
INPUT
PATCH
Source Mapping
Aux Setup Menu
(ImagePRO,
PrePRO-II)
Source Mapping
Router Name
Unit ID
REMOVE
Router Output
Analog Rtr Name
ADD
RESET
Unit Analog Input
Analog Rtr Out
SDI Rtr Name
SDI Rtr Out
Unit SDI Input
Diagnostic
DVI Rtr Name *
DVI Rtr Out *
ROUTER
SETUP
Unit DVI Input *
RESET
Network Setup
Menu
Input Source
Patch Menu
Router
Specification
Menu
Network DHCP
Source Number
Ctrlr IP
Connection Type
Name
Port
Router Input
Manufacturer
IP Range from
Tally Number
Router Type
IP Range to
ADD
PATCH
DELETE
PATCH
COMM
SETUP
OUTPUT
PATCH
* DVI not
available for
PrePRO-II Aux
Number
Ethernet Setup
Menu
RS-232 Setup
Menu
Lantronix Setup
Menu
Output Patch
Menu
# of Inputs
# of Outputs
IP Address
Baud Rate
Number
Comm Type
IP Port Number
Data Bits
Channel
DELETE
ROUTER
TEST
COMM
Parity
Baud Rate
VP Input
Stop Bits
Data Bits
Mixer Layer
Parity
VP Input Map To
ADD
NEW
NEXT
IP QUAD
TEST
COMM
Stop Bits
IP
MAC Addr
TEST
COMM
Router Output
Device ID
ADD
PATCH
DELETE
PATCH
Figure 5-15. System Menu Tree
All functions and sub menus are discussed in the following sections.
156
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
System Menu
póëíÉã=jÉåì=aÉëÅêáéíáçå
The figure below illustrates a sample System Menu:
SYSTEM MENU
H
O
M
E
Modify Layers On Program
Off
Tally Mode
Off
N
A
V
R
E
S
E
T
A
D
J
SW
V
E
R
D
I
A
G
DEST
SETUP
NETWORK
SETUP
INPUT
PATCH
ROUTER
SETUP
Figure 5-16. System Menu (sample)
To access the menu:
•
Press SYSTEM on the Home Menu, or press System in the Keypad Section.
The System Menu enables you to configure the Controller:
•
•
Modify Layers On Program — when enabled, you can change PIPs and Keys
directly on Program, without first setting up your “look” on Preview. When
disabled, Preview must be used to set up the next look. In Chapter 7, refer to the
“Modifying Layers On Program” section on page 306 for details.
Tally Mode — enables or disables the tally function.
~
~
When enabled, all eight tallies are activated, and can be triggered by
pressing a source button.
When disabled, all tallies are deactivated (but tally setups remain as
configured).
In Chapter 6, refer to the “Output Format Setup” section on page 263 for tally
setup details. In Chapter 7, refer to the “Working with Tallies” section on
page 328 for tally operating instructions.
•
Press {RESET} to display the System Reset Menu. Refer to the “System Reset
Menu” section on page 159 for details.
•
Press {SW VER} to display the Software Version Menu. Refer to the “Software
Version Menu” section on page 160 for details.
•
Press {DIAG} to display the Diagnostics Setup Menu. Refer to the
“Diagnostics Setup Menu” section on page 161 for details.
•
Press {DEST SETUP} to display the Destination Setup Menu. Refer to the
“Destination Setup Menu” section on page 166 for details.
•
Press {NETWORK SETUP} to display the Network Setup Menu. Refer to the
“Network Setup Menu” section on page 171 for details.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
157
5. Menu Orientation
System Menu
•
Press {INPUT PATCH} to display the Input Source Patch Menu. Refer to the
“Input Source Patch Menu” section on page 172 for details.
•
Press {ROUTER SETUP} to display the Router Specification Menu. Refer to
the “Router Specification Menu“section on page 174 for details.
póëíÉã=pìÄ=jÉåìë
The following sub menus can be accessed from the System Menu:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
158
System Reset Menu
Software Version Menu
Diagnostics Setup Menu
Destination Setup Menu
Network Setup Menu
Input Source Patch Menu
Router Specification Menu
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
System Menu
póëíÉã=oÉëÉí=jÉåì
From the System Menu, press {RESET} to display the System Reset Menu:
SYSTEM RESET
B
A
C
K
Device
CTRLR + VP + SP
Reset Option
Active Dests
Reset Type
N
A
V
SOFT
A
D
J
RESET
Figure 5-17. System Reset Menu (sample)
The Reset Menu enables you to perform various system reset functions. The following
functions are provided:
•
Device — selects which device(s) to reset. Choose between CTRLR+VP+SP,
CONTROLLER, VP or SP.
Note
•
•
•
CTRLR = Controller
VP = Video Processor
SP = ScreenPRO-II
Reset Option — for the selected device(s), chooses the subset that you wish to
reset. Choose between All VPs and SPs, All Detected VPs, All Detected SPs,
or Active Dests.
Reset Type — selects the type of reset that you wish to perform. Choose between
SOFT or FACTORY. Note that selecting SOFT will not delete any user defined
configurations, while FACTORY deletes all user configurations.
Press {RESET} to perform the selected reset operation. When the confirmation
screen appears:
~
~
Press {YES} to start the procedure.
Press {NO} to cancel the procedure.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
159
5. Menu Orientation
System Menu
pçÑíï~êÉ=sÉêëáçå=jÉåì
From the System Menu, press {SW VER} to display the Software Version Menu.
SOFTWARE VERSION
B
A
C
K
Controller
1.10
VP
1:
1.10
VP
2:
1.10
VP
3:
1.10
VP
4:
1.10
SP
5:
1.10
N
A
V
A
D
J
All software in device(s) match.
FORCE
DOWNLOAD
Figure 5-18. Software Version Menu (sample)
The Software Version Menu displays the software versions for all connected Video
Processors and ScreenPRO-IIs. The following functions are provided:
•
•
•
•
Controller — displays the Controller’s software version.
VP — these lines display each Video Processor’s software version. One line is
shown for each active destination.
SP — these lines display each ScreenPRO-II’s software version. One line is
shown for each active destination.
In the lower portion of the menu, the system actively compares all software
versions to that of the Controller:
~
~
•
•
If a mismatch is present, the display indicates “Software version
mismatch!,” and the {DOWNLOAD CODE} label appears.
Press {DOWNLOAD CODE} to begin the software download process,
downloading code from the Controller to only those “mismatched” units. The
entire process takes several minutes to complete.
Press {FORCE DOWNLOAD} to download code to all connected devices,
typically for troubleshooting purposes, or to simply guarantee identical code in
your entire system. This process also takes several minutes to complete.
Note
160
If all software versions match the Controller’s version, the display
indicates “All Software in device(s) match”
PG UP and PG DN softkeys will appear when the device list
gets too long to display on one page.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
System Menu
aá~ÖåçëíáÅë=pÉíìé=jÉåì
From the System Menu, press {DIAG} to display the Diagnostics Setup Menu.
DIAGNOSTICS SETUP
B
A
C
K
Test LED Module
Top
Reset Rotary Encoders
Yes
N
A
V
A
D
J
L
I
N
K
S
T
A
L
L
Y
START
LED TEST
ROTARY
ENCODER
TBAR &
JOYSTICK
KEY
DETECT
Figure 5-19. Diagnostics Setup Menu (sample)
The Diagnostics Setup Menu enables you to perform a variety of diagnostic tests on the
Controller. The following functions are provided:
•
Test LED Module — selects the region of the Controller that you wish to test.
~
~
•
•
Controller SC: select All, Bottom or Top.
Controller LC: select Left, Right, Middle or Top.
Reset Rotary Encoders — (Yes/No) determines whether or not you wish to reset
the rotary encoder values when you exit the Rotary Encoder Menu.
Press {LINKS} to display the Widescreen Link Diagnostics Menu. Refer to the
“Widescreen Link Diagnostics Menu” section on page 162 for details.
•
Press {TALLY} to display the Tally Diagnostic Menu, and immediately start a test
of all eight tally relays. This procedure takes several seconds to complete. Press
{EXIT} when complete.
•
Press {START LED TEST} to begin testing the selected LED module. This
procedure takes several seconds to complete. Press {EXIT} when complete.
•
Press {ROTARY ENCODER} to display the Rotary Encoder Menu. Refer to the
“Rotary Encoder Menu” section on page 163 for details.
•
Press {TBAR & JOYSTICK} to display the TBar & Joystick Menu. Refer to the
“TBar & Joystick Menu” section on page 164 for details.
•
Press {KEY DETECT} to display the Key Detect Menu. Refer to the “Key Detect
Menu” section on page 165 for details.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
161
5. Menu Orientation
System Menu
Widescreen Link Diagnostics Menu
From the Diagnostics Setup Menu, press {LINKS} to display the Widescreen Link
Diagnostics Menu.
WIDESCREEN LINK DIAGNOSTICS
B
A
C
K
Widescreen Destination
1
Select a Widescreen Destination
and press TEST LINKS to start
A
D
J
the Diagnostic procedure.
MAKE SURE ALL CONNECTIONS ARE
MADE WITH DVI-I DUAL LINK
CABLES.
TEST
LINKS
Figure 5-20. Widescreen Link Diagnostics Menu (sample)
The Widescreen Link Diagnostics Menu enables you to test the program and source link
cables that are required for wide screen operation. This menu only appears when a
defined wide screen destination is active.
•
Press {TEST LINKS} to perform the link diagnostics. You will be asked to confirm
your selection.
Note
This test affects the Program output.
When the test is complete, Preview and Program outputs are fully restored and
the test results are displayed on the menu. If any cables fail, the complete
connection list will be shown in the display for reference when troubleshooting the
cable connections.
162
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
System Menu
Rotary Encoder Menu
From the Diagnostics Setup Menu, press {ROTARY ENCODER} to display the Rotary
Encoder Menu.
ROTARY ENCODER DIAGNOSTICS
E
X
I
T
Rotary #
RelCnt
AbsCnt
1
0
0
2
0
0
3
0
0
Figure 5-21. Rotary Encoder Menu (sample)
The Rotary Encoder Menu enables you to test the functionality of each rotary encoder,
displaying both relative and absolute counts for each.
•
Press {EXIT} to return to the Diagnostics Setup Menu.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
163
5. Menu Orientation
System Menu
TBar & Joystick Menu
From the Diagnostics Setup Menu, press {TBAR & JOYSTICK} to display the TBar &
Joystick Menu.
TBAR & JOYSTICK DIAGNOSTICS
E
X
I
T
Joystick
TBAR
X =
0
Y =
0
Z =
0
0.0
%
Figure 5-22. TBar & Joystick Menu (sample)
The TBar & Joystick Menu enables you to test the functionality of the TBar and Joystick.
The TBAR range is 0 to 100%. Joystick range: -100 to 100 on each axis.
•
164
Press {EXIT} to return to the Diagnostics Setup Menu.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
System Menu
Key Detect Menu
From the Diagnostics Setup Menu, press {KEY DETECT} to display the Key Detect
Menu.
KEY DETECTION DIAGNOSTICS
E
X
I
T
Key Label:
GROUP 2
Key Status:
Pressed
Key Scan Code:
0x25
Row=5 Col=4
Figure 5-23. Key Detect Menu (sample)
The Key Detect Menu shows you the key that is pressed, its status (pressed or released)
its scan code and its location in the row and column matrix.
•
Press {EXIT} to return to the Diagnostics Setup Menu.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
165
5. Menu Orientation
System Menu
aÉëíáå~íáçå=pÉíìé=jÉåì
From the System Menu, press {DEST SETUP} to display the Destination Setup Menu.
DESTINATION SETUP
B
A
C
K
Destination - 2 ME(s)
1
Type
Widescreen VP
VP to Add
3
VP to Remove
1
N
A
V
A
D
J
VPs assigned to Destination 1:
1, 2
REMOVE
ALL
REMOVE
ADD
Figure 5-24. Destination Setup Menu (sample)
The Destination Setup Menu enables you to define each destination. The following
functions are provided:
•
Destination — sets the destination that you want to define. This field does not
depend on the destination currently selected on the Destination Bus, but it does
correspond to the similarly numbered button on the Controller.
Once Processors have been assigned for wide screen usage, the system displays
(on the top “Destination” line) how many M/Es are installed.
Important
•
Type — sets the selected destination type. Choices include:
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
166
Encore can create wide screen configurations with Video
Processors that do not have the same number of M/Es — in
which case, the system operates at the lowest common
denominator. For example, in a system consisting of a singleM/E Processor and a three-M/E Processor, Encore will create
a single-M/E wide screen configuration.
Single Screen VP
Wide Screen VP
Single Screen VP Stack
Wide Screen VP Stack
Single Screen SP
Aux
ImagePRO Aux
PrePRO-II Aux
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
System Menu
Note
•
•
•
•
When an Aux, ImagePRO Aux or PrePRO-II Aux destination
is selected, the {AUX SETUP} button appears, which enables
you to set the parameters of the Aux destination. Refer to the
“Aux Setup Menu” section on page 168 for details.
VP (SP) to Add — lists all available Processors or ScreenPRO-IIs that can be
assigned to the destination. If a Processor is currently assigned to another
destination, it will not appear in the list. Processors are identified by ID.
VP (SP) to Remove — lists all assigned Processors or ScreenPRO-IIs that can
be removed from the destination. Processors are identified by ID.
Routing Mode — if Single Screen SP is selected on the “Type” line, the Routing
Mode line appears which enables you to set the ScreenPRO-II’s routing mode —
either Internal or External. This function instructs the system how sources are
used on the assigned ScreenPRO-II.
At the bottom of the menu, the Status section dynamically lists the Processor IDs
assigned to the current destination.
•
Press {ADD} to add the selected Processor or ScreenPRO-II (on the VP [SP] to
Add line) to the current destination configuration.
•
Press {REMOVE} to remove the selected Processor or ScreenPRO-II (on the VP
[SP] to Remove line) from the current destination configuration.
•
Press {REMOVE ALL} to remove all Processors from the current destination.
Note
If you have defined a destination as a Wide Screen,
preliminary wide screen setup information will be sent to the
Video Processors when you exit this menu.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
167
5. Menu Orientation
System Menu
Aux Setup Menu
From the Destination Setup Menu, select an Aux destination type, then press {AUX
SETUP} to display the Aux Setup Menu. Please note:
•
•
•
The {AUX SETUP} button appears when an Aux, ImagePRO Aux or PrePRO-II
Aux destination is selected on the Destination Setup Menu.
The Aux Setup Menu changes, depending upon the selected type of destination.
In Chapter 1, refer to the “A Word About Destinations” section on page 26 for
examples of each Aux destination “type.”
When a standard Aux destination “type” is selected on the Destination Setup Menu, the
Aux Setup Menu appears in this form:
AUX SETUP
B
A
C
K
Source Mapping
Router Name
DEST_2
Direct Map
N
A
V
MATRIXPRO1
Router Output
7
A
D
J
RESET
Figure 5-25. Aux Setup Menu — Aux Destination (sample)
The following functions are provided:
•
•
Top Line — displays the type of Aux destination and its selected number.
Source Mapping — two selections are available:
~
~
•
•
•
168
Input Patch — maps Aux sources according to how your inputs are
patched to buttons in the console’s Source Selection section.
Direct Map — maps Aux sources according to how your inputs are
connected to the router.
Router Name — selects the router from which the Aux sources will be output.
Router Output — selects the specific router output designated as an Aux (as
assigned on the router’s Output Patch Menu).
Press {RESET} to return all fields to <UNDEFINED>.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
System Menu
When an ImagePRO Aux or PrePRO-II Aux destination “type” is selected on the
Destination Setup Menu, the Aux Setup Menu appears in this form:
AUX SETUP
B
A
C
K
Source Mapping
DEST_2
Input Patch
ImagePRO ID:
N
A
V
17
----------------------------------------ANALOG Router Name
MATRIXPRO1
ANALOG Router Output
7
ImagePRO Input:
1
A
D
J
----------------------------------------SDI Router Name
MATRIXPRO2
SDI Router Output
8
RESET
Figure 5-26. Aux Setup Menu — ImagePRO Aux Destination (sample)
The following functions are provided:
•
•
Top Line — displays the type of Aux destination and its selected number.
Source Mapping — two selections are available:
~
~
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Input Patch — maps Aux sources according to how your inputs are
patched to buttons in the console’s Source Selection section.
Direct Map — maps Aux sources according to how your inputs are
connected to the router.
ImagePRO ID (or PrePRO-II ID) — selects the ID of the ImagePRO or PrePRO-II,
to which you want to route Aux sources.
Analog Router Name — selects the router from which analog sources will be
routed to the ImagePRO or PrePRO-II.
Analog Router Output — selects the specific router output designated as Aux
(as assigned on the router’s Output Patch Menu).
ImagePRO Input (or PrePRO-II input) — selects the ImagePRO or PrePRO-II
input to which the router output is connected.
SDI Router Name — selects the router from which SDI sources will be routed to
the ImagePRO or PrePRO-II.
SDI Router Output — selects the specific router output designated as Aux (as
assigned on the router’s Output Patch Menu).
ImagePRO Input (or PrePRO-II input) — selects the ImagePRO or PrePRO-II
input to which the router output is connected.
DVI Router Name — selects the router from which DVI sources will be routed to
the ImagePRO. (Not applicable to PrePRO-II Aux destinations.)
DVI Router Output — selects the Aux router output (as assigned on the router’s
Output Patch Menu). (Not applicable to PrePRO-II Aux destinations.)
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
169
5. Menu Orientation
System Menu
•
•
ImagePRO Input — selects the ImagePRO input to which the router output is
connected. (Not applicable to PrePRO-II Aux destinations.)
Press {RESET} to return all fields to <UNDEFINED>.
Please note the following important points regarding Aux destinations:
•
For proper operation, ImagePRO and PrePRO-II devices must be connected to
Encore via Ethernet.
Note
•
•
•
•
170
Once the connection is made and verified in the Status
Menu, the next step is to define the router outputs that will be
used with the Aux unit. Once that step is done, use the
Destination Setup Menu to define the Aux Destination itself.
In Chapter 6, full setup details are provided in the “AUX
Destination Setup” section on page 259.
ImagePRO and PrePRO-II output setups must be performed locally on the units.
Only one router of each type (Analog, DVI, SDI) can be connected to ImagePRO.
Only one Analog and one SDI router can be connected to a PrePRO-II unit.
Automatic “copy down” takes place once the Aux Destination is defined and set
up, and once ImagePRO and PresentationPRO-II inputs have been configured.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
System Menu
kÉíïçêâ=pÉíìé=jÉåì
From the System Menu, press {NETWORK SETUP} to display the Network Setup Menu.
NETWORK SETUP
B
A
C
K
Network DHCP
Ctrlr IP
Port
IP Range from
to
[ Server ]
:
[ 192.168.000.01 ]
:
[ 3000 ]
N
A
V
[ 192.168.0.11 ]
[ 192.168.0.191 ]
A
D
J
Figure 5-27. Network Setup Menu (sample)
For reference only, the Network Setup Menu displays the available IP range for the
Encore system. The following information is provided:
•
•
•
•
Network DHCP — this non-selectable field confirms that the Controller is a DHCP
server, by showing the [SERVER] label.
Ctrlr IP — this non-selectable field shows the Controller’s IP address.
Port — this non-selectable field shows the Controller’s port.
IP Range from / to — these non-selectable fields show the system’s available IP
range that the server can provide.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
171
5. Menu Orientation
System Menu
fåéìí=pçìêÅÉ=m~íÅÜ=jÉåì
From the System Menu, press {INPUT PATCH} to display the Input Source Patch Menu.
INPUT SOURCE PATCH
B
A
C
K
Source Number
1
Connection Type
MATRIXPRO1
Router Input
1
Tally Number
1
N
A
V
A
D
J
Press “ADD PATCH” to log change
ADD
PATCH
DELETE
PATCH
Figure 5-28. Input Source Patch Menu (sample)
The Input Source Patch Menu enables you to associate (patch) router inputs to specific
source buttons on the Controller. The menu also enables you to assign tallies, and select
“direct” connections to the Processors (such as those from computers).
Important
The fields that are shown on the Input Source Patch Menu
change depending upon the selected Connection Type.
The following functions are provided:
•
•
Source Number — selects the source button on the Controller that you want to
patch. The selection ranges are 1 - 24 (Controller SC) and 1 - 64 (Controller LC).
The source is chosen with the ADJ knob — not with the source buttons.
Connection Type — determines how the selected source is connected to the
Processor — either via router, direct connection, or ScreenPRO-II:
~
~
~
~
172
Via router — choose between MATRIXPRO1, MATRIXPRO2, or a third
party router (e.g., SIERRA1, LEITCH1, etc.) as selected on the Router
Specification Menu.
Via ScreenPRO-II with internal routing — choose a ScreenPRO-II by
its ID (e.g., SP6).
Via ScreenPRO-II with external routing — choose ALL SP. This
enables all connected ScreenPRO-IIs to switch simultaneously to the
same input.
Via direct connection — choose between DIRECT ANALOG, DIRECT
DVI and DIRECT SDI.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
System Menu
•
Router Input — Applies to Router connections — selects the router input that
you wish to associate with the source. The range depends on the number of
inputs defined in the Router Specification Menu.
Note
•
ID — Applies to direct connections — this option selects the ID of the selected
Encore or ScreenPRO-II Processor.
Note
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The same router input can be chosen for different source
numbers.
If asterisks appear around an ID (e.g., * 6 *), the ID has not
been detected by the system.
SP Input — Applies to direct ScreenPRO-II connections — this option selects
a specific input connector on the ScreenPRO-II.
VP Input — Applies to direct Video Processor connections — this option
selects a specific M/E input connector on the Video Processor.
Mixer Layer — Applies to direct connections — this “information only” field
displays the mixer layer that corresponds to the specific M/E input connector.
SP Input is mapped to — Applies to direct ScreenPRO-II connections — this
“information only” field shows the current ScreenPRO-II input mapping, if present.
VP Input is mapped to — Applies to direct Video Processor connections —
this “information only” field shows the current Processor input mapping, if present.
Tally Number — Applies to all connections — this option enables you to assign
any of the eight available tallies to any input source. There are no restrictions on
tally usage. For example, inputs 8 and 23 could both map to tally 4 if desired.
Press {ADD PATCH} to confirm any change that you make. As you dial through
the choices, the status at the bottom of the menu shows if the current choice is
already in use.
Press {DELETE PATCH} to delete all input patch registers for the selected
Controller input. When pressed:
~
~
The Connection Type setting changes to “UNDEFINED”
The Router Input line is cleared.
This procedure is a good starting point if you are uncertain about specific patches.
In Chapter 6, refer to the “Output Format Setup” section on page 263 for important
information about the system’s default Input Patch Table.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
173
5. Menu Orientation
System Menu
oçìíÉê=péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçå=jÉåì
From the System Menu, press {ROUTER SETUP} to display the Router Specification
Menu.
ROUTER SPECIFICATION
B
A
C
K
Number
1
Name
[ MATRIXPRO1 ]
Manufacturer
FOLSOM
Router Type
ANALOG
Number of Inputs
16
Number of Outputs
DELETE
ROUTER
A
D
J
8
Communication Type
COMM
SETUP
N
A
V
ETHERNET
ADD
NEW
OUTPUT
PATCH
Figure 5-29. Router Specification Menu (sample)
The Router Specification Menu enables you to define input, output and communication
parameters for all connected routers and D/As.
Note
A D/A is an abbreviation for “Distribution Amplifier,” a
device which has one input and multiple outputs.
The following functions are provided:
•
•
Number — sets an arbitrary configuration number for a selected router. The
system supports up to eight router definitions. Each default router specification
has an associated OUTPUT PATCH definition.
Name — this non-selectable field shows the router’s assigned name. After a
factory reset, router number 1 defaults to [MATRIXPRO1] and router number 2
defaults to [MATRIXPRO SDI].
Note
•
•
Manufacturer — identifies the router manufacturer. Choose between FOLSOM,
EXTRON, SIERRA, LEITCH, ISIS, DVILINK and DPI. In Appendix E, refer to the
“Router Interface Notes” section on page 383 for additional details.
Router Type — identifies the type of router being used. The choices are
ANALOG, DVI, SDI, D/A ANALOG, D/A DVI and D/A SDI.
~
~
174
When a router number is undefined, [ROUTER #] appears,
and in the Number field, “EMPTY” appears.
{COMM SETUP} must be set for Analog, DVI and SDI routers.
D/As must be set up like routers. This enables you to define which D/A
outputs are patched to which specific Video Processor connectors.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
System Menu
•
•
•
Number of Inputs — identifies the number of inputs on the selected router.
Number of Outputs — identifies the number of outputs on the selected router.
Communication Type — sets the router’s communication type, either RS-232,
ETHERNET or LANTRONIX.
•
Press {COMM SETUP} to display one of three Comm Setup Menus, depending
on the selected Communication Type. Refer to the “Comm Setup Menus”
section on page 175 for details.
•
•
Press {DELETE ROUTER} to change the selected router Number to undefined.
•
Press {OUTPUT PATCH} to display the Output Patch Menu. Refer to the
“Output Patch Menu” section on page 178 for details.
Press {ADD NEW} after choosing an “EMPTY” router number to begin the
definition process — in order to create a valid router specification.
`çãã=pÉíìé=jÉåìë
Information is provided for three different Comm Setup Menus:
•
•
•
Ethernet Setup Menu
RS-232 Setup Menu
Lantronix Setup Menu
Ethernet Setup Menu
On the Router Specification Menu, when Communication Type is set to ETHERNET,
press {COMM SETUP} to display the Ethernet Setup Menu:
ETHERNET SETUP
B
A
C
K
IP Address
192.168.0.241
IP Port Number
23
N
A
V
A
D
J
TEST
COMM
NEXT
IP QUAD
Figure 5-30. Ethernet Setup Menu (sample)
The Ethernet Setup Menu enables you to set the router’s IP address and port number.
•
•
•
IP Address — sets the router’s IP address.
IP Port Number — sets the router’s IP port number, if applicable.
Press {NEXT IP QUAD} to advance to the next 3-digit set of numbers in the
address. Use the ADJ knob in the normal manner to change the digits.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
175
5. Menu Orientation
System Menu
•
Press {TEST COMM} to test communications with the defined router:
~
~
If the test is successful, a “ROUTER CONNECTED” message will
appear that includes the Router name and version.
If the test is unsuccessful, a “ROUTER FAILED” message will appear. In
this condition, re-check all connections and settings, and repeat the test.
RS-232 Setup Menu
On the Router Specification Menu, when Communication Type is set to RS-232, press
{COMM SETUP} to display the RS-232 Setup Menu:
RS232 SETUP
B
A
C
K
Baud Rate
115200
Data Bits
[8]
Parity
N
A
V
[ NONE ]
Stop Bits
[1]
A
D
J
TEST
COMM
Figure 5-31. RS-232 Setup Menu (sample)
The RS-232 Setup Menu enables you to set the router’s RS-232 baud rate only. All other
parameters are fixed.
•
•
•
•
•
Baud Rate — sets the desired baud rate (9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 38400,
57600, 115200).
Data Bits — fixed at 8.
Parity — fixed at None.
Stop Bits — fixed at 1.
Press {TEST COMM} to test communications with the defined router:
~
~
176
If the test is successful, a “ROUTER CONNECTED” message will
appear that includes the Router name and version.
If the test is unsuccessful, a “ROUTER FAILED” message will appear. In
this condition, re-check all connections and settings, and repeat the test.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
System Menu
Lantronix Setup Menu
On the Router Specification Menu, when Communication Type is set to LANTRONIX,
press {COMM SETUP} to display the Lantronix Setup Menu:
LANTRONIX SETUP
B
A
C
K
Number
< EMPTY >
Channel
[ N/A ]
Baud rate
[ N/A ]
Data bits
[ N/A ]
Stop bit
[ N/A ]
Parity
[ N/A ]
N
A
V
A
D
J
IP: N/A
MAC Addr: [ N/A ]
DISCOVER
LTRX
Figure 5-32. Lantronix Setup Menu (sample)
The Lantronix Setup Menu enables you to set parameters for multiple Lantronix Ethernetto-Serial device servers. Encore supports Lantronix models UDS100 and UDS200. The
menu will appear blank until the Lantronix device is “discovered.”
Important
•
•
•
Number — selects the number of the Lantronix device that you wish to set up.
Press {DISCOVER LTRX} to set up communications with the Lantronix device.
Channel — sets the specific Lantronix channel (1 or 2) that you wish to set up.
~
~
•
•
•
•
•
•
Prior to pressing {DISCOVER LTRX}, set up a static IP
address on the Lantronix device itself. The recommended
range is 192.168.0.191 - 192.168.0.240. Refer to the
Lantronix UDS100 or UDS200 User’s Guide for details.
The Lantronix UDS 100 can control one serial router.
The Lantronix UDS 200 can control two serial routers.
Baud Rate — sets the selected channel’s baud rate.
Data Bits — sets the selected channel’s data bits.
Stop Bit — sets the selected channel’s stop bit.
Parity — sets the selected channel’s parity.
IP — displays the IP address of the Lantronix. This parameter must be set at the
device itself.
MAC Addr — displays the hard-coded MAC address of the Lantronix.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
177
5. Menu Orientation
System Menu
lìíéìí=m~íÅÜ=jÉåì
From the Router Specification Menu, press {OUTPUT PATCH} to display the Output
Patch Menu.
MATRIXPRO1
OUTPUT PATCH
B
A
C
K
Router Output
1
Device ID
VP 1
VP Input
N
A
V
1A
Mixer Layer
[ 2A ]
A
D
J
VP Input is mapped to
MATRIXPRO1 Output 1
Set Device ID to NONE to define
the Router Output as an AUX.
ADD
PATCH
DELETE
PATCH
Figure 5-33. Output Patch Menu (sample)
After a router is chosen on the Router Specification Menu, the Output Patch Menu
enables you to associate router and D/A outputs with Video Processor IDs and inputs. This
process creates a unique “Output Patch Table” for each defined router.
The following functions are provided:
•
•
Router Output — selects the specific router output that is being patched. The
selectable range is 1 to the number of outputs defined in the Router
Specification Menu.
Device ID — selects the physical Video Processor ID to which the Router’s output
will be connected. The selectable range is 1 - 32.
Note
•
•
•
•
If asterisks appear around the Device ID (e.g., * 6 *), the ID
has not been detected by the system.
VP Input — selects the physical Processor input to which the router’s output is
being patched. Selections are 1A, 1B, 2A, 2B, 3A, and 3B.
Mixer Layer — this non-selectable field shows the Mixer Layer button (on the
Controller) that is associated with the selected Processor input.
Press {ADD PATCH} to confirm any change that you make on menu. As you dial
through patch choices, the status at the bottom of the menu shows if the current
choice is already in use. Press {ADD PATCH} to display a confirmation menu.
Press {DELETE PATCH} to delete all “Output Patch Table” registers for the
selected router output. The “Delete Patch” procedure is a good starting point if
you are uncertain about specific output patch settings.
In Chapter 6, refer to the “Router Setup” section on page 250 for important information
about the system’s default Output Patch Table.
178
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Miscellaneous Menu
jáëÅÉää~åÉçìë=jÉåì
The following topics are discussed in this section:
•
•
•
Miscellaneous Menu Tree
Miscellaneous Menu Description
Miscellaneous Sub Menus
jáëÅÉää~åÉçìë=jÉåì=qêÉÉ
The figure below illustrates the Miscellaneous Menu Tree:
HOME MENU
MISC
MISCELLANEOUS
MENU
CONSL
LOCK
Console Port
Setup Menu
Lockout Code
Menu
EDID
DEFINE
VP ID
EDID DVI Input
Format Menu
Video Processors
ID Definition
Menu
HOME
Baud Rate
CHANGE
CODE
Lockout Code
Data Bits
Change Lockout
Code Menu
Parity
Stop Bits
Destination
VP ID
Format
Assign To
Current Format
ASSIGN
PROGRAM
EDID
Enter New Code
Confirm Code
LCD
SETTINGS
USER
PREF
BACKUP
RESTORE
LCD Settings
Menu
User Preference
Menu
Backup / Restore
Menu
LCD
Black Invalid Vid
Device
Brightness
Controller Options
Contrast
VP/SP to Restore
RESET
BACKUP
LCD CAL
LCD Calibration
CHECK
CARD
Current Backup
Menu
RESTORE
Figure 5-34. Miscellaneous Menu Tree
All functions and sub menus are discussed in the following sections.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
179
5. Menu Orientation
Miscellaneous Menu
jáëÅÉää~åÉçìë=jÉåì=aÉëÅêáéíáçå
The Miscellaneous Menu enables you to access Encore functions that do not fall into
other distinct menu categories.
MISCELLANEOUS MENU
H
O
M
E
C
O
N
S
L
L
O
C
K
E
D
I
D
DEFINE
VP ID
LCD
SETTINGS
USER
PREF
BACKUP
RESTORE
Figure 5-35. Miscellaneous Menu
To access the menu:
•
Press MISC on the Home Menu, or press Misc in the Keypad Section.
The following “miscellaneous” functions are provided:
180
•
Press {CONSL} to access the Console Port Setup Menu. Refer to the “Console
Port Setup Menu” section on page 181 for details.
•
Press {LOCK} to access the Lockout Code Menu. Refer to the “Lockout Code
Menu” section on page 182 for details.
•
Press {EDID} to access the EDID DVI Input Format Menu. Refer to the “EDID
DVI Input Format Menu” section on page 183 for details.
•
Press {DEFINE VP ID} to access the Video Processors ID Definition Menu.
Refer to the “Video Processors ID Definition Menu” section on page 185.
•
Press {LCD SETTINGS} to access the LCD Settings Menu. Refer to the “LCD
Settings Menu” section on page 186 for details.
•
Press {USER PREF} to access the User Preference Menu. Refer to the “User
Preference Menu” section on page 187 for details.
•
Press {BACKUP RESTORE} to access the Backup/Restore Menu. Refer to the
“Backup/Restore Menu” section on page 188 for details.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Miscellaneous Menu
jáëÅÉää~åÉçìë=pìÄ=jÉåìë
The following sub menus can be accessed from the Miscellaneous Menu:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Console Port Setup Menu
Lockout Code Menu
EDID DVI Input Format Menu
Video Processors ID Definition Menu
LCD Settings Menu
User Preference Menu
Backup/Restore Menu
`çåëçäÉ=mçêí=pÉíìé=jÉåì
From the Miscellaneous Menu, press {CONSL} to display the Console Port Setup
Menu:
CONSOLE PORT SETUP
B
A
C
K
Baud Rate
115200
Data Bits
Parity
8
N
A
V
NONE
Stop Bits
1
A
D
J
Figure 5-36. Console Port Setup Menu (sample)
This menu enables you to verify (or change) Encore’s serial port communication settings
for the Ext Comm port. The following functions are provided:
•
•
•
•
Baud Rate — sets the port’s baud rate. Range: 2400 to 115200.
Data Bits — sets the port’s data bits. Range: 5 to 8.
Parity — sets the port’s parity: Even, Odd or None.
Stop Bits — sets the port’s stop bits: 1, 1.5 or 2.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
181
5. Menu Orientation
Miscellaneous Menu
içÅâçìí=`çÇÉ=jÉåì
From the Miscellaneous Menu, press {LOCK} to display the Lockout Code Menu:
LOCKOUT CODE
H
O
M
E
Default
Lockout Code
A
D
J
B
A
C
K
CHANGE
CODE
Figure 5-37. Lockout Code Menu (sample)
The Lockout Code Menu enables you to define a programmable lockout code, so that the
console can be locked out from unauthorized users. The following functions are provided:
•
The Lockout Code field defines which code is currently enabled.
~
~
•
Select Default to enable the system’s default lockout code: 1111
Select Custom to enable a custom lockout code, as entered on the
Change Lockout Code Menu.
Press {CHANGE CODE} to display the Change Lockout Code Menu.
CHANGE LOCKOUT CODE
Enter new code:
__ __ __ __
Confirm new code:
__ __ __ __
Enter and confirm new code
using preset keys 1 – 8.
CANCEL
Figure 5-38. Change Lockout Code Menu (sample)
182
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Miscellaneous Menu
To enter a new code (for both Controllers), use the first eight numbered buttons on
the Preset Bus, and then confirm the new code.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Enable/Disable Controller Lockout” section on page 329 for
instructions on using the Controller Panel Lockout mode.
bafa=asf=fåéìí=cçêã~í=jÉåì
From the Miscellaneous Menu, press {EDID} to display the EDID DVI Input Format
Menu:
EDID DVI Input Format
B
A
C
K
Destination
ALL
FORMAT:
1280 x 1024 @ 60
Current EDID format
1280 x 1024 @ 60
A
D
J
To change EDID for DVI inputs,
select the desired format and
select Program EDID.
PROGRAM
EDID
Figure 5-39. EDID DVI Input Format Menu (sample)
The EDID DVI Input Format Menu enables you to update the system’s preferred EDID
resolution for the DVI inputs — for the selected destination bus.
Note
This menu is designed for advanced users only. Do not
program EDID unless it is necessary.
Extended Display Identification Data (EDID) is a VESA standard data format that contains
information about a display device and its resolution, both preferred and allowed. The
system’s EDID file is stored in non-volatile memory. This file is read by an external
computer’s DVI graphic card when the computer’s DVI output is connected to Encore via
the DVI-I connector during boot-up. The Encore Video Processor must be powered on first
for the EDID information to be read.
The following functions are provided:
•
•
•
•
Destination — sets the destination on which you want to program EDID.
Format — selects the preferred DVI video format with which you want to program
the Encore Presentation System’s EDID non-volatile memory
Current — displays the current EDID video format that resides in memory.
Press {PROGRAM EDID} to program EDID with the new selected format. A
warning message will be shown.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
183
5. Menu Orientation
Miscellaneous Menu
Please note the following important points regarding EDID:
•
•
•
184
For the external computer to correctly see the EDID data, first turn on Encore
power. Then connect the DVI cable from the computer’s video card to one of
Encore’s mixer layers. Then, boot the computer.
Once EDID programming is complete, you will be prompted to power down the
external computer, power it back on again, and then ensure that the computer’s
format is set to match.
The system’s EDID PROM is not reset to any default during a factory reset. To
change the EDID, you must use the EDID DVI Input Format Menu.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Miscellaneous Menu
sáÇÉç=mêçÅÉëëçêë=fa=aÉÑáåáíáçå=jÉåì
From the Miscellaneous Menu, press {DEFINE VP ID} to display the Video Processors
ID Definition Menu:
Video Processors ID Definition
B
A
C
K
VP ID
3
Assign To
[ 19 ]
N
A
V
A
D
J
ASSIGN
Figure 5-40. Video Processors ID Definition Menu (sample)
The Video Processors ID Definition Menu enables you to redefine Video Processor IDs
using numbers 17 - 32. Please note:
•
•
•
Only Processors that are not currently defined as destinations can be re-defined.
The procedure adds 16 to the “physical” ID setting of the Processor, thus physical
ID 1 becomes “extended” ID 17, etc.
Physical digit 0 equates to logical ID 16.
ID mapping is fixed as follows:
Table 5-1. Video Processor ID Mapping
Physical ID
Extended ID
1
17
2
18
p
p
15
31
0
32
Please note:
•
•
If all video processors are currently assigned to destinations, all fields read N/A,
and the message “All processors are assigned to destinations” appears.
Once IDs have been redefined, additional Processors can be added to the
system. They will be recognized properly as IDs from the 1 - 16 range.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
185
5. Menu Orientation
Miscellaneous Menu
i`a=pÉííáåÖë=jÉåì
From the Miscellaneous Menu, press {LCD SETTINGS} to show the LCD Settings
Menu:
LCD SETTINGS
B
A
C
K
LCD
[1]
Brightness
50
Contrast
80
D
I
S
P
L
A
Y
B
R
I
T
E
RESET
LCD Cal
C
O
N
T
R
A
S
T
Figure 5-41. LCD Settings Menu (sample)
The LCD Settings Menu enables you to adjust the contrast and brightness settings for the
LCD touch screen(s). The following functions are provided:
•
•
•
•
•
186
Rotate the DISPLAY knob (Controller LC only) to select the touch screen display
that you want to adjust.
Rotate the BRITE knob to adjust brightness.
Rotate the CONTRAST knob to adjust contrast.
Press {RESET} to return settings to the factory default values.
Press {LCD CAL} to calibrate the touch screen display to your finger, or to a
stylus. Once pressed, you will be prompted to touch the center of a target three
times. At the conclusion of the procedure, the display is calibrated and the system
returns to the Home Menu.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Miscellaneous Menu
rëÉê=mêÉÑÉêÉåÅÉ=jÉåì
From the Miscellaneous Menu, press {USER PREF} to display the User Preference
Menu:
USER PREFERENCE MENU
B
A
C
K
Black Invalid Video
ON
N
A
V
A
D
J
Figure 5-42. User Preference Menu (sample)
The User Preference Menu enables you to set a variety of user preference parameters.
The following functions are provided:
•
Black Invalid Video — selects the method by which the scaler “loading”
procedure is shown on Preview, when the user changes inputs:
~
~
ON — shows black when scalers are loaded. In addition, black is shown
when a background channel (BG) becomes invalid, and the DSK will be
turned off when source video becomes invalid.
OFF — shows the full scaler loading procedure, which can temporarily
include non-sync and non-stable video.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Setting User Preferences” section on page 286 for instructions.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
187
5. Menu Orientation
Miscellaneous Menu
_~ÅâìéLoÉëíçêÉ=jÉåì
From the Miscellaneous Menu, press {BACKUP RESTORE} to display the Backup/
Restore Menu:
BACKUP / RESTORE
H
O
M
E
Device
Ctrlr+VP+SP
Controller Options
All
VP / SP To Restore
All
N
A
V
B
A
C
K
A
D
J
Select option to Backup /
Restore to or from the
MMC card.
BACKUP
CHECK
CARD
RESTORE
Figure 5-43. Backup/Restore Menu (sample)
The Backup/Restore Menu enables you to back up and restore system configurations,
using the console’s Flash Memory Card capability. You can also use this capability to
transfer configurations between Controllers.
Note
You can only store one system configuration on a Flash
Memory Card.
The following functions are provided:
•
•
•
•
•
Device — Selects the device(s) that you want to backup or restore. Choose
between the Ctrlr, VP+SP or Ctrlr+VP+SP.
Controller Options — Selects which portion of the selected devices you want to
backup or restore. Choose between All, System or Presets.
VP/SP to Restore — Selects the device(s) that you wish to restore. Choose
between All devices, or the ID of a specific device (e.g., 1, 2, 3).
Press {BACKUP} to perform a backup operation to the Flash Memory Card using
the selected device(s) and options.
Press {CHECK CARD} to check for the presence of a Flash Memory Card:
~
~
•
If no card is present, the message “Flash card not detected” is shown.
If a memory card is present, the Current Backup Menu appears. Refer
to the “Current Backup Menu” section on page 189 for details.
Press {RESTORE} to restore a system configuration from the Flash Memory Card
to the selected device(s).
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Using Backup and Restore” section on page 330 for
instructions.
188
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Miscellaneous Menu
Current Backup Menu
From the Backup/Restore Menu, press {CHECK CARD} to display the Current Backup
Menu. This menu only appears if a Flash Memory Card is present.
CURRENT BACKUP
B
A
C
K
Code version:
1.16
Controller files backed up:
System, 45 Presets
VP/SPs backed up:
1, 2, 3, 4
Figure 5-44. Current Backup Menu (sample)
The following functions are provided:
•
•
•
Code version — lists the current version of Controller code.
Controller files backed up — lists the types of files present on the Flash Memory
Card (e.g., System, Presets, ScreenPRO-II).
VP/SPs backed up — lists the IDs of the processors that are backed up.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
189
5. Menu Orientation
Effects Menu
bÑÑÉÅíë=jÉåì
The figure below illustrates a sample Effects Menu:
EFFECTS MENU
H
O
M
E
Destination
[2]
Key Frame Effect
LINEAR
Transition Rate
1.0
Transition Type
Mix
N
A
V
A
D
J
Figure 5-45. Effects Menu (sample)
To access the menu:
•
Press EFFECTS on the Home Menu, or press Effects in the Keypad Section.
The Effects Menu allows you to modify and manage effects on a destination by destination
basis, including the ability to define keyframes, paths and effect properties. The following
functions are provided:
•
•
•
•
Destination — indicates the currently selected destination (as chosen on the
Destination Bus).
Key Frame Effect — selects the type of point-to-point motion for a “move.”
Choose between LINEAR, LINEAR ACCL, ARCH CW, ARCH CCW, BMRNG
CW, and BMRNG CCW.
Transition Rate — sets the auto-transition rate that is used when the Auto Trans
button is pressed. The transition value is in 0.1 second increments.
Transition Type — sets the transition type. Choose between Mix, Wipe Right,
Wipe Left, Wipe Down, Wipe Up, Curtain Open, Curtain Close, Box In and
Box Out.
Note
•
Wide screen destinations only support two wipe patterns:
Wipe Up and Wipe Down.
Transition Edge Width — When a Wipe is selected, this field sets the transition’s
edge type. The range (in pixels) is from 0 to 256.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Working with Transitions” section on page 320 for details.
190
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Copy Setup Menu
`çéó=pÉíìé=jÉåì
The figure below illustrates the Copy Setup Menu:
COPY SETUP
B
A
C
K
Position
On
Size
On
Input Source
On
Aspect Ratio
On
Border
On
Shadow
On
Move Parameter
On
Effects
On
ALL ON
N
A
V
A
D
J
ALL OFF
Figure 5-46. Copy Setup Menu (sample)
To access the menu:
•
Press COPY in the Layer Function Section.
Encore’s “Copy” function allows you to copy the parameters of a PIP or KEY from one layer
to another. The Copy Setup Menu selects the precise subset of the effect’s attributes that
you wish to copy — such as border color, PIP size, aspect ratio, etc.
S To keep a PIP at its current position and size, but copy an effect’s border
attribute from another layer, turn Position and Size off, and turn Border on.
Then perform the copy function itself.
The following functions are provided:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Position — enables or disables the effect’s “position” attribute.
Size — enables or disables the effect’s “size” attribute.
Input Source — enables or disables the effect’s “input source.”
Aspect Ratio — enables or disables the effect’s “aspect ratio” attribute.
Border — enables or disables the effect’s “border” attribute.
Shadow — enables or disables the effect’s “shadow” attribute.
Move Parameter — enables or disables the effect’s “move” setup.
Effects — enables or disables the effect’s “special effects” attributes.
Press {ALL ON} to enable all attributes.
Press {ALL OFF} to disable all attributes.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Using Copy” section on page 309 for instructions.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
191
5. Menu Orientation
User Key Copy Setup Menu
rëÉê=hÉó=`çéó=pÉíìé=jÉåì
On the Controller LC only, the figure below illustrates a sample User Key Copy Setup
Menu. The function is not available on the Controller SC.
USER KEY COPY SETUP
H
O
M
E
Position
On
Size
On
Input Source
On
Aspect Ratio
On
Border
On
Shadow
On
Move Parameter
On
Effects
On
ALL ON
N
A
V
A
D
J
ALL OFF
Figure 5-47. User Key Copy Setup Menu (sample)
To access the menu (Controller LC only):
•
Press USER KEYS on the Home Menu, or press User Copy in the Layer
Function Section.
The Controller LC has 100 available user keys (10 pages of 10 user keys). Similar to the
Copy Setup Menu, the User Key Copy Setup Menu sets the precise subset of an effect’s
attributes that you wish to store on a user key — such as border color, PIP size, etc.
The following functions are provided:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Position — enables or disables the effect’s “position” attribute.
Size — enables or disables the effect’s “size” attribute.
Input Source — enables or disables the effect’s “input source.”
Aspect Ratio — enables or disables the effect’s “aspect ratio” attribute.
Border — enables or disables the effect’s “border” attribute.
Shadow — enables or disables the effect’s “shadow” attribute.
Move Parameter — enables or disables the effect’s “move” setup.
Effects — enables or disables the effect’s “special effects” attributes.
Press {ALL ON} to enable all attributes.
Press {ALL OFF} to disable all attributes.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Working with User Keys” section on page 327 for instructions.
192
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Status Menu
pí~íìë=jÉåì
The Status Menu provides basic system status information:
ENCORE SYSTEM STATUS
VER x.xx
VIDEO PROCESSOR: 4
SCREENPRO II: 1
PREPRO II: 1
IMAGEPRO: 2
ROUTERS: 2
Figure 5-48. Status Menu (sample)
To access the Status Menu:
•
Press STATUS in the Keypad Section, or press {STATS} from various menus
(such as the Key Menu).
The following status information is provided:
•
•
•
•
•
•
VER x.xx — displays the Controller’s current software version.
Video Processors — lists the number of Video Processors detected.
ScreenPRO-II — lists the number of ScreenPRO-II units detected.
ScreenPRO-II — lists the number of PresentationPRO-II units detected.
ImagePRO — lists the number of ImagePRO units detected.
Routers — lists the number of Routers detected.
Note
The Status Menu displays additional messages (such as
“Checksum Mismatch” and “Please Upgrade”) if certain
error conditions exist.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
193
5. Menu Orientation
PIP Adjustment Menu
mfm=^ÇàìëíãÉåí=jÉåì
The following topics are discussed in this section:
•
•
•
•
PIP Adjustment Menu Tree
PIP Adjustment Menu Description
PIP Adjustment Menu Functions
PIP Adjustment Sub Menus
mfm=^ÇàìëíãÉåí=jÉåì=qêÉÉ
The figure below illustrates the PIP Adjustment Menu Tree:
[ ]
A
[ ]
B
PIP
PIP ADJUSTMENT
MENU
CLONE
BORDR
SHDOW
EFX
Clone Setup
Menu
Border
Menu
Shadow
Menu
Image Effects
Menu
H Size
V Size
H Position
V Position
Move Rate
Destination
Mode
Mode
Clone Type
Style
H Size
Monochrome
Red
Color: Red
V Size
Green
Color: Green
H Pos
Blue
Color: Blue
V Pos
Invert
Size Specified
Transparency
Key Frame Effect
Track
H Size
PIP
V Size
Rate
BORDR
Size
SHDOW
3
Hue
Strobe Mode
Track Size
Strobe Interval
PIP
PIP
EFX
PIP
CLONE
BORDR
BORDR
SHDOW
CLONE
SHDOW
EFX
EFX
CLONE
RESET
RGB
Figure 5-49. PIP Adjustment Menu Tree
All functions and sub menus are discussed in the following sections.
194
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
PIP Adjustment Menu
mfm=^ÇàìëíãÉåí=jÉåì=aÉëÅêáéíáçå
The figure below illustrates a sample PIP Adjustment Menu:
PIP ADJUSTMENT
C
L
O
N
E
B
O
R
D
R
S
H
D
O
W
H Size < 37.3% >
674
V Size < 58.9% >
452
H Position
-34
V Position
70
H
Move Rate
1.4
Key Frame Effect
V
P
O
S
JOY Z TO SIZE, X Y TO POSITION
TRACK
P
O
S
[ LINEAR ]
OPERATION:
E
F
X
S
I
Z
E
H SIZE
V SIZE
RATE
Figure 5-50. PIP Adjustment Menu (sample)
The PIP Adjustment Menu provides tools that enable you to adjust the “active” PIP. To
access the menu:
•
•
Select a blue “layer” button in the Layer Control Section.
Press the PIP button in the Layer Function Section.
On the Controller LC, the menu immediately appears in the right hand Touch Screen Menu.
On the Controller SC (with its single Touch Screen), the current “system” menu is replaced
by the PIP Adjustment Menu.
mfm=^ÇàìëíãÉåí=jÉåì=cìåÅíáçåë
The following PIP Adjustment Menu functions are provided:
•
•
•
•
H Size — adjusts the PIP’s horizontal size. The “%” value is the PIP’s size as a
percentage of the screen’s horizontal resolution. The numeric value is the PIP’s
width in pixels. To adjust, use the Joystick’s Z-Axis knob or the SIZE rotary knob.
See the “PIP Joystick Functions” section on page 196 for details.
V Size — adjusts the PIP’s vertical size. The “%” value is the PIP’s size as a
percentage of the screen’s vertical resolution. The numeric value is the PIP’s
height in pixels. To adjust, use the Joystick’s Z-Axis knob or the SIZE rotary knob.
See the “PIP Joystick Functions” section on page 196 for more details.
H Position — indicates the PIP’s position, relative to the horizontal center of the
screen (00), as measured from the exact center of the PIP. Thus, the value -34 is
34 pixels to the left of center. To adjust, move the Joystick left and right.
V Position — indicates the PIP’s position, relative to the vertical center of the
screen (00), as measured from the exact center of the PIP. Thus, the value 70 is
70 pixels above center. To adjust V Position, move the Joystick up and down.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
195
5. Menu Orientation
PIP Adjustment Menu
•
•
Move Rate — adjusts the rate (in 0.1 second increments) for programmed PIP
“moves” from keyframe to keyframe. To adjust, select the RATE radio button and
twist the Joystick Z-Axis knob.
Key Frame Effect — indicates the “motion type” that is used to move the PIP
from point to point.
~
~
If no move is programmed, the display reads [N/A].
If a move is programmed, the motion type is shown (e.g., [Linear]). The
motion type is selected on the Effects Menu.
•
Press {CLONE} to display the Clone Setup Menu (if Clone is enabled). Refer to
the “Clone Setup Menu” section on page 197 for details.
•
Press {BORDR} to display the Border Menu. Refer to the “Border Menu”
section on page 199 for details.
•
Press {SHDOW} to display the Shadow Menu. Refer to the “Shadow Menu”
section on page 200 for details.
•
Press {EFX} to display the Image Effects Menu. Refer to the “Image Effects
Menu” section on page 201 for details.
•
Press Source in the Joystick Section to display the Input Source Adjustment
Menu. Refer to the “Source Adjustment Menus” section on page 212.
mfm=gçóëíáÅâ=cìåÅíáçåë
At the bottom of the PIP Adjustment Menu, four radio buttons enable the Joystick to be
assigned to various PIP adjustment functions.
•
Press {TRACK} to lock H Size and V Size together. Regardless of the PIP’s
current aspect ratio, its size will adjust proportionally when the Joystick’s Z-Axis
knob or the SIZE rotary knob is used to change size.
•
Press {H SIZE} to adjust only the horizontal size, leaving the vertical size alone.
In this way, you can stretch the PIP horizontally.
•
Press {V SIZE} to adjust only the vertical size, leaving the horizontal size as is. In
this way, you can stretch the PIP vertically.
•
Press {RATE} to adjust the move rate of the PIP, from keyframe to keyframe.
Please note the following additional related functions:
•
•
To return the PIP to its default size and aspect ratio, press the Reset button in the
Joystick Section.
To adjust the PIP with fine resolution, press the Fine Adjust button in the
Joystick Section.
mfm=^ÇàìëíãÉåí=pìÄ=jÉåìë
The following sub menus can be accessed from the PIP Adjustment Menu:
•
•
•
•
Clone Setup Menu
Border Menu
Shadow Menu
Image Effects Menu
Complete descriptions are provided in the following sections.
196
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
PIP Adjustment Menu
`äçåÉ=pÉíìé=jÉåì
From the PIP Adjustment Menu, press {CLONE} to display the Clone Setup Menu, a
sample of which is shown below.
Note
If the cloned layer is a key (and accessed from a Key menu),
softkeys will be different: {PIP} is replaced by {KEY}, and
{BORDR} and {SHDOW} will not be shown.
CLONE SETUP
P
I
P
B
O
R
D
R
Destination
1
Clone Type
OFFSET
Offset
N
A
V
704
A
D
J
S
H
D
O
W
E
F
X
Figure 5-51. Clone Setup Menu (sample)
The Clone Setup Menu enables you to set parameters for a cloned layer.
Note
You can also access the Clone Menu from the Shadow
Menu, the Border Menu and the Image Effects Menu by
pressing {CLONE}.
Please note:
•
•
•
•
•
The {CLONE} softkey only appears when a PIP (or Key) is cloned and the Clone
button is lit.
The mode can only be enabled when a widescreen destination is selected.
The mode cannot be enabled if the PIP or Key straddles any part of the center of
the overall widescreen. An error message “Resource Conflict - Cannot Apply
Clone” will appear.
Both PIPs and Keys can be cloned.
You can set up and perform Moves with clones.
The following functions are provided:
•
•
Destination — displays the currently selected destination.
Clone Type — sets the type of clone “motion.”
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
197
5. Menu Orientation
PIP Adjustment Menu
~
Offset — both cloned images move together with a fixed pixel offset.
For example, if you adjust H Position, both images move left and right.
If you adjust V Position, both images move up and down.
Cloned
PIP A
PIP A
Figure 5-52. Clone Offset Mode — Sample Widescreen
~
Mirror — both cloned images move together as if a mirror is positioned
in the middle of the widescreen overlap region. For example, if you
adjust H Position, both images move towards (and away from) the
center of the widescreen.
PIP A
Cloned
PIP A
Figure 5-53. Clone Mirror Mode — Sample Widescreen
•
Offset — if “Offset” is selected on the Clone Type line, this field enables you to
set the offset (in pixels). If “Mirror” is selected, the field is hidden.
Important
The Clone Setup Menu also appears when the Clone button
is enabled (in the Layer Functions Section), provided that a
widescreen destination is selected. However, if you press
Clone and the message “Resource Conflict - Cannot Apply
Clone” appears, the PIP (or Key) is most likely positioned
within the center of the widescreen.
S In a 2 screen blend, the PIP or Key cannot be
positioned such that it sits between screens
1 and 2.
S In a 3 screen blend, the PIP or Key cannot be
anywhere within the screen 2 space.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Using Clone” section on page 308 for operating instructions.
198
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
PIP Adjustment Menu
_çêÇÉê=jÉåì
From the PIP Adjustment Menu, press {BORDR} to display the Border Menu.
BORDER
P
I
P
C
L
O
N
E
S
H
D
O
W
Mode
On
Style
5
Color:
Red
609
Green
600
Blue
531
N
A
V
A
D
J
% of PIP
Size Specified In
Size < % of PIP >
10.2
E
F
X
Figure 5-54. Border Menu (sample)
The Border Menu enables you to add a border to a PIP, and adjust its shape, style and
color as desired.
Note
You can access the Border Menu from the Shadow Menu,
the Image Effects Menu and the Clone Setup Menu by
pressing {BORDR}.
The following functions are provided:
•
•
•
•
•
Mode — enables or disables the PIP’s border.
Style — select one of ten border styles, including single color and dual color with
various combinations of soft edge.
Color — adjusts the border’s Red, Green and Blue attributes as desired.
Size Specified In — select the method by which you want to specify the border
size, either as a percentage of the PIP size or in pixels.
Size — adjust’s the border size, using the method selected on the “Size
Specified In” line. Note that if “% of PIP” is selected and you switch to “Pixels,”
the system auto converts one display method to the other.
•
Press {PIP} to return to the PIP Adjustment Menu. Refer to the “PIP
Adjustment Menu Functions” section on page 195 for details.
•
Press {CLONE} to display the Clone Setup Menu (if Clone is enabled). Refer to
the “Clone Setup Menu” section on page 197 for details.
•
Press {SHDOW} to display the Shadow Menu. Refer to the “Shadow Menu”
section on page 200 for details.
•
Press {EFX} to display the Image Effects Menu. Refer to the “Image Effects
Menu” section on page 201 for details.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
199
5. Menu Orientation
PIP Adjustment Menu
pÜ~Ççï=jÉåì
From the PIP Adjustment Menu, press {SHDOW} to display the Shadow Menu.
SHADOW
P
I
P
B
O
R
D
R
C
L
O
N
E
Mode
On
H Size < % >
106
V Size < % >
106
H Pos < pixel >
28
V Pos < pixel >
11
N
A
V
A
D
J
100
Transparency
E
F
X
3
TRACK SIZE
Figure 5-55. Shadow Menu (sample)
The Shadow Menu enables you place a shadow behind a PIP.
Note
You can access the Shadow Menu from the Border Menu,
the Clone Setup Menu and the Image Effects Menu by
pressing {SHDOW}.
The following functions are provided:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
200
Mode — enables or disables the PIP’s shadow.
H Size < % > — adjusts the shadow’s horizontal size as a percentage of the PIP’s
size. If {TRACK SIZE} is checked, H and V size adjust proportionally.
V Size < % > — adjusts the shadow’s vertical size as a percentage of the PIP’s
size. If {TRACK SIZE} is checked, H and V size adjust proportionally.
H Pos < pixel > — adjusts the shadow’s horizontal position in pixels.
V Pos < pixel > — adjusts the shadow’s vertical position in pixels.
Transparency — adjusts transparency, from 0 (transparent) to 1024 (opaque).
Check {TRACK SIZE} to adjust the shadow’s H Size and V Size proportionally.
Press {PIP} to return to the PIP Adjustment Menu. Refer to the “PIP
Adjustment Menu Functions” section on page 195 for details.
•
Press {BORDR} to display the Border Menu. Refer to the “Border Menu”
section on page 199 for details.
•
Press {CLONE} to display the Clone Setup Menu (if Clone is enabled). Refer to
the “Clone Setup Menu” section on page 197 for details.
•
Press {EFX} to display the Image Effects Menu. Refer to the “Image Effects
Menu” section on page 201 for details.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
PIP Adjustment Menu
fã~ÖÉ=bÑÑÉÅíë=jÉåì
From the PIP Adjustment Menu (or the Key Menu), press {EFX} to display the Image
Effects Menu.
IMAGE EFFECTS
P
I
P
B
O
R
D
R
S
H
D
O
W
C
L
O
N
E
Monochrome Mode
Off
Red
100
Green
100
Blue
100
Invert
Off
N
A
V
A
D
J
0
Hue
- - - - - - STROBE - - - - - Mode
Off
Interval (frames)
2
RESET
RGB
Figure 5-56. Image Effects Menu (sample)
The Image Effects Menu enables you to creatively manipulate the selected PIP or Key.
Note
When adjusting PIPs, you can access the Image Effects
Menu from the Border Menu, the Clone Setup Menu or the
Shadow Menu by pressing {EFX}.
When adjusting Keys, you can also access the Image Effects
Menu from the Key Adjustment Menu or the Matte Menu by
pressing {EFX}.
•
•
Monochrome Mode — turns chroma on or off. When the mode is enabled, the
image is completely monochrome.
Red — adjusts the image’s red saturation.
~
•
Green — adjusts the image’s green saturation.
~
•
Adjustment range: 0 to 100
Adjustment range: 0 to 100
Blue — adjusts the image’s blue saturation.
~
Adjustment range: 0 to 100
Note
The Red, Green and Blue adjustments function whether or
not Monochrome Mode is enabled.
Tip
For a sepia tone effect, turn Monochrome Mode on, and set
Red to 100, Green to 65 and Blue to 10.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
201
5. Menu Orientation
PIP Adjustment Menu
•
•
•
•
•
•
Invert — enables you to invert all image colors.
Hue — adjusts the image’s hue, by rotating color vectors throughout the 360
degree color spectrum.
Mode — In the “Strobe” section, enables or disables the strobe mode which when
enabled, acts as a programmable freeze.
Interval (frames) — In the “Strobe” section, sets the freeze interval.
Press {RESET RGB} to reset all image colors to their default values.
Press {PIP} to return to the PIP Adjustment Menu. Refer to the “PIP
Adjustment Menu Functions” section on page 195 for details.
•
Press {BORDR} to display the Border Menu. Refer to the “Border Menu”
section on page 199 for details.
•
Press {SHDOW} to display the Shadow Menu. Refer to the “Shadow Menu”
section on page 200 for details.
•
Press {CLONE} to display the Clone Setup Menu (if Clone is enabled). Refer to
the “Clone Setup Menu” section on page 197 for details.
Note
202
To remove any image effects from the PIP or Key, press the
RESET button in the Layer Functions Section. No other
parameters will be affected.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Key Menu
hÉó=jÉåì
The following topics are discussed in this section:
•
•
•
•
Key Menu Tree
Key Menu Description
Key Menu Functions
Key Sub Menus
hÉó=jÉåì=qêÉÉ
The figure below illustrates the Key Menu tree:
[ ]
A
[ ]
B
KEY
KEY MENU
Key Type (Luma)
Key Type (Color)
Key Type (Cut + Fill)
Invert Mode
Red Color
Invert Mode
Clip
Green Color
Clip
CLONE
EFX
MATTE
SIZE &
POS
Clone Setup
Menu
Image Effects
Menu
Matte
Menu
Key Adjustment
Menu
Gain
Blue Color
Gain
Opacity
Red Threshold
Opacity
Destination
Monochrome
Red
H Size
Fill Source
Green Threshold
Fill Source
Clone Type
Red
Green
V Size
Green
Blue
H Pos
Blue Threshold
STATS
Red Mask
STATS
KEY
Green Mask
Blue Mask
Opacity
Blue
Invert
EFX
3
Hue
V Pos
Track RGB
Move Rate
STATS
Key Frame Effect
Strobe Mode
Track
Strobe Interval
KEY
STATS
V Size
STATS
EFX
PICK
COLOR
KEY
GRAB
COLOR
RESET
RGB
H Size
SIZE &
POS
Rate
STATS
KEY
MATTE
MATTE
SIZE &
POS
EFX
Figure 5-57. Key Menu Tree
All functions and sub menus are discussed in the following sections.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
203
5. Menu Orientation
Key Menu
hÉó=jÉåì=aÉëÅêáéíáçå
The figure below illustrates a sample Key Menu, when Luma key is selected:
KEY
S
T
A
T
S
C
L
O
N
E
Key Type
Luma
Invert Mode
Off
Clip
N
A
V
0
Gain
1.00
Opacity
512
Fill Source
A
D
J
Matte
E
F
X
MATTE
SIZE &
POS
Figure 5-58. Key Menu (sample)
The Key Menu provides the tools to adjust the “active” key. To access the menu:
•
•
Select a blue button in the Layer Control Section.
Press the KEY button in the Layer Function Section.
On the Controller LC, the menu immediately appears in the right hand Touch Screen. On
the Controller SC (with its single Touch Screen), the current “system” menu is replaced by
the Key Menu.
hÉó=jÉåì=cìåÅíáçåë
The available Key Menu functions change, depending upon the type of key selected.
•
Key Type — displays the type of key:
~
~
Choose between Luma or Color when the Layer A key is selected.
Choose between Luma, Color, or Cut + Fill when the Layer B key is
selected (in Split Mode only).
Refer to the following sections for details.
•
•
•
204
Luma Key Functions
Color Key Functions
Cut + Fill Key Functions
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Key Menu
iìã~=hÉó=cìåÅíáçåë
A Luma (luminance) key is one in which the hole-cutting information is derived from the
luminance (brightness) level of the key source.
Note
Luma keys can be selected on both the Layer A and Layer B
keyers, in both Split and Mix modes.
The following Key Menu functions are provided when Luma key is selected:
•
•
Invert Mode — enables you to invert the key signal.
Clip — adjusts the threshold of the video that “cuts” into the background image. A
hole will be cut into the background anywhere that foreground luminance is
greater than the clip level. The hole is then filled with the Fill Source.
~
•
Gain — adjusts the sensitivity of the keyer, enabling you to change the sharpness
of the keyed image. Gain only affects the key hole, as set by the clip.
~
•
Adjustment range: 0 to 1023.99
Opacity — enables you to adjust the opacity of the keyed image, from fully
opaque to fully transparent.
~
•
Adjustment range: 0 to 1023
Adjustment range: 0 to 1024
Fill Source — determines the video that fills the key hole:
~
~
Self — fills the hole with the key source video itself, for example, the
video from a character generator or logo.
Matte — fills the hole with a matte color, which can be adjusted with the
Matte Menu. See the “Matte Menu” section on page 207 for details.
•
Press {STATS} to display the Status Menu. Refer to the “Status Menu” section
on page 193 for details.
•
Press {CLONE} to display the Clone Setup Menu (if Clone is enabled). Refer to
the “Clone Setup Menu” section on page 197 for details
•
Press {EFX} to display the Image Effects Menu. Refer to the “Image Effects
Menu” section on page 201 for details.
•
Press {MATTE} to display the Matte Menu. Refer to the “Matte Menu” section on
page 207 for details.
•
Press {SIZE & POS} to display the Key Adjustment Menu. Refer to the “Key
Adjustment Menu” section on page 208 for details.
`çäçê=hÉó=cìåÅíáçåë
A Color key is one in which the hole-cutting information is derived from a specific RGB
value — including luminance.
Note
Color keys can be selected on both the Layer A and Layer B
keyers, in both Split and Mix modes.
The following Key Menu functions are provided when Color key is selected:
•
•
Red Color — adjusts the red component of the selected key color, from 0 to 1024.
Green Color — adjusts the green component of the key color, from 0 to 1024.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
205
5. Menu Orientation
Key Menu
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Blue Color — adjusts the blue component of the key color, from 0 to 1024.
Red Threshold — adjusts the key’s clip along the Cyan vector (as demonstrated
using a CIE color chip chart).
Green Threshold — adjusts the key’s clip along the Magenta vector.
Blue Threshold — adjusts the key’s clip along the Yellow vector
Red Mask — adjusts the background mask to/from black along the Cyan vector.
Green Mask — adjusts background mask to/from black along the Magenta vector.
Blue Mask — adjusts background mask to/from black along the Yellow vector.
Opacity — adjusts the opacity of the keyed image, from fully opaque to fully
transparent.
~
Adjustment range: 0 to 1024
•
Press {STATS} to display the Status Menu. Refer to the “Status Menu” section
on page 193 for details.
•
Press {CLONE} to display the Clone Setup Menu (if Clone is enabled). Refer to
the “Clone Setup Menu” section on page 197 for details
•
Press {EFX} to display the Image Effects Menu. Refer to the “Image Effects
Menu” section on page 201 for details.
•
Press {PICK COLOR} to choose the keying color visually. Once pressed, the
{GRAB COLOR} label appears, and a crosshair appears on Preview. Use the
Joystick to move the crosshair around the Preview monitor as desired.
•
•
Press {GRAB COLOR} to select the color directly under the crosshair. These
values are immediately mapped into the Red, Green and Blue color fields on the
menu, and can be adjusted with the knobs in the normal manner.
Press {SIZE & POS} to display the Key Adjustment Menu. Refer to the “Key
Adjustment Menu” section on page 208 for details.
`ìí=H=cáää=hÉó=cìåÅíáçåë
A Cut + Fill key is one in which the hole-cutting information is provided by a Luma Key on
a mixer’s B layer, and the fill information is provided by the same mixer’s A layer.
Note
Cut + Fill keys can only be selected on a mixer’s Layer B
keyer, in the Split mode only.
The following Key Menu functions are provided when Cut + Fill key is selected:
•
•
Invert Mode — enables you to invert the “Cut” key signal.
Clip — adjusts the threshold of the video that “cuts” into the background. The
hole is filled with the Fill Source from Layer A.
~
•
~
•
Adjustment range: 0 to 1023.99
Opacity — enables you to adjust the opacity of the keyed image, from fully
opaque to fully transparent.
~
206
Adjustment range: 0 to 1023
Gain — adjusts the sensitivity of the keyer, enabling you to change the sharpness
of the image. Gain only affects the key hole.
Adjustment range: 0 to 1024
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Key Menu
•
•
Fill Source — permanently set to the current mixer’s Layer A (e.g., [1A]).
Press {STATS} to display the Status Menu. Refer to the “Status Menu” section
on page 193 for details.
•
Press {CLONE} to display the Clone Setup Menu (if Clone is enabled). Refer to
the “Clone Setup Menu” section on page 197 for details
•
Press {EFX} to display the Image Effects Menu. Refer to the “Image Effects
Menu” section on page 201 for details.
•
Press {SIZE & POS} to display the Key Adjustment Menu. Refer to the “Key
Adjustment Menu” section on page 208 for details.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Working with Keys in Split Mode” section on page 302 for
instructions.
hÉó=pìÄ=jÉåìë
The following sub menus can be accessed from the Key Adjustment Menu:
•
•
Matte Menu
Key Adjustment Menu
j~ííÉ=jÉåì
From the Key Menu, press {MATTE} to display the Matte Menu.
MATTE
S
T
A
T
S
Red
528
Green
204
Blue
260
N
A
V
K
E
Y
A
D
J
E
F
X
3
SIZE &
POS
TRACK RGB
Figure 5-59. Matte Menu (sample)
Note
The menu is also accessed from the DSK Adjustment Menu.
All functions are identical, but the menu is named the DSK
Matte Adjustment Menu at the top.
The Matte Menu adjusts the fill color of a matte key. The following functions are provided:
•
•
Red — adjusts the red component of the matte fill as required, from 0 to 1024.
Green — adjusts the green component of the matte fill, from 0 to 1024.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
207
5. Menu Orientation
Key Menu
•
•
Blue — adjusts the blue component of the matte fill, from 0 to 1024.
Press {STATS} to display the Status Menu. Refer to the “Status Menu” section
on page 193 for details.
•
Press {KEY} to display the Key Menu. Refer to the “Key Menu Description”
section on page 204 for details.
•
Press {EFX} to display the Image Effects Menu. Refer to the “Image Effects
Menu” section on page 201 for details.
•
Check {TRACK RGB} to lock RGB values together, and adjust them all
simultaneously. Uncheck to unlock the values, and adjust colors individually.
•
Press {SIZE & POS} to display the Key Adjustment Menu. Refer to the “Key
Adjustment Menu” section on page 208 for details.
hÉó=^ÇàìëíãÉåí=jÉåì
From the Key Menu, press {SIZE & POS} to display the Key Adjustment Menu.
KEY ADJUSTMENT
S
T
A
T
S
K
E
Y
H Size < 33.5% >
606
V Size < 58.3% >
448
H Position
-160
V Position
64
S
I
Z
E
H
M
A
T
T
E
Move Rate
2.0
Key Frame Effect
[ N/A ]
OPERATION:
E
F
X
V
P
O
S
JOY Z TO SIZE, X Y TO POSITION
TRACK
P
O
S
H SIZE
V SIZE
RATE
Figure 5-60. Key Adjustment Menu (sample)
The Key Adjustment Menu is virtually identical to the PIP Adjustment Menu — except
that it pertains to Keys rather than PIPs. The following functions are provided:
•
•
•
208
H Size — adjusts the Key’s horizontal size. The “%” value indicates the key’s size
as a percentage of the screen’s horizontal resolution. The numeric value is the
Key’s width in pixels. To adjust, use the Joystick’s Z-Axis knob or the SIZE knob.
See the “Key Joystick Functions” section on page 209 for details.
V Size — adjusts the PIP’s vertical size. The “%” value indicates the PIP’s size as
a percentage of the screen’s vertical resolution. The numeric value is the PIP’s
height in pixels. To adjust, use the Joystick’s Z-Axis knob or the SIZE knob. See
the “Key Joystick Functions” section on page 209 for details.
H Position — indicates the Key’s position, relative to the horizontal center of the
screen (00), as measured from the exact center of the Key. Thus, the value -160
is 160 pixels to the left of center. To adjust, move the Joystick left and right.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Key Menu
•
•
•
V Position — indicates the Key’s position, relative to the vertical center of the
screen (00), as measured from the exact center of the Key. Thus, the value 64 is
64 pixels above center. To adjust, move the Joystick up and down.
Move Rate — adjusts the rate (in 0.1 second increments) for programmed Key
movement, from keyframe to keyframe. To adjust, select the RATE radio button
and twist the Joystick Z-Axis knob.
Key Frame Effect — indicates the “motion type” that is used to move the Key
from point to point.
~
~
If no move is programmed, the display reads [N/A].
If a move is programmed, the motion type is shown (e.g., [Linear]). The
motion type is selected on the Effects Menu.
•
Press {STATS} to display the Status Menu. Refer to the “Status Menu” section
on page 193 for details.
•
Press {KEY} to display the Key Menu. Refer to the “Key Menu Description”
section on page 204 for details.
•
Press {MATTE} to display the Matte Menu. Refer to the “Matte Menu” section on
page 207 for details.
•
Press {EFX} to display the Image Effects Menu. Refer to the “Image Effects
Menu” section on page 201 for details.
Key Joystick Functions
At the bottom of the Key Adjustment Menu, four radio buttons enable the Joystick to be
assigned to various Key adjustment functions.
•
Press {TRACK} to lock H Size and V Size together. Regardless of the Key’s
current aspect ratio, its size adjusts proportionally when the Joystick’s Z-Axis knob
or the SIZE rotary knob is used to change size.
•
Press {H SIZE} to adjust only the horizontal size, leaving the vertical size alone.
In this way, you can stretch the Key horizontally.
•
Press {V SIZE} to adjust only the vertical size, leaving the horizontal size as is. In
this way, you can stretch the Key vertically.
•
Press {RATE} to adjust the move rate of the Key, from keyframe to keyframe.
Please note the following additional related functions:
•
•
To return the Key to its default size and aspect ratio, press the RESET button in
the Joystick Section.
To adjust the Key with fine resolution, press the FINE ADJUST button in the
Joystick Section.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
209
5. Menu Orientation
Crop Menu
`êçé=jÉåì
With a PIP or a Key selected, press Crop to display the Crop Menu.
CROP ADJUSTMENT
S
T
A
T
S
ALL-SIDES
H Size < 53.3% >
682
V Size < 50.0% >
512
S
I
Z
E
- - - - Aspect Ratio - - - Mode
4:3
Ratio
1.333
OPERATION:
R
A
T
I
O
JOY Z TO CROP SIZE
TRACK
H SIZE
M
O
D
E
V SIZE
Figure 5-61. Crop Menu (sample)
The Crop Menu enables you crop the sides of a PIP or a Key without affecting the size of
the source image. The following functions are provided:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
H Size — indicates the PIP or Key’s horizontal size. The “%” value indicates size
as a percentage of the screen’s horizontal resolution. The numeric value is the
width in pixels. To crop, use the Joystick’s Z-Axis knob or the SIZE knob.
V Size — indicates the PIP or Key’s vertical size. The “%” value indicates size as
a percentage of the screen’s vertical resolution. The numeric value is the height in
pixels. To crop, use the Joystick’s Z-Axis knob or the SIZE knob.
Aspect Ratio Mode — rotate the MODE knob to select one of several standard
aspect ratios: 16:9, 5:4, 4:3, 3:2 and 1:1.
Ratio — Rotate the RATIO knob to select a custom aspect ratio.
Press {TRACK} to proportionally crop H and V edges.
Press {H SIZE} to crop only the left and right edges.
Press {V SIZE} to crop only the top and bottom edges.
Please note the following important points:
•
•
•
•
210
To remove crop effects from the layer, press the RESET button in the Joystick
Section. No other parameters will be affected.
If you enter the Crop Menu for a layer that is already cropped, if you crop the
layer further, RESET returns the image to its state when the menu was enabled.
To completely RESET a layer to a non-cropped state, exit the Crop Menu and reselect the source in the Source Selection Bus.
While in the Crop Menu, selecting different sources into the layer causes a
relative crop to be applied to the new source within the layer.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Crop Menu
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
211
5. Menu Orientation
Source Adjustment Menus
pçìêÅÉ=^ÇàìëíãÉåí=jÉåìë
Two similar Source Adjustment Menus are available:
•
If a PIP is selected:
a.
•
Press SOURCE (in the Joystick Section) to display the Input Source
Adjustment Menu.
If a Key is selected:
a.
Access the Key Adjustment menu (by pressing {SIZE & POS} on the
Key Menu)
b.
Press SOURCE (in the Joystick Section) to display the Key Source
Adjustment Menu.
Please note:
•
•
On the Controller LC, the selected Source Adjustment Menu immediately appears
in the right hand Touch Screen Menu.
On the Controller SC (with its single Touch Screen), the current “system” menu is
replaced by the selected Source Adjustment Menu.
Both menus are virtually identical in their functionality, with the exception of the available
branches. All functions and sub menus are discussed in the following sections.
•
•
•
212
Source Adjustment Menu Trees
Source Adjustment Menu Description
Source Adjustment Menu Functions
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Source Adjustment Menus
pçìêÅÉ=^ÇàìëíãÉåí=jÉåì=qêÉÉë
The figure below illustrates the two Source Adjustment Menu Trees.
PIP
Source
INPUT SOURCE
ADJUSTMENT
MENU
BORDR
SHDOW
EFX
Border
Menu
Shadow
Menu
Image Effects
Menu
H Size
V Size
H Position
V Position
Move Rate
Key Frame Effect
Track
H Size
V Size
Rate
KEY
SIZE &
POS
Source
KEY SOURCE
ADJUSTMENT
MENU
KEY
MATTE
EFX
Key
Menu
Matte
Menu
Image Effects
Menu
H Size
V Size
H Position
V Position
Move Rate
Key Frame Effect
Track
H Size
V Size
Rate
STATS
Figure 5-62. Source Adjustment Menu Trees
All functions and sub menus are discussed in the following sections.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
213
5. Menu Orientation
Source Adjustment Menus
pçìêÅÉ=^ÇàìëíãÉåí=jÉåì=aÉëÅêáéíáçå
The figure below illustrates a sample Input Source Adjustment Menu:
INPUT SOURCE ADJUSTMENT
B
O
R
D
R
S
H
D
O
W
H Size < 100.0% >
1024
V Size < 100.0% >
768
H Position
0
V Position
0
H
2.0
Move Rate
Key Frame Effect
V
P
O
S
JOY Z TO SIZE, X Y TO POSITION
TRACK
P
O
S
[ N/A ]
OPERATION:
E
F
X
S
I
Z
E
H SIZE
V SIZE
RATE
Figure 5-63. Input Source Adjustment Menu (sample)
The figure below illustrates a sample Key Source Adjustment Menu:
KEY SOURCE ADJUSTMENT
S
T
A
T
S
K
E
Y
H Size < 100.0% >
1024
V Size < 100.0% >
768
H Position
0
V Position
0
S
I
Z
E
H
M
A
T
T
E
2.0
Move Rate
Key Frame Effect
[ N/A ]
OPERATION:
E
F
X
V
P
O
S
JOY Z TO SIZE, X Y TO POSITION
TRACK
P
O
S
H SIZE
V SIZE
RATE
Figure 5-64. Key Source Adjustment Menu (sample)
As shown above, the Input Source Adjustment Menu is virtually identical to the Key
Source Adjustment Menu — and also virtually identical to the PIP and Key Adjustment
menus. The exception is that the two Source adjustment menus pertain to the source
“inside” the PIP or Key — rather than the boundaries of the PIP or Key itself.
In this way, for example, a PIP can remain in its exact location on screen, but you can scale
or re-position the imagine inside the PIP.
214
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Source Adjustment Menus
pçìêÅÉ=^ÇàìëíãÉåí=jÉåì=cìåÅíáçåë
The following Source Adjustment Menu functions are provided:
•
•
•
•
•
•
H Size — adjusts the source’s horizontal size. The “%” value indicates size as a
percentage of the original PIP or Key’s horizontal resolution. The numeric value is
the source’s width in pixels. To adjust, use the Joystick’s Z-Axis knob or the SIZE
knob. See the “Source Joystick Functions” section on page 216 for details.
V Size — adjusts the source’s vertical size. The “%” value indicates size as a
percentage of the original PIP or Key’s vertical resolution. The numeric value is
the source’s height in pixels. To adjust, use the Joystick’s Z-Axis knob or the SIZE
knob. See the “Source Joystick Functions” section on page 216 for details.
H Position — indicates the source’s horizontal position, relative to its default
horizontal position (00) with no offset. Thus, the value 50 is 50 pixels to the right
of its default position. To adjust, move the Joystick left and right along the X-Axis.
V Position — indicates the source’s vertical position, relative to its default vertical
position (00) with no offset. Thus, the value -10 is 10 pixels below its default
position. To adjust, move the Joystick up and down along the Y-Axis.
Move Rate — adjusts the rate (in 0.1 second increments) for programmed Key or
PIP movement, from keyframe to keyframe. To adjust, select the RATE radio
button and twist the Joystick Z-Axis knob.
Key Frame Effect — indicates the “motion type” that is used to move the PIP or
Key from point to point.
~
~
If no move is programmed, the display reads [N/A].
If a move is programmed, the motion type is shown (e.g., [Linear]). The
motion type is selected on the Effects Menu.
For Input Source Adjustments:
•
Press {BORDR} to display the Border Menu. Refer to the “Border Menu”
section on page 199 for details.
•
Press {SHDOW} to display the Shadow Menu. Refer to the “Shadow Menu”
section on page 200 for details.
•
Press {EFX} to display the Image Effects Menu. Refer to the “Image Effects
Menu” section on page 201 for details.
For Key Source Adjustments:
•
Press {STATS} to display the Status Menu. Refer to the “Status Menu” section
on page 193 for details.
•
Press {KEY} to display the Key Menu. Refer to the “Key Menu Description”
section on page 204 for details.
•
Press {MATTE} to display the Matte Menu. Refer to the “Matte Menu” section on
page 207 for details.
•
Press {EFX} to display the Image Effects Menu. Refer to the “Image Effects
Menu” section on page 201 for details.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
215
5. Menu Orientation
Source Adjustment Menus
Source Joystick Functions
At the bottom of the Input Source Adjustment Menu and the Key Source Adjustment
Menu, four radio buttons assign the Joystick to various source adjustment functions.
•
Press {TRACK} to lock H Size and V Size together. Regardless of the source’s
current aspect ratio, its size adjusts proportionally when the Joystick’s Z-Axis knob
or the SIZE rotary knob is used to change size.
•
Press {H SIZE} to adjust only the horizontal size, leaving the vertical size alone.
In this way, you can stretch the source horizontally.
•
Press {V SIZE} to adjust only the vertical size, leaving the horizontal size as is. In
this way, you can stretch the source vertically.
•
Press {RATE} to adjust the move rate of the PIP or Key, from keyframe to
keyframe.
Please note the following additional related functions:
•
•
216
To return the source to its default size and aspect ratio, press the RESET button in
the Joystick Section.
To adjust the source with fine resolution, press the FINE ADJUST button in the
Joystick Section.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Background Input Setup Menu
_~ÅâÖêçìåÇ=fåéìí=pÉíìé=jÉåì
The BG (Background) Input Setup Menu enables you to select and define background
sources A and B. For each background, you can choose between a solid matte color, a
DVI input, an analog input, or a captured frame grab as the background source. The
menus change depending on the selected background “type.”
To access the menu:
•
Press BG A or BG B in the Controller’s Layer Control Section.
~
~
If the selected background is already on Program, the BG Input Setup
Menu appears, but parameters can not be adjusted. The layer can be
cleared in the normal manner, however, in which case the last used
matte color appears in Preview.
If the selected background is not on Program, the menu appears with full
adjustment capabilities.
The following topics are discussed in this section:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Background Input Setup Menu Tree
Shared Background Menu Functions
Background Menu Functions — Matte Type
Background (and DSK) Menu Functions — DVI Type
Background (and DSK) Menu Functions — Analog Type
Background (and DSK) Menu Functions — FG Type
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
217
5. Menu Orientation
Background Input Setup Menu
_~ÅâÖêçìåÇ=fåéìí=pÉíìé=jÉåì=qêÉÉ
The figure below illustrates the Background Input Setup Menu Tree.
BG
A
BG
B
BG INPUT SETUP
MENU
Destination
ID
Type (Matte)
MATTE
Type (DVI)
Type (Analog)
Key Type (FG)
Format
Format
File to load
Crop: H Offset
Crop: H Offset
Name
Crop: V Offset
Crop: V Offset
SAVE
Contrast
RESET
LOAD
Brightness
RESET
SAVE
SAVE
SAVE
APPLY
FORMAT
APPLY
FORMAT
FORCE
ACQUIRE
SIZING
COLOR
BALANCE
FORCE
ACQUIRE
Figure 5-65. Background Input Setup Menu Tree
All functions and sub menus are discussed in the following sections.
218
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Background Input Setup Menu
pÜ~êÉÇ=_~ÅâÖêçìåÇ=jÉåì=cìåÅíáçåë
The figure below illustrates a sample BG Input Setup Menu, showing shared functions:
BG INPUT SETUP
Destination
BG_A
Destinat
[1]
ID
ALL
Type
DVI
N
A
V
Figure 5-66. BG Input Setup Menu (sample)
The following functions are shared — regardless of the selected background type:
•
•
Top Line — indicates the selected background button: BG_A or BG_B.
Destination — displays the currently selected destination.
Note
•
•
Different backgrounds can be assigned to different
destinations.
ID — displays the ID(s) of the selected destination’s associated Processor. Note
that with wide screen destinations, the background for each Video Processor can
be individually adjusted.
Type — selects the desired background type:
~
~
~
~
MATTE — a solid color can be used as the background. Refer to the
“Background Menu Functions — Matte Type” section on page 220 for
menu details.
DVI — a digital graphic from a computer (or other DVI source) can be
used as the background. Refer to the “Background (and DSK) Menu
Functions — DVI Type” section on page 222 for menu details.
Analog — an analog graphic from a computer (or other analog source)
can be used as the background. Refer to the “Background (and DSK)
Menu Functions — Analog Type” section on page 223.
FG_1, FG_2 or FG_3 — a frame grab can be used as the background.
Refer to the “Background (and DSK) Menu Functions — FG Type”
section on page 224 for menu details.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
219
5. Menu Orientation
Background Input Setup Menu
_~ÅâÖêçìåÇ=jÉåì=cìåÅíáçåë=Ô=j~ííÉ=qóéÉ
The figure below illustrates a sample BG Input Setup Menu when “Matte” is selected as
the background type.
BG INPUT SETUP
Destination
ID
M
A
T
T
E
Type
BG_A
[1]
[ ALL ]
N
A
V
Matte
A
D
J
S
A
V
E
Figure 5-67. BG Input Setup Menu — Matte Type (sample)
The following functions are provided for a Matte background:
•
Press {MATTE} to display the BG Matte Menu. Refer to the “BG Matte Menu”
section on page 221 for details.
•
Press {SAVE} to save the selected background input configuration.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Background Transitions” section on page 298 for instructions
on how to use a background matte in place of a graphic background.
220
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Background Input Setup Menu
_d=j~ííÉ=jÉåì
From the BG Input Setup Menu, press {MATTE} to access the BG Matte Menu.
BG MATTE
B
A
C
K
Red
0
Green
600
Blue
900
N
A
V
M
I
N
A
D
J
M
A
X
BLACK
Figure 5-68. BG Matte Menu (sample)
The Background Matte Menu enables you to create a solid background matte color to use
behind your PIPs and Keys. The system supports two separate matte colors — one for
BG_A and one for BG_B.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Red — adjusts the red component of the background matte color, from 0 to 1023.
Green — adjusts the green component of the background matte, from 0 to 1023.
Blue — adjusts the blue component of the background matte, from 0 to 1023.
Press {MIN} to change the highlighted color to 0.
Press {MAX} to change the highlighted color to 1023.
Press {BLACK} to change all three colors to 0.
In Chapter 7, refer to the “Background Transitions” section on page 298 for instructions
on how to use a background matte in place of a graphic background.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
221
5. Menu Orientation
Background Input Setup Menu
_~ÅâÖêçìåÇ=E~åÇ=aphF=jÉåì=cìåÅíáçåë=Ô=asf=qóéÉ
The figure below illustrates a sample BG Input Setup Menu when “DVI” is selected as the
background type.
Note
The functions described below also apply to the DSK Input
Setup Menu, when “DVI” is selected as the DSK type.
BG INPUT SETUP
BG_A
Destination
[1]
ID
ALL
Type
DVI
Format
Crop:
R
E
S
E
T
N
A
V
1024 x 768 @ 59.94
H Offset
[0]
V Offset
[0]
A
D
J
S
A
V
E
APPLY
FORMAT
FORCE
ACQUIRE
Figure 5-69. BG (and DSK) Input Setup Menu — DVI Type (sample)
The following functions are provided for a DVI background or DSK source:
•
Format — this line performs two functions:
~
~
•
~
~
~
222
Manually sets the resolution of the incoming source. Once the format is
selected, press {APPLY FORMAT} to “accept” and activate the format.
For the two Crop settings:
~
•
•
•
Displays the resolution that is automatically determined by the FORCE
ACQUIRE function.
If the source’s input resolution matches the output resolution, or if output
resolution is larger than input resolution, Crop settings are bracketed.
If input data is smaller than output resolution, the area around the active
data is set to black, and input data is centered in the screen.
If the source’s input resolution is larger than the output resolution, the H
Offset and V Offset values can be used to choose which portion of the
background you want to display.
Press {RESET} to reset the H and V offsets to 0.
Press {SAVE} to save the selected background input configuration.
Press {APPLY FORMAT} to “activate” the selected format.
Press {FORCE ACQUIRE} to automatically detect the input signal resolution and
update the display Format field accordingly.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Background Input Setup Menu
_~ÅâÖêçìåÇ=E~åÇ=aphF=jÉåì=cìåÅíáçåë=Ô=^å~äçÖ=qóéÉ
The figure below illustrates a sample BG Input Setup Menu when “Analog” is selected as
the background type.
Note
The functions described below also apply to the DSK Input
Setup Menu, when “Analog” is selected as the DSK type.
BG INPUT SETUP
BG_A
Destination
[1]
ID
ALL
Type
Analog
Format
Crop:
R
E
S
E
T
S
A
V
E
1024 x 768 @ 59.94
H Offset
[0]
V Offset
[0]
Contrast ( % )
100.0
Brightness ( % )
100.0
APPLY
FORMAT
N
A
V
SIZING
COLOR
BALANCE
A
D
J
FORCE
ACQUIRE
Figure 5-70. BG (and DSK) Input Setup Menu — Analog Type (sample)
Note
When you select Analog as the background type, the
following message appears: Warning! Using analog
background in edge-butted mode could possibly cause
seams, and is not recommended!
The following functions are provided for an Analog background or DSK source:
•
Format — this line performs two functions:
~
~
•
Displays the resolution that is automatically determined by the FORCE
ACQUIRE function.
Manually sets the resolution of the incoming source. Once the format is
selected, press {APPLY FORMAT} to “accept” and activate the format.
For the two Crop settings:
~
~
~
~
If the source’s input resolution matches output resolution, or if output
resolution is larger than input resolution, Crop settings will be bracketed.
If input data is smaller than output resolution, the area around the active
data is set to black, and input data is centered in the screen.
If the input resolution is larger than the output resolution, the H Offset
and V Offset values can be used to choose which portion of the
background you want to display.
Press {RESET} to reset the H and V offsets to 0.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
223
5. Menu Orientation
Background Input Setup Menu
•
Contrast — sets the input’s contrast.
~
•
Brightness — sets the input’s brightness.
~
•
•
•
•
•
Adjustment range: 75% to 125%
Adjustment range: 75% to 125%
Press {SAVE} to save the selected background input configuration.
Press {APPLY FORMAT} to “activate” the selected format.
Press {SIZING} to display the Sizing Menu. Refer to the “Sizing Menu” section
on page 145 for details.
Press {COLOR BALANCE} to display the Color Balance Menu. Refer to the
“Color Balance Menu” section on page 147 for details.
Press {FORCE ACQUIRE} to automatically detect the input signal resolution and
update the display Format field accordingly.
_~ÅâÖêçìåÇ=E~åÇ=aphF=jÉåì=cìåÅíáçåë=Ô=cd=qóéÉ
The figure below illustrates a sample BG Input Setup Menu when a captured frame grab
(FG_1, FG_2 or FG_3) is selected as the background type.
Note
The functions described below also apply to the DSK Input
Setup Menu, when FG_1, FG_2 or FG_3 is selected as the
DSK type.
BG INPUT SETUP
L
O
A
D
BG_A
Destination
[1]
ID
ALL
Type
FG_1
File to load
Name
N
A
V
[
10
Waterfall_1 ]
A
D
J
S
A
V
E
Figure 5-71. BG (or DSK) Input Setup Menu — Frame Grab Type (sample)
When FG_1, FG_2 or FG_3 is selected as the background (or DSK) type, a captured frame
can be used as the background or DSK. This source type cannot be selected until one or
more frames have been captured. Refer to the “Frame Grab Menu” section on page 225
for details.
224
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Frame Grab Menu
cê~ãÉ=dê~Ä=jÉåì
The following topics are discussed in this section:
•
•
•
•
Frame Grab Menu Tree
Frame Grab Overview
Frame Grab Menu Description
Frame Grab Sub Menus
cê~ãÉ=dê~Ä=jÉåì=qêÉÉ
The figure below illustrates the Frame Grab Menu Tree:
Frame
Grab
Frame Grab
Menu
NAME
ERASE
SAVE
DELETE
RECALL
Frame Grab
Name Menu
Frame Grab
Erase Menu
Frame Save
Menu
Frame Grab
Delete Menu
Frame Grab
Recall Menu
Destination
ID
Frame Number
Capture Format
Name
Saved Location
Saved Location
Save Location
Saved Location
Saved Location
Current Name
Name
Current Name
Name
Name
DELETE
RECALL
Format
New Name
HOME
New Name
ERASE
SAVE
CAPTURE
Confirmation
Figure 5-72. Frame Grab Menu Tree
All functions and menus are discussed in the following sections.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
225
5. Menu Orientation
Frame Grab Menu
cê~ãÉ=dê~Ä=lîÉêîáÉï
The Encore system provides complete flexibility with regard to frame grabs:
•
•
•
•
Temporary Frame Stores — The Encore Video Processor has three temporary
(temp) frame stores (FG_1, FG_2 and FG_3) which function as the three sources
from which “on-air” frames originate.
Capture Sources — All frame grabs are full screen captures. A frame can be
captured from BG A, BG B, the DSK, or any of the scaled inputs (layers).
Permanent Frame Stores — As standard, the Encore Video Processor has three
permanent (non-volatile) frame stores available.
Extended Frame Grab Option — If this “ES” option is installed, you can store
and recall 100 frames in non-volatile memory.
In Chapter 7 refer to the “Working with Frame Grabs” section on page 332 for complete
instructions on “frame grab” operations.
cê~ãÉ=dê~Ä=jÉåì=aÉëÅêáéíáçå
The figure below illustrates a sample Frame Grab Menu:
FRAME GRAB
H
O
M
E
Destination
1
ID
ALL
Frame Number
FG_1
Capture Format
N
A
M
E
N
A
V
[ 1280 x 1024 ]
A
D
J
Name
[
Company Logo ]
Format
[ 1280 x 1024 ]
E
R
A
S
E
CAPTURE
SAVE
DELETE
RECALL
Figure 5-73. Frame Grab Menu (sample)
To access the Frame Grab Menu:
•
•
On Preview, select the layer or the background source from which you want to
capture a “full screen” frame.
Press {FRAME GRAB} in the Layer Functions Section.
The Frame Grab Menu enables you to manage all aspects of frame grab operations. The
following functions are provided:
•
•
•
226
Destination — displays the currently selected destination.
ID — displays the ID(s) of the selected destination’s associated Video Processor.
Frame Number — selects “temp” frame stores:
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Frame Grab Menu
~
~
•
•
~
•
•
•
•
•
For the “bottom” stack Processor, selects BG_FG_1, BG_FG_2
or BG_FG_3).
•
For the “top” stack Processor, selects DSK_FG_1, DSK_FG_2
or DSK_FG_3).
Name — displays the name of the file in “temp” memory:
~
~
•
For “stack” systems, selects one of six “temp” frame stores:
Capture Format — displays the output resolution. Encore always captures a full
screen image at the output resolution — regardless of the input resolution.
~
•
•
For single screen and standard wide screen systems, selects one of
three “temp” frame stores (FG_1, FG_2 or FG_3). Once selected, you
can capture into the selected frame store, save it to permanent memory,
or download a frame grab from permanent storage for use on-air.
EMPTY — the frame store is completely empty, after a factory reset has
been performed.
UNSAVED_FG_[n] — the captured frame is unsaved.
SAVED_FG_[n] — the frame is saved in permanent memory, but it has
not been assigned a custom name.
[NAME] — the frame is saved in permanent memory with a custom
name, up to 23 characters in length. Spaces are allowed.
Format — displays the resolution of the frame in permanent memory.
Press {NAME} to display the Frame Grab Name Menu. Refer to the “Frame
Grab Name Menu” section on page 228 for details.
Press {ERASE} to display the Frame Erase Menu. Refer to the “Frame Erase
Menu” section on page 229 for details.
Press {CAPTURE} to capture a frame into the selected “temporary” frame store.
Once pressed, the screen indicates that the frame is being captured.
Press {SAVE} to display the Frame Save Menu. Refer to the “Frame Save
Menu” section on page 230 for details.
Press {DELETE} to display the Frame Delete Menu. Refer to the “Frame Delete
Menu” section on page 231 for details.
Press {RECALL} to display the Frame Recall Menu. Refer to the “Frame Recall
Menu” section on page 232 for details.
In Chapter 7, see the “Working with Frame Grabs” section on page 332 for details.
cê~ãÉ=dê~Ä=pìÄ=jÉåìë
The following sub menus can be accessed from the Frame Grab Menu:
•
•
•
•
•
Frame Grab Name Menu
Frame Erase Menu
Frame Save Menu
Frame Delete Menu
Frame Recall Menu
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
227
5. Menu Orientation
Frame Grab Menu
cê~ãÉ=dê~Ä=k~ãÉ=jÉåì
The Frame Grab Name Menu enables you to name a frame that has been saved to
permanent memory. A customer-supplied PS/2 keyboard is required (which connects to
the KEYBOARD port on the rear of the Controller).
Select a frame (in permanent memory) on the Frame Grab Menu, then press {NAME} to
display the Frame Grab Name Menu:
FRAME GRAB NAME
B
A
C
K
Saved Location
2
Current Name:
[
SAVED_FG_2 ]
New Name:
[
Company Pres ]
A
D
J
Enter a new name for this saved
frame grab using a PS2 keyboard
and hit enter to save it.
Figure 5-74. Frame Grab Name Menu (sample)
The following functions are provided:
•
Saved Location — indicates the saved memory location whose frame you can
name. Rotate the ADJ knob to select a location.
~
~
•
•
With standard systems, 3 saved locations are available.
With “ES” systems that have the Extended Frame Grab Option
installed, 100 saved locations are available.
Current Name — indicates the current name of the frame at the selected “saved
location.”
New Name — indicates the new frame name, as entered on the PS/2 keyboard.
To name the frame, select the desired frame, enter the new name on the keyboard, and
press ENTER on the PS/2 keyboard itself. Repeat as required to name additional frames.
228
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Frame Grab Menu
cê~ãÉ=bê~ëÉ=jÉåì
The Frame Erase Menu enables you to permanently erase a selected frame. This
“destructive” process (which locks the console) takes from 1 to 2 minutes (standard
systems), or from 20 to 30 seconds (“ES” systems).
Select a frame (in permanent memory) on the Frame Grab Menu, then press {ERASE}:
•
With standard systems, the Frame Erase Menu appears:
FRAME ERASE
System controls will be locked
for 1 to 2 minutes.
Permanently erase image?
YES
NO
Figure 5-75. Standard Frame Erase Menu (sample)
~
~
•
Press {YES} to erase the selected frame.
Press {NO} to cancel and return to the Frame Grab Menu.
With “ES” systems, the Extended Frame Erase Menu appears:
FRAME GRAB ERASE
B
A
C
K
Saved Location
Name:
2
[
SAVED_FG_2 ]
A
D
J
ERASE
Figure 5-76. Extended Frame Erase Menu (sample)
~
~
~
Saved Location — indicates the memory location whose frame you can
erase. Rotate the ADJ knob to select a location.
Name — indicates the name of the frame at the selected location.
Press {ERASE} to erase the selected frame.
Caution
Use caution when erasing frames, as there is no “undo”
function or “confirmation” menu.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
229
5. Menu Orientation
Frame Grab Menu
cê~ãÉ=p~îÉ=jÉåì
The Frame Save Menu enables you to save a selected frame grab into permanent
memory in a selected register. This process (which locks the console) takes from 1 to 2
minutes (standard systems), or from 20 to 30 seconds (“ES” systems).
Select a frame (in permanent memory) on the Frame Grab Menu, then press {SAVE}.
•
With standard systems, the Frame Save Menu appears:
FRAME SAVE
System controls will be locked
for 2 to 3 minutes.
Save Now?
YES
NO
Figure 5-77. Standard Frame Save Menu (sample)
~
~
•
Press {YES} to save the selected frame in permanent memory.
Press {NO} to cancel and return to the Frame Grab Menu.
With “ES” systems, the Extended Frame Save Menu appears:
FRAME SAVE
B
A
C
K
Saved Location
5
Current Name:
[
SAVED_FG_5 ]
New Name:
[
SAVED_FG_5 ]
A
D
J
SAVE
Figure 5-78. Extended Frame Save Menu (sample)
~
~
~
~
230
Saved Location — indicates the memory location whose frame you can
save. Rotate the ADJ knob to select a location.
Current Name — indicates the current frame name.
New Name — indicates the current frame name. If desired, type a new
name with the PS/2 keyboard, to name and save simultaneously.
Press {SAVE} to save the selected frame.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
Frame Grab Menu
cê~ãÉ=aÉäÉíÉ=jÉåì
The Frame Delete Menu enables you to mark a selected permanent frame as deleted —
but the ERASE function is still required for permanent deletion. You can consider this as a
“quick” delete function.
Select a frame (in permanent memory) on the Frame Grab Menu, then press {DELETE}.
•
With standard systems, the Frame Delete Menu appears:
FRAME DELETE
Delete Image Now?
YES
NO
Figure 5-79. Frame Delete Menu (sample)
~
~
•
Press {YES} to delete the selected frame.
Press {NO} to cancel and return to the Frame Grab Menu.
With “ES” systems, the Extended Frame Delete Menu appears:
FRAME GRAB DELETE
B
A
C
K
Saved Location
Name:
[
3
SAVED_FG_3 ]
Select the file you want to
A
D
J
delete and hit DELETE.
DELETE
Figure 5-80. Extended Frame Delete Menu (sample)
~
~
~
Saved Location — indicates the memory location whose frame you can
delete. Rotate the ADJ knob to select a location.
Name — indicates the current frame name.
Press {DELETE} to delete the selected frame.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
231
5. Menu Orientation
Frame Grab Menu
cê~ãÉ=oÉÅ~ää=jÉåì
The Frame Recall Menu enables you to recall a selected frame from permanent storage
back into temporary memory.
•
With standard systems:
~
~
•
Select the temporary frame store into which you want to recall the
associated “permanent” frame — 1 into 1, 2 into 2, etc.
Press {RECALL} to recall the selected frame. The “Recalling” popup
window appears during the procedure.
With “ES” systems:
~
~
Select the temporary frame store into which you want to recall a selected
“permanent” frame.
Press {RECALL} to display the Frame Grab Recall Menu:
FRAME GRAB RECALL
B
A
C
K
Saved Location
Name:
[
14
Product Logo 2 ]
A
D
J
Select the file that you want to
recall and hit RECALL.
RECALL
Figure 5-81. Frame Grab Recall Menu (sample)
~
~
~
232
Saved Location — indicates the memory location whose frame you can
recall. Rotate the ADJ knob to select a location.
Name — indicates the current frame name.
Press {RECALL} to recall the selected frame.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
DSK Menus
aph=jÉåìë
The following topics are discussed in this section:
•
•
•
DSK Menu Tree
DSK Adjustment Menu
DSK Input Setup Menu
aph=jÉåì=qêÉÉ
The figure below illustrates the DSK Menu Tree.
DSK
DSK
ADJUSTMENT
MENU
INPUT
SETUP
Destination
ID
Key Type (Luma)
DSK Input
Setup Menu
Key Type (Color)
Invert Mode
Red Color
Clip
Green Color
ID
Gain
Blue Color
DSK Input
Opacity
Red Threshold
Fill Source
Green Threshold
Destination
Type (None)
Type (DVI)
Type (Analog)
Type (FG)
KEY
Format
Format
KEY
Crop: H Offset
Crop: H Offset
Crop: V Offset
Crop: V Offset
Blue Threshold
STATS
Red Mask
Green Mask
MATTE
Blue Mask
SAVE
SAVE
Brightness
Opacity
KEY
Contrast
STATS
RESET
KEY
PICK
COLOR
SAVE
RESET
APPLY
FORMAT
SAVE
FORCE
ACQUIRE
APPLY
FORMAT
GRAB
COLOR
SIZING
COLOR
BALANCE
FORCE
ACQUIRE
Figure 5-82. DSK Menu Tree
All functions and sub menus are discussed in the following sections.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
233
5. Menu Orientation
DSK Menus
aph=^ÇàìëíãÉåí=jÉåì
The DSK Adjustment Menu provides the tools necessary to adjust the DSK (Downstream
Key. To access the menu:
•
Press DSK in the Layer Control Section.
The available DSK Adjustment Menu functions change, depending upon the selected
“Key Type.”
•
•
When Luma is selected, you can perform a luminance DSK. Refer to the “DSK
Luma Key Functions” section on page 234 for details.
When Color is selected, you can perform a color DSK. Refer to the “DSK Color
Key Functions” section on page 235 for details.
aph=iìã~=hÉó=cìåÅíáçåë=
A Luma (luminance) key is one in which the hole-cutting information is derived from the
luminance (brightness) level of the key source. The figure below illustrates the DSK
Adjustment Menu when Luma key is selected:
DSK ADJUSTMENT
S
T
A
T
S
Key Type
Luma
Destination
[1]
ID
ALL
Invert Mode
Off
Clip
512
Gain
7.00
Opacity
1000
Fill Source
N
A
V
A
D
J
Matte
MATTE
INPUT
SETUP
Figure 5-83. DSK Adjustment Menu — Luma (sample)
The following DSK Adjustment Menu functions are provided when Luma is selected as
the DSK type:
•
•
•
•
•
Key Type — displays the currently selected DSK type.
Destination — displays the currently selected destination (if a single destination
is selected) or enables you to select a destination (if multiple destinations are
enabled).
ID — displays the ID of the selected destination’s associated Video Processor.
Invert Mode — inverts the DSK signal.
Clip — adjusts the threshold of the video that “cuts” into the background image. A
hole will be cut into the background anywhere that foreground luminance is
greater than the clip level. The hole is then filled with the Fill Source.
~
234
Adjustment range: 0 to 1023
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
DSK Menus
•
Gain — adjusts the sensitivity of the keyer, enabling you to change the sharpness
of the keyed image. Gain only affects the key hole, as set by the clip.
~
•
Opacity — adjusts the opacity of the keyed image, from fully opaque to fully
transparent.
~
•
Adjustment range: 0 to 1023.99
Adjustment range: 0 to 1024
Fill Source — determines the video that fills the DSK hole:
~
~
Self — fills the hole with the DSK source video itself, such as the video
from a character generator.
Matte — fills the hole with a matte color, which can be adjusted with the
DSK Matte Adjustment Menu. Refer to the “Matte Menu” section on
page 207 for details.
•
Press {STATS} to display the Status Menu. Refer to the “Status Menu” section
on page 193 for details.
•
Press {INPUT SETUP} to display the DSK Input Setup Menu. Refer to the “DSK
Input Setup Menu” section on page 237 for details.
aph=`çäçê=hÉó=cìåÅíáçåë
A Color key is one in which the hole-cutting information is derived from a specific RGB
value — including luminance. The figure below illustrates the DSK Adjustment Menu
when Color key is selected:
DSK ADJUSTMENT
S
T
A
T
S
Key Type
Color
Destination
[1]
ID
ALL
Red Color
1000
Green Color
200
Blue Color
200
Red Threshold
100
Green Threshold
100
Blue Threshold
100
PICK
COLOR
N
A
V
A
D
J
INPUT
SETUP
Figure 5-84. DSK Adjustment Menu — Color (sample)
The following DSK Adjustment Menu functions are provided when Color is selected as
the DSK type:
•
•
•
•
Destination — displays the currently selected destination.
ID — displays the ID of the selected destination’s associated Encore.
Red Color — adjusts the red component of the DSK color, from 0 to 1024.
Green Color — adjusts the green component of the DSK color, from 0 to 1024.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
235
5. Menu Orientation
DSK Menus
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Red Threshold — adjusts the DSK’s clip along the Cyan vector (as demonstrated
using a CIE color chip chart).
Green Threshold — adjusts the DSK’s clip along the Magenta vector.
Blue Threshold — adjusts the DSK’s clip along the Yellow vector
Red Mask — adjusts the background mask to/from black along the Cyan vector.
Green Mask — adjusts background mask to/from black along the Magenta vector.
Blue Mask — adjusts background mask to/from black along the Yellow vector.
Opacity — adjusts the opacity of the keyed image, from fully opaque to fully
transparent. Adjustment range is 0 to 1024.
•
Press {STATS} to display the Status Menu. Refer to the “Status Menu” section
on page 193 for details.
•
Press {PICK COLOR} to choose the keying color visually. Once pressed, the
{GRAB COLOR} label appears, and a crosshair appears on Preview. Use the
Joystick to move the crosshair around the Preview monitor as desired.
•
•
236
Blue Color — adjusts the blue component of the DSK color, from 0 to 1024.
Press {GRAB COLOR} to select the color directly under the crosshair. These
values are immediately mapped into the Red, Green and Blue color fields on the
menu, and can be adjusted with the knobs in the normal manner.
Press {INPUT SETUP} to display the DSK Input Setup Menu. Refer to the “DSK
Input Setup Menu” section on page 237 for details.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
5. Menu Orientation
DSK Menus
aph=fåéìí=pÉíìé=jÉåì
The figure below illustrates a sample DSK Input Setup Menu:
DSK INPUT SETUP
Destination
[1]
ID
ALL
DSK Input
K
E
Y
1B
Type
DVI
Format
R
E
S
E
T
N
A
V
1280 x 1024 @60
Crop: H Offset
0
V Offset
0
A
D
J
S
A
V
E
APPLY
FORMAT
FORCE
ACQUIRE
Figure 5-85. DSK Input Setup Menu (sample)
The DSK Input Setup Menu enables you to set up the DSK input. The menu changes
depending on the selected input “type.”
The following three menu functions are shared — regardless of the selected DSK type:
•
•
•
Destination — displays the currently selected destination.
ID — displays the ID(s) of the selected destination’s associated Video Processor.
DSK Input — enables you to select the input connector from which the DSK
source is pulled.
The following function changes the menu parameters:
•
Type — selects the desired DSK type:
~
Tip
~
Note
None — the DSK circuitry for a selected Processor (as chosen with the
ID field), is off.
This selection is recommended when a DSK is only needed
on the last screen in a widescreen configuration (such as a
bug), and when only a single head graphics card is required.
DVI — a digital graphic from a computer or other DVI source is the DSK
Source. Refer to the “Background (and DSK) Menu Functions — DVI
Type” section on page 222.
When “DVI” is selected, the available functions are virtually
identical to those on the BG Input Setup Menu — when
“DVI” is selected as the background type.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
237
5. Menu Orientation
DSK Menus
~
Note
~
Note
Analog — an analog graphic from a computer or other analog source is
the DSK source. Refer to the “Background (and DSK) Menu
Functions — Analog Type” section on page 223.
When “Analog” is selected, the available functions are
virtually identical to those on the BG Input Setup Menu —
when “Analog” is selected as the type.
FG_1, FG_2, FG_3 — a temporary frame store is the DSK source. Refer
to the “Background (and DSK) Menu Functions — FG Type” section
on page 224 for menu details.
When FG_1, FG_2 or FG_3 is selected, the available
functions are virtually identical to those on the BG Input
Setup Menu — when FG_1, FG_2 or FG_3 is selected as the
background type.
Once you have reviewed all of the sections in this chapter, please continue with Chapter 6,
“System Setup” on page 239.
238
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
SK==póëíÉã=pÉíìé
få=qÜáë=`Ü~éíÉê
This chapter provides comprehensive instructions for setting up the Encore system. The
following topics are discussed:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Setup Prerequisites
System Setup Sequence
ID Setup and Remote Enable
Peripheral Power Up and Status Check
Return to Factory Default
Touch Screen Calibration
Programming EDID
Restore from Flash Memory Card
Router Setup
D/A Setup
Input Patching
Destination Setup
AUX Destination Setup
Output Format Setup
Sync Setup
Genlock Setup
Projector Setup
Background Setup
Input Setup
DSK Setup
Saving the Setup
Backup to Flash Memory Card
Note
Once you have reviewed all of the sections in this chapter,
please continue with Chapter 7, “Operations” on page 279.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
239
6. System Setup
Setup Prerequisites
pÉíìé=mêÉêÉèìáëáíÉë
Before starting to set up your Encore system, please review the following prerequisites:
•
•
•
•
•
Ensure that you are familiar with all Encore system hardware. Refer to Chapter 2,
“Hardware Orientation” on page 39 for details.
Ensure that hardware is properly installed, and that all sources, routers and
peripherals are properly connected. Refer to Chapter 3, “Hardware Installation”
on page 51 for details.
Ensure that you are familiar will all parts of the Controller — including the
functions of all buttons within the various sections. Refer to Chapter 4,
“Controller Orientation” on page 97 for details.
Ensure that you are familiar will all Encore menus and sub-menus. Refer to
Chapter 5, “Menu Orientation” on page 135 for details.
Ensure that your connection charts are complete, and readily available for
reference throughout this chapter. In Chapter 3, refer to the “Connection Charts”
section on page 80 for details.
Please note:
•
•
In this chapter, when a procedure tells you to “scroll to” a certain line, use the
rotary knob labelled NAV to move the highlight.
When a procedure tells you to “adjust” or “select” a certain parameter, use the
ADJ rotary knob.
SRC_1
HD-15
N
A
V
YPbPr
[ SMPTE ]
A
D
J
[ 1:1 ]
100.0
100.0
1.0
COLOR
BALANCE
FORCE
ACQUIRE
Figure 6-1. Menu Navigation
240
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
6. System Setup
System Setup Sequence
póëíÉã=pÉíìé=pÉèìÉåÅÉ
This section provides a top level view of the entire Encore setup procedure, plus links to
each individual sequence.
Important
For the optimum Encore setup, it is recommended that you
follow all procedures in the order outlined below.
„ Preliminary steps:
1.
“ID Setup and Remote Enable,” page 242.
2.
“Peripheral Power Up and Status Check,” page 244.
3.
“Return to Factory Default,” page 246.
„ Next, set up all menus under the MISC heading:
4.
“Touch Screen Calibration,” page 247.
5.
“Programming EDID,” page 248.
6.
“Restore from Flash Memory Card,” page 249.
„ Next, set up all menus under the System heading:
7.
“Router Setup,” page 250. Router setup
8.
“D/A Setup,” page 254. D/A setup
9.
“Input Patching,” page 255. Input Patching
10. “Destination Setup,” page 257. Destination Setup
11. “AUX Destination Setup,” page 259. Aux Destination Setup
„ Next, set up all menus under the Output heading:
12. “Output Format Setup,” page 263.
13. “Sync Setup,” page 264.
14. “Genlock Setup,” page 265.
15. “Projector Setup,” page 266.
„ Set up all background inputs, all primary sources and the DSK:
16. “Background Setup,” page 269.
17. “Input Setup,” page 271.
18. “DSK Setup,” page 274.
„ To complete your setup:
19. “Saving the Setup,” page 277.
20. “Backup to Flash Memory Card,” page 278.
All of the above procedures are covered in the following sections.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
241
6. System Setup
ID Setup and Remote Enable
fa=pÉíìé=~åÇ=oÉãçíÉ=bå~ÄäÉ=
Encore system setup: Step 1.
1
In this procedure, you will set up individual Encore Video Processor IDs. If ScreenPRO-II,
PresentationPRO-II and/or ImagePRO units are used as destinations, you will also set their
IDs and enable remote control. Each unit in your system must have a unique ID.
„ Use the following steps to set up IDs and remote control:
1.
Power up your Encore Controller, and allow it to fully boot up. This is the system’s
DHCP server.
2.
To set Encore Video Processor IDs:
a.
Using the Unit ID Selector on the rear of each Processor, set the
desired ID. Logical IDs 1 - 16 are available.
b.
If you elect to use “extended” IDs 17 - 32, use the Video Processors ID
Definition Menu to redefine the IDs. In Chapter 5, refer to the “Video
Processors ID Definition Menu” section on page 185 for details.
Important
c.
Repeat step 3 for all other Video Processors in your system.
3.
Power up all Encore Video Processors, ScreenPRO-II units, PresentationPRO-II
units and ImagePRO units in your system. This sequence enables the Encore
Controller to “serve” IP addresses to the Processors and other peripherals.
4.
To set ScreenPRO-II and PresentationPRO-II IDs and enable remote control:
a.
Ensure that the ScreenPRO-II and PresentationPRO-II units are
connected to the same Ethernet Switch as the Video Processor(s).
b.
Press {REMOTE CONTROL} on the Home Menu to access the Remote
Control Menu.
c.
Scroll to the Unit ID line, and select a unique ID. The ID range is 1 to 32.
d.
Scroll to the Remote Control/DHCP line, and enable remote control.
Note
5.
When remote control is on, the {HOME} buttons disappears,
the ScreenPRO-II (or PresentationPRO-II) front panel is
disabled, and the unit’s IP address is dynamically assigned.
All control now originates from Encore’s console.
e.
Press {SAVE} to save the system state in non-volatile memory — so that
it will return to it should power need to be cycled.
f.
Repeat step 4 for all other ScreenPRO-II and PresentationPRO-II units in
your system.
To set ImagePRO IDs and enable remote control:
a.
242
If you are setting up a “stack” configuration, the ID of the
bottom stack Video Processor must always be lower than the
ID of the top stack Processor.
Ensure that the ImagePRO units are connected to the same Ethernet
Switch as the Video Processor(s).
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
6. System Setup
ID Setup and Remote Enable
b.
c.
Ensure that the ImagePRO is running software version 2.30 or greater.
•
To verify, press SETUP > TECH SUPPORT to display the Tech
Support Menu. The version is listed on line 2.
•
Press ESC repeatedly to return to the top level.
Set the ImagePRO’s output resolution.
•
Press SETUP > OUTPUT to display the Output Menu.
•
On the output resolution line, press SEL to select the desired
resolution, then press SEL to accept.
•
Scroll to the SAVE CONFIG line and press SEL to save the
output configuration.
•
Press ESC repeatedly to return to the top level.
d.
Press SETUP > SYSTEM > ETHERNET to display the Ethernet Menu.
e.
On the MODE line, enable the function. Once enabled, a message
appears that the unit is searching for a DHCP server.
f.
Scroll to the DHCP line, and verify that DHCP is enabled. If not, enable
this function.
g.
On the IP line, confirm that an IP address has been received from the
Encore Controller.
h.
Scroll to the REMOTE CONTROL line and press SEL to display the
Barco Remote Control Menu.
i.
Scroll to the ID line and set a unique ID for the unit.
j.
Scroll to the CONNECT line and enable this function. Once enabled, a
message appears that the unit is attempting to connect, followed by a
message that a connection has been established.
Note
When remote control is on, the unit’s input switching buttons
are disabled, but you can still navigate through the menus.
All switching control now originates from Encore’s console.
k.
Scroll to the SAVE CONFIG line and press SEL to save the remote
control configuration.
l.
Press ESC repeatedly to return to the top level.
m. Repeat step 5 for all other ImagePRO units in your system.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
243
6. System Setup
Peripheral Power Up and Status Check
mÉêáéÜÉê~ä=mçïÉê=ré=~åÇ=pí~íìë=`ÜÉÅâ
Encore system setup: Step 2.
2
„ Use the following steps to power up your routers and check system status:
1.
Power up all routers in your system, and allows them to fully boot up. These are
your devices with static IP addresses.
Note
2.
Power up all additional peripherals, such as monitors and projectors.
3.
Check the Encore System Status Menu, and ensure that all devices have been
recognized. By default, this menu should appear at power up. If it is not shown,
press STATUS in the System Keypad.
4.
Check code compatibility — when the Encore Controller connects to the Video
Processor(s), ScreenPRO-II units and PresentationPRO-II units, it automatically
checks the compatibility of the code versions.
~
~
~
244
If Barco MatrixPRO series routers are connected and
powered on first, before the Controller, they will be
automatically "discovered" by the Controller.
If the Controller’s code version matches that of the Video Processor(s),
ScreenPRO-II units and PresentationPRO-II units, the System Status
Menu is shown — and you do not need to download code.
If the message “Checksum Mismatch” appears on the System Status
Menu, it is highly recommended that you download code. However, if
the Controller buttons are not flashing, then the code is compatible and
therefore usable. Please continue with the “Downloading Code”
procedure on page 245.
If the Controller’s code version is incompatible with the code version of a
Video Processor, a ScreenPRO-II or a PresentationPRO-II (or a
combination of units), all buttons will flash on the Controller console. The
System Status Menu is shown with the message “Please Upgrade.”
Please continue with the “Downloading Code” procedure on page 245.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
6. System Setup
Peripheral Power Up and Status Check
açïåäç~ÇáåÖ=`çÇÉ
When an incompatibility exists between software code versions, all buttons will flash on the
Controller console. In this situation, the System Status Menu automatically appears with
the message “Please Upgrade.”
„ Use the following steps to download code from the Controller to the target device(s),
including Video Processors, ScreenPRO-II units and PresentationPRO-II units:
1.
On the Encore Controller console, press SYSTEM > {SW VER} to display the
Software Version Menu. Any incompatibilities will be listed.
SOFTWARE VERSION
B
A
C
K
Controller
1.10
VP
1:
1.10
VP
2:
1.10
VP
3:
1.10
VP
4:
1.00
SP
5:
1.00
N
A
V
Software versions
incompatible with
Controller’s version
A
D
J
Software version mismatch!
Download device(s) software
DOWNLOAD
CODE
FORCE
DOWNLOAD
Figure 6-2. Software Version Menu (sample)
2.
Press {DOWNLOAD CODE} to begin the download process, which takes several
minutes to complete.
During the procedure, several “progress” messages are shown. When the entire
procedure is complete, the Download Code Results Menu displays a summary
of the download. Please note:
~
~
~
3.
Results may appear on multiple pages.
If required, press {PG DN} and {PG UP} to move between pages.
Press {DETAILS} to view additional information for a specific download.
After the upgrade process is complete, perform a complete factory reset on the
Controller and any Processors and/or ScreenPRO-IIs that the Controller detects.
Refer to the “Return to Factory Default” section on page 246 for instructions.
At the conclusion of the procedure, each Video Processor, ScreenPRO-II, and
PresentationPRO-II is running the same version of code as the Encore Controller.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
245
6. System Setup
Return to Factory Default
oÉíìêå=íç=c~Åíçêó=aÉÑ~ìäí
Encore system setup: Step 3.
3
Prior to performing any setup procedures, it is recommended that you perform a factory
reset — in order to reset all router tables and source mappings. The procedure guarantees
that any previous setups (e.g., those that may have been programmed by other users), do
not remain in system memory.
S Prerequisite — Ensure that you are familiar with the Reset Menu. In
Chapter 5, refer to the “System Reset Menu” section on page 159.
„ Use the following steps to return the system to factory default values:
246
1.
In the System Keypad, press SYSTEM to display the System Menu.
2.
Press {RESET} to display the Reset Menu.
3.
On the Device line, select CTRLR + VP + SP.
4.
On the Reset Option line, select All VPs and SPs
5.
On the Reset Type line, select FACTORY.
6.
Press {RESET}. When the Reset Confirmation screen appears, press {YES} to
delete all user configurations and reset the system to factory default values.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
6. System Setup
Touch Screen Calibration
qçìÅÜ=pÅêÉÉå=`~äáÄê~íáçå
Encore system setup: Step 4.
4
The calibration procedure is an excellent starting point prior to setup.
S Prerequisite — Ensure that you are familiar with the LCD Settings Menu. In
Chapter 5, refer to the “LCD Settings Menu” section on page 186.
„ Use the following steps to calibrate your Touch Screen display(s):
1.
In the System Keypad, press MISC to display the Miscellaneous Menu.
2.
Press {LCD SETTINGS} to display the LCD Settings Menu.
3.
Press {LCD CAL} to display the Touch Screen Calibration Menu.
4.
(Controller LC only) On the top LCD line, select the LCD touchscreen that you
want to calibrate.
5.
Follow the directions on the menu to complete the calibration procedure.
6.
(Controller LC only) Repeat steps 1 through 5 for the other LCD touchscreen.
7.
For both Controllers, use the controls on the LCD Settings Menu to adjust
brightness and contrast as desired.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
247
6. System Setup
Programming EDID
mêçÖê~ããáåÖ=bafa
Encore system setup: Step 5
5
The EDID (Extended Display Identification Data) programming procedure is a prerequisite
for background and DSK setup. The procedure guarantees proper communications at the
preferred resolution between Encore’s DVI inputs and your system’s PCs.
S Prerequisite — Ensure that you are familiar with the EDID DVI Input Format
Menu. In Chapter 5, refer to the “EDID DVI Input Format Menu” section on
page 183.
„ Use the following steps to program Encore’s EDID:
1.
Ensure that Encore’s output format matches your projector’s native resolution. In
Chapter 5, refer to the “Output Menu Functions” section on page 150 for details.
2.
Ensure that the computer(s) that you wish to use as background and DSK
source(s) are capable of supporting the selected output resolution.
3.
Ensure that all DVI inputs to each Video Processor are disconnected.
4.
In the System Keypad, press MISC to access the Miscellaneous Menu.
5.
Press {EDID} to display the EDID DVI Input Format Menu.
6.
On the Destination line, select the individual destination whose EDID you wish to
program, or select ALL if all destinations will be using the same resolution.
7.
Note the Current EDID format line, which displays the EDID format that resides
in memory. If this format is already set to the desired resolution, no programming
is required. You can exit this procedure, and continue with the next setup step.
8.
If a new resolution is required, scroll to the Format line and use the ADJ knob to
select the preferred EDID format.
9.
Press {PROGRAM EDID} to display a warning message. Press {CONTINUE} to
continue with the procedure.
10. Once EDID programming is complete, reconnect each external computer and
power it back on.
11. On each PC’s desktop, right-click to display the Display Properties Window.
12. Select the Settings Tab, and verify that the PC’s resolution matches that which
you just programmed into EDID. If not, set the resolution as required.
13. Repeat steps 6 through 12 for each additional Encore destination.
248
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
6. System Setup
Restore from Flash Memory Card
oÉëíçêÉ=Ñêçã=cä~ëÜ=jÉãçêó=`~êÇ
Encore system setup: Step 6 (optional)
6
In this procedure, you will restore your system configuration from flash memory — provided
that you previously backed up your system to the flash memory card.
S Prerequisite — Ensure that you are familiar with the Backup/Restore
Menu. In Chapter 5, refer to the “Backup/Restore Menu” section on
page 188 for details.
„ Use the following steps to restore your system from the flash memory card:
1.
Ensure that your flash memory card is properly inserted in the Controller’s
MEMORY CARD slot.
2.
In the System Keypad, press MISC to access the Miscellaneous Menu.
3.
Press {BACKUP RESTORE} to display the Backup/Restore Menu.
4.
Press {CHECK CARD} to display the Current Backup Menu.
~
~
~
Check the “Controller files backed up” section to confirm the types of
files present on the Flash Memory Card (e.g., System, Presets,
ScreenPRO-II).
Check the “VP/SPs backed up” section to confirm the IDs of the
processors that are backed up.
Press {BACK} to return to the Backup/Restore Menu.
5.
On the Device line, select Ctrlr+VP+SP to perform a complete “restore.”
6.
On the Controller Options line, select All.
7.
On the VP/SP to Restore line, select All.
8.
Press {RESTORE} to restore the selected system configuration.
At the conclusion of this procedure, your system is completely set up — exactly the way
that you left it when you performed a complete system “backup.” No further setup
operations are required.
Please continue with system operations. Refer to the “Operations” chapter on page 279
for details.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
249
6. System Setup
Router Setup
oçìíÉê=pÉíìé
Encore system setup: Step 7
S Prerequisites — Ensure that you are familiar with the following menus:
7
~
~
~
Router Specification Menu. In Chapter 5, refer to the “Router
Specification Menu” section on page 174.
Comm Setup Menu. In Chapter 5, refer to the “Comm Setup Menus”
section on page 175.
Output Patch Menu. In Chapter 5, refer to the “Output Patch Menu”
section on page 178.
„ Use the following steps to set up your system’s routers:
1.
Ensure that your router(s) are properly connected to the Encore system. In
Chapter 3, refer to the “Installation” section on page 54 for details.
2.
For Ethernet controlled routers, ensure that your router’s protocol is supported.
The list of supported manufacturers currently includes the Folsom MatrixPro
series, and routers from Sierra, Extron, Leitch, Isis, DVILink and DPI.
3.
For Ethernet controlled routers, ensure that you know each router’s IP address. If
required, preset the IP addresses at the routers themselves. Refer to each
router’s User’s Guide for instructions.
Note that MatrixPRO routers default to the following IP addresses:
~
~
~
MatrixPRO Analog Router: 192.168.0.241
MatrixPRO SDI Router: 192.168.0.242
MatrixPRO DVI Router: 192.168.0.243
4.
In the System Keypad, press SYSTEM to display the System Menu.
5.
Press {ROUTER SETUP} to display the Router Specification Menu.
6.
On the Number line, select the number that you wish to assign to this router.
Note
This is an arbitrary number used for associating the router
with a configuration file. Encore provides an available “pool”
of 8 devices from which you can assign routers and D/As.
7.
On the Manufacturer line, select the router manufacturer.
8.
On the Router Type line, select the type of router being used.
9.
On the Number of Inputs line, select the router’s input count.
10. On the Number of Outputs line, select the routers’ output count.
11. On the Communication Type line, select the type of communication that you are
using to connect to the router: RS-232, Ethernet or Lantronix.
12. Press {ADD NEW} to save the router’s specification.
13. Press {COMM SETUP} to display the appropriate communications setup menu for
the selected device.
14. For Ethernet controlled routers, verify that the IP Address field matches the
router’s IP address. If not, use the ADJ knob in conjunction with the {NEXT IP
QUAD} button to change the address as required.
250
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
6. System Setup
Router Setup
15. Test communications:
~
~
For serial and Ethernet controlled routers, press {TEST COMM}.
For Lantronix devices, press {DISCOVER LTRX}. Note that {TEST
COMM} can be used for Routers connected to Lantronix devices once
the Lantronix device has been discovered and properly set up.
Note
If the message “Communication Failed” appears, take the
necessary actions to rectify the communications error and
repeat this step.
16. Press {BACK} to return to the Router Specification Menu.
17. Press {OUTPUT PATCH} to display the Output Patch Menu for the selected
router. On the top line, confirm the router name.
Standard (non-stack) configurations — please note:
~
~
~
On a 3 M/E Video Processor, the first six router outputs have been
automatically patched to inputs 1A through 3B respectively.
On a 2 M/E Video Processor, the first four router outputs have been
automatically patched to inputs 1A through 2B respectively.
On a 1 M/E Video Processor, the first two router outputs have been
automatically patched to inputs 1A and 1B.
The table below illustrates the default router output patch for standard (non-stack)
configurations:
Table 6-1. Default output patch table — standard configurations
Router Output
VP Input
Mixer Layer
1
1A
3A
2
1B
3B
3
2A
2A
4
2B
2B
5
3A
1A
6
3B
1B
7
Undefined
Undefined
8
Undefined
Undefined
If you have a Folsom MatrixPro Router and you connect the router outputs per
the table above, no setup is necessary on the Output Patch Menu — unless you
specifically want to patch the outputs in a different way. This “default”
configuration is ideal for most single-screen applications with one Processor, or
wide screen applications with multiple Processors.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
251
6. System Setup
Router Setup
Stack configurations — please note:
~
~
Stacking is only available with the Controller LC.
When using a router with a single or wide screen “stack” configuration,
router outputs are required to go to all physical inputs for both the bottom
and top Processors, provided that all inputs are required to go to any
available layers.
The table below illustrates the default router output patch for a "stack"
configuration, where VP 2 is the “Top” Processor, and VP 1 is the “Bottom”
Processor:
Table 6-1. Default output patch table
Router Output
VP ID
VP Input
Mixer Layer
1
2
1A
6A
2
2
1B
6B
3
2
2A
5A
4
2
2B
5B
5
2
3A
4A
6
2
3B
4B
7
1
1A
3A
8
1
1B
3B
9
1
2A
2A
10
1
2B
2B
11
1
3A
1A
12
1
3B
1B
18. To patch router outputs, use the following steps:
a.
On the Router Output line, select the output that you want to patch.
b.
If you are uncertain about the current patch, or if you want to remove the
current (existing) patch and start clean, press {DELETE PATCH}.
c.
On the Device ID line, select the Encore Processor or ScreenPRO-II ID
to which you want to patch the selected router output.
d.
On the VP Input line, select the specific Encore Processor or
ScreenPRO-II input to which you want to patch the selected output.
e.
Press {ADD PATCH} to confirm your changes. The new “mapping”
appears on the menu.
f.
Repeat step 18 for all remaining router outputs that you wish to patch.
19. To designate a router output as an “Aux” output:
252
a.
On the Router Output line, select the specific output that you want to
designate as an Aux output.
b.
If you are uncertain about the current patch, or if you want to remove the
current (existing) patch and start clean, press {DELETE PATCH}.
c.
On the Device ID line, select None.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
6. System Setup
Router Setup
d.
Press {ADD PATCH} to confirm the change.
e.
Repeat step 19 to designate additional Aux outputs.
20. Press {BACK} to return to the Router Specification Menu.
21. Repeat from step 6 for the next router that you wish to assign.
22. When you have configured all of your system’s routers, on the Router
Specification Menu, scroll to the Number line, and scan through the remaining
router numbers. Other than the ones which you just assigned, if there are any
router numbers that do not say <EMPTY> on the Number line, press {DELETE
ROUTER} to remove the specification from the system.
23. In the System Keypad, press SAVE to save the current configuration.
Note
When you press the SAVE button, router specifications will be
saved only if changes have not previously been written to
Flash memory.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
253
6. System Setup
D/A Setup
aL^=pÉíìé
Encore system setup: Step 8
S Prerequisites — Ensure that you are familiar with the following menus:
8
~
~
Router Specification Menu. In Chapter 5, refer to the “Router
Specification Menu” section on page 174.
Output Patch Menu. In Chapter 5, refer to the “Output Patch Menu”
section on page 178.
„ Use the following steps to set up a D/A (Distribution Amplifier):
1.
Ensure that the outputs from the analog, SDI or DVI D/A that you wish to set up
are properly (physically) connected to the desired Video Processor or
ScreenPRO-II inputs. There are no communications connections required from
Encore to the D/A.
2.
In the System Keypad, press SYSTEM to display the System Menu.
3.
Press {ROUTER SETUP} to display the Router Specification Menu.
4.
On the Number line, select the number that you wish to assign to the D/A.
Note
This is an arbitrary number used for associating the D/A with
a configuration file. Encore provides an available “pool” of 8
devices from which you can assign routers and D/As.
5.
Press {DELETE ROUTER} to clear any existing specification from memory.
6.
On the Router Type line, select the type of D/A that you wish to set up (e.g., D/A
SDI, D/A ANALOG). The Number of Inputs line defaults to [1].
7.
On the Number of Outputs line, set the number of D/A outputs available.
8.
Press {ADD NEW} to save the D/A’s specification.
9.
Press {OUTPUT PATCH} to display the Output Patch Menu for the selected D/A.
10. On the Router Output line, select the D/A output that you want to patch.
11. On the Device ID line, select the Video Processor or ScreenPRO-II ID to which
you want to patch the selected D/A output.
12. On the VP Input line (or the SP Input line), select the specific Video Processor or
ScreenPRO-II input to which you want to patch the selected D/A output.
13. Press {ADD PATCH} to confirm your changes.
14. Repeat steps 10 through 13 for all remaining D/A outputs that you wish to patch.
15. Press {BACK} to return to the Router Specification Menu.
16. Repeat steps 4 through 15 for the next D/A that you wish to assign.
17. In the System Keypad, press SAVE to save the current configuration.
254
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
6. System Setup
Input Patching
fåéìí=m~íÅÜáåÖ
Encore system setup: Step 9
S Prerequisites — Ensure that you are familiar with the Input Source Patch
9
Menu. In Chapter 5, refer to the “Input Source Patch Menu” section on
page 172.
This procedure enables you to associate (patch) specific router inputs to specific source
buttons on the Controller, and also assign tally connections. This procedure is also used
for assigning “direct” connections (from PCs or video sources) to source buttons.
•
•
On the Controller SC, up to 24 inputs can be assigned.
On the Controller LC, up to 64 inputs can be assigned.
Important
You may not need to change the input patches if you elect to
use those in the default Input Patch Table.
Encore creates a unique “Input Patch Table” for each default router. After a factory reset,
the Input Patch Table defaults to the following settings:
Table 6-2. Default input patch table after factory reset
Router
Number
Router
Name
Router
Type
Router
Sources:
Map to
Encore Sources:
Encore
Tally
Controller LC
1
MatrixPRO1
Analog
1 - 16
1 - 16
1 - 8 defined only
2
MatrixPRO2
SDI
17 - 32
17 - 32
Undefined
3
MatrixPRO3
DVI
33 - 48
33 - 48
Undefined
Controller SC
1
MatrixPRO1
Analog
1 - 16
1 - 16
1 - 8 defined only
2
MatrixPRO2
SDI
17 - 24
17 - 24
Undefined
3
MatrixPRO3
DVI
Undefined
N/A
Undefined
You may elect to use the default patches as shown above, or you can create custom
patches as required for specific input configurations.
Tip
The same router input can be patched to one (or more)
source numbers. For example, if you want to use a DVD
player in both 16:9 and 4:3 formats, patch the DVD to inputs
10 and 42 (the shifted source 10). Using the input setup
procedure, set up each input for the desired aspect ratio.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
255
6. System Setup
Input Patching
„ Use the following steps to patch inputs to specific source buttons:
1.
In the System Keypad, press SYSTEM to display the System Menu.
2.
Press {INPUT PATCH} to display the Input Source Patch Menu.
3.
On the Source Number line, select the source button on the Controller that you
want to patch.
4.
(Optional) If required, press {DELETE PATCH} to clear all registers for a selected
source button. This enables you to start again with an “undefined” patch.
5.
On the Connection Type line, select the router, ScreenPRO-II or the physical
connector that you want the selected button to communicate with. Four options
are available:
~
~
~
~
6.
7.
9.
Select a DIRECT SDI, Analog or DVI connection.
Select an individual ScreenPRO-II ID (e.g., SP 9).
Select ALL SP. This selection assumes connections from D/As to similar
inputs on all ScreenPRO-IIs in your system.
If you selected a router:
a.
On the Router Input line, select the physical router input that you wish to
associate with the source button.
b.
Continue with step 10.
If you selected a DIRECT connection:
a.
On the ID line, choose the ID of the Video Processor or ScreenPRO-II
that you want to address.
b.
Select the input to which the source is physically connected:
c.
8.
Select a router by name (e.g., MatrixPRO1).
•
If you chose the ID of a Video Processor, on the VP Input line,
select the specific M/E input connector on the Processor
•
If you chose the ID of a ScreenPRO-II, on the SP Input line,
select the specific input connector on the ScreenPRO-II.
Continue with step 10.
If you selected an individual ScreenPRO-II ID:
a.
On the SP Input line, select the specific input connector on the
ScreenPRO-II.
b.
Continue with step 10.
If you selected ALL SP:
a.
On the ScreenPRO-II Input line, select the “common” input connector
on all ScreenPRO-IIs to which the sources are physically connected.
b.
Continue with step 10.
10. On the Tally Number line, select the tally that you want to associate with the
source button. (If tallies are not connected, in Appendix A, refer to the “Tally
Connector” section on page 351 for pinout details.)
11. Press {ADD PATCH} to confirm your changes.
12. Repeat the procedure from step 3 to patch additional Controller buttons.
13. Press {BACK} to return to the System Menu.
14. In the System Keypad, press SAVE to save the new configuration in memory.
256
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
6. System Setup
Destination Setup
aÉëíáå~íáçå=pÉíìé
Encore system setup: Step 10
10
In this procedure, you will set up the Encore system’s single and wide screen destinations.
Once assigned, the associated button(s) on the Destination Bus will be active.
S Prerequisites — Ensure that you are familiar with the Destination Setup
Menu. In Chapter 5, refer to the “Destination Setup Menu” section on
page 166 for details.
Note
On the Controller SC, up to 6 destinations can be assigned.
On the Controller LC, up to 32 destinations can be assigned.
The following topics are discussed:
•
•
Standard and Stack Destination Setup
ScreenPRO-II Destination Setup
pí~åÇ~êÇ=~åÇ=pí~Åâ=aÉëíáå~íáçå=pÉíìé
„ Use the following steps to set up a standard or stack destination:
1.
In the System Keypad, press SYSTEM to access the System Menu.
2.
Press {DEST SETUP} to display the Destination Setup Menu.
3.
On the Destination line, select the destination that you want to define.
4.
(Optional) If desired, press {REMOVE ALL} to remove all previously assigned
Video Processors (VPs) from the selected destination.
5.
Scroll to the Type line, and select one of four “standard” and “stack” destinations:
~
~
Note
Single Screen VP, Wide Screen VP
Single Screen VP Stack, Wide Screen VP Stack
Stacking is only available with the Controller LC.
6.
Scroll to the VP to Add line, and select the ID of the Processor that you want to
assign to the selected destination.
7.
Press {ADD} to add the highlighted Processor. Once added, the ID appears in the
bottom portion of the menu. Please note:
~
~
~
For a Single Screen configuration, add only one VP.
For a Wide Screen configuration, add as many VPs as required.
For a single or wide screen Stack, VPs are added in pairs.
8.
If required, scroll to the VP to Remove line, select the ID of a Processor that you
want to remove from the destination, and press {REMOVE}.
9.
Repeat from step 3 to define additional “standard” and “stack” destinations.
This completes the procedure for defining “standard” and “stack” destinations. The
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
257
6. System Setup
Destination Setup
selected buttons on the Destination Bus are now active.
Note
Encore can create destinations with Processors that do not
have the same number of M/Es — in which case, the system
operates at the lowest common denominator of M/Es.
pÅêÉÉåmolJff=aÉëíáå~íáçå=pÉíìé
In this procedure, you will set up ScreenPRO-II systems as single screen destinations.
Once assigned, the associated button(s) on the Destination Bus will be active.
S Prerequisites — Ensure that you are familiar with the ways in which a
ScreenPRO-II system can be physically configured as a destination. In
Appendix D, refer to the “ScreenPRO-II Configurations” section on
page 367 for details.
„ Use the following steps to set up a ScreenPRO-II destination:
1.
In the System Keypad, press SYSTEM to access the System Menu.
2.
Press {DEST SETUP} to display the Destination Setup Menu.
3.
On the Destination line, select the destination that you want to define.
4.
(Optional) If desired, press {REMOVE ALL} to remove all previously assigned
Video Processors (VPs) from the selected destination.
5.
Scroll to the Type line and select Single Screen SP.
6.
Scroll to the SP to Add line and select the ScreenPRO-II ID that you wish to add.
7.
Press {ADD} to add the highlighted ScreenPRO-II. Once added, the ID appears
in the bottom portion of the menu.
8.
If required, scroll to the SP to Remove line, select the ID of the ScreenPRO-II that
you want to remove from the destination, and press {REMOVE}.
9.
Scroll to the Routing Mode line, and select either Internal or External —
depending on the way that you want to configure your source routing.
10. Repeat from step 3 for each additional ScreenPRO-II destination that you want to
set up.
This completes the procedure for defining ScreenPRO-II destinations. The selected
buttons on the Destination Bus are now active. Please note:
•
•
258
When a ScreenPRO II destination uses “external” routing, the OUTPUT PATCH
table for the external router allows you to choose which analog input on the
ScreenPRO II is being used by the router output. These procedures are covered
in the Router Setup section.
When a ScreenPRO II destination uses internal routing, you can patch individual
inputs, or you can define selected source buttons to use the same input for all
ScreenPRO IIs. This method is ideal if you are using D/As to connect sources to
similar inputs on each ScreenPRO-II. These procedures are covered in the Input
Patching section.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
6. System Setup
AUX Destination Setup
^ru=aÉëíáå~íáçå=pÉíìé
Encore system setup: Step 11
11
In this procedure, you will set up the system’s Aux (Auxiliary) destinations.
S Prerequisites — Ensure that you are familiar with the following menus:
~
~
Destination Setup Menu. In Chapter 5, refer to the “Destination Setup
Menu” section on page 166.
Aux Destination Setup Menu. In Chapter 5, refer to the “Aux Setup
Menu” section on page 168.
The following topics are discussed:
•
•
•
•
Aux Destination Overview
Aux Destination Setup
ImagePRO or PrePRO-II Aux Destination Setup
Aux Destination Setup Notes
^ìñ=aÉëíáå~íáçå=lîÉêîáÉï
Encore provides three types of Aux destinations: Aux, ImagePRO Aux and PrePRO-II
Aux. Each type of destination can be switched from the Controller by selecting it on the
Destination Bus, and then selecting the desired source on the Source Selection Bus.
•
•
•
An Aux destination is the output of a router, which is typically connected directly to
a monitor — rather than to a Video Processor. This type of destination is single
format (e.g., an analog monitor can only accept signals from an analog router).
An ImagePRO Aux destination is an external ImagePRO unit, a multi-format
processor with three inputs (one analog, one SDI and one DVI) and the ability to
scale these inputs to one common output format. Typically, the ImagePRO output
is connected to another display device such as a monitor or projector.
A PrePRO-II Aux destination is an external PresentationPRO-II unit, a multiformat processor with nine inputs (eight analog and one SDI), and the ability to
scale these inputs to one common output format. Similar to the ImagePRO, the
PrePRO-II output is connected to another display device such as a monitor.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
259
6. System Setup
AUX Destination Setup
^ìñ=aÉëíáå~íáçå=pÉíìé
This section provides instructions for setting up an Aux destination.
„ Use the following steps to set up an Aux destination:
1.
Ensure that you have properly configured one (or more) router outputs as “Aux”
outputs. If not, refer to the “Router Setup” section on page 250 for instructions.
Step 19 deals specifically with Aux output setup.
2.
In the System Keypad, press SYSTEM to access the System Menu.
3.
Press {DEST SETUP} to display the Destination Setup Menu.
4.
On the Destination line, select the Aux destination that you want to define.
Note
On the Controller SC, up to 6 destinations can be assigned.
On the Controller LC, up to 32 destinations can be assigned.
5.
Scroll to the Type line and select Aux.
6.
Press {AUX SETUP} to display the Aux Setup Menu.
7.
On the Source Mapping line, two choices are available:
~
~
Select Input Patch if you want to map Aux sources according to how
inputs are patched to buttons on the Source Selection Bus. Note that
this is the typical choice.
Select Direct Map if you want the Source Selection bus to be a 1:1
mapping of your router inputs — for this Aux destination only.
8.
On the Router Name line, select the router on which you configured the Aux
output(s).
9.
On the Router Output line, select the specific router output that you wish to
designate as the Aux destination. Note that only outputs configured as “Aux” will
appear in the list.
10. Press {BACK} to return to the Destination Setup Menu.
11. Repeat from step 4 to configure additional Aux outputs.
12. Press {BACK} to return to the System Menu.
13. In the System Keypad, press SAVE to save the system configuration in memory.
This completes the procedure for defining Aux destinations. The selected button(s) on the
Destination Bus are now active.
260
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
6. System Setup
AUX Destination Setup
fã~ÖÉmol=çê=mêÉmolJff=^ìñ=aÉëíáå~íáçå=pÉíìé
This section provides instructions for setting up ImagePRO Aux and PrePRO-II Aux
destinations. Once assigned, the associated button(s) on the Controller’s Destination
Bus will be active.
S Prerequisites — Ensure that you are familiar with the ways in which
ImagePRO and PresentationPRO-II systems can be physically configured as
Aux destinations. In Appendix D:
~
~
Refer to the “PresentationPRO-II Aux Configuration” section on
page 372 for PresentationPRO-II details.
Refer to the “ImagePRO Aux Configuration” section on page 373 for
ImagePRO details.
„ Use the following steps to set up an ImagePRO or PrePRO-II Aux destination:
1.
Ensure that your ImagePRO and/or PresentationPRO-II systems are properly
connected to the system Switch via Ethernet. If not, in Chapter 3, refer to the
“Installation” section on page 54 for instructions.
2.
Ensure that you have properly configured one (or more) router outputs as “Aux”
outputs. If not, refer to the “Router Setup” section on page 250 for instructions.
Step 19 deals specifically with Aux output setup.
3.
In the System Keypad, press SYSTEM to access the System Menu.
4.
Press {DEST SETUP} to display the Destination Setup Menu.
5.
On the Destination line, select the Aux destination that you want to define.
Note
On the Controller SC, up to 6 destinations can be assigned.
On the Controller LC, up to 32 destinations can be assigned.
6.
Scroll to the Type line and select ImagePRO Aux or PrePRO-II Aux.
7.
Press {AUX SETUP} to display the Aux Setup Menu.
8.
On the Source Mapping line, two choices are available:
~
~
9.
Select Input Patch if you want to map Aux sources according to how
inputs are patched to buttons on the Source Selection Bus. Note that
this is the typical choice.
Select Direct Map if you want the Source Selection bus to be a 1:1
mapping of your router inputs — for this Aux destination only.
On the ID line, select the ID of the ImagePRO or PrePRO-II to which you want to
route Aux sources.
10. In the Analog section:
a.
On the Analog Router Name line, select the router from which analog
sources will be routed to the ImagePRO (or PrePRO-II).
b.
On the Analog Router Output line, select the specific router output that
you designated as an Aux output.
c.
On the ImagePRO Input (or PrePRO-II Input) line, select the
ImagePRO or PrePRO-II input to which the analog router output is
connected.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
261
6. System Setup
AUX Destination Setup
11. In the SDI section:
a.
On the SDI Router Name line, select the router from which SDI sources
will be routed to the ImagePRO (or PrePRO-II).
b.
On the SDI Router Output line, select the specific router output that you
designated as an Aux output.
c.
On the ImagePRO Input (or PrePRO-II Input) line, select the
ImagePRO or PrePRO-II input to which the SDI router output is
connected.
12. In the DVI section (applies to ImagePRO Aux destinations only):
a.
On the DVI Router Name line, select the router from which DVI sources
will be routed to the ImagePRO.
b.
On the DVI Router Output line, select the specific router output that you
designated as an Aux output.
c.
On the ImagePRO Input line, select the ImagePRO input to which the
DVI router output is connected.
13. Press {BACK} to return to the Destination Setup Menu.
14. Repeat from step 5 to configure another ImagePRO or PrePRO-II Aux
destination.
15. Press {BACK} to return to the System Menu.
16. In the System Keypad, press SAVE to save the new system configuration.
This completes the procedure for defining ImagePRO or PrePRO-II Aux destinations. The
selected button(s) on the Destination Bus are now active.
^ìñ=aÉëíáå~íáçå=pÉíìé=kçíÉë
Please note the following important points regarding Aux Destination Setup:
•
•
•
ImagePRO and PrePRO-II output setups must be performed locally on the units
themselves.
Only one router of each type (Analog, DVI and SDI) can be connected to an
ImagePRO unit.
In order to ensure that the ImagePRO and PresentationPRO-II units properly
process each input, an Input Configuration File must be created for each input.
This function is accomplished with the Controller’s automatic “Copy Down”
feature, which is initiated by setting up your Processor and ScreenPRO-II inputs.
As you progress through the entire setup sequence, ensure that you complete the
“Input Setup” procedure on page 271 to guarantee a “Copy Down.”
Note
262
In general, a “Copy Down” takes place automatically to all
destinations that are currently defined to be connected to a
given router.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
6. System Setup
Output Format Setup
lìíéìí=cçêã~í=pÉíìé
Encore system setup: Step 12
S Prerequisites — Ensure that you are familiar with the Output Menu. In
12
Chapter 5, refer to the “Output Menu Functions” section on page 150.
In this procedure, you will configure the output format for each Video Processor and
ScreenPRO-II that is used in your system.
Important
Be sure to select your projector’s native resolution and a
frame rate that is consistent with your inputs — for example, if
you are using 59.94 NTSC video inputs, run the output at the
same rate in order to be synchronous.
To guarantee absolute "sync" of Input vs. Output, ensure
that you genlock the Video Processors. Refer to the
“Genlock Setup” section on page 265 for details.
„ Use the following steps to set up the Encore output format:
1.
On the Destination Bus, select the destination that you want to configure.
2.
In the System Keypad, press OUTPUT to display the Output Menu. At least one
destination must be active in order to access the menu.
3.
On the Format line, select the resolution and frame rate at which you want to
drive the destination’s projector(s). To minimize synchronization problems, select
a frame rate that is consistent with your input sources.
4.
Press {APPLY FORMAT} to accept the selection.
5.
Repeat from step 2 to set additional destination output formats.
6.
In the System Keypad, press SAVE to save the new configuration in memory.
Note
Automatic "Saves" occur as necessary, for example, when
you change output resolutions.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
263
6. System Setup
Sync Setup
póåÅ=pÉíìé
Encore system setup: Step 13
S Prerequisites — Ensure that you are familiar with the Settings Menu. In
13
Chapter 5, refer to the “Settings Menu” section on page 152.
In this procedure, you will set up sync parameters for the monitors and projectors
connected to the system — for the destination selected on the Output Menu.
Note
It is recommended that you leave the sync parameters at their
default (factory reset) values. However, should you need to
adjust individual settings for a particular monitor and projector
configuration, use the following procedure.
„ Use the following steps to set up sync parameters:
1.
In the System Keypad, press OUTPUT to display the Output Menu.
2.
On the Destination Bus, select the destination that you want to configure.
3.
Press {SETTINGS} to display the Settings Menu.
4.
On the Output Monitor line, select the device(s) that are affected by the sync
settings — All, Preview, Program 1 or Program 2.
5.
On the Sync Out line, set the desired sync value — +H+V, -H-V, +H-V, -H+V or
CSync.
6.
On the SOG line, select a specific “sync on green” signal — Off, Standard or TriLevel (for certain HD devices).
7.
On the Gamma line, set the output gamma for the selected destination.
Important
8.
On the Raster Box Size line, set the size of the raster box that appears around
PIPs and Keys. The range is 0 to 8 pixels. Note that the 0 setting effectively turns
the raster box off.
Note
9.
It is recommended that you leave Gamma at the unity setting
(1.0). Change the value only if you need to compensate for a
gamma problem in your projector or monitor.
As required, you can change the Raster Box value during
operations without affecting sync settings.
Press {BACK} to return to the Output Menu.
10. Repeat from step 2 to set sync parameters for additional destinations.
11. In the System Keypad, press SAVE to save the new configuration in memory.
264
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
6. System Setup
Genlock Setup
dÉåäçÅâ=pÉíìé
Encore system setup: Step 14
S Prerequisites — Ensure that you are familiar with the Genlock Menu. In
14
Chapter 5, refer to the “Genlock Menu” section on page 151.
In this procedure, you will set up Genlock for each destination.
„ Use the following steps to set up Genlock:
1.
In the System Keypad, press OUTPUT to display the Output Menu.
2.
On the Destination Bus, select the destination that you want to configure.
3.
Press {GLCK} to display the Genlock Menu.
4.
For all types of destinations, set the genlock source on the Source line. Choose
between Black Burst, CSync or None.
Note
When you select the Source, the Type line automatically
displays the type of genlock provided.
5.
For ScreenPRO-II destinations only, verify the setting of the ScreenPRO-II’s
Termination Switch on the Termination line. The menu prompts you how to
change this physical switch on the ScreenPRO-II itself, if required.
6.
Press {BACK} to return to the Output Menu.
7.
Repeat from step 2 to set additional destination genlock types.
8.
In the System Keypad, press {SAVE} to save the new configuration in memory.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
265
6. System Setup
Projector Setup
mêçàÉÅíçê=pÉíìé
Encore system setup: Step 15
S Prerequisites — Ensure that you are familiar with the following:
15
~
~
~
Test Pattern Menu. In Chapter 5, refer to the “Test Pattern Menu”
section on page 153.
Wide Screen Menu. In Chapter 5, refer to the “Wide Screen Settings
Menu” section on page 154.
Configurator Application. You can use the Configurator application to
assist with wide screen setup. The software is available via download
from the Barco website, or contact Barco Technical Support. In
Appendix B, refer to the “Contact Information” section on page 358.
In this section, you will set up your projectors for both single screen and widescreen
destinations. The following procedures are provided:
•
•
Single Screen Projector Setup
Wide Screen Projector Setup
páåÖäÉ=pÅêÉÉå=mêçàÉÅíçê=pÉíìé
„ Use the following steps to set up a projector for a single screen destination.
Note
This procedure also applies to a single screen “stack”
destination.
1.
In the System Keypad, press OUTPUT to display the Output Menu.
2.
On the Destination Bus, select the destination whose projector you want to
configure.
3.
Press {TEST PATTERN} to display the Test Pattern Menu.
4.
On the Output Monitor line, select the output(s) on which you want a test pattern
to appear — All, Preview, Program 1 or Program 2.
5.
On the Mode line, select On.
6.
On the Type line, select the Burst test pattern.
7.
On the Raster Box line, select On.
8.
At the projector itself, perform the following adjustments to ensure that the output
data from the selected device is properly displayed:
~
~
9.
Adjust the image for the minimum amount of noise.
Adjust the pixel clock for proper image position, such that the entire
Raster Box is visible.
On the Type line, select one of the many Gray Scale test patterns, as desired.
10. At the projector itself, adjust color balance, brightness and contrast.
Important
266
Refer to your projector’s technical manual for information on
all projector setup and adjustment procedures.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
6. System Setup
Projector Setup
11. Once the projector is properly set, turn the Raster Box and the Mode off.
12. Press {BACK} to return to the Output Menu.
13. Repeat from step 2 for additional single screen destination projector setups.
14. When all projectors for single screen destinations have been set up, press SAVE
in the System Keypad to save the new configuration in memory.
táÇÉ=pÅêÉÉå=mêçàÉÅíçê=pÉíìé
„ Use the following steps to set up projectors for a wide screen application. This
procedure affects all projectors assigned to the selected destination.
Note
1.
This procedure also applies to a wide screen “stack”
destinations.
If you elected to use the Configurator application to assist with your widescreen
setup parameters, ensure that you have completed the following steps:
a.
On the Configurator’s Show Layout Tab, click the radio buttons for the
Encore Presentation System and your desired show layout.
b.
On the Configurator’s Screen Details Tab, click the large “W” to display
the Wide Screen Parameters Window.
c.
In the Wide Screen Parameters Window, enter your screen’s H and V
dimensions and the number of projectors.
d.
Click Calculate to determine the required overlap.
e.
Make a note of these values. You will transfer them to the Controller’s
Wide Screen Settings Menu in the following steps.
2.
In the System Keypad, press OUTPUT to display the Output Menu.
3.
On the Destination Bus, select the wide screen destination whose projectors you
want to configure.
4.
Press {TEST PATTERN} to display the Test Pattern Menu.
5.
On the Output Monitor line, select the output(s) on which you want a test pattern
to appear — All, Preview, Program 1 or Program 2.
6.
On the Mode line, select On.
7.
On the Type line, select the Burst test pattern.
8.
On the Raster Box line, select On.
9.
Press {BACK} to return to the Output Menu.
10. Press {WIDE SCREEN} to display the Wide Screen Settings Menu. Note that
the Total Projectors line shows the total number of Video Processors as defined
on the Destination Setup Menu.
11. Scroll to the Total H Res line and enter the total number of horizontal pixels in the
overall wide screen display.
12. Scroll to the Background Format line and select the method by which your
background graphics were originally produced: Edge-butted or Overlapped.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
267
6. System Setup
Projector Setup
13. Scroll to the Marker Mode line and enable (or disable) the system’s wide screen
markers. If enabled, you can see the boundaries of active data on Preview.
As required, you can change the Marker Mode during
operations without affecting other wide screen settings.
Note
14. Scroll to the Overlap Width line and enter the desired overlap between
projectors. The value is in pixels.
15. Scroll to the Data Doubling line and disable data doubling.
16. Scroll to the Justification line and set the desired wide screen justification, either
Center or Left.
17. In the Feathering section, scroll to the Mode line and disable edge feathering.
18. Scroll to the Gamma line and set the gamma for the feathered regions. The
default value is 2.2.
19. At each projector, perform the following adjustments to ensure that the output data
is properly displayed:
~
~
Adjust the images for a minimum amount of noise.
Adjust the pixel clocks for proper image position, such that the entire
Raster Box is visible.
20. Press {BACK} to return to the Output Menu.
21. Press {TEST PATTERN} to display the Test Pattern Menu.
22. On the Type line, select one of the many Gray Scale test patterns, as desired.
23. At each projector, adjust brightness, contrast and color balance.
Important
Refer to your projector’s technical manual for information on
all projector setup and adjustment procedures.
24. Once each projector is properly set, scroll to the Alignment Test Pattern line and
enable the function. This special test pattern allows you to perform projector lens
shift and registration adjustments.
a.
At each projector, perform lens shift and registration adjustments.
b.
If required, adjust the horizontal and vertical “totals” to match those
entered on the Wide Screen Settings Menu.
Note
Refer to your projector’s technical manual for information on
all lens shift and registration procedures.
c.
When adjustments are complete, turn off the Alignment Test Pattern.
25. Re-enable edge feathering and data doubling (if required for your configuration).
26. Press {BACK} to return to the Output Menu.
27. Repeat from step 3 for additional wide screen destination projector setups.
28. When all projectors for wide screen destinations have been set up, press SAVE in
the System Keypad to save the new configuration in memory.
268
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
6. System Setup
Background Setup
_~ÅâÖêçìåÇ=pÉíìé
Encore system setup: Step 16
S Prerequisites — Ensure that you are familiar with the following menus:
16
~
~
Background Input Setup Menu. In Chapter 5, refer to the
“Background Input Setup Menu” section on page 217.
BG Matte Menu. In Chapter 5, refer to the “BG Matte Menu” section on
page 221.
In this procedure, you will set up the Controller’s two “background” sources (for the BG A
and BG B buttons). An Encore background can be configured as a DVI input, an analog
input, a matte color or a frame grab.
Please note the following important points:
•
•
•
For ScreenPRO-II destinations, remember that BG B and the DSK are mutually
exclusive. This occurs because the BG/DSK Input B is shared between the DSK
and BG B on all individual ScreenPRO-II units.
For single or wide screen Encore systems using single M/E Video Processors,
there are only two DVI input connectors available (1A and 1B). In this
configuration, you can not set up both backgrounds and the DSK — you can only
configure two of the three (e.g., both backgrounds, or one background plus DSK).
For stack configurations, remember that the background sources connect to the
“bottom” stack Processor, while DSK sources connect to the “top” stack.
„ Use the following steps to set up your background sources:
1.
On the Destination Bus, select the destination whose background sources you
want to configure.
2.
On the Controller, press BG A to display the Background Input Setup Menu.
3.
To configure a matte background:
4.
a.
Scroll to the Type line and select Matte.
b.
Press {MATTE} to display the BG Matte Menu.
c.
Adjust the matte color as desired.
d.
Press {BACK} to return to the Background Input Setup Menu.
e.
Press {SAVE}.
To configure a DVI background:
a.
Ensure that your DVI source (e.g., a PC) is properly connected to the
Video Processor or ScreenPRO-II chassis, and that the PC is turned on.
b.
Ensure that EDID is properly set. If not, refer to the “Programming
EDID” section on page 248 for details.
c.
Scroll to the Type line and select DVI.
d.
Set the DVI source’s format:
e.
•
Press {FORCE ACQUIRE}, or ...
•
To manually set the source’s resolution, select the desired
format on the Format line, then press {APPLY FORMAT}.
(Optional) Adjust H Offset and V Offset as required.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
269
6. System Setup
Background Setup
f.
5.
To configure a frame grab background:
a.
Ensure that you have captured frame(s) into temporary memory, or
saved frame(s) into permanent memory. In Chapter 7, refer to the
“Working with Frame Grabs” section on page 332 for instructions.
b.
Scroll to the Type line and select one of the three temporary frame
stores: FG_1, FG_2 or FG_3.
c.
To load a frame from “extended” memory into the selected frame store:
d.
6.
Press {SAVE}.
•
Scroll to the File to load line.
•
Use the ADJ knob to select a file.
•
Press {LOAD}.
Press {SAVE}.
To configure an Analog background:
a.
Ensure that your analog source is properly connected to the Video
Processor chassis. In Appendix A, refer to the “DVI-I Connector
Pinouts” section on page 347 for pinout details.
Note
Analog backgrounds cannot be configured on ScreenPRO-II
destinations.
b.
Scroll to the Type line and select Analog.
c.
Set the analog source’s format:
Press {FORCE ACQUIRE}, or ...
•
To manually set the source’s resolution, select the desired
format on the Format line, then press {APPLY FORMAT}.
d.
(Optional) Adjust H Offset and V Offset as required.
e.
(Optional) Adjust Contrast, Brightness, Sizing and Color Balance as
required.
f.
Press {SAVE}.
Important
270
•
Using analog background in edge-butted mode could
possibly cause seams, and is not recommended!
7.
Repeat from step 2 for BG B.
8.
Repeat from step 1 for the next destination’s background sources.
9.
When all background sources have been configured for all destinations, press
SAVE in the System Keypad to save the new configuration in memory.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
6. System Setup
Input Setup
fåéìí=pÉíìé
Encore system setup: Step 17
S Prerequisites — Ensure that you are familiar with the Input Menu. In
17
Chapter 5, refer to the “Input Menu” section on page 138.
This procedure provides steps for setting up the system’s inputs, for single screen, wide
screen and “stack” destinations. The following topics are provided:
•
•
•
Input Setup — Quick Start
Input Setup — Comprehensive Method
Input Setup Notes
fåéìí=pÉíìé=Ô=nìáÅâ=pí~êí
„ Use the following “quick start” method to set up inputs.
1.
On the Destination Bus, select the destination whose inputs you want to set up.
2.
On the Controller, select a layer button in the Layer Control Section.
3.
In the Layer Functions Section, press Source Preview. This action isolates the
source within the PIP, displays a gray background, turns off borders and shadows,
and displays the Input Menu.
Note
The Source Preview function is not available with “stack”
configurations. In this situation, use the PIP Adjustment
Menu to turn off borders and shadows, and then press INPUT
in the System Keypad.
4.
On the Source Selection Bus, select the source that you want to set up.
5.
Press {FORCE ACQUIRE} to perform the optimum image setup.
6.
Press {SAVE} to save the new input configuration in memory.
7.
Repeat from step 4 for the next source.
8.
(For non-stack configurations only) When all sources have been set up for the
selected destination, press Source Preview to restore the previous setup.
9.
Repeat from step 1 for the next destination — only if required. Refer to the “Input
Setup Notes” section on page 274 for details.
fåéìí=pÉíìé=Ô=`çãéêÉÜÉåëáîÉ=jÉíÜçÇ
„ Use the following “comprehensive” method to set up inputs.
1.
On the Destination Bus, select the destination whose inputs you want to set up.
2.
On the Controller, select a layer button in the Layer Control Section.
3.
In the Layer Functions Section, press Source Preview.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
271
6. System Setup
Input Setup
This action isolates the source within the PIP, displays a gray background, turns
off borders and shadows, and displays the Input Menu.
Note
Source Preview is not available with “stack” configurations.
In this situation, first turn off borders and shadows, then press
INPUT in the System Keypad.
4.
On the Source Selection Bus, select the source that you want to set up.
5.
Press {FORCE ACQUIRE} to perform the optimum image setup.
6.
Perform additional setups on the Input Menu — if required:
a.
(Optional) Scroll to the Input Connector line and select the physical
connector to which the input is connected, either HD-15, DVI or BNC. If
you perform this step, press {FORCE ACQUIRE}.
b.
If you need to manually set the resolution, scroll to the Format line and
select the desired format. Press {APPLY FORMAT} to accept.
c.
Scroll to the Input Type line and set the type of input. Remember that
the choices change depending on the selected Format, and in some
cases, this function is not available.
d.
Scroll to the Color Space line, and set the input’s color space, either
SMPTE or RGB. In some cases, this function is not available.
e.
Scroll to the Sampling Mode line and set the sampling mode.
f.
Scroll to the Contrast line and set the input’s contrast.
g.
Scroll to the Brightness line and set the input’s brightness.
h.
Scroll to the Gamma line and set the input gamma.
i.
Scroll to the Input Sync Type line and set the source’s sync type.
j.
Scroll to the Pulldown Compensation line and enable (or disable) the
mode. Remember that this function only applies to standard video
(component, s-video, composite) inputs.
k.
Scroll to the Sync Slice <mv> line and adjust as required.
l.
Scroll to the Sharpness line and set the input’s sharpness.
m. Press {SAVE} to save the input configuration.
7.
8.
272
Perform additional setups on the Aspect Ratio Menu — if required:
a.
Press {AR} to display the Aspect Ration Menu.
b.
Adjust the Mode and Ratio as required.
c.
Press {SAVE} to save the input configuration.
d.
Press {BACK} to return to the Input Menu.
Perform additional setups on the Sizing Menu — if required:
a.
Press {SIZING} to display the Sizing Menu.
b.
If 1:1 Sampling was selected:
•
Scroll to the Clock Phase line and adjust for the cleanest,
brightest and sharpest image.
•
Scroll to the H Total line and set the total pixel count per line.
•
Scroll to the H Active line and set the width of the active area.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
6. System Setup
Input Setup
•
•
•
c.
9.
Scroll to the H Position line and set the start of the active
area’s horizontal offset from H sync.
Scroll to the V Active line and set the number of vertical lines in
the image.
Scroll to the V Position line and set the start of the active area’s
vertical offset from V sync.
•
Press {SAVE} to save the input configuration.
•
Press {BACK} to return to the Input Menu.
If Oversample was selected:
•
Scroll to the Right Edge line and adjust as required.
•
Scroll to the Left Edge line and adjust as required.
•
Scroll to the Top Edge line and adjust as required.
•
Scroll to the Bottom Edge line and adjust as required.
•
Press {SAVE} to save the input configuration.
•
Press {BACK} to return to the Input Menu.
Perform additional setups on the Color Balance Menu — if required:
a.
Press {COLOR BALANCE} to display the Color Balance Menu.
b.
If an RGB source was selected:
•
Scroll to the Red Contrast line and adjust as required.
•
Scroll to the Red Brightness line and adjust as required.
•
Scroll to the Green Contrast line and adjust as required.
•
Scroll to the Green Brightness line and adjust as required.
•
Scroll to the Blue Contrast line and adjust as required.
•
Scroll to the Blue Brightness line and adjust as required.
•
Press {SAVE} to save the input configuration.
•
Press {BACK} to return to the Input Menu.
c.
If a Composite, S-Video or YPbPr source was selected:
•
•
•
•
Important
Scroll to the Saturation line and adjust as required.
Scroll to the Hue line and adjust as required.
Press {SAVE} to save the input configuration.
Press {BACK} to return to the Input Menu.
If you have not already performed incremental “saves,”
ensure that you press {SAVE} before you exit the Input Menu
— otherwise all of your setups will be lost. If you do not save
the input, the next time the source is selected, the input’s
default settings will be displayed.
In addition, the {SAVE} function performs the Controller’s
automatic “Copy Down” feature, which ensures that
ImagePRO and PrePRO-II units properly process each input.
10. Repeat from step 4 for the next source that you want to set up.
11. (For non-stack configurations only) When all sources have been set up for the
selected destination, press Source Preview to restore the previous setup.
12. Repeat from step 1 for the next destination — only if required. Refer to the “Input
Setup Notes” section on page 274 for details.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
273
6. System Setup
DSK Setup
fåéìí=pÉíìé=kçíÉë
You do not have to repeat the input setup procedure for other destinations if either of the
following criteria are met:
•
•
Your other destinations use sources that are patched to the same router.
Your other destinations are configured using the “ALL SP” function on the Input
Source Patch Menu.
In this case, all other system destinations will automatically receive input configuration files
via the system’s “copy down” functionality.
You do have to repeat the input setup procedure if either of the following criteria are met:
•
•
Your other destinations use a different router.
Your other destinations use unique input patching.
aph=pÉíìé
Encore system setup: Step 18
S Prerequisites — Ensure that you are familiar with the following menus:
18
~
~
DSK Adjustment Menu. In Chapter 5, refer to the “DSK Adjustment
Menu” section on page 234.
DSK Input Setup Menu. In Chapter 5, refer to the “DSK Input Setup
Menu” section on page 237.
In this procedure, you will set up the Controller’s DSK source. An Encore DSK can be
configured as a DVI input, an analog input, a frame grab or “none.”
Please note the following important points:
•
•
•
For ScreenPRO-II destinations, remember that BG B and the DSK are mutually
exclusive. This occurs because the BG/DSK Input B is shared between the DSK
and BG B on all individual ScreenPRO-II units.
For single or wide screen Encore systems using single M/E Video Processors,
there are only two DVI input connectors available (1A and 1B). In this
configuration, you can not set up both backgrounds and the DSK — you can only
configure two of the three (e.g., both backgrounds, or one background plus DSK).
For stack configurations, remember that the background sources connect to the
“bottom” stack Processor, while DSK sources connect to the “top” stack.
„ Use the following steps to set up your DSK source:
1.
On the Controller, press DSK to display the DSK Adjustment Menu.
2.
Press {INPUT SETUP} to display the DSK Input Setup Menu.
3.
On the Destination line, select the destination on which you want to set up the
downstream key.
~
~
4.
If a single destination is active, selections cannot be made.
On the ID line, select the IDs of the Processor(s) for which you want set up the
downstream key.
~
274
If multiple destinations are active, select the desired destination.
For single screen destinations, ID selections cannot be made.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
6. System Setup
DSK Setup
~
For wide screen destinations only:
•
Select All to set up all the DSK on Processors.
•
Select the ID of an individual processor.
Note
5.
6.
7.
Typically, in a wide screen destination, the DSK is placed on
only one of the multiple screens (e.g., the far right screen).
For this setup, use the IDs of the individual Processors and
set up their “types” accordingly — DVI or Analog for the DSK
screen, and “none” for the remaining screens.
To configure the DSK with no input:
a.
Scroll to the Type line and select None.
b.
Press {SAVE}.
To configure a DVI input as the DSK:
a.
Ensure that your DVI source (e.g., a PC) is properly connected to the
Video Processor or ScreenPRO-II chassis, and that the PC is turned on.
b.
Ensure that EDID is properly set. If not, refer to the “Programming
EDID” section on page 248 for details.
c.
Scroll to the DSK Input line and select the input connector from which
the DSK source is pulled.
d.
Scroll to the Type line and select DVI.
e.
Set the DVI source’s format:
•
Press {FORCE ACQUIRE}, or ...
•
To manually set the source’s resolution, select the desired
format on the Format line, then press {APPLY FORMAT}.
f.
(Optional) Adjust H Offset and V Offset as required.
g.
(Optional) Use the Crop function to trim a DVI or analog input that is
being used as a DSK.
h.
Press {SAVE}.
To configure a frame grab as the DSK:
a.
Ensure that you have captured frame(s) into temporary memory, or
saved frame(s) into permanent memory. In Chapter 7, refer to the
“Working with Frame Grabs” section on page 332 for instructions.
b.
Scroll to the Type line and select one of the three temporary frame
stores: FG_1, FG_2 or FG_3.
c.
To load a frame from “extended” memory into the selected frame store:
d.
•
Scroll to the File to load line.
•
Use the ADJ knob to select a file.
•
Press {LOAD}.
Press {SAVE}.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
275
6. System Setup
DSK Setup
8.
To configure an Analog source as the DSK:
a.
Ensure that your analog source is properly connected to the Video
Processor chassis. In Appendix A, refer to the “DVI-I Connector
Pinouts” section on page 347 for pinout details.
Note
9.
Analog DSKs cannot be configured on ScreenPRO-II
destinations.
b.
Scroll to the DSK Input line and select the input connector from which
the DSK source is pulled.
c.
Scroll to the Type line and select Analog.
d.
Set the analog source’s format:
•
Press {FORCE ACQUIRE}, or ...
•
To manually set the source’s resolution, select the desired
format on the Format line, then press {APPLY FORMAT}.
e.
(Optional) Adjust H Offset, V Offset, Contrast, Brightness, Sizing and
Color Balance as required.
f.
Press {SAVE}.
Press {KEY} to return to the DSK Adjustment Menu.
10. On the Key Type line, select the type of key desired (Luma or Color).
11. Adjust key parameters as required:
~
~
For a Luma Key, adjust Invert Mode, Clip, Gain, Opacity and Fill
Source for the optimum visual key.
For a color key, pick the desired color, then adjust Red, Green and Blue
Color, Threshold, Mask and Opacity.
12. When your DSK is fully adjusted, press SAVE in the System Keypad.
276
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
6. System Setup
Saving the Setup
p~îáåÖ=íÜÉ=pÉíìé
Encore system setup: Step 19
19
When all system setup procedures have been complete, press SAVE in the System
Keypad. This action saves the state of the Controller in non-volatile memory.
Once pressed, the Touch Screen menu reads “Saving System Configuration.” If you
cycle power, the Controller will return to its state at the time of the “save.”
Note
Automatic "Saves" occur as necessary, for example, when
you change output resolutions.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
277
6. System Setup
Backup to Flash Memory Card
_~Åâìé=íç=cä~ëÜ=jÉãçêó=`~êÇ
Encore system setup: Step 20
S Prerequisites — Ensure that you are familiar with the Backup/Restore
20
Menu. In Chapter 5, refer to the “Backup/Restore Menu” section on
page 188 for details.
In this procedure, you will back up your system configuration to a Flash Memory Card.
Note
You can only store one system configuration on a Flash
Memory Card.
„ Use the following steps to back up your system:
1.
Ensure that you have a (customer supplied) Flash Memory Card available.
Important
Only MMC or MMCPlus cards greater than 512MB can be
used. SD cards cannot be used.
2.
Insert the Flash Memory Card into the Controller’s rear panel Memory Card slot.
3.
In the System Keypad, press MISC to display the Miscellaneous Menu.
4.
Press {BACKUP RESTORE} to display the Backup/Restore Menu.
5.
On the Device line, select Ctrlr+VP+SP to perform a complete “backup.”
6.
On the Controller Options line, select All.
7.
Press {CHECK CARD} to display the Current Backup Menu.
~
~
8.
Check the “Controller files backed up” section to confirm the types of
files present on the Flash Memory Card, if any. If files are present,
determine if you want to overwrite, or insert a new (blank) card.
Press {BACK} to return to the Backup/Restore Menu.
Press {BACKUP} to perform a backup operation to the Flash Memory Card using
the selected device(s) and options.
At the conclusion of this procedure, your system is completely backed up.
278
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
TK==léÉê~íáçåë
få=qÜáë=`Ü~éíÉê
This chapter includes operational instructions for all Encore modes and functions. The
following topics are discussed:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Prerequisites
Operational Configuration
Using the Alphanumeric Keypad
Using the PS/2 Keyboard
Working with Groups
Working with Destinations
Working with Layers
Working with Layer Functions
Using Move
Working with Live Modes
Working with Transitions
Working with Presets
Layer and Aux Control
Working with User Keys
Working with Tallies
Enable/Disable Controller Lockout
Using Backup and Restore
Working with Frame Grabs
Working with the DSK
Note
With only minor differences, operations are identical between
the two Controllers (SC and LC). Differences will be noted in
the various sections that follow.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
279
7. Operations
Prerequisites
mêÉêÉèìáëáíÉë
Prior to using the system and following the instructions in this chapter, please ensure the
following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
All system destinations are properly configured. In Chapter 6, refer to the
“Destination Setup" section on page 257 for details.
All system inputs (sources) are properly configured. In Chapter 6, refer to the
“Input Setup" section on page 271 for details.
All system backgrounds are properly configured. In Chapter 6, refer to the
“Background Setup" section on page 269 for details.
The DSK is properly configured. In Chapter 6, refer to the “DSK Setup" section
on page 274 for details.
Ensure that you are familiar with all Controller sections and buttons. In Chapter 4,
refer to the “Controller Orientation" section on page 97 for details.
Ensure that you are familiar with all system menus, and in particular, the
operational menus. In Chapter 5, refer to the following sections for details:
~
~
~
Refer to the “PIP Adjustment Menu" section on page 194 for details on
all PIP adjustment menu items.
Refer to the “Key Menu" section on page 203 for details on all Key
adjustment menu items.
Refer to the “Source Adjustment Menus" section on page 212 for
details on all input source adjustment parameters.
Tip
As you review each function, it is recommended that you try
out (and practice) each feature at the Encore itself — using a
fully configured system consisting of Program and Preview
monitors, projector(s), and all the required destinations,
sources and backgrounds.
Note
In this chapter, when a sequence of menu selections is
required to complete a given procedure, the ">" symbol is
used to divide each successive menu pick.
S To access the Genlock Menu, press
OUTPUT > {GLCK}.
280
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
7. Operations
Operational Configuration
léÉê~íáçå~ä=`çåÑáÖìê~íáçå
The following topics are discussed in this section:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Monitor Layout
Touch Screen Calibration
Wide Screen Markers
Lookahead Preview
Understanding Raster Boxes
A Word About LOS
Setting User Preferences
Understanding Input File Mapping
jçåáíçê=i~óçìí
Use the following diagrams as recommended layouts for Program and Preview monitors:
•
Single Screen Application — For optimum viewing and utility, place your
Preview monitor on the left, and your Program monitor on the right.
Preview
Program
Figure 7-1. Single Screen Application Layout
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
281
7. Operations
Operational Configuration
•
Wide Screen Application — For optimum viewing in all wide screen applications,
place all Preview monitors on the left, and all Program monitors on the right.
Preview #1
Preview #2
Program #1
Program #2
Figure 7-2. Wide Screen Application Layout
qçìÅÜ=pÅêÉÉå=`~äáÄê~íáçå
As an excellent prerequisite to all operating procedures, it is recommended that you
calibrate the Touch Screen.
„ Use the following steps to calibrate your Touch Screen display:
1.
In the System Keypad, press MISC to display the Miscellaneous Menu.
2.
Press {LCD SETTINGS} to display the LCD Settings Menu.
3.
Press {LCD CAL} to display the Touch Screen Calibration Menu.
4.
(Controller LC only) On the top LCD line, select the LCD touchscreen that you
want to calibrate.
5.
Follow the directions on the menu to complete the calibration procedure.
6.
(Controller LC only) Repeat steps 1 through 5 for the other LCD touchscreen.
7.
For both Controllers, use the controls on the LCD Settings Menu to adjust
brightness and contrast as desired.
When the procedure is complete, the Controller remembers this calibration setting until it is
performed again.
282
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
7. Operations
Operational Configuration
táÇÉ=pÅêÉÉå=j~êâÉêë
If you are using a wide screen configuration, ensure that your Wide Screen Markers are
enabled. In Chapter 6, refer to the “Wide Screen Projector Setup" section on page 267
for details.
In wide screen applications, Wide Screen Markers are thin vertical green lines at the
edges of the screens that are used to denote the actual projected image area.
Using edge feathering and data doubling, Encore provides perfect and seamless wide
screen images. Because of the required overlap, a portion of the original image is unused,
and does not get projected. The location of the unused portion depends on your selected
justification — left or center.
With each type of justification, the Wide Screen Markers accurately denote the unused
portion, thus enabling you to properly compose your screens.
•
Left Justified Markers
The figure below illustrates the Wide Screen Marker in a left justified
configuration.
~
~
Images to the left of the green vertical line are projected.
Images to the right are not.
Preview #1
Preview #2
Preview #1
Preview #2
Wide
Screen
Marker
Figure 7-3. Wide Screen Marker, Left Justification
•
Center Justified Markers
The figure below illustrates the two Wide Screen Markers in a center justified
configuration.
~
~
Wide
Screen
Marker
Images between the two vertical green lines are projected.
Images outside of the lines are not.
Preview #1
Preview #2
Preview #1
Preview #2
Wide
Screen
Marker
Figure 7-4. Wide Screen Marker, Center Justification
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
283
7. Operations
Operational Configuration
iççâ~ÜÉ~Ç=mêÉîáÉï
Encore uses a “full lookahead” preview system that ensures the accuracy of all your
transitions. The “look” or appearance that you create on Preview represents the exact
appearance of Program, after you cut or “auto transition” the images to program.
S The illustration below represents a simple Preview-to-Program transition.
SPLIT mode is on, enabling you to have two PIPs on screen simultaneously:
Program
Program
Background A
Background A
PIP 1A
PIP 1A
PIP 1B
3
1
CUT
Preview
AUTO
TRANS
2
Preview
4
Background A
Background A
PIP 1A
PIP 1A
PIP 1B
PIP 1B
Figure 7-5. Program-to-Preview Transition with Lookahead
•
•
•
•
In frame 1, Program consists of a background and a single PIP.
In frame 2, a second PIP is selected and positioned on Preview.
When CUT or AUTO TRANS is pressed, the PIP transitions to Program. Frame 3
represents the Program screen — identical to the Preview “look” in frame 2.
Frame 4 represents Preview after the transition. Preview will continue to match
Program until you modify the preview image, in preparation for the next transition.
With these facts in mind, ensure that you always create the desired “next” look in Preview.
In this manner, there won’t be any operational surprises:
•
•
284
By using lookahead, you’ll always know visually what PIPs and keys you want to
transition TO Program.
Conversely, you’ll always know what PIPs and keys to you wish to clear — to
visually remove elements FROM Program.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
7. Operations
Operational Configuration
råÇÉêëí~åÇáåÖ=o~ëíÉê=_çñÉë
When Raster Boxes are enabled on Preview, each PIP or Key is surrounded by a border
that helps you identify the PIP or Key’s original mixer and layer. Please note:
•
•
The PIP or Key with a “corner” style raster box is Layer A.
The PIP or Key with a “dashed” raster box is Layer B.
PIP 1B
PIP 1A
Figure 7-6. Raster Box styles
•
•
The "blinking" raster box is always the one enabled for modification, and its
corresponding layer button will blink.
The borders of raster boxes that are underneath other layers (such as another
PIP) are still visible on Preview.
PIP 1A
PIP 1B
Figure 7-7. Raster Box visibility
Raster box color assignments are as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Layers 1A and 1B: Red
Layers 2A and 2B: Green
Layers 3A and 3B: Blue
Layers 4A and 4B: Cyan
Layers 5A and 5B: Gold
Layers 6A and 6B: Magenta
Layer 3
Layer 4
Layer 2
Layer 5
Layer 1
Layer 6
Figure 7-8. Raster Box color assignments
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
285
7. Operations
Operational Configuration
„ Remember that Raster Box size can be adjusted:
1.
In the System Keypad, press OUTPUT to display the Output Menu.
2.
On the Destination Bus, select the destination that you want to configure.
3.
Press {SETTINGS} to display the Settings Menu.
4.
On the Raster Box Size line, set the size of the raster box that appears around
PIPs and Keys. The adjustment range (in pixels) is from 0 (off) to 8.
^=tçêÇ=^Äçìí=ilp
On rare occasion, you can experience LOS (loss of signal) — typically due to a poor video,
graphics or computer connection. In these cases, Encore obeys a precise set of rules:
•
•
•
Scaler LOS — If there is a LOS for a video signal inside a scaler (PIP or KEY),
the video switches to black, but the scaler remains in its current size and position.
Background LOS — If there is a LOS for a background DVI input, the video
switches to the background’s selected matte color.
DSK LOS — If there is a LOS for the DSK, the system switches the DSK Off
(specifically, selecting "none" as the type).
In each case, when the video signal recovers, Encore re-enables the signal as before.
S In a widescreen setup, a multi-head graphics card is attached to the unscaled
BG A channel. Once this live background source has been set up, if the
signal becomes invalid (e.g., if a cable is removed or the computer is turned
off), the BG A background switches to the currently defined matte color.
Refer to the "Setting User Preferences" section below for additional related information.
pÉííáåÖ=rëÉê=mêÉÑÉêÉåÅÉë
„ Prior to operations, be sure to set user preferences as desired:
1.
In the System Keypad, press MISC to display the Miscellaneous Menu.
2.
Press {USER PREF} to display the User Preference Menu.
3.
On the Black Invalid Video line, select the method by which the scaler “loading”
procedure is shown on Preview, when you change inputs:
~
~
286
ON — black is shown when scalers are loaded. In addition, Black is
shown when a background channel (BG) becomes invalid, and the DSK
is turned off when source video becomes invalid.
OFF — the full scaler loading procedure is shown. In this mode, the
Preview image can temporarily include non-sync and non-stable video.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
7. Operations
Operational Configuration
råÇÉêëí~åÇáåÖ=fåéìí=cáäÉ=j~ééáåÖ
This section provides information on how Encore stores the characteristics of each input in
a unique file, and how those files are used during Controller operations.
During the input setup procedure, after adjusting each input parameter, pressing {SAVE}
on the Input Configuration Menu saves those characteristics in a file. The filenames (and
associated destinations) can be viewed on the Input Configuration Menu.
The configuration file (e.g., IFILE_003) stores all input definitions for that source alone,
along with the associated destination.
From that point forward, each time you press that source button and assign it to a PIP or
Key, the stored file is recalled and the image appears on Preview (typically after a brief
delay). The delay occurs as each input is instantly re-scaled per the file’s instructions, and
the M/E’s scaler is instantly re-programmed with the file’s data.
With regards to router connections, an input file is independent of the physical connector.
Even though only certain sources can be connected to specific connectors (e.g., HD/SDI
on the BNC connector), once a connector is selected (on the Input Menu) and an input file
is created for the source, that file can be recalled on any of the same type of connectors in
the system, provided that a router is properly connected and assigned. This in no way
forces all of the other connectors to only accept that particular kind of source signal.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
287
7. Operations
Using the Alphanumeric Keypad
rëáåÖ=íÜÉ=^äéÜ~åìãÉêáÅ=hÉóé~Ç
On the Controller LC only, the Alphanumeric Keypad enables you to enter and change
numeric fields (on the Touch Screen) without having to use a rotary knob.
The alphanumeric keypad is supported on the following menus, with the following caveats:
•
The following four menus have no restrictions as to keypad usage. They keypad
can be used for any highlighted field.
~
~
~
~
•
Border Menu
Shadow Menu
Effects Menu
The Status Menu must be selected in the second Touch Screen Display in order
for the keypad to function in the following three menus:
~
~
~
•
Key Menu
Input Menu
Sizing Menu(s)
Color Balance Menu
Because the following four menus do not have "highlights," you must first turn the
desired Rotary Knob (e.g., H POS or V POS) by at least 1 count to "activate" the
desired field. Thereafter, the keypad functions in the normal manner:
~
~
~
~
Note
PIP Adjustment Menu
Input Source Adjustment Menu
Key Adjustment Menu
Key Source Adjustment Menu
With the four menus listed above, if you do not activate a
knob first, numeric entry defaults to V Size, and H Size is
automatically calculated.
„ Use the following steps to enter a value numerically:
1.
Highlight (or select) the field in which you want to enter a number.
2.
Enter the desired value on the keypad. Please note:
~
~
Pressing the first digit clears the field and enters the selected number.
Subsequent entries shift left.
3.
Press ENTER in the keypad to "accept" the value.
4.
For numeric fields with decimal points, the decimal point is fixed:
S To enter 120.3, press 1, 2, 0, 3, ENTER.
288
5.
During the entry process, press CLEAR at any time to delete the last number
entered. Press CLEAR repeatedly to delete all entered numbers and restore the
original value.
6.
For fields that accept negative numbers, press CLEAR first before entering the
first number. Once the first number is entered, the negative sign appears.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
7. Operations
Using the PS/2 Keyboard
rëáåÖ=íÜÉ=mpLO=hÉóÄç~êÇ
Standard PS/2 style keyboards can be connected and used with both Controllers for
numeric entry and “naming” of certain functions (such as frame grabs).
The keyboard can be connected to the Controller before (or after) the Controller is powered
on. Once the keyboard in plugged in, it is immediately available for use. Either the number
row or keyboard’s keypad can be used for numeric entry.
Please note:
•
•
•
•
Numeric entry is valid for all menus listed in the previous "Using the
Alphanumeric Keypad" section on page 288.
To enter negative values, use the "-" (minus) key, in either the number row or the
keypad.
To clear a value, use the "Backspace" key.
To enter a value, use the use the "ENTER" key, in either the number row or the
keypad.
Names can be entered in the following menus:
•
•
Frame Grab Name Menu
Frame Save Menu
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
289
7. Operations
Working with Groups
tçêâáåÖ=ïáíÜ=dêçìéë
Group
1
A Group is a single button that represents a certain number of destinations, as
programmed by the user. For example, the Group 1 button can represent destination 1 or
destinations 1, 2 and 3.
•
•
On the Controller SC, 4 group buttons are available.
On the Controller LC, 8 group buttons are available.
Groups are activated by pressing (lighting) the desired Group button. With groups
activated, your setups and “looks” will be routed to the selected destinations only. Any
combination of Group buttons can be enabled, but all group selections (whether individual
or multiple) are mutually exclusive.
The following topics are discussed in this section:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Learning a Group
Adding or Removing Destinations from a Group
Activating a Group
Clearing a Group
Unlearning a Group
Group Notes
iÉ~êåáåÖ=~=dêçìé
„ Use the following steps to learn (program) a group button:
Note
1.
By default, only Group 1 is assigned to Destination 1. All
other groups must be defined by the user.
Controller LC:
a.
On the Destination Bus, activate the desired destination(s).
b.
Press and hold Learn.
c.
Press the desired Group button.
Note
2.
Controller SC:
a.
Press and hold the desired Group button.
b.
On the Destination Bus, press the desired destination button(s).
c.
Release the Group button.
Note
290
This method can also be used to add (or remove)
destinations to/from the group — simply by re-learning the
button with a new array of destinations.
This method also works on the Controller LC.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
7. Operations
Working with Groups
^ÇÇáåÖ=çê=oÉãçîáåÖ=aÉëíáå~íáçåë=Ñêçã=~=dêçìé
„ Use the following steps to add (or remove) a destination to/from an existing group:
1.
Controller LC and SC:
a.
Press and hold the Group button to which you want to add or remove a
destination.
b.
On the Destination Bus, select the destination(s) that you want to add
or remove. In this mode, each destination is a toggle. Those that remain
on comprise the new group.
c.
Release the Group button.
Note
On the Controller LC, you can also simply re-learn a Group
button with a new array of destinations.
^Åíáî~íáåÖ=~=dêçìé
„ Use the following steps to activate one (or more) groups:
1.
2.
Controller LC and SC:
a.
Press a numbered Group button by itself to enable the assigned
destination(s) and toggle all other groups (and destinations) off.
b.
Press two or more Group buttons simultaneously to enable multiple
groups of destinations, and toggle all other active groups off.
To activate all groups:
a.
Controller LC — In the Group Control Section, press All.
b.
Controller SC — Simultaneously press all assigned Group buttons.
`äÉ~êáåÖ=~=dêçìé
„ Use the following steps to clear a group. This function clear’s the group’s destinations
only — it does not re-program the group:
1.
2.
Controller LC:
a.
Press Clear + a selected Group button to clear that one group only.
b.
Press Clear + All to clear all active groups.
Controller SC:
a.
Method 1 — Press the group(s) that you wish to remain enabled (which
will, in turn, clear the other un-selected groups).
b.
Method 2 — Press and hold the Clear button (on the Destination Bus),
then press the button(s) for the destination(s) that you wish to clear.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
291
7. Operations
Working with Groups
råäÉ~êåáåÖ=~=dêçìé
„ Use the following steps to unlearn (completely clear) a group button — so that it no
longer lights:
1.
2.
Controller LC:
a.
Clear all destinations on the Destination Bus (Clear + All).
b.
Press and hold Learn.
c.
Press the desired Group button. Here, you are essentially programming
the button with “no destinations.”
Controller SC:
a.
Press and hold the Group button that you want to unlearn.
b.
On the Destination Bus, toggle all destination(s) off.
c.
Release the Group button.
dêçìé=kçíÉë
Please note the following points regarding groups:
•
If you enable a group that fully contains all the destinations from another group,
both group buttons will light.
S Group 1 contains destinations 1 and 2, Group 2 contains destinations 3 and
4, and Group 3 contains destinations 1, 2, and 4. When you press the
Group 3 button by itself, it lights, and the Group 1 button also lights —
because both destinations in Group 1 are fully included in Group 3.
292
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
7. Operations
Working with Destinations
tçêâáåÖ=ïáíÜ=aÉëíáå~íáçåë
Destinations can be configured as single screens (projectors), multiple screens (in wide
screen applications), single or wide screen "stack" configurations, ScreenPRO-II systems,
auxiliary router outputs, ImagePRO systems and PresentationPRO-II systems.
During system setup, multiple destinations can be configured:
•
•
On the Controller SC, 6 destinations are available.
On the Controller LC, 32 destinations are available.
In Chapter 6, refer to the “Destination Setup" section on page 257 and the “Projector
Setup" section on page 266 for complete destination setup instructions.
The following topics are discussed in this section:
•
•
•
Activating and Deactivating Destinations
Clearing Destinations
Routing Sources to Aux Destinations
^Åíáî~íáåÖ=~åÇ=aÉ~Åíáî~íáåÖ=aÉëíáå~íáçåë
„ Use the following steps to activate and deactivate destinations:
1
1.
Activate — press the desired button on the Destination Bus to route signals to
that destination (e.g., single or multiple projectors, Aux, ScreenPRO-II, etc.). The
button lights when activated. Any combination of destination buttons can be
enabled sequentially — the buttons are not mutually exclusive.
2.
Deactivate — press Clear + the desired button on the Destination Bus to
remove the selected destination from the output routing. Any combination of
destination buttons can be cleared sequentially.
Note
“Groups” can also be used to activate and deactivate single
or multiple destinations with one-button ease. Refer to the
“Working with Groups" section on page 290 for details.
`äÉ~êáåÖ=aÉëíáå~íáçåë
„ Use the following steps to clear destinations:
Clear
1.
To clear a single destination, press Clear + the desired button on the Destination
Bus to remove it from the output routing.
2.
(Controller LC only) To clear all destinations, press Clear + All.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
293
7. Operations
Working with Destinations
oçìíáåÖ=pçìêÅÉë=íç=^ìñ=aÉëíáå~íáçåë
When using Aux destinations, remember that you are routing individual router inputs to
router outputs, which in turn are connect to other devices. You are not routing the output of
the Video Processors.
•
•
•
With Aux destinations (monitors), source selections on the Controller connect a
router input to a selected router output. This output in turn is connected to a
monitor. This is a single-format route.
With ImagePRO Aux destinations, source selections on the Controller connect a
router input to a selected router output. This output in turn is connected to one of
three ImagePRO inputs. This is a multi-format route.
With PresentationPRO-II Aux destinations, source selections on the Controller
connect a router input to a selected router output. This output in turn is connected
to one of eight PresentationPRO-II inputs. This is a multi-format route.
Note
The quality of the selected transition depends on the target
Aux device. For example, with an ImagePRO Aux, you may
get a glitch or a smooth transition, depending on the selected
input patching. With a PresentationPRO-II Aux, you will
always get a smooth transition.
Several different Aux routing methods are available:
•
•
•
•
Pending and Completing an Aux Route
Live Switch Aux Routing
Program/Preview Aux Routing
Viewing Aux Routes
mÉåÇáåÖ=~åÇ=`çãéäÉíáåÖ=~å=^ìñ=oçìíÉ
„ Use the following steps to pend and complete an Aux destination:
1.
On the Destination Bus, enable the desired Aux destination(s).
2.
On the Source Selection Bus, select the source that you want to route to the Aux
destination(s).
Note
3.
Perform the desired transition in the normal manner (e.g., CUT, AUTO TRANS).
Once performed, the Aux route is completed.
Note
294
At this point, the Aux route is pending. You are free change
sources, or to pend other routes to different destinations (e.g.,
PIP and Key), but the pending Aux route will not be
completed until the next transition is performed.
If you want to clear the pending Aux route prior to performing
it, simply clear the lit Aux destination(s).
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
7. Operations
Working with Destinations
iáîÉ=pïáíÅÜ=^ìñ=oçìíáåÖ
„ Use the following steps to switch Aux destinations live.
Source
1.
On the Destination Bus, enable the desired Aux destination(s).
2.
Press Shift + Source (in the Live Switch Section). The Source button lights to
indicate the live mode is enabled, and the Source Selection Bus is now a “live”
Aux switcher.
3.
On the Source Selection Bus, select the desired source. Encore immediately
routes that source to the selected Aux destination(s).
Note
4.
In this mode, Program LEDs are disabled.
To clear the mode, press Shift + Source. The light turns off, and the Source
Selection Bus is returned to its normal functionality.
mêçÖê~ãLmêÉîáÉï=^ìñ=oçìíáåÖ
„ Use the following steps to switch Aux destinations using the Program/Preview method.
Program
1.
On the Destination Bus, enable the desired Aux destination(s).
Preview
2.
Press Shift + Program/Preview (in the Live Switch Section). The Program/
Preview button lights to indicate the mode is enabled.
~
~
On the Source Selection Bus, the bottom row is now the Preview bus,
while the top row is now the Program Bus.
The top Program bus is now mapped with the same inputs as the bottom
Preview bus, but note that on both Controllers, only half of your inputs
are available:
•
On the Controller SC, inputs 1 - 6 and shifted inputs 7 - 12 are
available (but they are mapped to the Preview row). Inputs 13 24 are not available.
•
On the Controller LC, inputs 1 - 16 and shifted inputs 17 - 32
are available (but they are mapped to the Preview row). Inputs
33 - 64 are not available.
3.
On the Preview Bus, select (pend) the desired source.
4.
Perform the desired transition (e.g., CUT, AUTO TRANS). The Program Bus
switches to the new source, and the Preview Bus clears.
5.
To clear the mode, press Shift + Program/Preview. The light turns off, and the
Source Selection Bus is returned to its normal functionality.
Please note the following points regarding the Program/Preview mode:
•
•
•
You can not see the selected Preview source prior to transition, because Aux
destinations are "single scaler" devices.
Program LEDs are disabled on the Source Selection Bus only — not in the
Layer Control Section.
You can also "live switch" directly on the Program Bus.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
295
7. Operations
Working with Destinations
sáÉïáåÖ=^ìñ=oçìíÉë
Aux routes can be viewed individually, without affecting other routes currently in effect.
„ Use the following steps to view an Aux route:
1.
On the Destination Bus, press and hold the desired Aux destination button.
~
~
2.
296
All other lit destination buttons temporarily turn off.
On the Source Selection Bus, you can now view the input currently
routed to the Aux destination (via the red LED), and any pending source
selections (via the blinking source button).
Release the Aux destination button to return the Destination Bus and the Source
Selection Bus to their previous state.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
7. Operations
Working with Layers
tçêâáåÖ=ïáíÜ=i~óÉêë
The following topics are discussed in this section:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Switching Sources
Background Transitions
Understanding Split and Mix Modes
Working with PIPs in Split Mode
Working with PIPs in Mix Mode
Modifying PIPs
Working with Keys in Split Mode
Working with Keys in Mix Mode
Using Cut & Fill
Modifying Keys
Clearing Layers from Program
Modifying Layers On Program
pïáíÅÜáåÖ=pçìêÅÉë
The following sources are available:
•
•
On the Controller SC, 24 sources are available.
On the Controller LC, 64 sources are available.
„ Use the following steps to switch sources into a PIP or a Key:
1.
Select a destination that is not an Aux destination.
2.
Select a layer button (in the Layer Control Section). Ensure that it is blinking.
3.
Select PIP or Key as desired.
4.
Press the desired button on the Source Selection Bus to assign that source to
the PIP or Key.
~
~
On the Controller SC, sources 1 - 12 are accessed directly. Press and
light the Shift button to access sources 13 - 24.
On the Controller LC, sources 1 - 32 are accessed directly. Press and
light the Shift button to access sources 33 - 64.
The source button blinks to indicate that it is selected and active for modification.
Please note the following points regarding sources:
•
•
•
•
The Shift button on the Source Selection Bus is a toggle. It stays lit until
pressed again.
When the Red LED above a source button is lit, the source is on Program.
When a source button is lit solid, the source is on Preview — but it is not active for
manipulation. Only blinking source buttons are active for modification.
Multiple sources can appear on Program and Preview simultaneously, but only
one button can be blinking and active for modification on Preview.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
297
7. Operations
Working with Layers
•
•
If a router is used for input connection, a source can be assigned to multiple layers
simultaneously.
If you select a layer in the Layer Control Section that is lit (but not blinking), it will
blink — and the corresponding “assigned” source on the Source Selection Bus
will blink. This method also allows you to quickly verify layer/source selections.
_~ÅâÖêçìåÇ=qê~åëáíáçåë
„ Use the following steps to perform a background transition:
BG
A
1.
Ensure that your backgrounds are properly set up. In Chapter 6, refer to the
“Background Setup" section on page 269 for details.
2.
On the Destination Bus, enable the desired destination(s).
3.
Press the desired background button (BG A, BG B) in the Layer Control
Section. The button blinks to indicate it is selected and active for modification.
Please note:
~
~
If the background is already on Program, the Background Menu
appears, but parameters can not be modified.
If the background is not on Program, the Background Menu appears —
and it is active for modification.
4.
On the Type line, select the desired background type: Matte, DVI, Analog or a
frame grab.
5.
Perform the desired transition (AUTO TRANS or CUT) in the normal manner. The
Red LED above the background now indicates that it is on Program.
6.
To clear a background from Program (as indicated by the Red LED):
a.
Select it in the Layer Control Section.
b.
Press Clear Layer.
c.
Perform the desired transition.
Note
When you clear a background, it clears to the last selected
background matte color. Note that two separate matte colors
can be defined, one for BG A and one for BG B.
„ Use the following steps to automatically toggle backgrounds:
Toggle
1.
Press the desired background button. The button blinks to indicate it is selected.
2.
Press and light the Toggle button in the Transition Functions Section.
3.
Perform the desired transition. The "Preview" background transitions to Program,
while the "Program" background is automatically selected on Preview.
Note
298
As long as Toggle remains on, backgrounds will toggle
between A and B on every transition. You can change the
background "type" on Preview in the normal manner.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
7. Operations
Working with Layers
råÇÉêëí~åÇáåÖ=péäáí=~åÇ=jáñ=jçÇÉë
Encore provides two different modes with which you can transition PIPs and Keys:
•
•
Split Mode
Mix Mode
péäáí=jçÇÉ
With the Split button lit, a mixer’s two layers operate independently. You can manipulate
and transition the following combinations of effects on a single mixer:
Split
•
•
•
One or two PIPs
One or two Keys
One PIP and one Key
jáñ=jçÇÉ
With the Split button off, a mixer’s two layers are ganged together, and two sub-modes
determine the mixer’s function:
Note
•
Mix
Source
Mix Source and Swap modes are mutually exclusive.
With Mix Source enabled, both mixer layers are perfectly co-located after every
transition. Layers A and B are exactly the same vertical size — in exactly the
same position — with exactly the same border and shadow.
This mode is ideal for transitioning images inside a static PIP. Even though two
identical PIPs are used, they visually appear as one, provided that they are both
the same aspect ratio.
Note
•
Swap
•
Toggle
In this mode, two PIPs will be the same vertical size, but may
differ in horizontal size, for example, if one layer is 4:3 and the
other layer is 16:9.
With Swap enabled, both mixer layers can be located independently, with different
positions, sizes, borders and shadows. Layers A and B can be positioned and
sized as desired — but only one can be on screen at a time.
The Toggle mode can be used with both Mix Source and Swap modes, without
restriction. When enabled, sources toggle back and forth with each transition.
~
With Toggle on, perform a transition and select a different source in
Preview. Once the first source transitions off Program, it “flip-flops” to
Preview. Subsequent transitions alternate between sources. Another
new source can also be selected in Preview, and as long as Toggle is
on, the last two selected sources will alternate.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
299
7. Operations
Working with Layers
~
Note
With Toggle off, the source selected in Preview stays in Preview, once
the transition is complete. Here, sources must be changed manually.
If the PIP in Preview has a different source than the PIP in
Program, the moment Toggle is turned off, the PIP in Preview
automatically changes its source to match Program.
Please note the following important points regarding Mix Mode:
•
•
When neither layer is on Program, if you select one layer, the other is
automatically de-selected. Only one layer can be active at a time.
Four transition combinations are possible:
~
~
Mix Source with or without Toggle.
Swap with or without Toggle.
tçêâáåÖ=ïáíÜ=mfmë=áå=péäáí=jçÇÉ
In Split Mode, a mixer’s two layers operate independently.
„ Use the following steps to work with PIPs in Split Mode.
1.
On the Destination Bus, select the desired destination(s).
2.
In the Layer Control Section, press the desired layer button:
~
~
The layer button blinks, and in the Source Selection Bus, the source
assigned to the layer blinks.
On Preview, the raster box for the selected layer blinks (even if it is
hidden under another layer).
3.
Turn the Split button ON.
4.
In the Layer Function Section, press PIP to display the PIP Adjustment Menu.
5.
On the Source Selections Bus, select the desired source. The button blinks to
indicate that it is active, and the source appears within the PIP on Preview.
6.
Adjust the PIP’s size, position, border, shadow and effects as desired. Refer to
the “Modifying PIPs" section on page 301 for details.
7.
Press Source to display the Input Source Adjustment Menu. Adjust the
source’s size and position within the PIP if required.
8.
Prior to the transition, set up additional PIPs and Keys as desired.
9.
Transition the setup to Program.
10. Repeat the procedure from step 1 for the next transition.
Please note:
•
If a mixer is in "Split Mode" and a Layer is active for modification, pressing Mix
Source or Swap places the mixer in Mix Mode, and automatically turns the Split
button off. Please note:
~
~
•
300
The layer selected on Preview remains selected, and if a layer is
currently on Program, it remains on air.
If both layers are active on Program, Mix Mode cannot be enabled.
If a mixer is in Mix Mode, pressing Split automatically cancels the current mode
and turns off either the Mix Source or Swap button.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
7. Operations
Working with Layers
tçêâáåÖ=ïáíÜ=mfmë=áå=jáñ=jçÇÉ
In Mix Mode, a mixer’s layers are ganged together. Both layers can be perfectly colocated on screen (Mix Source mode), or both can operate independently (Swap mode),
but only one layer can be on Program at a time.
„ Use the following steps to work with PIPs in Mix Mode.
1.
On the Destination Bus, select the desired destination(s).
2.
In the Layer Control Section, press the desired layer button:
~
~
~
The layer button blinks to indicate that it is active for modification.
In the Source Selection Bus, the source assigned to the layer blinks.
On Preview, the raster box for the selected layer blinks (even if it is
hidden under another layer).
3.
In the Layer Function Section, press PIP to display the PIP Adjustment Menu.
4.
In the Transition Functions Section, select the desired Mix Mode:
~
~
~
To co-locate the mixer’s layers, press Mix Source.
To locate the mixer’s layers independently, press Swap.
To toggle sources, enable Toggle.
5.
On the Source Selections Bus, select the desired source. The button blinks to
indicate that it is active for modification. At this point the source appears within
the PIP on Preview.
6.
Adjust the PIP’s size, position, border, shadow and effects as desired. Refer to
the “Modifying PIPs" section on page 301 for details.
7.
Press Source to display the Input Source Adjustment Menu. Adjust the
source’s size and position within the PIP if required.
8.
Prior to the transition, set up additional PIPs and keys as desired.
9.
Transition the setup to Program. Refer to the “Working with Transitions" section
on page 320 for details.
10. Repeat the procedure from step 1 for the next transition.
Please note:
•
When the Controller is placed in Mix Mode, Toggle is automatically enabled.
jçÇáÑóáåÖ=mfmë
„ Use the following steps to modify a PIP:
1.
Select the PIP that you wish to modify in the Layer Control Section.
2.
If the PIP Adjustment Menu is not visible, press PIP.
3.
Size and Position — Use the Size and Position controls in the PIP Adjustment
Menu to manipulate the PIP on Preview. In Chapter 5, refer to the "PIP
Adjustment Menu" section on page 194 for details.
4.
Source Size — Press Source (in the Joystick Section) to display the Input
Source Adjustment Menu. Use the Size and Position controls to manipulate
the source image within the PIP. In Chapter 5, refer to the "Source Adjustment
Menu Description" section on page 214 for details.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
301
7. Operations
Working with Layers
5.
Crop — Press Crop (in the Joystick Section) to display the Crop Adjustment
Menu. Select the type of crop, the aspect ratio, and the image’s H and V size. In
Chapter 5, refer to the "Crop Menu" section on page 210 for details.
6.
Border — From the PIP, Shadow or Effects menus, press {BORDR} to display
the Border Menu. Select the border’s style, color and size. In Chapter 5, refer to
the "Border Menu" section on page 199 for menu details.
7.
Shadow — From the PIP, Border or Effects menus, press {SHDOW} to display
the Shadow Menu. Choose the shadow’s size, position and transparency. In
Chapter 5, refer to the "Shadow Menu" section on page 200 for details.
8.
Special Effects — From the PIP, Shadow or Border menus, press {EFX} to
display the Image Effects Menu. Select the desired effect. In Chapter 5, refer to
the "Image Effects Menu" section on page 201 for details.
9.
Global Functions — Remember that the following global functions are available:
~
~
~
Press Reset (in the Joystick Section) to reset the current effect (e.g.,
PIP, Key, crop, etc.) to a nominal default value.
Press Full Screen to bring the PIP to full screen, using the source’s
height as the defining factor. If Borders are on, they factor into the
height calculation, so that they will be completely visible on screen.
Press Freeze to freeze the PIP. Press again to unfreeze.
10. Transition — Transition the new look to program with a CUT or AUTO TRANS.
Refer to the “Working with Transitions" section on page 320 for details.
tçêâáåÖ=ïáíÜ=hÉóë=áå=péäáí=jçÇÉ
In Split Mode, a mixer’s two layers operate independently.
„ Use the following steps to work with Keys in Split Mode.
1.
On the Destination Bus, select the desired destination(s).
2.
In the Layer Control Section, press the desired layer button:
~
~
~
302
The layer button blinks to indicate that it is active for modification.
In the Source Selection Bus, the source assigned to the layer blinks.
On Preview, the raster box for the selected layer blinks (even if it is
hidden under another layer).
3.
Turn the Split button ON.
4.
In the Layer Function Section, press Key to display the Key Menu.
5.
On the Source Selection Bus, select the desired (new) key source. The button
blinks to indicate that it is selected, and the source appears on Preview.
6.
Adjust the Key. Refer to the “Modifying Keys" section on page 304 for details.
7.
Prior to the transition, set up additional PIPs and keys as desired.
8.
Transition the setup to Program. Refer to the “Working with Transitions" section
on page 320 for details.
9.
Repeat the procedure from step 1 for the next transition.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
7. Operations
Working with Layers
tçêâáåÖ=ïáíÜ=hÉóë=áå=jáñ=jçÇÉ
In Mix Mode, a mixer’s layers are ganged together. Both Keys can be perfectly co-located
on screen (Mix Source mode), or both can operate independently (Swap mode), but only
one layer can be on Program at a time.
„ Use the following steps to work with Keys in Mix Mode.
1.
On the Destination Bus, select the desired destination(s).
2.
In the Layer Control Section, press the desired layer button:
~
~
~
The layer button blinks to indicate that it is active for modification.
In the Source Selection Bus, the source assigned to the layer blinks.
On Preview, the raster box for the selected layer blinks (even if it is
hidden under another layer).
3.
In the Layer Function Section, press Key to display the Key Menu.
4.
In the Transition Functions Section, select the desired Mix Mode:
~
~
~
To co-locate the mixer’s layers, press Mix Source.
To locate the mixer’s layers independently, press Swap.
To toggle sources, enable Toggle.
5.
On the Source Selection Bus, select the desired (new) key source. The button
blinks to indicate that it is selected, and the source appears on Preview.
6.
Adjust the Key as required. Refer to the “Modifying Keys" section on page 304
for details.
7.
Transition the setup to Program. Refer to the “Working with Transitions" section
on page 320 for details.
8.
Repeat the procedure from step 1 for the next transition.
rëáåÖ=`ìí=C=cáää
In any mixer, a Cut + Fill key is one in which the hole-cutting information is provided by a
Key on Layer B, while the fill information is provided by an effect on Layer A (either a PIP
or a Key). In this mode, the two layers can be manipulated independently or joined
together using the “Join” mode.
Note
Cut + Fill keys can only be selected on Layer B when the
Split Mode is enabled.
„ Use the following steps to create a Cut & Fill Key:
1.
On the Destination Bus, select the desired destination(s).
2.
Identify the mixer in which you want to create the Cut & Fill Key. All subsequent
steps apply to that mixer.
3.
In the Layer Control Section, turn the Split button ON in the mixer.
4.
Press the Layer A button, and select the "fill" type — either PIP or Key. Typically,
the fill is a PIP. This video will appear "inside" the key hole.
5.
On the Source Selection Bus, select the "fill" video source.
6.
Press the Layer B button and select Key to display the Key Menu.
7.
On the Source Selection Bus, select the "cut" video source.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
303
7. Operations
Working with Layers
8.
Place your "cut" source on top of your "fill" source.
9.
On the Key Type line, select Cut + Fill.
Note
At this point, Layer A's image will disappear, however, the
Layer’s raster box remains visible. Depending on current Key
parameters (e.g., Clip, Gain), some part of the "fill" may be
visible in the shape of the "cut" source.
10. On the Key Menu, use the Clip, Gain, Opacity and Invert controls to set the
appearance of the key "hole" as desired.
11. Alternate between selecting Layer A and Layer B, and use each layer’s Size and
Position controls to position the fill within the key as desired.
12. At this point, many creative options are available with Cut + Fill keys. You can:
~
~
~
Use the "Join" mode to link the layers together, such that they move as
one. Refer to the "Using Join Mode" section on page 311 for details.
Program a "Move" with the combined Cut + Fill effect. Refer to the
"Using Move" section on page 313 for details.
Program a "Move" with only the key signal — such that the moving key
travels over a static fill.
13. Transition the new setup to Program. Refer to the “Working with Transitions"
section on page 320 for details.
jçÇáÑóáåÖ=hÉóë
„ Use the following steps to modify a Key:
1.
Select the Key that you wish to modify in the Layer Control Section.
2.
If the Key Menu is not visible, press KEY in the Layer Functions Section.
3.
Key Type — Use the Key Menu to select the desired key type — Luma, Color, or
Cut + Fill. In Chapter 5, refer to the "Key Menu Functions" section on page 204
for menu details.
Note
304
Remember that Cut + Fill keys can only be selected on
Layer B when Split is enabled.
4.
Clip, Gain, Mode, Opacity — Use the Key Menu to adjust the Key’s clip, gain,
invert mode and opacity on Preview. In Chapter 5, refer to the "Key Menu
Functions" section on page 204 for menu details.
5.
Fill Source — Use the Key Menu to select a self or matte fill key. If Matte is
selected, press {MATTE} to display the Matte Menu, with which you can adjust
color. In Chapter 5, refer to the "Matte Menu" section on page 207 for details.
6.
Size and Position — From the Key Menu, press {SIZE & POS} to display the
Key Adjustment Menu. Use the controls to manipulate the Key on Preview. In
Chapter 5, refer to the "Key Adjustment Menu" section on page 208 for details.
7.
Crop — Press Crop (in the Joystick Section) to display the Crop Adjustment
Menu. Select the type of crop, the aspect ratio, and the image’s H and V size. In
Chapter 5, refer to the "Crop Menu" section on page 210 for details.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
7. Operations
Working with Layers
8.
Source Size — Press Source (in the Joystick Section) to display the Key
Source Adjustment Menu. Adjust the source image’s size and position within
the Key. In Chapter 5, refer to the "Source Adjustment Menu Description"
section on page 214 for menu details.
9.
Special Effects — From the Key, Key Adjustment, Key Source Adjustment or
Matte Menu, press {EFX} to display the Image Effects Menu. Select the desired
effect, including monochrome, chroma and hue, invert and strobe. In Chapter 5,
refer to the "Image Effects Menu" section on page 201 for details.
10. Global Functions — Remember that the following global functions are available:
~
~
~
Press Reset to reset the current effect (e.g., PIP, Key, crop, etc.) to a
nominal default value.
Press Full Screen to bring the Key to full screen, using the source’s
height as the defining factor.
Press Freeze to freeze the Key (on Program and Preview). Press again
to unfreeze.
11. Transition — Transition the new look to program with a CUT or AUTO TRANS.
Refer to the “Working with Transitions" section on page 320 for details.
`äÉ~êáåÖ=i~óÉêë=Ñêçã=mêçÖê~ã
The clear layer procedure enables you to remove layers from Program — including
backgrounds, layers and the DSK. When clearing layers, always remember to take
advantage of the system’s Lookahead Preview function. Refer to the "Lookahead
Preview" section on page 284 for additional details.
„ Use the following steps to clear a layer from Program:
Clear
Layer
1.
Check (and compare) the Program and Preview monitors, and note the layer(s)
that you wish to clear. In the Layer Control Section, Red LEDs above the
buttons indicate the layers that are on Program.
2.
If the button for the layer that you wish to clear is not lit, press to light it.
3.
In the Layer Control Section, press Clear Layer. This action turns off the
selected layer button and visually clears the layer from Preview. This step is valid
for all buttons in the Layer Control Section.
4.
Prior to transition, if you want to clear additional layers, repeat steps 2 and 3.
5.
Transition the new setup to Program. The selected layer(s) will transition off of
Program.
„ Use the following steps to clear all layers from Program:
1.
In the Layer Function section, press All + Clear Layer (or Clear Layer + All).
2.
Perform an auto transition or a cut. All layers will transition off of Program.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
305
7. Operations
Working with Layers
jçÇáÑóáåÖ=i~óÉêë=lå=mêçÖê~ã
Encore enables you to modify layers directly on Program, without first setting up a "look" on
Preview. The mode is typically used for creating a "look" on Program (especially in
conjunction with a large screen projector), when the Preview monitor may be too small to
realize the desired result.
„ Use the following steps to modify layers directly on Program:
1.
In the System Keypad, press SYSTEM to display the System Menu.
2.
Scroll to the Modify Layers On Program line and turn the mode ON. You can
now change PIPs and Keys directly on Program.
Please note:
•
•
306
When you switch sources directly on Program, you may notice a glitch in the
image as the scalers recall the source’s file.
If you use camera inputs in this mode, it is recommended that you use an external
Genlock signal. Refer to the "Understanding Input File Mapping" section on
page 287 for details on source files.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
7. Operations
Working with Layer Functions
tçêâáåÖ=ïáíÜ=i~óÉê=cìåÅíáçåë
On each Controller, the Layer Functions Section and the Transition Function Section
provide numerous creative modes to enhance your presentation.
The following topics are discussed in this section:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Changing the Layer Mode
Using Full Screen
Using Clone
Using Swap Z-order
Using Copy
Using Freeze
Using Black Preview
Using Ext Trigger
Using Source Preview
Using Reset
Using Join Mode
`Ü~åÖáåÖ=íÜÉ=i~óÉê=jçÇÉ
„ Use the following steps to change the layer mode:
1.
Ensure that the PIP or Key that you wish to change is selected in the Layer
Control Section, and active for modification.
2.
In the Layer Functions Section, press PIP to change a Key to a PIP.
3.
Press Key to change a Pip to a Key.
rëáåÖ=cìää=pÅêÉÉå
„ Use the following steps to take the active PIP or Key to full screen:
Full
Screen
1.
Ensure that the PIP or Key is selected in the Layer Control Section, and active
for modification.
2.
In the Layer Function Section, press Full Screen. The source’s height will be
used as the parameter that define’s the full screen size.
~
~
If borders are ON, they will be taken into account and remain visible.
Shadows will not be taken into account for the full screen size.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
307
7. Operations
Working with Layer Functions
rëáåÖ=`äçåÉ==
Clone
The Clone mode is designed for widescreen configurations only. It enables you to make
an exact copy of a layer onto the opposite screen. All Key or PIP parameters are cloned —
including the shadow, effects, border and size. Once cloned, you can select between a
“mirror” or an “offset” clone.
„ Use the following steps to clone a layer:
1.
Ensure that a PIP or Key is selected in the Layer Control Section, and active for
modification in Preview.
2.
Ensure that the PIP or Key is positioned fully within the boundaries of an outside
destination’s screen. If the PIP or Key straddles the center of the widescreen, the
Clone mode cannot be enabled.
S In a 2 screen blend, the PIP or Key cannot be positioned such that it
sits between screens 1 and 2.
S In a 3 screen blend, the PIP or Key cannot be positioned anywhere
within the Screen 2 space.
3.
Press Clone to display the Clone Setup Menu.
4.
Select the desired clone type — Mirror or Offset.
5.
If Offset is selected, adjust the offset (in pixels) as desired.
6.
If desired, clone additional layers by repeating the procedure from step 1.
7.
Press CUT or AUTO TRANS to transition the new effect to Program.
Note
You can set up and perform a Move in conjunction with a
cloned image.
rëáåÖ=pï~é=wJçêÇÉê
„ In Split mode only, use the following steps to swap the Z-order (priority) of two layers
Swap
Z-order
within the same mixer. The function works with two Keys, two PIPs, or one of each.
1.
In the selected mixer, ensure that Split mode is enabled.
2.
Ensure that you have two layers visible on Preview, with one layer visually
overlapping the other.
3.
In the Layer Functions Section, press Swap Z-Order. The visual priority (on
Preview) of the two layers changes. Note that the layers remain at their current
locations — only the priority changes.
4.
Transition the new "look" to program with a CUT or AUTO TRANS.
Note
308
The Swap Z-Order function only works on the layers within a
selected mixer. You cannot use the function to swap the
priority of different mixers.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
7. Operations
Working with Layer Functions
rëáåÖ=`çéó==
The Copy function enables you to copy the properties of the active PIP or Key to another
PIP or Key — on the same (or different) mixer.
Copy
„ Use the following steps to PIP or Key parameters to other layers:
1.
In the Layer Control Section, select the PIP or Key that you want to "copy from"
(the blinking layer).
2.
In the Layer Functions Section, press Copy to display the Copy Setup Menu.
3.
Using the menu, enable or disable the specific parameters that you wish to copy
(e.g., Position, Size, Border, etc.). You can also enable or disable all parameters
using the {ALL ON} and {ALL OFF} buttons.
4.
Press and hold Copy.
5.
Press the button for the layer that you want to "copy to."
Note
The "copy to" layer must be enabled on Preview.
rëáåÖ=cêÉÉòÉ
„ Use the following steps to freeze a layer’s motion. Both PIPs and Keys can be frozen.
Freeze
1.
In the Layer Control Section, select the layer on Preview that you wish to freeze.
2.
In the Layer Function Section, press Freeze. The button lights to indicate that
“freeze” is enabled.
Note
The lit Freeze button indicates an association between the
selected layer and the “freeze.” If you select a different layer
that does not have an associated freeze, the button turns off.
If you return to the “associated” layer, the button lights again.
3.
Transition the frozen layer to/from Program in the normal way.
4.
To restore motion to the source, select the frozen layer and press Freeze.
Please note:
•
•
•
If a mixer is in Mix mode, you can only freeze and un-freeze while a layer is
selected on Preview.
If a mixer is in Split mode, you can freeze and un-freeze while a layer is selected
on either Preview or Program.
When Freeze is enabled for a layer, PIP and Key adjustments are not allowed.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
309
7. Operations
Working with Layer Functions
rëáåÖ=_ä~Åâ=mêÉîáÉï
Black
Preview
The Black Preview function enables you to transition all layers, backgrounds and the DSK
to black, across all configured screens and all enabled destinations. The button is a toggle
— press to enable black on Preview, press again to restore the previous “look” on Preview.
Please note:
„ Use the following steps to use the Black Preview function:
1.
Regardless of the setup currently in Preview, in the Transition Function Section
press Black Preview to place source “black” on Preview. All PIPs, keys and
backgrounds are maintained under the black screen. Please note:
~
~
The Black Preview button blinks when enabled.
All raster boxes remain visible on Preview.
2.
Perform a transition in the normal way to fade Program to black.
3.
To fade up from black, turn off the Black Preview button. All PIPs, keys and
backgrounds are restored on Preview.
4.
Perform a transition in the normal way to fade up from black.
rëáåÖ=bñí=qêáÖÖÉê=
Ext
Trigger
The Ext Trigger function is only used with the Barco Events Manager or Barco Stage
Manager applications. With these two products, when the timeline reaches a programmed
"pause" cue, the timeline pauses. This in turn causes Encore’s Ext Trigger button to flash.
Pressing Ext Trigger restarts the timeline.
„ Use the following steps to use the Ext Trigger function:
1.
Ensure that Encore is properly connected to (and recognized by) the Barco
Events Manager or Barco Stage Manager application. An Ethernet connection
is required. Refer to the application’s User’s Guide for interfacing instructions.
2.
On the Barco Events Manager or Barco Stage Manager application, program a
"pause" cue in the normal manner. When the timeline reaches the "pause" cue,
the timeline pauses. This action causes the Ext Trigger button to flash.
3.
To restart the application’s timeline, press Ext Trigger.
Note
If you are not using Barco Events Manager or Barco Stage
Manager, the Ext Trigger button has no function.
rëáåÖ=pçìêÅÉ=mêÉîáÉï
Source
Preview
The Source Preview function enables you to quickly isolate a selected layer for sizing and
adjustment purposes — in Preview only.
„ Use the following steps to use the Source Preview function:
1.
In the Layer Control Section, select the layer that you want to isolate.
2.
In the Layer Functions Section, press Source Preview. Please note:
~
~
310
For the selected layer, the border and shadow is turned off.
The PIP (or Key) is placed in the center of the screen and sized to 90%
of the output resolution.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
7. Operations
Working with Layer Functions
~
~
~
~
If the system is in wide screen mode, the layer is centered in screen 1
and sized to 90% of that screen.
All other layers are hidden.
The background switches to a neutral gray.
The Input Menu for the selected source appears.
3.
Using the Input Menu, adjust the source in the normal manner.
4.
To restore Preview to its previous setup, press Source Preview.
Please note the following important points regarding Source Preview:
•
•
While the Source Preview mode is enabled, you can only perform input
adjustments and source selections. All other layer, destination and output
functions are disabled.
The Source Preview mode cannot be enabled with "stack" destinations.
rëáåÖ=oÉëÉí
The Reset function is context sensitive. It is used to reset the current effect to a nominal
default value on Preview.
Reset
„ Use the following steps to reset a specific PIP or Key parameter:
1.
In the Layer Control Section, activate the layer that you wish to reset. The layer
button blinks to indicate that it is active.
2.
Ensure that the layer is on Preview. Typically, you cannot reset functions on
Program.
Note
In some situations (such as size and position), a parameter
on Program can be reset — provided that Modify Layers on
Program is enabled.
3.
Ensure that Freeze is off. Frozen PIPs or Keys cannot be reset.
4.
If required, access the "menu" whose specific function you want to reset (e.g.,
borders, shadows, special effects, size, etc.).
5.
In the Joystick Section, press Reset to reset the current effect.
rëáåÖ=gçáå=jçÇÉ
Within a selected mixer, the "Join" mode enables you to lock layers A and B together, such
that they move as one and maintain a precise relationship. You can also program "moves"
when the two layers are joined. The mode is particularly effective when using Cut + Fill
keys, or for simultaneously moving a PIP with an associated lower-third key.
The following rules apply:
•
•
•
•
Only the layers within a mixer can be joined (e.g., 1A and 1B).
Layers on two separate mixers cannot be joined (e.g., 1A and 3B).
In the selected mixer, Split mode must be enabled.
Any type of PIP and all types of Keys can be joined. You can join two PIPs, two
Keys, or one PIP and one Key.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
311
7. Operations
Working with Layer Functions
•
•
•
When the two layers are joined, the Size and Position controls on either layer
enable you to move both layers as one. The relationship of the two layers (at the
time of the joining) is maintained proportionally.
When the two layers are joined, the effects (e.g., border, shadow, clip) on each
layer are locked — and cannot be changed until the "join" is cancelled. In
addition, source selection and input adjustments are disabled.
You can only enable and disable the mode when the "join" is on Preview.
„ Use the following steps to join both layers within a mixer:
1.
In the Layer Control Section, ensure that Split is enabled in the selected mixer.
2.
On Preview, create a PIP or Key on Layer A in the normal manner.
3.
Create a PIP or Key on Layer B in the normal manner.
4.
Press and hold the Split button, then press either of the two layer buttons. This
action enables the "join" mode, and causes both layer buttons to blink.
5.
Modify the joined layers as required:
~
~
Use either layer’s Size and Position controls.
Program a "move."
Note that the two layers move and size as one.
6.
Transition the new setup to program with a CUT or AUTO TRANS.
7.
To exit the mode, transition the effect off Program and back to Preview.
8.
Press and hold the Split button, then press either of the two layer buttons.
Note
312
When Presets are learned, the state of a joined mixer is
saved in the Preset.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
7. Operations
Using Move
rëáåÖ=jçîÉ
The following topics are discussed in this section:
•
•
•
Programming Moves
Pending and Triggering Moves
Move Notes
mêçÖê~ããáåÖ=jçîÉë
Move
Setup
The Encore Presentation System enables you to move a PIP or a Key (or both) smoothly
from one screen location to another at a predefined rate, while the layer(s) are on-air. All
moves are two-keyframe effects, with a starting location and an ending location.
There are two ways to program a move — on Preview or on Program.
Move
•
•
Program a Move on Preview
Program a Move on Program
mêçÖê~ã=~=jçîÉ=çå=mêÉîáÉï
This mode enables you to program a move with the selected layer on Preview only —
before it has transitioned to Program.
„ Use the following steps to program a move on Preview:
1.
In the Layer Control Section, select the layer that you want to move. The button
blinks to indicate that it is active for modification.
2.
In the Layer Functions Section, select Key or PIP as desired.
3.
Size and position the PIP or Key in its “starting” location on Preview. Adjust all
border, shadow and source parameters in the normal way.
4.
In the Layer Functions Section, press Move Setup. The button blinks to
indicate that you are now actively defining the properties of the move.
5.
Move the PIP or Key to its “ending” size and location (on or off screen).
6.
Adjust the Move Rate parameter to define the rate at which the PIP or Key
moves. The rate can be adjusted in 0.1 second increments.
7.
Press Move Setup again to complete the programming. The button remains lit,
and the PIP or Key returns to its starting location on Preview.
Note
8.
The lit Move Setup button indicates an association between
the selected layer and a programmed “move.” If you select a
different layer that does not have an associated move, the
button turns off. If you return to the “associated” layer, the
button lights again.
To set up an additional move on another layer, repeat the procedure from step 1.
To pend and trigger the move, refer to the "Pending and Triggering Moves" section on
page 314.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
313
7. Operations
Using Move
mêçÖê~ã=~=jçîÉ=çå=mêçÖê~ã
This mode enables you to program a move with the selected layer on both Program and
Preview — after the layer has transitioned to Program.
„ Use the following steps to program a move on Program:
1.
In the Layer Control Section, select the layer (on Program) that you want to
move. Note that its current position is the move’s "starting" location.
2.
In the Layer Functions Section, press Move Setup. The button blinks to
indicate that you are now actively defining the properties of the move.
3.
Size and position the PIP or Key to its “ending” location. Note that on Preview,
only the raster box moves.
4.
Press Move Setup again to complete the programming. The button remains lit,
and the raster box returns to its starting location on Preview.
5.
To set up an additional move on another layer, repeat the procedure from step 1.
To pend and trigger the move, refer to the "Pending and Triggering Moves" section.
mÉåÇáåÖ=~åÇ=qêáÖÖÉêáåÖ=jçîÉë
For each layer on which you have programmed an associated move, you can “pend” and
"trigger" the move in one of two ways — on Preview or on Program.
•
•
Pend on Preview
Pend on Program
mÉåÇ=çå=mêÉîáÉï
This method enables you to move the PIP or Key automatically on the next transition.
„ Use the following steps to pend a move on Preview:
1.
With the move properly programmed, ensure that the layer containing a move is
selected and blinking.
2.
To pend the move, press Move in the Layer Functions Section. The button
lights to indicate the pending move. On Preview, the raster box blinks at the
"destination" location — not the PIP or Key’s current location.
Note
314
If you need to cancel the move (un-pend), simply press Move
to turn the button off.
3.
Perform a CUT or AUTO TRANS. The transition takes the Preview image to air,
and the move begins immediately.
4.
To move the layer back to keyframe 1, press Move. The button lights and on
Preview, the raster box blinks at the "starting" location.
5.
Perform a CUT or AUTO TRANS. In this "ping-pong" manner, you can continue
to transit back and forth between keyframes 1 and 2.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
7. Operations
Using Move
mÉåÇ=çå=mêçÖê~ã
This method enables you to trigger the move manually, with a layer already on Program.
„ Use the following steps to pend a move on Program:
1.
With the move properly programmed, ensure that the layer containing a move is
selected and blinking.
2.
Perform a CUT or AUTO TRANS.
3.
To pend the move, press Move in the Layer Functions Section. The button
lights to indicate the pending move. On Preview, the raster box blinks at the
"destination" location — not the PIP or Key’s current location.
Note
If you need to cancel the move (un-pend), simply press Move
to turn the button off.
4.
Perform a CUT or AUTO TRANS. The move begins when the button is pressed.
5.
To move the layer back to keyframe 1, press Move. The button lights and on
Preview, the raster box blinks at the "starting" location.
6.
Perform a CUT or AUTO TRANS. In this "ping-pong" manner, you can continue
to transit back and forth between keyframes 1 and 2.
jçîÉ=kçíÉë
Please note the following important points regarding the Move mode:
•
Move parameters — for a given PIP, the following effects are valid "move"
parameters, each of which will transition smoothly from point to point:
~
~
~
~
•
~
~
~
~
•
•
•
PIP or Key source size and position
PIP Shadow size and position
PIP or Key Crop values
Keyframe effects — In addition to the “LINEAR” motion type, additional
predefined keyframe effects are available on the Effects Menu:
~
•
PIP or Key size and position
LINEAR ACCL — Same as LINEAR, but with acceleration and
deceleration.
ARCH CW — A smooth arch path moving in a clockwise direction.
ARCH CCW — A smooth arch path moving counter-clockwise.
BMRNG CW — A smooth boomerang motion, clockwise.
BMRNG CCW — A smooth boomerang motion, counter-clockwise.
Clearing moves — To clear a move (and remove the association between a layer
and a move), double-punch the Move Setup button quickly.
Raster size — If you define a PIP to transition to 0 x 0 size, the raster box
changes to a 4 x 4 pixel size. This enables you to know its location on the next
transition. The raster box change also occurs after you pend the move.
Freeze — You cannot set up a move or pend a move when a layer is frozen.
On screen, off screen — When programming moves, Encore lets you move a
PIP or Key from an off-screen location to an on-screen location, and vice-versa.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
315
7. Operations
Using Move
•
Editing moves — Once a move property has been defined, it can be edited:
a.
Select the layer that contains the move and press Move Setup. The
layer snaps to its defined "ending" location.
b.
Select a new "ending" location in the normal way.
c.
Change the keyframe effect or the move rate in the normal way.
d.
Press Move Setup to complete the edit.
Remember that Move behaves differently, depending on the selected mode:
•
•
In Split mode, two PIPs or Keys in a mixer can be programmed and triggered
independently (or simultaneously). You can pend individual layers or both layers
— and then transition as desired.
In Mix Source mode, both PIPs or keys are perfectly co-located on screen. The
programmed move applies to both layers. After a move is programmed, the Move
Setup button lights when either layer A or B is pressed.
~
~
~
•
If Toggle is Off, you must change sources manually (if desired) before
each transition.
"Ping-pong" transitions can be performed.
In Swap mode, both layers can operate independently but only one PIP or key
can be on screen at a time, and the system alternates between each layer on
each transition.
~
~
~
Note
316
If Toggle is On, each time you transition, the source inside the PIP or
Key changes automatically.
Each layer can have its own programmed move.
The "toggle" mode applies in the normal manner.
"Ping-pong" transitions cannot be performed.
To store “moves” such that they are repeatable, use Presets.
Refer to the “Working with Presets" section on page 322 for
details.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
7. Operations
Working with Live Modes
tçêâáåÖ=ïáíÜ=iáîÉ=jçÇÉë
The following topics are discussed in this section:
•
•
•
Using Live Switch Program/Preview Mode
Using Live Switch Source Mode
Live Mode Source Timing
rëáåÖ=iáîÉ=pïáíÅÜ=mêçÖê~ãLmêÉîáÉï=jçÇÉ
Program
Preview
The Live Switch Program/Preview Mode turns both rows of the Source Selection Bus
into two buses, both of which can be used to route sources into PIPs and Keys:
•
•
The top row is the Program bus. When you select sources here, you perform live
"cuts" directly on Program.
The bottom is the Preview bus. When you select sources here, you can "cut" or
"transition" them to Program.
„ Use the following steps to utilize the Live Switch Program/Preview Mode:
1.
On the Destination Bus, enable the desired destination(s).
2.
On Preview, select the one layer that you want to remain enabled when you enter
the live mode. All other Preview layers will be cleared.
3.
Press Shift + Program/Preview. The Program/Preview button lights to indicate
that the mode is enabled.
~
~
4.
The top Program bus is now mapped with the same inputs as the bottom
Preview bus, but only half of your inputs are available:
•
On the Controller SC, inputs 1 - 6 and shifted inputs 7 - 12 are
available (but they are mapped to the Preview row). Inputs 13 24 are not available.
•
On the Controller LC, inputs 1 - 16 and shifted inputs 17 - 32
are available (but they are mapped to the Preview row). Inputs
33 - 64 are not available.
With the mode enabled, there are several ways you can switch and transition:
~
~
~
~
5.
When you first enter the mode, all layers on Preview (except the
selected one) are cleared. All layers on Program remain as is.
Select a layer and a function (PIP or Key). On Preview, select (pend)
the desired source, then perform the desired transition. The source
transitions to Program.
Select a layer and a function (PIP or Key) that is not already on
Program. Its "last selected" source appears on Preview. Select a
source directly on Program to immediately cut that layer to Program.
Select a layer already on Program. Select a source on Preview or
Program to immediately cut that source into the layer.
Use the Clear Layer function in the normal way to transition layers off of
the Program bus.
To clear the entire mode, press Shift + Program/Preview. The button turns off,
and the entire Source Selection Bus is returned to its normal functionality.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
317
7. Operations
Working with Live Modes
Please note the following points regarding the Live Switch Program/Preview Mode:
•
•
•
•
•
•
When switching directly on Program, the Controller uses a predefined set of
rules. Refer to the "Live Mode Source Timing" section page 319 for details.
Program LEDs are disabled on the Source Selection Bus only — but not in the
Layer Control Section. The only exception is that a blinking Red LED on
Program still indicates that the associated mixer is set to Mix Mode.
If a layer is on Preview only, the PIP or Key can be sized and positioned.
The Split and Mix modes operate in the normal manner.
You can program a "move" with a source already on Program. When you press
Move Setup, you can move the raster box on Preview and choose the
"destination" location and size.
When using the mode in conjunction with Presets, the following rules apply:
~
~
~
•
When learning Presets, they will still be learned from Preview.
When recalling Presets, they will still be recalled to Preview.
A Preset remembers if the Live Switch Program/Preview Mode was
active at the time it was learned. Upon Preset recall, the mode is
enabled automatically.
The Live Switch Program/Preview Mode is automatically disabled when you
change destinations.
rëáåÖ=iáîÉ=pïáíÅÜ=pçìêÅÉ=jçÇÉ
Source
The Live Switch Source Mode turns both rows of the Source Selection Bus into a live
“Program” bus. For a selected layer, when a source button is pressed, the layer switches
to the new source. This is a "cuts only" mode — without any transitions.
„ Use the following steps to utilize the Live Switch Source Mode:
1.
On the Destination Bus, enable the desired destination(s).
2.
On Preview, select the one layer that you want to remain enabled when you enter
the live mode. All other Preview layers will be cleared.
3.
Press Shift + Source. The Source button lights to indicate the mode is enabled.
~
~
4.
Both rows of the Source Selection Bus are now a live Program Bus,
and all of your inputs are available.
With the mode enabled, there are several ways you can switch:
~
~
~
Note
318
When you first enter the mode, all layers on Preview (except the
selected one) are cleared. All layers on Program remain as is.
Select a layer and a function (PIP or Key) that is not already on
Program. Its "last selected" source appears on Preview. Size and
position the layer in the normal way. Select a source to immediately cut
that layer to Program.
Select a layer already on Program. Select a source to immediately cut
that source into the Program layer.
Use the Clear Layer function to transition layers off of the Program bus.
When you press Clear Layer, the Live Switch Source Mode
is automatically cancelled.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
7. Operations
Working with Live Modes
5.
To clear the entire mode, press Shift + Source. The button turns off, and the
entire Source Selection Bus is returned to its normal functionality.
Please note the following points regarding the Live Switch Source Mode:
•
•
When switching directly on Program, the Controller uses a predefined set of
rules. Refer to the "Live Mode Source Timing" section page 319 for details.
When you enable the mode, the following rules apply:
~
~
•
•
•
•
If Mix mode was enabled, the system forces Mix Source and Toggle on.
When you select a new source, it is routed to Preview, and once it is
stable, the layer automatically cuts to Program.
Program LEDs are disabled on the Source Selection Bus only — but not in the
Layer Control Section. The only exception is that a blinking Red LED on
Program still indicates that the associated mixer is set to Mix Mode.
If a layer is on Preview only, the PIP or Key can be sized and positioned.
You can program a "move" with a source already on Program. When you press
Move Setup, you can move the raster box on Preview and choose the
"destination" location and size.
When using the mode in conjunction with Presets, the following rules apply:
~
~
~
•
If Split mode was enabled, it remains enabled. If a layer is on Program
and you select a new source, the layer automatically cuts to the new
source without any transition.
When learning Presets, they will still be learned from Preview.
When recalling Presets, they will still be recalled to Preview.
A Preset remembers if the Live Switch Source Mode was active at the
time it was learned. Upon recall, the mode is enabled automatically.
The Live Switch Source Mode is automatically disabled when you change
destinations.
iáîÉ=jçÇÉ=pçìêÅÉ=qáãáåÖ
When using "live" functions (as outlined above) directly on Program, it is not necessary to
have genlocked sources.
•
•
If the timings between selected sources do not match, the layer briefly goes to
Black when the switch occurs, in order to provide a clean transition between
dissimilar timings.
If the sources have the same timing and are genlocked, the layer performs a clean
"cut," and does not go to Black during the switch.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
319
7. Operations
Working with Transitions
tçêâáåÖ=ïáíÜ=qê~åëáíáçåë
This section provides instructions for performing a variety of transitions. The following
topics are discussed:
•
•
•
•
Cut
Mix
Wipe
Manual Transitions
`ìí
Cuts can be performed on both single screen and widescreen destinations.
Cut
„ Use the following steps to perform a Cut:
1.
Set up the desired “look” in Preview.
2.
In the Transition Section, press CUT to instantly cut the setup to Program.
Cuts can also be performed directly on Program in the following three modes:
•
•
•
Modify Layers on Program is enabled. Refer to the "Modifying Layers On
Program" section on page 306 for details.
Live Switch Program/Preview Mode is enabled. Refer to the "Using Live
Switch Program/Preview Mode" section on page 317 for details.
Live Switch Source Mode is enabled. Refer to the "Using Live Switch
Program/Preview Mode" section on page 317 for details.
jáñ
A Mix (or Dissolve) can be performed on both single screen and widescreen destinations.
Auto
Trans
„ Use the following steps to perform a Mix:
1.
Set up the desired “look” in Preview.
2.
Preset the mode and transition rate:
3.
320
a.
In the System Keypad, press EFFECTS to display the Effects Menu.
b.
Adjust the Transition Rate field, in 0.1 second increments.
c.
In the Transition Type field, select Mix.
In the Transition Section, press AUTO TRANS to dissolve the setup to Program.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
7. Operations
Working with Transitions
táéÉ
Auto
Trans
All types of wipes can be performed on single screen destinations. On widescreen
destinations, you can only perform a Wipe Up or a Wipe Down.
„ Use the following steps to perform a Wipe:
1.
Set up the desired “look” in Preview.
2.
Preset the desired transition rate, wipe effect and wipe edge:
3.
a.
In the System Keypad, press EFFECTS to display the Effects Menu.
b.
Adjust the Transition Rate field, in 0.1 second increments.
c.
In the Transition Type field, select the desired Wipe pattern.
d.
In the Transition Edge Width field, select the desired wipe edge.
In the Transition Section, press AUTO TRANS to wipe the setup to Program.
j~åì~ä=qê~åëáíáçåë
Cuts and wipes can be performed manually with the T-Bar.
„ Use the following steps to perform a manual transition:
1.
Set up the desired “look” in Preview.
2.
Using the Effects Menu, select a Wipe or Mix in the normal way.
3.
In the Transition Section, move the T-Bar to manually dissolve (or wipe) the
images from Preview to Program.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
321
7. Operations
Working with Presets
tçêâáåÖ=ïáíÜ=mêÉëÉíë
This section provides detailed instructions for working with Presets. The Preset Section
enables you to store and recall entire Controller setups. Each Preset button represents
one “look” of the entire Controller, including the current state of all mixers, layers, sources,
backgrounds and the DSK.
The following topics are discussed:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
A Word About Resources
Storing Presets
Recalling Presets
Deleting Presets
Using Next and Previous
Presets and Moves
Preset Notes
^=tçêÇ=^Äçìí=oÉëçìêÅÉë
Resources, as they apply to Presets, are the layers that comprise the current “look.”
•
4
•
•
The contents of a Preset are locked to the mixers from which they were originally
stored. For example, if you store a Preset that only has Layers 1A and 1B
enabled on Preview, that Preset can only be recalled into Mixer 1.
When you store a Preset, you are not only recording the Controller’s entire look,
but you are also recording the priorities of the individual layers (PIPs and Keys) as
selected in the Layer Control Section.
When you recall a Preset, you are recalling the entire setup, and all previously
stored priorities — PIPs, Keys, Colors, Sources, Moves, etc.
Several "resource" examples are provided below:
S Example 1: Split — No conflict.
a.
Enable Split mode.
b.
Store a Preset that contains Source 1 on Layer 1A, and Layer 1B clear.
c.
Take Source 2 to Program on Layer 1A.
d.
Recall the Preset.
You can recall the Preset to Preview, because the system temporarily
borrows scaler 1B to avoid a resource conflict.
S Example 2: Split — Conflict.
a.
Enable Split mode.
b.
Store a Preset that contains Source 1 on Layer 1A, and Layer 1B clear.
c.
Take Source 2 to Program on Layer 1A, and Source 3 to Program on
Layer 1B.
d.
Recall the Preset.
You cannot recall the Preset to Preview, because both scalers are in use.
A "resource conflict" message is shown.
322
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
7. Operations
Working with Presets
S Example 3: Mix — No conflict.
a.
Enable Mix mode.
b.
Store a Preset that contains Source 1 on Layer 1A.
c.
Take Source 2 to Program on Layer 1A.
d.
Recall the Preset.
You can recall the Preset to Preview, because there is always a layer
available in Mix Mode. The system will pick the available layer based on
resources (e.g., if you stored the Preset in Layer 1A, the system may
recall it to Layer 1B — if Layer 1A is already in use).
S Example 4: Store a Split, Recall a Mix — No conflict.
a.
Enable Split mode.
b.
Store a Preset that contains Source 1 on Layer 1A, and Source 2 on
Layer 1B.
c.
Enable Mix mode.
d.
Store a second Preset that contains Source 1 on Layer 1A.
e.
Recall the first (Split) Preset, and take it to Program.
f.
Recall the second (Mix) Preset. The system recalls the Preset to
Preview, but the Split button blinks to indicate that the mode will change
to Mix when you transition.
g.
At this point, you can perform the transition, or press the Split button to
keep the mixer in Split mode.
With these facts in mind, you may wish to store (and organize) your Presets according to
the use of resources:
•
•
For example, you could store Presets on Page 1 that only use one PIP, and
presets on Page 2 that use two PIPs.
As an alternate method, you may want to plan your presentations such that
Presets are always recalled to an “empty” Program setup (with only a background
visible). This method avoids all resource issues entirely.
píçêáåÖ=mêÉëÉíë
Please note the following important points:
•
•
The Controller SC includes buttons for 64 Presets (8 pages of 8 presets each).
The Controller LC has buttons for 900 Presets (30 pages of 30 presets each).
„ Use the following steps to store a preset:
1.
Set up the desired “look” on Preview. Remember that one preset equals a single
“look” of the Controller, including the current state of all mixers, layers, sources,
backgrounds and the DSK.
2.
Select the “page” on which you want to store the preset. In the Preset Section,
hold down Page, then press the desired Preset button. The Red LED above the
button lights to indicate the current page.
3.
To store the preset, press Learn + the desired Preset button. The Touch Screen
displays a confirmation message, and the overall look of the Controller is now
saved into that register.
Page
Learn
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
323
7. Operations
Working with Presets
oÉÅ~ääáåÖ=mêÉëÉíë
„ Use the following steps to recall a preset:
1.
Check the available resources on Program. If the resources (layers) that you wish
to recall are already in use on Program, they must first be cleared before the
“recall” is permitted. Refer to the "A Word About Resources" section on
page 322 for additional information.
2.
Select the “page” from which you want to recall the preset. In the Preset Section,
hold down Page, then press the desired Preset button. The Red LED above the
button lights to indicate the current page.
3.
To recall a Preset, simply press the desired Preset button to recall the stored
“look” to Preview.
Important
All recall functions are affected by the current settings on the
Preset Recall Options Menu. This menu (accessed by
pressing Presets on the System Keypad) enables you to
select all or a portion of the stored Preset for recall.
aÉäÉíáåÖ=mêÉëÉíë
„ Use the following steps to delete a preset:
Delete
1.
Select the “page” from which you want to delete a preset. In the Preset Section,
hold down Page, then press the desired Preset button.
2.
In the Preset Section, hold down Delete, then press the desired Preset button to
delete that register from memory.
rëáåÖ=kÉñí=~åÇ=mêÉîáçìë
„ Use the following steps to utilize the Next function:
Next
Previous
1.
Check the available resources on Program. If the resources that you wish to
recall are in use on Program, they must first be cleared. Refer to the "A Word
About Resources" section on page 322 for additional information.
2.
In the Preset Section, press Next to recall the next valid Preset in sequential
order, or press Previous to recall the previous Preset. Please note:
~
~
324
If a Preset is undefined, it will be skipped when Next or Previous is
pressed.
Both the Next and Previous functions include the ability to “wrap” to the
next or previous page.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
7. Operations
Working with Presets
mêÉëÉíë=~åÇ=jçîÉë
Encore’s Preset mode provides a unique "automatic pend move" feature:
•
If you store several Presets, for example, with the same PIP in different sizes and
positions on screen, the system automatically pends a Move when you recall
each Preset. You do not have to store the PIP with a Move Setup enabled.
In this manner, when you cut each Preset to Program, the PIP moves from point to
point without restriction. The end point of the last move becomes the starting
point for the next move — regardless of the sequence in which the Presets are
recalled.
•
The following rules apply:
~
~
•
The layer stored in each Preset must be the same, the source must be
the same, and PIP parameters (in general) must be the same. If any of
these parameters are different, the system will not pend the move.
In this mode, all key frame effects are LINEAR. If you want to use other
key frame effects such as LINEAR ACCL or ARCH CW, you must
purposely store the PIP with a Move Setup.
For a given PIP, the following effects are valid "move" parameters, each of which
will transition smoothly from point to point. You can change any of these
parameters, and the system will pend a move:
~
~
~
~
PIP or Key size and position
PIP or Key source size and position
PIP Shadow size and position
PIP or Key Crop values
If you change any other parameters, such as shadow opacity, border color, border
style, image effects, etc., the system will not pend the move.
•
If you recall a Preset with a defined Move to an empty layer, both the starting and
ending points of the recalled Move will be used.
mêÉëÉí=kçíÉë
Please note the following important points regarding Presets:
•
•
•
Destinations — Active destinations (both standard and Aux) are stored in
Presets.
Aux Sources — Aux source selections are saved and recalled in Presets.
Barco Events Manager — All "resource" rules apply when Presets are used in
conjunction with the Barco Events Manager application.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
325
7. Operations
Layer and Aux Control
i~óÉê=~åÇ=^ìñ=`çåíêçä
Note
The Layer and Aux Control features are currently not
implemented.
AUX — Information to be provided.
AUX
326
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
7. Operations
Working with User Keys
tçêâáåÖ=ïáíÜ=rëÉê=hÉóë
1
Encore’s User Key feature enables you to select all (or a portion) of the current layer’s
attributes (such as border color, size, effects, etc.), and store them on a User Key. Those
attributes can then be applied to any active layer on Preview. Please note:
•
On the Controller LC only, 100 user keys are available — 10 pages of 10 keys
each. The feature is not available on the Controller SC.
The following topics are discussed:
•
•
•
Storing User Keys
Applying User Keys
User Key Notes
píçêáåÖ=rëÉê=hÉóë
„ Use the following steps to store a User Key with a layer’s attributes:
1.
Select the layer whose PIP parameters you want to store.
2.
Press USER KEYS on the Home Menu (or press User Copy in the Layer
Function Section) to display the User Key Copy Setup Menu.
3.
Using the menu, enable or disable the specific parameters that you wish to store
(e.g., Position, Size, Input Source, etc.). You can also enable or disable all
parameters using the {ALL ON} and {ALL OFF} buttons.
4.
In the User Key Section, press and hold the Page button, then press the desired
User Key (1 to 10) to switch to that page.
5.
To store the PIP’s attributes in a specific user key, press and hold User Copy,
then press the desired User Key.
6.
Repeat from step 1 to store additional User Keys.
^ééäóáåÖ=rëÉê=hÉóë
„ Use the following steps to apply the contents of a User Key to a selected layer:
1.
Select the layer onto which you want to apply the contents of a User Key.
2.
In the User Key Section, select the desired Page, then press the desired User
Key to apply its parameters.
rëÉê=hÉó=kçíÉë
Please note the following important points regarding User Keys:
•
•
User Keys work for both PIPs and Keys.
If the selected layer is a Key, when a User Key is learned, it remembers the state
of the Key (e.g., clip, gain, etc.) even though those options are not listed in the
menu. If you apply this specific User Key to a PIP, it changes to a Key.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
327
7. Operations
Working with Tallies
tçêâáåÖ=ïáíÜ=q~ääáÉë
The "Tally" function can be enabled or disabled as required.
„ Use the following steps to enable or disable tallies:
1.
Ensure that your tallies are properly set up. In Chapter 6, refer to the "Output
Format Setup" section on page 263 for instructions.
2.
In the System Keypad, press SYSTEM to display the System Menu.
3.
On the Tally Mode line:
~
~
Select On to enable all assigned tally relay closures.
Select Off to disable all assigned tally relay closures.
Please note:
•
•
•
•
328
Remember that tallies are mapped to inputs. When Tally Mode is On, if a
"mapped" tally goes to Program, one of the associated eight tally circuits turns on.
When the "mapped" input is removed from Program, the associated tally turns off.
Tally functionality can be tested. On the System Menu, press {DIAG} > {TALLY}
to initiate the test.
In Appendix A, refer to the “Tally Connector” section on page 351 for pinout
details.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
7. Operations
Enable/Disable Controller Lockout
bå~ÄäÉLaáë~ÄäÉ=`çåíêçääÉê=içÅâçìí
This section provides instructions for locking and unlocking the Controller.
S Prerequisite:
~
Ensure that you are familiar with the Lockout Code Menu and its
associated submenu. In Chapter 5, refer to the “Lockout Code Menu”
section on page 182.
„ Use the following steps to enable Controller panel lockout:
1.
On the Lockout Code Menu, select the type of lockout code you wish to use:
Default or Custom.
2.
If Custom is selected, use the Change Lockout Code Menu to enter the desired
code. Be sure to make a note of the selected code.
3.
To enable Controller lockout, press and hold the CANCEL button in the System
Keypad, then press the ALL button in the Layer Functions Section. The
message "KEYBOARD LOCKED" appears on the menu.
„ Use the following steps to disable Controller panel lockout:
1.
Press and hold the CANCEL button in the System Keypad, then press the ALL
button in the Layer Functions Section. The Enter Lockout Code menu
appears.
2.
Use the first eight numbered buttons on the Preset Bus to enter the code.
~
~
If the correct code has been entered, the message "Unlocking
Controller" appears on the display, and the Controller is ready for use.
If the incorrect code has been entered, the Controller remains locked.
Important
If you have selected a Custom lockout code, but you have
forgotten the code, a Master Code is always available. Refer
to the Encore system’s most current "What’s New" document
for details. This document is bundled with every software
download. Note that the Master Code changes with each
software version.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
329
7. Operations
Using Backup and Restore
rëáåÖ=_~Åâìé=~åÇ=oÉëíçêÉ
The Encore system enables you to backup and restore all (or a portion) of the complete
system configuration setup using a customer supplied flash memory card. The following
topics are discussed:
•
•
System Backup
System Restore
póëíÉã=_~Åâìé
This procedure enables you to back up all (or a portion) of the entire Encore system
configuration. Please note the following important points:
•
•
You can only store one system configuration on a Flash Memory Card.
Customer supplied Flash Memory Cards must be equal to or greater than 512MB.
„ Use the following steps to back up your system:
1.
Ensure that you have a (customer supplied) Flash Memory Card available.
2.
Insert the Flash Memory Card into the Controller’s rear panel Memory Card slot.
3.
Press MISC on the Home Menu, or press MISC in the System Keypad.
4.
Press {BACKUP RESTORE} to display the Backup/Restore Menu.
5.
On the Device line, select the combination of devices you want to back up:
~
~
~
VP+SP — backs up the Video Processors and ScreenPRO-IIs only.
Ctrlr+VP+SP — backs up the Controller, the Video Processors and any
ScreenPRO-IIs.
6.
On the Controller Options line, select which portion of the selected devices you
want to back up. Choose between All, System or Presets.
7.
Press {CHECK CARD} to display the Current Backup Menu.
~
~
8.
330
Ctrlr — backs up the Controller only.
Check the “Controller files backed up” section to confirm the types of
files present on the Flash Memory Card, if any. (e.g., System, Presets,
ScreenPRO-II). If files are present, determine if you want to overwrite, or
insert a new (blank) card.
Press {BACK} to return to the Backup/Restore Menu.
Press {BACKUP} to backup your system to the Flash Memory Card using the
selected device(s) and options.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
7. Operations
Using Backup and Restore
póëíÉã=oÉëíçêÉ
Please note the following important points regarding the "restore" function:
•
•
When restoring, you must have the same version of software installed in the
Controller as was used to perform the backup.
Conversion between versions can only be done with the Barco Backup and
Restore utility.
Note
The Barco Backup and Restore utility can be found in the
Encore Presentation System software bundle — available via
download from the Barco website.
„ Use the following steps to restore your system from the flash memory card:
1.
Ensure that your flash memory card is properly inserted in the Controller’s
MEMORY CARD slot.
2.
Press MISC on the Home Menu, or press MISC in the System Keypad.
3.
Press {BACKUP RESTORE} to display the Backup/Restore Menu.
4.
Press {CHECK CARD} to display the Current Backup Menu.
~
~
~
5.
Check the “Controller files backed up” section to confirm the types of
files present on the Flash Memory Card (e.g., System, Presets,
ScreenPRO-II).
Check the “VP/SPs backed up” section to confirm the IDs of the
processors that are backed up.
Press {BACK} to return to the Backup/Restore Menu.
On the Device line, select the combination of devices you want to restore:
~
~
~
Ctrlr — restores up the Controller only.
VP+SP — restores the Video Processors and ScreenPRO-IIs only.
Ctrlr+VP+SP — restores the Controller, the Video Processors and any
ScreenPRO-IIs.
6.
On the Controller Options line, select which portion of the selected devices you
want to restore. Choose between All, System or Presets.
7.
On the VP/SP to Restore line, select the device(s) that you wish to restore.
Choose between All devices, or the ID of a specific device (e.g., 1, 2, 3).
8.
Press {RESTORE} to restore the selected system configuration.
At the conclusion of this procedure, your system is completely restored — exactly the way
that you left it when you performed a complete system “backup.”
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
331
7. Operations
Working with Frame Grabs
tçêâáåÖ=ïáíÜ=cê~ãÉ=dê~Äë
The following topics are discussed in this section:
Frame
Grab
•
•
•
•
•
•
Frame Capture Overview
Capturing Frames from a Background or DSK Input
Capturing Frames from a Layer
Saving Frames in Permanent Memory
Naming a Saved Frame
Erasing and Deleting Frames
Please note the following important prerequisites to all frame grab procedures:
•
•
Ensure that you are familiar with the Background Input Setup Menu. In
Chapter 5, refer to the “Background Input Setup Menu" section on page 217.
Ensure that you are familiar with the Frame Grab Menu. In Chapter 5, refer to the
“Frame Grab Menu" section on page 225 for details.
cê~ãÉ=`~éíìêÉ=lîÉêîáÉï
The Encore system enables you to capture frames into the Video Processor’s three internal
frame stores. The “sources” of the frames are each Processor’s background inputs, or any
active layer. Please note:
•
•
•
For single screen and ScreenPRO-II destinations, you are working with the
individual destination’s three frame stores (FG_1, FG_2 and FG_3) as normal.
For widescreen destinations, even though you are using the frame stores of
multiple Processors, you are "operationally" working with only three frame stores
(FG_1, FG_2 and FG_3) — each of which captures’s its “slice” of the complete
widescreen image.
For “stack” systems, remember you have six “temp” frame stores available, and
your menus will change accordingly:
~
Three frame stores are available for the “bottom” stack Processor:
•
~
BG_FG_1, BG_FG_2 and BG_FG_3.
Three frame stores are available for the “top” stack Processor:
•
DSK_FG_1, DSK_FG_2 and DSK_FG_3.
Encore provides complete flexibility with regard to frame grabs:
•
Temporary Frame Stores — The Encore Video Processor has three temporary
(temp) frame stores (FG_1, FG_2 and FG_3) which function as the three sources
from which “on-air” frames originate. During operations, you can:
~
~
~
332
Capture (grab) frames to any “temp” frame store.
Assign any temp frame store to BG A, BG B or the DSK.
Download a frame from “permanent” storage into any temp frame store
for use on-air.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
7. Operations
Working with Frame Grabs
~
Note
•
Overwrite any temp frame store with a new capture.
All frames in “temp” storage are lost when the system is
powered down.
Capture Sources — All frame grabs are full screen captures. A frame can be
captured from BG A, BG B, the DSK, or any of the scaled inputs (layers).
The following important rules apply:
~
~
~
~
Note
If BG A, BG B, or the DSK is on Program, a frame cannot be captured.
If you attempt a capture, you will get an error message.
If BG A, BG B, or the DSK is selected on Preview (and none of those
three layers are on Program), a frame can be captured.
If you select a layer on Preview or Program, a frame can be captured
— provided that BG A, BG B, or the DSK is not on Program.
In order to capture a frame from BG A, BG B, or the DSK, the
background input "type" must be set to Analog or DVI. If it is not, you will
get an error message.
Because all grabs are full screen captures, when you capture
a layer, you will capture the selected PIP with no borders, and
with black as the background.
Once captured, a frame can be assigned as the input “type” for BG A, BG B, or
the DSK — basically any “green” button in the Layer Control Section.
•
Permanent Frame Stores — As standard, the Encore Video Processor has three
permanent (non-volatile) frame stores available. Please note:
~
~
~
~
•
Frames in permanent storage are not lost when the system is powered
down. At bootup, all frames from the three “permanent” frame stores are
read into temp memory for use on-air.
In a standard Encore system, at any one time you could have a
maximum of three frames in temporary memory, and three different
frames in permanent memory.
Permanent frames can be overwritten, deleted (flagged for deletion
only), or erased (permanently deleted).
Any frame in permanent memory can be named using a customersupplied PS/2 keyboard.
Extended Frame Grab Option — If this “ES” option is installed, you can store
and recall 100 frames in non-volatile memory. Benefits include:
~
~
Faster saves to permanent storage (20 - 30 seconds vs. 2 - 3 minutes)
Direct recalls from permanent storage into temporary memory via Preset
Recalls. Under this condition, you will experience a complete "draw to
screen" time of approximately 4 - 6 seconds.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
333
7. Operations
Working with Frame Grabs
`~éíìêáåÖ=cê~ãÉë=Ñêçã=~=_~ÅâÖêçìåÇ=çê=aph=fåéìí
„ Use the following steps to capture a frame from a background input:
1.
Ensure that the background (or DSK) input from which you want to capture is
properly set up as an Analog or DVI input. In Chapter 6, refer to the
"Background Setup" and "DSK Setup" sections for instructions.
2.
Ensure that BG A, BG B or the DSK are not on Program. If they are, you will get
a pop-up prompt. Transition these layers off Program in the normal manner.
3.
In the Layer Control Section, select the background (or DSK) from which you
want to capture. The button blinks, the source appears on Preview, and the
selected setup menu appears.
4.
In the Layer Functions Section, press FRAME GRAB to display the Frame
Grab Menu.
5.
On the Destination line, select the destination for which you want to capture.
~
~
6.
If a single destination is active, selections cannot be made.
On the ID line, select the IDs of the Processor(s) for which you want to capture.
~
~
Note
7.
If multiple destinations are active, select the desired destination.
For single screen destinations, ID selections cannot be made.
For wide screen destinations only, select All to capture across all
Processors, or select the ID of an individual processor.
In the case of an individual ID selection, the frame will be
grabbed only for that Processor — leaving the other "wide
screen" portions of that frame store available.
On the Frame Number line, select the temporary frame store into which the frame
will be captured (FG_1, FG_2 or FG_3). Remember that for "stack" systems:
~
~
Background frames are captured into the "bottom" stack Processor:
BG_FG_1, BG_FG_2 or BG_FG_3.
DSK frames are captured into the "top" stack Processor: DSK_FG_1,
DSK_FG_2 and DSK_FG_3.
8.
Press {CAPTURE}. Once pressed, the screen will indicate that the frame is being
captured. A pop-up message confirms the procedure. In the Name field, the
captured frame is listed as UNSAVED.
9.
Repeat the procedure to capture additional frames from a background (or DSK)
input. Remember that you can always overwrite the selected frame store.
Please note:
•
The captured frame(s) can now be assigned as the input “type” for BG A, BG B or
the DSK. In Chapter 6, refer to the following sections for instructions:
~
~
•
•
334
"Background Setup," page 269.
"DSK Setup," page 274.
Captured frames reside in temporary memory. If the system is powered down or
reset, the frames will be lost. To save frames in permanent memory, refer to the
"Saving Frames in Permanent Memory" section on page 336.
Only "saved" frames can be named.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
7. Operations
Working with Frame Grabs
`~éíìêáåÖ=cê~ãÉë=Ñêçã=~=i~óÉê
„ Use the following steps to capture a frame from a layer.
1.
Ensure that BG A, BG B or the DSK are not on Program. If they are, you will get
a pop-up prompt. Transition these layers off Program in the normal manner.
2.
In the Layer Control Section, select the layer (on either Program or Preview)
from which you want to capture a frame. The button blinks indicating that it is
"selected."
3.
Select PIP or Key in the normal manner. The selected PIP or Key Adjustment
Menu appears.
4.
Adjust the PIP or Key’s size and position. Remember that:
~
~
The system will capture the "selected" layer in its current size and
position, with no borders, and with black as the background.
If you have two layers on Preview, only the active (selected) layer will be
captured, regardless of image priority.
5.
In the Layer Functions Section, press FRAME GRAB to display the Frame
Grab Menu.
6.
On the Destination line, select the destination for which you want to capture.
~
~
7.
Note
For single screen destinations, ID selections cannot be made.
For wide screen destinations only, select All to capture across all
Processors, or select the ID of an individual processor.
In the case of an individual ID selection, the frame will be
grabbed only for that Processor — leaving the other "wide
screen" portions of that frame store available.
On the Frame Number line, select the temporary frame store into which the frame
will be captured (FG_1, FG_2 or FG_3). Remember that for "stack" systems:
~
~
9.
If a single destination is active, selections cannot be made.
On the ID line, select the IDs of the Processor(s) for which you want to capture.
~
~
8.
If multiple destinations are active, select the desired destination.
Background frames are captured into the "bottom" stack Processor:
BG_FG_1, BG_FG_2 or BG_FG_3.
DSK frames are captured into the "top" stack Processor: DSK_FG_1,
DSK_FG_2 and DSK_FG_3.
Press {CAPTURE}. Once pressed, the screen will indicate that the frame is being
captured. A pop-up message confirms the procedure. In the Name field, the
captured frame is listed as UNSAVED.
10. Repeat the procedure to capture additional frames from a layer. Remember that
you can always overwrite the frame store.
Please note:
•
The captured frame(s) can now be assigned as the input “type” for BG A, BG B or
the DSK. In Chapter 6, refer to the following sections for instructions:
~
~
"Background Setup," page 269.
"DSK Setup," page 274.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
335
7. Operations
Working with Frame Grabs
•
•
Captured frames reside in temporary memory. If the system is powered down or
reset, the frames will be lost. To save frames in permanent memory, refer to the
"Saving Frames in Permanent Memory" section on page 336.
Only "saved" frames can be named.
p~îáåÖ=cê~ãÉë=áå=mÉêã~åÉåí=jÉãçêó
„ Use the following steps to save a captured frame into permanent memory.
1.
Capture a frame as outlined in the previous two sections.
~
~
2.
"Capturing Frames from a Background or DSK Input" on page 334.
"Capturing Frames from a Layer" on page 335.
On the Frame Grab Menu, use the Frame Number line to select the frame that
you wish to save.
Warning
3.
Press {SAVE} to save the captured frame into a storage register. Remember that
three registers are available in standard systems, and 100 registers are available
in "ES" systems.
~
~
Note
4.
336
Do not execute the next step during live production. All
controls will be locked during the "save" process. Always try
to save your frames during pre-production.
In standard systems, the Frame Save Menu appears.
•
Press YES to save the frame. All front panel controls will be
locked for up to three minutes.
•
Press NO to cancel the procedure.
In "ES" systems, the Extended Frame Save Menu appears.
•
In the Saved Location field, select a memory location (1 - 100).
•
(Optional) In the New Name field, type a new name. Ensure
that a PS/2 keyboard is properly connected to the Controller’s
Keyboard port.
•
Press {SAVE} to save the selected frame. All front panel
controls will be locked for up to three minutes.
Remember that you can always overwrite a frame in
permanent memory.
Repeat the procedure to save additional frames.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
7. Operations
Working with Frame Grabs
k~ãáåÖ=~=p~îÉÇ=cê~ãÉ
„ Use the following steps to name (or rename) a saved frame.
1.
Ensure that the frame you wish to name has either been captured, or saved in
permanent memory.
Note
If the frame has only been captured, you can use the "Save"
procedure to both save and name the frame simultaneously.
Refer to the "Saving Frames in Permanent Memory"
section on page 336 for details.
Note
If you are using a ScreenPRO-II destination, ensure that the
Tally option is physically installed.
2.
Ensure that a (customer supplied) PS/2 keyboard is connected to the Controller’s
Keyboard connector.
3.
On the Frame Grab Menu, press {NAME} to display the Frame Grab Name
Menu.
4.
On the Saved Location line, select the frame that you wish to name.
5.
Using the keyboard, enter the desired name. As you type, characters will appear
in the menu’s New Name field.
6.
Press Enter (on the PS/2 keyboard) to save the new name. Once saved, the
system "attaches" the name to the frame in permanent memory.
7.
Repeat the procedure to name additional frames.
bê~ëáåÖ=~åÇ=aÉäÉíáåÖ=cê~ãÉë
Please remember the following rules regarding erasing and deleting frames:
•
•
The "delete" procedure enables you to mark a selected frame as deleted — but
the ERASE function is still required for permanent deletion. You can consider this
as a “quick” delete function.
The "erase" procedure is a "destructive" process that enables you to permanently
erase a selected frame. This process takes from 1 to 2 minutes, and locks the
console during the procedure.
„ (Standard Systems — Delete) Use the following steps to delete a saved frame.
1.
On the Frame Grab Menu, select the frame store that you wish to delete.
2.
Press {DELETE} to display the Frame Delete Menu.
3.
Press {YES} to delete the selected frame.
4.
Repeat the procedure to delete additional frames.
„ ("ES" Systems — Delete) Use the following steps to delete a saved frame.
1.
On the Frame Grab Menu, press {DELETE} to display the Frame Delete Menu.
2.
On the Saved Location line, select the frame that you wish to delete.
Note
The ADJ knob only scrolls through saved frames.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
337
7. Operations
Working with Frame Grabs
3.
Press {DELETE} to delete the selected frame.
4.
Repeat the procedure to delete additional frames.
„ (Standard Systems — Erase) Use the following steps to erase a saved frame.
1.
On the Frame Grab Menu, select the frame store that you wish to erase.
2.
Press {ERASE} to display the Frame Erase Menu.
3.
Press {YES} to erase the selected frame. All front panel controls will be locked for
1 to 2 minutes.
4.
Repeat the procedure to erase additional frames.
„ ("ES" Systems — Delete) Use the following steps to erase a saved frame.
1.
On the Frame Grab Menu, press {ERASE} to display the Frame Erase Menu.
2.
On the Saved Location line, select the frame that you wish to erase.
Note
338
The ADJ knob only scrolls through all frames, giving you
access to all 100 registers.
3.
Press {ERASE} to erase the selected frame.
4.
Repeat the procedure to erase additional frames.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
7. Operations
Working with the DSK
tçêâáåÖ=ïáíÜ=íÜÉ=aph
„ Use the following steps to perform a downstream key:
DSK
1.
Ensure that the DSK is properly set up, and the key "type" is selected on the DSK
Input Setup Menu. In Chapter 6, refer to the "DSK Setup" section on page 274
for instructions.
2.
Please remember the following important DSK rules:
~
~
~
For ScreenPRO-II destinations, remember that BG B and the DSK are
mutually exclusive.
For single or wide screen Encore systems using single M/E Video
Processors, there are only two DVI input connectors available (1A and
1B). In this configuration, you cannot use both backgrounds and the
DSK — you can only use two of the three.
For stack configurations, remember that DSK sources connect to the
“top” stack Processor.
3.
In the Layer Control Section, press DSK to display the DSK Adjustment Menu.
4.
On the Destination line, select the destination on which you want to perform the
downstream key.
~
~
5.
If multiple destinations are active, select the desired destination.
If a single destination is active, selections cannot be made.
On the ID line, select the IDs of the Processor(s) on which you want to perform the
downstream key.
~
~
For single screen destinations, ID selections cannot be made.
For wide screen destinations only, select All to set up all Processors, or
select the ID of an individual processor.
6.
On the Key Type line, select Luma or Color as required.
7.
Adjust DSK parameters, including key type, invert, clip, gain, opacity and fill
source. Refer to the "Modifying Keys" section on page 304 for details.
Note
Not all parameters listed in the "Modifying Keys" section
apply to a DSK.
8.
Perform a CUT or AUTO TRANS.
9.
Clear the DSK from Program in the normal manner — by clearing its layer from
Preview and then transitioning.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
339
7. Operations
Working with the DSK
340
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë
få=qÜáë=^ééÉåÇáñ
This appendix provides detailed technical specifications for the Encore Presentation
System. The following topics are discussed:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Input Specifications
Output Specifications
Physical and Electrical Specifications
Communications Specifications
Pinouts
Input and Output Resolutions
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
341
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë
Input Specifications
fåéìí=péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë=
The table below lists Encore Presentation System input specifications.
Table A-1. Encore Video Processor Input Specifications
Input
Mixer/Effects Channels
(2 per M/E board)
Parameter
Analog Inputs
RGBHV / RGBS / RGsB computer video, YPbPr video (SD or
HD), S-video, or Composite video on 15-pin HD connector
SD and HDSDI
Input
Per SMPTE 259M-C (NTSC / PAL resolution) SMPTE 292M
(HDTV) on BNC connector
DVI Input
Per DDWG 1.0 on DVI-I connector
Input
Resolutions
Native Resolution
Background Channels
(2 per M/E board)
342
NTSC/PAL
Computer Resolutions VGA (640 x 480) through
UXGA (1600 x 1200)
HDTV Resolutions up to 1920 x 1080 (720p, 1080i,
1080p)
2048 x 1080p (Digital Cinema format)
Plasma Display Resolutions
RGBHV computer video on DVI-I connector
DVI Input
Per DDWG 1.0 on DVI-I connector
•
•
•
•
Computer Resolutions: SVGA (800 x 600) through
UXGA (1600 x 1200)
HDTV Resolutions (720p, 1080p)
2048 x 1080p (Digital Cinema format)
Plasma Display Resolutions
Analog Inputs
RGBHV computer video on DVI-I connector
DVI Input
Per DDWG 1.0 on DVI-I connector
Input
Resolutions
Frame Lock Input
•
•
•
•
•
Analog Inputs
Input
Resolutions
Downstream Key Input
(1 per Encore Video
Processor)
Specification
•
•
•
•
Computer Resolutions: SVGA (800 x 600) through
UXGA (1600 x 1200)
HDTV Resolutions (720p, 1080p)
2048 x 1080p (Digital Cinema format)
Plasma Display Resolutions
NTSC/PAL black burst reference on BNC Connector
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë
Output Specifications
lìíéìí=péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë=
The table below lists Encore Presentation System output specifications.
Table A-2. Encore Video Processor Output Specifications
Output
Preview Output
Program Output 1
Program Output 2
Parameter
Analog Outputs
RGBHV / RGBS / RGsB, YPbPr video (SD or HD), on 15-pin
HD connectors
DVI Output
Per DDWG 1.0 on DVI-I connector
Analog Outputs
RGBHV / RGBS / RGsB, YPbPr video (SD or HD), on 15-pin
HD connectors
DVI Output
Per DDWG 1.0 on DVI-I connector
Optional HDSDI
Output
Per SMPTE 259M-C (NTSC / PAL resolution) SMPTE 292M
(HDTV) on BNC connector (Program Out)
Function
This output can be programmed to serve as a second
buffered program output or a monitoring program output
Analog Outputs
RGBHV / RGBS / RGsB, YPbPr video (SD or HD), on 15-pin
HD connectors
DVI Output
Per DDWG 1.0 on DVI-I connector
Optional HDSDI
Output
Per SMPTE 259M-C (NTSC / PAL resolution) SMPTE 292M
(HDTV) on BNC connector (Program Out)
•
•
•
•
Output Resolutions
Delay
Specification
Computer Resolutions VGA (640 x 480) through
UXGA (1600 x 1200)
HDTV Resolutions up to 1920 x 1080 (720p,1080I,
1080p)
2048 x 1080 (Digital Cinema format)
Plasma Display Resolutions
50Hz
30ms max.
60Hz
25ms max.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
343
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë
Physical and Electrical Specifications
mÜóëáÅ~ä=~åÇ=bäÉÅíêáÅ~ä=péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë=
The table below lists Encore Presentation System physical and electrical specifications.
Table A-3. Encore Physical and Electrical Specifications
Parameter
Power
Mechanical
Detail
Specification
Video Processor
120-240 VAC - 50/60 Hz., Auto-selecting 1.0A maximum
Controllers
120-240 VAC - 50/60 Hz., Auto-selecting 1.7A maximum
Video Processor
3 RU Rackmount Chassis
H: 5.25 inches (13.34 cm)
W: 17.00 inches (43.18 cm)
D: 15.00 inches (38.10 cm)
Controller SC
H: 10.60 inches (26.92 cm)
W: 17.00 inches (43.18 cm)
D: 22.14 inches (56.24 cm)
Controller LC
H: 10.60 inches (26.92 cm)
W: 44.54 inches (113.13 cm)
D: 22.14 inches (56.24 cm)
Weight
Video Processor
1 M/E: 27.8 lbs (12.61 kg)
2 M/E: 30.5 lbs (13.83 kg)
3 M/E: 33.2 lbs (15.05 kg)
344
Controller SC
28.9 lbs (13.11 kg)
Controller LC
55.8 lbs (25.31 kg)
Temperature
0-40 degrees C
Humidity
0-95% non-condensing
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë
Communications Specifications
`çããìåáÅ~íáçåë=péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë=
The table below lists Encore Presentation System communications specifications.
Table A-4. Encore Communications Specifications
Parameter
RS-232
Detail
Specification
Video Processor
DB-9 Female, DCE, 115k Baud
Controller (Console)
DB-9 Female, DCE, 115k Baud
Controller (EXT COMM)
DB-9 Female, DCE, 115k Baud
Video Processor
RJ-45, 10/100 Mbps Autosense
Controllers
RJ-45, 10/100 Mbps Autosense
Tally
Controllers
DB-25 Male, Dry-Contact Relay Closures
Keyboard Port
Controllers
PS/2 Connector
MultiMedia Card
Controllers
System specification version 3.31 compliant.
Ethernet
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
345
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë
Pinouts
máåçìíë=
The following topics are discussed in this section:
•
•
•
•
•
•
DVI Connector Pinouts
DVI-I Connector Pinouts
Analog 15-pin D Connector
Ethernet Connector
Serial Connector
Tally Connector
asf=`çååÉÅíçê=máåçìíë
The figure below illustrates the DVI connector:
1
8
17
24
9
Figure A-1. DVI Connector
The table below lists DVI Connector pinouts. Please note:
•
•
T.M.D.S = Transition Minimized Differential Signal
DDC = Display Data Channel
Table A-5. DVI Connector Pinouts
Pin
346
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
T.M.D.S. Data 2-
13
T.M.D.S. Data 3+
2
T.M.D.S. Data 2+
14
+5V Power
3
T.M.D.S. Data 2/4 Shield
15
ground (for +5V)
4
T.M.D.S. Data 4-
16
Hot Plug Detect
5
T.M.D.S. Data 4+
17
T.M.D.S. Data 0-
6
DDC Clock
18
T.M.D.S. Data 0+
7
DDC Data
19
T.M.D.S. Data 0/5 Shield
8
Analog Vertical Sync
20
T.M.D.S. Data 5-
9
T.M.D.S. Data 1-
21
T.M.D.S. Data 5+
10
T.M.D.S. Data 1+
22
T.M.D.S. Clock Shield
11
T.M.D.S. Data 1/3 Shield
23
T.M.D.S. Clock +
12
T.M.D.S. Data 3-
24
T.M.D.S. Clock -
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë
Pinouts
asfJf=`çååÉÅíçê=máåçìíë
The figure below illustrates the DVI-I connector:
1
8 C1 C2
9
C5
17
24 C3 C4
Figure A-2. DVI-I Connector
The table below lists DVI-I Connector pinouts. Please note:
•
•
T.M.D.S = Transition Minimized Differential Signal
DDC = Display Data Channel
Table A-6. DVI-I Connector Pinouts
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
T.M.D.S. Data 2-
13
T.M.D.S. Data 3+
2
T.M.D.S. Data 2+
14
+5V Power
3
T.M.D.S. Data 2/4 Shield
15
ground (for +5V)
4
T.M.D.S. Data 4-
16
Hot Plug Detect
5
T.M.D.S. Data 4+
17
T.M.D.S. Data 0-
6
DDC Clock
18
T.M.D.S. Data 0+
7
DDC Data
19
T.M.D.S. Data 0/5 Shield
8
Analog Vertical Sync
20
T.M.D.S. Data 5-
9
T.M.D.S. Data 1-
21
T.M.D.S. Data 5+
10
T.M.D.S. Data 1+
22
T.M.D.S. Clock Shield
11
T.M.D.S. Data 1/3 Shield
23
T.M.D.S. Clock +
12
T.M.D.S. Data 3-
24
T.M.D.S. Clock -
MicroCross Pins
C1
Analog Red Video
C4
Analog Horizontal Sync
C2
Analog Green Video
C5
Analog Common Ground Return
C3
Analog Blue Video
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
347
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë
Pinouts
^å~äçÖ=NRJéáå=a=`çååÉÅíçê
The figure below illustrates the analog 15-pin D connector:
5
1
10
6
15
11
Figure A-3. Analog 15-pin D Connector
The table below lists Analog 15-pin D connector pinouts.
Table A-7. Analog 15-pin D Connector Pinouts
Pin
Signal
Pin
1
Red
9
2
Green
10
3
Blue
11
Signal
GND
4
12
5
13
H Sync or C Sync
V Sync
6
Red return
14
7
Green return
15
8
Blue return
Note that each M/E’s Analog Input connectors (A and B) accept a variety of analog formats
including VGA, low-resolution composite video, S-video and YUV component video.
•
•
For RGB with H and V sync, use the VGA connector directly.
Using a (customer supplied) VGA to 5xBNC breakout cable, multiple input
combinations are possible. Cells with check marks denote the connections
required for the indicated format.
Table A-8. Analog Input Combinations using Breakout Cable
Breakout Cable
Wire Color
Composite
Video
R
G
B
H Sync
V Sync
348
3
S-Video
(Y/C)
YUV
(YPbPr)
RGB
Sync on Green
RGB
Comp Sync
RGB
Separate H V
3 (Chrom)
3 (Pr)
3
3
3
3 (Lum)
3 (Lum)
3
3
3
3 (Pb)
3
3
3
3
3
3
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë
Pinouts
bíÜÉêåÉí=`çååÉÅíçê
The figure below illustrates the Ethernet connector:
1
8
Figure A-4. Ethernet Connector
The table below lists Ethernet connector pinouts.
Table A-9. Ethernet Connector Pinouts
Pin
Signal
Wire Color
1
TX Data +
White / Orange
2
TX Data -
Orange
3
RX Data +
White / Green
4
Blue
5
White / Blue
6
RX Data -
Green
7
White / Brown
8
Brown
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
349
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë
Pinouts
pÉêá~ä=`çååÉÅíçê
The figure below illustrates the Video Processor’s Serial connector, and the Ext Comm
and Console connectors on both Controller models. All connectors are identical.
5
1
9
6
Figure A-5. Serial Connector
The table below lists Serial, Ext Comm and Console connector pinouts.
Table A-10. Serial Connector Pinouts
Pin
350
RS-232 Signal
Description
1
CD
Carrier Detect
2
TXD
Transmitted Data
3
RXD
Received Data
4
DSR
Data Set Ready
5
GND
Signal Ground
6
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
7
CTS
Clear To Send
8
RTS
Request To Send
9
RI
Unused
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë
Pinouts
q~ääó=`çååÉÅíçê
Each Encore Controller provides one 25-pin D connector for issuing tally “relay closure”
commands to external devices. Eight tally circuits are provided. Please note:
•
•
•
•
Tally outputs provide dry-contact relay closures between signal pairs or contact
closures to ground, whenever the corresponding input source is selected for
display on a Program output.
Tally outputs may be used to signal when input devices (cameras) are “live.”
Each contact has a rating of 1 Amp at 30 VDC, and 0.5 Amps at 125 VDC.
A mating connector is required — see the diagrams below.
1
13
14
1
14
13
25
25
Figure A-6. Tally Connector and Circuit
The table below lists Tally Connector pinouts:
Table A-11. Tally Connector Pinouts
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
Tally 1 contact closure
14
Tally 1 grounding closure
2
Tally 1 contact closure
15
Tally 2 contact closure
3
Tally 2 grounding closure
16
Tally 2 contact closure
4
Tally 3 contact closure
17
Tally 3 grounding closure
5
Tally 3 contact closure
18
Tally 4 contact closure
6
Tally 4 grounding closure
19
Tally 4 contact closure
7
Tally 5 contact closure
20
Tally 5 grounding closure
8
Tally 5 contact closure
21
Tally 6 contact closure
9
Tally 6 grounding closure
22
Tally 6 contact closure
10
Tally 7 contact closure
23
Tally 7 grounding closure
11
Tally 7 contact closure
24
Tally 8 contact closure
12
Tally 8 grounding closure
25
Tally 8 contact closure
13
Signal ground
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
351
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë
Input and Output Resolutions
fåéìí=~åÇ=lìíéìí=oÉëçäìíáçåë
The tables on the following pages provide comprehensive lists of available input and output
resolutions. Please note:
•
•
In Chapter 5, refer to the “Input Menu Description” section on page 139 for
details on assigning input resolutions.
In Chapter 5, refer to the “Output Menu Description” section on page 149 for
details on assigning output resolutions.
Note
Please contact Barco Technical Support if you would like to
request the addition of a new resolution.
The following topics are provided:
•
•
352
Input Resolutions
Output Resolutions
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë
Input and Output Resolutions
fåéìí=oÉëçäìíáçåë
Input resolutions are listed below. Each
entry lists Format @Fv (Hz).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
NTSC (480i)
720x480p
PAL (576i)
720x575p
640x480 @59.94
640x480 @60
640x480 @72
640x480 @75
640x480 @85
800x600 @50
800x600 @56
800x600 @59.94
800x600 @60
800x600 @72
800x600 @75
800x600 @85
1024x768 @47.95
1024x768 @48
1024x768 @50
1024x768 @59.94
1024x768 @60
1024x768 @70
1024x768 @71.93
1024x768 @72
1024x768 @75
1024x768 @85
1152x864 @75
1280x768 @47.95
1280x768 @48
1280x768 @50
1280x768 @59.94
1280x768 @75
1280x960 @50
1280x960 @59.94
1280x960 @60
1280x960 @85
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1280x1024 @47.95
1280x1024 @48
1280x1024 @50
1280x1024 @59.94
1280x1024 @60
1280x1024 @71.93
1280x1024 @72
1280x1024 @75
1280x1024 @85
1364x768 @47.95
1364x768 @48
1364x768 @50
1364x768 @59.94
1364x768 @75
1364x1024 @47.95
1364x1024 @48
1364x1024 @50
1364x1024 @59.94
1364x1024 @75
1366x768 @50
1366x768 @59.94
1400x1050 @48
1400x1050 @50
1400x1050 @59.94
1400x1050 @60
1400x1050 @75
1536x768 @50
1536x768 @59.94
1680x1050 @60
1600x1200 @47.95
1600x1200 @48
1600x1200 @50
1600x1200 @59.94
1600x1200 @60
1280x720p @48
1280x720p @50
1280x720p @59.94
1280x720p @60
1920x1080p @23.98
353
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë
Input and Output Resolutions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
354
1920x1080p @24
1920x1080p @25
1920x1080p @29.97
1920x1080p @30
1920x1080p @48
1920x1080p @50
1920x1080p II @50
1920x1080p @59.94
1920x1080p @60
1920x1080sF@23.98
1920x1080sF@24
1920x1080i @50
1920x1080i @59.94
1920x1080i @60
2048x1080p @48
2048x1080p @50
2048x1080p II @50
2048x1080p @59.94
2048x512p @59.94
2048x1080p @60
1920x1200p @60
Apple 1200p @60
875p
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë
Input and Output Resolutions
lìíéìí=oÉëçäìíáçåë
Output resolutions are listed below. Each
entry lists Format @Fv (Hz).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
NTSC (480i)
720x480p
PAL (576i)
720x575p
640x480 @59.94
640x480 @60
640x480 @72
640x480 @75
800x600 @50
800x600 @59.94
800x600 @60
800x600 @72
800x600 @75
1024x768 @47.95
1024x768 @48
1024x768 @50
1024x768 @59.94
1024x768 @60
1024x768 @71.93
1024x768 @72
1024x768 @75
1280x768 @47.95
1280x768 @48
1280x768 @50
1280x768 @59.94
1280x768 @75
1280x960 @50
1280x960 @59.94
1280x960 @60
1280x1024 @47.95
1280x1024 @48
1280x1024 @50
1280x1024 @59.94
1280x1024 @60
1280x1024 @71.93
1280x1024 @72
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1280x1024 @75
1364x768 @47.95
1364x768 @48
1364x768 @50
1364x768 @59.94
1364x768 @75
1364x1024 @50
1364x1024 @59.94
1364x1024 @75
1366x768 @50
1366x768 @59.94
1400x1050 @48
1400x1050 @50
1400x1050 @59.94
1400x1050 @60
1400x1050 @75
1536x768 @50
1536x768 @59.94
1680x1050 @60
1600x1200 @47.95
1600x1200 @48
1600x1200 @50
1600x1200 @59.94
1600x1200 @60
1280x720p @48
1280x720p @50
1280x720p @59.94
1280x720p @60
1920x1080p @29.97
1920x1080p @30
1920x1080p @48
1920x1080p @50
1920x1080p II @50
1920x1080p @59.94
1920x1080p @60
1920x1080sF@23.98
1920x1080sF@24
1920x1080i @50
1920x1080i @59.94
355
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë
Input and Output Resolutions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
356
1920x1080i @60
2048x1080p @48
2048x1080p @50
2048x1080p II @50
2048x1080p @59.94
2048x512p @59.94
2048x1080p @60
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
_K==`çåí~Åí=fåÑçêã~íáçå
få=qÜáë=^ééÉåÇáñ
The following topics are discussed in this Appendix:
•
•
•
Warranty
Return Material Authorization (RMA)
Contact Information
t~êê~åíó
All video products are designed and tested to the highest quality standards and are backed
by a full 3-year parts and labor warranty. Warranties are effective upon delivery date to
customer and are non-transferable. Barco warranties are only valid to the original
purchaser/owner. Warranty related repairs include parts and labor, but do not include faults
resulting from user negligence, special modifications, lightning strikes, abuse (drop/crush),
and/or other unusual damages.
The customer shall pay shipping charges when unit is returned for repair. Barco will cover
shipping charges for return shipments to customers.
oÉíìêå=j~íÉêá~ä=^ìíÜçêáò~íáçå=Eoj^F
In the unlikely event that a product is required to return for repair, please call the following
number and ask for a Sales Engineer to receive a Return Merchandise Authorization
number (RMA).
•
(888) 414-7226
RMA Conditions are listed below:
a.
Prior to returning any item, you must receive a Return Merchandise
Authorization (RMA) number.
b.
All RMA numbers must appear on their return-shipping label.
c.
RMA numbers are valid for ten (10) days from issue date.
d.
All shipping and insurance charges on all RMAs must be prepaid by the
customer
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
357
_K==`çåí~Åí=fåÑçêã~íáçå
Contact Information
`çåí~Åí=fåÑçêã~íáçå
Barco Media and Entertainment
11101 Trade Center Drive
Rancho Cordova, California 95670
USA
•
•
•
Phone: (916) 859-2500
Fax: (916) 859-2515
Website: www.barco.com
Sales Contact
•
•
•
Direct: (916) 859-2505
Toll Free: (888) 414-7226
E-mail: folsomsales@barco.com
Barco N.V.
Noordlaan 5
8520 Kuurne
BELGIUM
•
•
•
Phone: +32 56.36.82.11
Fax: +32 56.35.16.51
Website: www.barco.com
Technical Support
•
•
358
Tech Line: (866) 374-7878 — 24 hours per day, 7 days per week
E-mail: folsomsupport@barco.com
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
`K==réÖê~ÇáåÖ=pçÑíï~êÉ
få=qÜáë=^ééÉåÇáñ
The following topics are discussed in this Appendix:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Software Upgrade Overview
Hardware Requirements
Software Requirements
Downloading Software
Serial Upgrade Method
Ethernet Upgrade Method
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
359
`K==réÖê~ÇáåÖ=pçÑíï~êÉ
Software Upgrade Overview
pçÑíï~êÉ=réÖê~ÇÉ=lîÉêîáÉï
Firmware files for the Encore Presentation System are loaded into the hardware at powerup. These files are stored in the unit’s onboard flash memory, which can be upgraded
using a serial or Ethernet connection to a PC (or laptop).
The desired connection is made through the Console or Ethernet port on the Controller’s
rear panel, in conjunction with the “Flash Loader” utility supplied with each upgrade. The
Flash Loader enables you to update the Flash memory with the latest software revision.
The utility should be run from a PC’s hard drive (recommended).
e~êÇï~êÉ=oÉèìáêÉãÉåíë
The following hardware items are required to upgrade the Encore Presentation System:
•
IBM compatible computer with an available COM port or Ethernet port.
If you elect to connect serially, a serial cable conforming to EIA RS-232 specifications (e.g.,
standard modem cable) is required. The cable should have a DB-9 male connector on one
end (for connection to the Controller’s Console port), and the appropriate connector on the
other end for connection to your PC (typically, a DB-9).
pçÑíï~êÉ=oÉèìáêÉãÉåíë
The following list outlines software requirements for upgrading the Encore system:
•
•
Ensure that your PC (or laptop) uses the Windows® 2000 or XP operating
systems.
Software files:
~
~
~
Note
Flash File Loader. (This software enables the PC to send commands to
the Encore Presentation System.)
Encore Presentation System software
What’s New File
All software files listed above (and more) are contained in the
file that you will download.
Software files can be downloaded from either the Folsom FTP site or the Barco website, as
described in the following “Downloading Software” section on page 361.
360
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
`K==réÖê~ÇáåÖ=pçÑíï~êÉ
Downloading Software
açïåäç~ÇáåÖ=pçÑíï~êÉ
Two different methods can be used to download Encore system software and the Flash File
Loader utility:
•
•
Via FTP Site
Via Web Site
sá~=cqm=páíÉ
Barco Folsom's FTP site address is: ftp.folsom.com
„ To download from the FTP site:
1.
Create a target folder on your PC (e.g., Encore).
2.
If you are using an FTP client, logon to our site as follows:
~
~
User name: anonymous
Password: your email address
S Example: johndoe@somecompany.com
If you are using a web browser to access our FTP site, point the browser to:
ftp://ftp.folsom.com
3.
Once logged on, navigate to the following directory:
ftp://ftp.folsom.com/Image Processing/Encore/
4.
Transfer the following file to the target folder on your PC:
EncoreSystem_SPII Controller_Rev###.EXE
5.
With the download complete, navigate to the target folder and double-click the
EXE to launch the installation shield.
6.
Follow the prompts to install the upgrade package. At the conclusion of the
procedure, a new path will be created under Start > Programs > Barco Folsom.
7.
As required, please continue with the “Serial Upgrade Method” section on
page 362, or the “Ethernet Upgrade Method” section on page 364.
sá~=tÉÄ=páíÉ
Barco's web site address is: www.barco.com
„ To download from the web site:
1.
Create a target folder on your PC (e.g., Encore).
2.
On the web, navigate to:
http://www.barco.com
3.
Navigate to the “Events” home page:
http://www.barco.com/events
4.
Log in to the Barco Partnerzone.
5.
Navigate to the “Software Updates” link, and download the latest version of
Encore software.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
361
`K==réÖê~ÇáåÖ=pçÑíï~êÉ
Serial Upgrade Method
6.
When the File Download Dialog appears, click Save to save the file to your
computer.
7.
When the Save As Dialog appears, navigate to the target folder and click Save.
8.
With the download complete, navigate to the target folder and double-click the
EXE to launch the installation shield.
9.
Follow the prompts to install the upgrade package. At the conclusion of the
procedure, a new path will be created under Start > Programs > Barco Folsom.
10. As required, please continue with the “Serial Upgrade Method” section on
page 362, or the “Ethernet Upgrade Method” section on page 364.
pÉêá~ä=réÖê~ÇÉ=jÉíÜçÇ
„ Use the following steps to upgrade Encore software using a serial PC connection:
1.
Connect the Console port on the back of the Encore Controller to the COM 1 port
on your PC.
2.
Power-up the Encore Presentation System.
3.
On the PC, click Start > Programs > Barco Folsom > Encore System_SPII
Controller Software #.##.
4.
In the next pop-up menu in sequence, click the Flash Loader line to launch the
Flash Loader utility.
Figure C-1. Flash Loader Utility
Note
362
If you have not used the COM 1 port on your PC, an error
message will be shown at the bottom of the Flash Loader.
5.
Click Communication > RS232 Config > Baud, and select 115200.
6.
Click Communication > RS232 Config > COM Port, and select the COM port on
your PC to which the Controller is connected. If no other programs are using the
port, the “Established communications” message appears at the bottom of the
Flash Loader.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
`K==réÖê~ÇáåÖ=pçÑíï~êÉ
Serial Upgrade Method
7.
8.
9.
To verify communications between the PC and the Controller:
a.
In the Flash Loader, click in the black terminal window area.
b.
Note the condition of the status lights:
•
DCD and CTS should be red.
TXD and RXD should be green. They will flash if Enter is
•
pressed.
c.
Press Enter a few times to display the system prompt “#” on screen.
d.
If the prompt does not appear, continue with step 8 (troubleshooting).
e.
If the prompt appears, continue with step 9 (uploading files).
To troubleshoot the serial connection:
a.
If the DCD and CTS status lights are green, re-check the communication
settings in the loader, and verify that the COM port and Baud Rate
settings are correct.
b.
To verify Controller communication settings:
•
In the System Keypad press MISC to display the
Miscellaneous Menu.
•
Press {CONSL} to display the Console Port Setup Menu.
c.
Verify the following settings:
•
Baud rate = 115200
•
Data Bits = 8
•
Parity = None
•
Stop Bits = 1
d.
Repeat steps 6 and 7 above, then re-check the status lights.
e.
With communication status OK, continue with step 9.
To upload files to the Controller, click "Open script file to read and upload."
10. In the dialog, select "Complete_Load.sld" and click Open. The Encore menu
should immediately display the "System in LOADER MODE" message.
11. It takes several minutes to load the flash memory. When complete, the Flash
Loader utility displays the “Upload Complete” message. Click OK to continue.
12. Cycle power on the Controller, and exit the Flash Loader utility.
13. On the Controller, perform a factory reset. In Chapter 6, refer to the “Return to
Factory Default” section on page 246 for instructions.
14. At this point, the System Status Menu will display the “Please Upgrade”
message, because an incompatibility exists between code versions in the
Controller and the Video Processors.
To download code from the Controller to all target devices (including Video
Processors, ScreenPRO-II units and PresentationPRO-II), follow the instructions
in the “Downloading Code” section on page 245.
15. On the Controller, verify that the new software has been loaded correctly:
~
~
In the System Keypad, press SYSTEM to display the System Menu.
Press {SW VER} to display the Software Version Menu.
This completes the software upgrade procedure via serial communications.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
363
`K==réÖê~ÇáåÖ=pçÑíï~êÉ
Ethernet Upgrade Method
bíÜÉêåÉí=réÖê~ÇÉ=jÉíÜçÇ
„ Use the following steps to upgrade Encore software using an Ethernet connection to
your PC:
Note
The Controller’s default IP address is 192.168.0.1. The Video
Processor’s default IP address is 192.168.0.10.
1.
Ensure that your PC (or laptop) uses the Windows® 2000 or XP operating
systems.
2.
Connect the Controller’s Ethernet port to a Switch.
3.
Connect the Ethernet Switch to your PC. Remember that a totally “local” network
is recommended, without IP connections to the outside world.
4.
Power-up the Encore Presentation System.
5.
On the PC, click Start > Programs > Barco Folsom > Encore System_SPII
Controller Software #.##.
6.
In the next pop-up menu in sequence, click the Flash Loader line to launch the
Flash Loader utility.
Figure C-2. Flash Loader Utility
7.
Click Communication > Ethernet > Connect to display the Ethernet
Connection Dialog.
Figure C-3. Ethernet Connection Dialog (sample)
~
364
If the Ethernet menu pick is grayed out, set the COM port to None.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
`K==réÖê~ÇáåÖ=pçÑíï~êÉ
Ethernet Upgrade Method
8.
In the dialog, enter Controller’s IP address (192.168.0.1), and enter the default
port number: 3000.
9.
Click the Connect button. If the connection is successfully, the message
“Connect via Ethernet successful” appears in the Flash Loader’s Status Bar. If
you cannot connect, refer to the “Troubleshooting Ethernet Communication”
section on page 365.
10. To upload files to the Controller, click "Open script file to read and upload."
11. In the dialog, select "Complete_Load.sld" and click Open. The Encore menu
should immediately display the "System in LOADER MODE" message.
12. It takes several minutes to load the flash memory. When complete, the Flash
Loader utility displays the “Upload Complete” message. Click OK to continue.
13. Cycle power on the Controller, and exit the Flash Loader utility.
14. On the Controller, perform a factory reset. In Chapter 6, refer to the “Return to
Factory Default” section on page 246 for instructions.
15. At this point, the System Status Menu will display the “Please Upgrade”
message, because an incompatibility exists between code versions in the
Controller and the Video Processors.
To download code from the Controller to all target devices (including Video
Processors, ScreenPRO-II units and PresentationPRO-II), follow the instructions
in the “Downloading Code” section on page 245.
16. On the Controller, verify that the new software has been loaded correctly:
~
~
In the System Keypad, press SYSTEM to display the System Menu.
Press {SW VER} to display the Software Version Menu.
qêçìÄäÉëÜççíáåÖ=bíÜÉêåÉí=`çããìåáÅ~íáçå
„ Use the following steps to determine the IP address of the Controller, and establish
proper communications:
Note
1.
The Controller’s default IP address is 192.168.0.1. The Video
Processor’s default IP address is 192.168.0.10.
Turn on the Controller. In the System Keypad:
a.
Press SYSTEM to display the System Menu.
b.
Press {NETWORK SETUP} to display the Network Setup Menu.
2.
Make a note of the IP address.
3.
Attempt to ping the Controller as follows:
a.
Connect the Controller’s Ethernet port to a Switch.
b.
Connect the Ethernet Switch to your PC. A totally “local” network is
recommended, without IP connections to the outside world.
c.
Turn on the PC or laptop.
d.
Open a command prompt window on the PC. Click Start > Programs >
Accessories > Command Prompt.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
365
`K==réÖê~ÇáåÖ=pçÑíï~êÉ
Ethernet Upgrade Method
e.
On the command prompt line, type:
ping 192.168.0.1
... followed by Enter.
Note
Use the unit’s actual IP address, as determined in step 2
above.
f.
If the computer is able to successfully communicate with the Controller,
you will see a series of “replies” from the target IP address. Repeat the
upgrade procedure as outlined in the “Ethernet Upgrade Method”
section on page 364.
g.
If you see a “Request timed out” message, the PC is unable to locate
and communicate with the Controller. If this is the case:
•
•
•
366
Check your network connections and settings as described
above, or ...
Contact your network administrator, or ...
Contact Technical Support. In Appendix B, refer to the
“Contact Information” section on page 358 for details.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
aK==tçêâáåÖ=táíÜ=aÉëíáå~íáçåë
få=qÜáë=^ééÉåÇáñ
The following topics are discussed in this Appendix:
•
•
•
ScreenPRO-II Configurations
PresentationPRO-II Aux Configuration
ImagePRO Aux Configuration
pÅêÉÉåmolJff=`çåÑáÖìê~íáçåë
For your reference, this section provides illustrations of various ScreenPRO-II routing and
communications configurations:
•
•
•
•
Internal Router Configuration
External Serial Router Configuration
External Ethernet Router Configuration
External Serial and Ethernet Router Configuration
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
367
aK==tçêâáåÖ=táíÜ=aÉëíáå~íáçåë
ScreenPRO-II Configurations
fåíÉêå~ä=oçìíÉê=`çåÑáÖìê~íáçå
The diagram below illustrates an Encore configuration that uses two ScreenPRO-II units
with internal source routing. Each ScreenPRO-II is set up as a unique destination.
Internal Routing
ScreenPRO-II
Side Screen 1
Analog Inputs 1-8
HD/SD Inputs 1-2
(HD Model Only)
Analog Inputs 1-8
Side Screen 2
HD/SD Inputs 1-2
(HD Model Only)
Encore Controller (SC or LC)
Ethernet Switch
Figure D-1. ScreenPRO-II units using internal source routing
For an “internal routing” ScreenPRO-II configuration, please note the following points
regarding destination setup and source connections:
•
On the Destination Setup Menu:
~
~
~
•
•
Set the “Routing Mode” to Internal.
In Chapter 6, refer to the “ScreenPRO-II Destination Setup” section on
page 258 for instructions.
Connect analog and digital sources directly to each ScreenPRO-II.
ScreenPRO-II inputs are mapped using the Input Patch Menu:
~
~
~
368
Select Single Screen SP as the “Type.”
If you are using D/As to connect sources to similar inputs on each
ScreenPRO-II, select ALL SP as the “Connection Type.”
If you are connecting to different inputs, separate input patches are
required for each.
In Chapter 6, refer to the “Output Format Setup” section on page 263
for instructions.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
aK==tçêâáåÖ=táíÜ=aÉëíáå~íáçåë
ScreenPRO-II Configurations
bñíÉêå~ä=pÉêá~ä=oçìíÉê=`çåÑáÖìê~íáçå
The diagram below shows a configuration that uses two ScreenPRO-II units with external
source routing. Each ScreenPRO-II is set up as a unique destination.
In this configuration, two external serial (RS-232) routers are used — one for analog
connections and one for SDI source connections to each ScreenPRO-II. Because two
serial connections are required, a Lantronix UDS200 is used.
Inputs
ScreenPRO-II
Side Screen 1
Router
Outputs
MatrixPRO SDI Router
SDI
Inputs
RS-232
MatrixPRO Analog Router
Side Screen 2
Analog
Inputs
Encore Controller (SC or LC)
RS-232
Lantronix
UDS200
Ethernet
Ethernet Switch
Figure D-2. ScreenPRO-II units using external serial controlled routers
For an “external routing” configuration with serial controlled routers, please note the
following points regarding destination setup and source connections:
•
On the Destination Setup Menu:
~
~
~
•
•
•
•
•
Select Single Screen SP as the “Type.”
Set the “Routing Mode” to External.
In Chapter 6, refer to the “ScreenPRO-II Destination Setup” section on
page 258 for instructions.
Connect analog and digital sources to each router in the normal manner.
For each router, connect two outputs to each ScreenPRO-II.
On the Router Specification Menu, select the correct router and manufacturer,
and set the “Communication Type” to LANTRONIX. In Chapter 6, refer to the
“Router Setup” section on page 250 for instructions.
Router outputs are mapped using the Output Patch Menu. This menu defines
which router output connects to which ScreenPRO-II input. In Chapter 6, refer to
the “Router Setup” section on page 250 for instructions.
Router inputs are mapped using the Input Patch Menu. In Chapter 6, refer to the
“Output Format Setup” section on page 263 for instructions.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
369
aK==tçêâáåÖ=táíÜ=aÉëíáå~íáçåë
ScreenPRO-II Configurations
bñíÉêå~ä=bíÜÉêåÉí=oçìíÉê=`çåÑáÖìê~íáçå
The diagram below shows a configuration that uses two ScreenPRO-II units with external
source routing. Each ScreenPRO-II is set up as a unique destination. Two external
Ethernet routers are used — one for analog connections and one for SDI source
connections to each ScreenPRO-II.
ScreenPRO-II
Inputs
Side Screen 1
Router
Outputs
MatrixPRO SDI Router
SDI
Inputs
MatrixPRO Analog Router
Side Screen 2
Analog
Inputs
Encore Controller (SC or LC)
Ethernet Switch
Figure D-3. ScreenPRO-II units using external Ethernet controlled routers
For an “external routing” configuration with Ethernet controlled routers, please note the
following points regarding destination setup and source connections:
•
On the Destination Setup Menu:
~
~
~
•
•
•
•
•
370
Select Single Screen SP as the “Type.”
Set the “Routing Mode” to External.
In Chapter 6, refer to the “ScreenPRO-II Destination Setup” section on
page 258 for instructions.
Connect analog and digital sources to each router in the normal manner.
For each router, connect two outputs to each ScreenPRO-II.
On the Router Specification Menu, select the correct router and manufacturer,
and set the “Communication Type” to ETHERNET. In Chapter 6, refer to the
“Router Setup” section on page 250 for instructions.
Router outputs are mapped using the Output Patch Menu. This menu defines
which router output connects to which ScreenPRO-II input. In Chapter 6, refer to
the “Router Setup” section on page 250 for instructions.
Router inputs are mapped using the Input Patch Menu. In Chapter 6, refer to the
“Output Format Setup” section on page 263 for instructions.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
aK==tçêâáåÖ=táíÜ=aÉëíáå~íáçåë
ScreenPRO-II Configurations
bñíÉêå~ä=pÉêá~ä=~åÇ=bíÜÉêåÉí=oçìíÉê=`çåÑáÖìê~íáçå
The diagram below shows a configuration that uses two ScreenPRO-II units with external
source routing. Each ScreenPRO-II is set up as a unique destination. One external
Ethernet router is used, and one external serial router is used.
Inputs
ScreenPRO-II
Side Screen 1
Router
Outputs
MatrixPRO SDI Router
SDI
Inputs
RS-232
MatrixPRO Analog Router
Side Screen 2
Analog
Inputs
Encore Controller (SC or LC)
Ext Comm
Ethernet Switch
Figure D-4. ScreenPRO-II units using external serial and Ethernet routers
For an “external routing” configuration with Ethernet controlled routers, please note the
following points regarding destination setup and source connections:
•
On the Destination Setup Menu:
~
~
~
•
•
•
•
Set the “Routing Mode” to External.
In Chapter 6, refer to the “ScreenPRO-II Destination Setup” section on
page 258 for instructions.
Connect analog and digital sources to each router in the normal manner.
For each router, connect two outputs to each ScreenPRO-II.
On the Router Specification Menu, select the correct router and manufacturer.
In Chapter 6, refer to the “Router Setup” section on page 250 for instructions.
~
~
•
Select Single Screen SP as the “Type.”
For the serial router, set the “Communication Type” to RS-232.
For the Ethernet router, set the “Communication Type” to ETHERNET.
Router outputs are mapped using the Output Patch Menu. This menu defines
which router output connects to which ScreenPRO-II input. In Chapter 6, refer to
the “Router Setup” section on page 250 for instructions.
Router inputs are mapped using the Input Patch Menu. In Chapter 6, refer to the
“Output Format Setup” section on page 263 for instructions.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
371
aK==tçêâáåÖ=táíÜ=aÉëíáå~íáçåë
PresentationPRO-II Aux Configuration
mêÉëÉåí~íáçåmolJff=^ìñ=`çåÑáÖìê~íáçå
PresentationPRO-II units can be connected to the Encore Controller via Ethernet for use as
Aux destinations. In this manner, AUX outputs from up to two routers are connected to the
PresentationPRO-II — so that any available source used in the Encore system can be
displayed on a given monitor.
The diagram below shows a PresentationPRO-II Aux configuration that uses one analog
router and one SDI router.
MatrixPRO SDI Router
Router
Outputs
Monitor
SDI
Inputs
Inputs
PresentationPRO-II
MatrixPRO Analog Router
Analog
Inputs
Encore Controller (SC or LC)
Ethernet Switch
Figure D-5. PresentationPRO-II Aux connections
„ Use the following steps to properly prepare a PresentationPRO-II system for setup as
an Aux destination:
372
1.
Ensure that you are running software Version 1.12 (or above) on the
PresentationPRO-II. If not, download software in the normal manner from the
FTP site (ftp.folsom.com) or the web site (www.barco.com).
2.
On each router (1 x Analog, 1 x SDI), ensure that an unused router output is
physically connected to a PresentationPRO-II input. Make a note of these
connection patches, as they will need to be entered during the setup procedure.
3.
Before you connect the PresentationPRO-II to the Encore Controller, set up the
PresentationPRO-II’s output resolution at the unit itself. Ensure that you match
the resolution of the monitor connected to the system.
4.
On PresentationPRO-II’s Effects Menu, set up the transition parameters that the
unit will use when AUTO TRANS is pushed on the Encore Controller.
5.
(Optional) If a BG (background) or DSK (Downstream Key) needs to be on
Program at all times, set up this input on the PresentationPRO-II, and transition it
to Program — prior to placing the PresentationPRO-II into remote control mode.
6.
Complete the setup procedure by setting up the Aux destination(s) on the Encore
Controller. In Chapter 6, refer to the “AUX Destination Setup” section on
page 259 for instructions.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
aK==tçêâáåÖ=táíÜ=aÉëíáå~íáçåë
ImagePRO Aux Configuration
fã~ÖÉmol=^ìñ=`çåÑáÖìê~íáçå
ImagePRO units can be connected to the Encore Controller via Ethernet for use as Aux
destinations. In this manner, AUX outputs from up to three routers are connected to the
ImagePRO — so that any available source used in the Encore system can be displayed on
a given monitor.
The diagram below shows a ImagePRO Aux configuration that uses one analog router, one
DVI router and one SDI router.
MatrixPRO SDI Router
Router
Outputs
Monitor
SDI
Inputs
ImagePRO
Inputs
MatrixPRO DVI Router
DVI
Inputs
Encore Controller (SC or LC)
MatrixPRO Analog Router
Analog
Inputs
Ethernet Switch
Figure D-6. ImagePRO Aux connections
„ Use the following steps to properly prepare an ImagePRO system for setup as an Aux
destination:
1.
Ensure that you are running software Version 2.30 (or above) on the ImagePRO.
If not, download software in the normal manner from the FTP site
(ftp.folsom.com) or the web site (www.barco.com).
2.
On each router (1 x Analog, 1 x SDI, 1 x DVI), ensure that an unused router output
is physically connected to an ImagePRO input. Make a note of these connection
patches, as they will need to be entered during the setup procedure.
3.
Before you connect the ImagePRO to the Encore Controller, set up the
ImagePRO’s output resolution at the unit itself. Ensure that you match the
resolution of the monitor connected to the system.
4.
On ImagePRO’s Effects Menu, set up the transition parameters that the unit will
use when AUTO TRANS is pushed on the Encore Controller.
5.
Complete the setup procedure by setting up the Aux destination(s) on the Encore
Controller. In Chapter 6, refer to the “AUX Destination Setup” section on
page 259 for instructions.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
373
aK==tçêâáåÖ=táíÜ=aÉëíáå~íáçåë
ImagePRO Aux Configuration
374
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
bK==^ééäáÅ~íáçå=kçíÉë
få=qÜáë=^ééÉåÇáñ
The following application notes are provided in this Appendix:
•
•
Encore Controller to Router Connections
Router Interface Notes
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
375
bK==^ééäáÅ~íáçå=kçíÉë
Encore Controller to Router Connections
båÅçêÉ=`çåíêçääÉê=íç=oçìíÉê=`çååÉÅíáçåë
This application note provides information on how to use RS-232 communications to
connect the Encore Controller (both the SC and LC models) to various routers and
peripheral equipment. All RS-232 connections to the Controller are made through the
controller's DB-9 EXT COMM port.
Important
All Barco/ Folsom Routers can be connected to the Encore
Controller via Ethernet. This is the preferred connection
method.
The following topics are provided in this application note:
•
•
•
•
•
376
EXT COMM Pinouts
Cable Connection — Straight Through
Cable Connection — Null Modem
Lantronix Ethernet to Serial Cable Connection
Router Connection Table
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
bK==^ééäáÅ~íáçå=kçíÉë
Encore Controller to Router Connections
buq=`ljj=máåçìíë
The table below illustrates the pinouts on Encore's EXT COMM serial connector.
Note
5
Data "direction" information is provided from the point of view
of the Encore controller.
1
9
6
Figure E-1. Ext Comm Connector
Table E-1. Ext Comm Connector Pinouts
Pin
Signal
Description
Note
1
CD
Carrier Detect
2
TXD
Transmitted Data
Sends data. Connects to router's receiving pin.
3
RXD
Received Data
Receives data. Connects to router's transmitting pin
4
DSR
Data Set Ready
5
GND
Signal Ground
6
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
7
CTS
Clear To Send
8
RTS
Request To Send
9
RI
Unused
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
Connects to Ground Pin on Router
377
bK==^ééäáÅ~íáçå=kçíÉë
Encore Controller to Router Connections
`~ÄäÉ=`çååÉÅíáçå=Ô=píê~áÖÜí=qÜêçìÖÜ
The table below illustrates the required pin connections for typical Encore-to-Router
configurations. A straight-through RS-232 cable is used between Encore and the router.
Encore Controller (SC or LC)
MatrixPRO SDI Router
RS-232
Straight-through
Figure E-2. Straight through configuration
Table E-2. Straight-through pin connection
Encore Pin
2
3
5
378
Router Pin
l
l
l
2
3
5
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
bK==^ééäáÅ~íáçå=kçíÉë
Encore Controller to Router Connections
`~ÄäÉ=`çååÉÅíáçå=Ô=kìää=jçÇÉã
The table below illustrates the required pin connections for alternate Encore-to-Router
configurations (such as to Extron routers). A null modem RS-232 cable is used.
Encore Controller (SC or LC)
Extron Router
RS-232
Null Modem
Figure E-3. Null modem configuration
Table E-3. Null modem pin connection
Encore Pin
2
3
5
Router Pin
l
l
l
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
3
2
5
379
bK==^ééäáÅ~íáçå=kçíÉë
Encore Controller to Router Connections
i~åíêçåáñ=bíÜÉêåÉí=íç=pÉêá~ä=`~ÄäÉ=`çååÉÅíáçå
Because Encore Controllers only have one RS-232 serial port (EXT COMM), an external
device (such as the Lantronix UDS200) is required for multiple RS-232 connections. The
Lantronix UDS200 connects to Encore via Ethernet, and provides two RS-232 ports.
The table below illustrates the pinouts on the UDS200's serial connector.
Note
5
Data "direction" information is provided from the point of view
of the UDS200.
1
9
6
Figure E-4. Ext Comm Connector
Encore Controller (SC or LC)
MatrixPRO SDI Router
Lantronix
UDS200
MatrixPRO Analog Router
Ethernet Switch
Figure E-5. Lantronix Configuration
Table E-4. Lantronix Connector Pinouts
Pin
380
Signal
Description
Note
1
CD
Carrier Detect
2
RXD
Received Data
Receives data. Connects to router's transmitting pin
3
TXD
Transmitted Data
Sends data. Connects to router's receiving pin.
4
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
5
GND
Signal Ground
6
DSR
Data Set Ready
7
RTS
Request To Send
8
CTS
Clear To Send
9
RI
Unused
Connects to Ground Pin on Router
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
bK==^ééäáÅ~íáçå=kçíÉë
Encore Controller to Router Connections
Note
RS-232 cable requirements vary. Use the table in the
following section for specific cable requirements for various
routers.
oçìíÉê=`çååÉÅíáçå=q~ÄäÉ
The table below illustrates numerous notes and cable requirements, when connecting
Encore to various routers.
Router
Use null modem cable
Use straight through cable
Table E-5. Router Connection Table
Note
Use Host Connector
Sierra
Ensure DIP switches on Control Processor are set correctly
Older models
TX out of Sierra on Pin 2
RX in to Sierra on Pin 6
GND on Pin 1
3
New models
Leitch
… when connecting to Encore Controller
3
… when connecting to Lantronix
3
… when connecting to Encore Controller
Extron
3
… when connecting to Lantronix
3
… when connecting to Encore Controller
3
… when connecting to Lantronix
Direct Ethernet connections are supported
DPI or DVILINK
3
… when connecting to Encore Controller
3
Folsom
3
3
… when connecting to Lantronix
Use straight DB-25 to DB-9 cable to Encore Controller
3
Use straight DB-25 to DB-9 cable plus null modem adapter to
Lantronix
… or, use direct Ethernet to router
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
381
bK==^ééäáÅ~íáçå=kçíÉë
Encore Controller to Router Connections
Router
Use null modem cable
Use straight through cable
Table E-5. Router Connection Table (Continued)
3
ISIS
3
Note
… when connecting to Encore Controller
… when connecting to Lantronix
If required, try reversing null modem cable vs. straight through
cable, if the connection does not function properly.
382
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
bK==^ééäáÅ~íáçå=kçíÉë
Router Interface Notes
oçìíÉê=fåíÉêÑ~ÅÉ=kçíÉë
For selected third party routers, additional interface information is provided below. The
following topics are discussed in this section:
•
•
•
•
Extron Router Support
DVILink and DPI Router Support
Sierra Video Systems Router Support
Leitch Router Support
bñíêçå=oçìíÉê=pìééçêí
Encore supports Extron routers enabled with Ethernet.
•
•
•
In the Router Specification Menu, set the Communication Type to ETHERNET.
In the Ethernet Setup Menu, dial in the router’s IP address, and keep the port
number set to 23.
Press {TEST COMM} to establish communications.
Due to the Extron protocol, the router’s matrix size will not be read by the Controller, but will
instead default to 32 x 23. When you return from the Ethernet Setup Menu to the Router
Specification Menu, dial in the proper number of inputs and outputs to gain full access to
the router.
Note
Ensure that you set the router’s IP address to work within the
recommended range for non-Barco routers: 192.168.0.191 192.168.0.240. This range does not conflict with the
Controller, VPs or other network routers and devices.
asfiáåâ=~åÇ=amf=oçìíÉê=pìééçêí
Encore supports the DVILink and DPI 18x18 routers enabled with serial control. Connect
to the EXT COMM port on the back of the Controller. In Appendix A, refer to the “Serial
Connector” section on page 350 for pinouts.
páÉêê~=sáÇÉç=póëíÉãë=oçìíÉê=pìééçêí
Encore supports Sierra Video Systems routers enabled with serial control. Connect the
router to the EXT COMM port on the back of the Controller. In Appendix A, refer to the
“Serial Connector” section on page 350 for pinouts.
iÉáíÅÜ=oçìíÉê=pìééçêí
Ethernet connection to Leitch touters is supported. When the Encore Controller connects
to a Leitch Router via Ethernet, a Telnet session is established between the Controller and
the Router. As part of establishing this connection, the router requires a User Name and
Password to be entered. The Controller does this automatically when attempting to
connect to the router by using the default factory account.
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
383
bK==^ééäáÅ~íáçå=kçíÉë
Router Interface Notes
To ensure that a connection is successful, verify that the Leitch Router has the following
User Name and Password account:
•
•
User Name: leitch
Password: leitchadmin
Refer to the router "Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual" for more
information on how to create user accounts. The manual will also describe how to properly
change the IP address of the router. This will be necessary in order to set the router to a
compatible static IP address.
384
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
fåÇÉñ
pçÑíâÉóë
{ADD NEW} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
{ADD PATCH} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173, 178
{ADD} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
{ALL OFF} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191, 192
{ALL ON} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191, 192
{APPLY FORMAT} . . . . . . . . .140, 142, 150, 222
{AR} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
{ASPECT RATIO} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
{AUX SETUP} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167, 168
{BACK} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
{BACKUP RESTORE} . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180, 188
{BACKUP} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
{BG MATTE} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
{BLACK} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
{BORDR} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196, 199, 200
{CAPTURE} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
{CFG} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141, 143
{CHANGE CODE} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
{CHECK CARD} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188, 189
{CLONE} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196, 197, 199, 200
{COLOR BALANCE} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142, 147
{COMM SETUP} . . . . . . . . . .174, 175, 176, 177
{CONSL} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180, 181
{DEFINE VP ID} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180, 185
{DELETE PATCH} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173, 178
{DELETE ROUTER} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
{DELETE} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143, 227, 231
{DEST SETUP} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157, 166
{DIAG} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157, 161
{DISCOVER LTRX} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
{DOWNLOAD CODE} . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160, 245
{EDID} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180, 183
{EFX} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196, 199, 200, 201, 215
{ERASE} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227, 229
{FORCE ACQUIRE} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142, 146
{FORCE DOWNLOAD} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
{FRAME GRAB} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
{GLCK} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150, 151
{GRAB COLOR} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206, 236
{H SIZE} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196, 209, 210, 216
{HOME} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
{INPUT PATCH} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158, 172
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
{INPUT SETUP} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235, 236
{KEY DETECT} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161, 165
{KEY} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
{LCD CAL} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
{LCD SETTINGS} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180, 186
{LINKS} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35, 161, 162
{LOCK} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180, 182
{MATTE} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205, 207, 215
{MAX} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
{MIN} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
{NAME} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
{NETWORK SETUP} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157, 171
{NEXT IP QUAD} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
{OUTPUT PATCH} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175, 178
{PICK COLOR} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206, 236
{PIP} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199, 200
{PROGRAM EDID} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
{RATE} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196, 209, 216
{RECALL} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227, 232
{REMOVE} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
{RESET ALL} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
{RESET RGB} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
{RESET} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157, 159
{RESTORE} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
{ROTARY ENCODER} . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161, 163
{ROUTER SETUP} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158, 174
{SAVE} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141, 143, 146, 227
{SETTINGS} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150, 152
{SHDOW} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196, 199, 200
{SIZE & POS} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205, 206, 208
{SIZING} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142, 145
{START LED TEST} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
{STATS} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205, 209, 235
{SW VER} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157, 160
{TALLY} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
{TBAR & JOYSTICK} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161, 164
{TEST COMM} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
{TEST LINKS} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
{TEST PATTERN} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150, 153
{TRACK SIZE} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
{TRACK} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196, 209, 216
{USER PREF} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180, 187
{V SIZE} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196, 209, 210, 216
{WIDE SCREEN} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150, 154
385
Index
kìãÉêáÅë
1-1 Sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
1-1 Sizing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
^
program/preview routing . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
route viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
setup menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Aux destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26, 259
route sources to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259, 260
setup notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
setup overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
AC
connector, controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
connector, processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Acrobat usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
navigating and searching . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Activate
destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Adapter information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Adding destination to group . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Address, company . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3, 358
Advanced video processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Air intake ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Alignment Test Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . .153, 155
All button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 123, 127, 131
Alphanumeric keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37, 136
controller LC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Analog
15-pin D connector pinouts . . . . . . . . . . .348
background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36, 219, 223
DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
input combinations, table . . . . . . . . . . . .348
input flexibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
router name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
router output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Application
configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
single screen stack installation . . . . . . . . .71
single screen, installation . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
triple screen, installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
wide screen plus preview, installation . . . .67
wide screen stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
wide screen, installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Apply user keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Aspect ratio
menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144, 210
Athena scaler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 24
Auto
pend move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
trans button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Aux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
live switch routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
pend route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
386
_
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36, 219
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
DVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
format, wide screen settings . . . . . . . . . .154
frame grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
input setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
input setup menu description . . . . . . . . .219
input setup menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
LOS (loss of signal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
matte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
menu functions, analog . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
menu functions, DVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
menu functions, frame grab . . . . . . . . . .224
menu functions, matte . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
setup sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Backup
and restore utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 331
and restore, menu description . . . . . . . .188
and restore, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
system, flash memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Barco
backup and restore utility . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
contact information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Events Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 133
Folsom Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
sales contact information . . . . . . . . . . . .358
stage manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
technical support information . . . . . . .3, 358
Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
BG
A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 130
matte menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Black
invalid video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
preview button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
preview, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
Index
Blank connection charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Blue
color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
matte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208, 221
threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Border
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Bottom Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
analog background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
BRITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Burst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Bus
destination, controller LC . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
destination, controller SC . . . . . . . . . . . .102
source selection, controller LC . . . . . . . . .99
source selection, controller SC . . . . . . . .102
Button color, use of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
`
Cable information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Calibration
LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Capture
format, frame grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
frame from layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
frame grab from background input . . . . .334
sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226, 333
Card slot, multimedia, controller . . . . . . . . . . .50
Center justified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Change
history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
layer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
lockout code menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Chapter structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Charts
blank connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
sample connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Chassis handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Checksum Mismatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Clear
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 127
destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
layer button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
layers from program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205, 206
DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Clock Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Clone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
menu parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
setup menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197, 198
using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Code
download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Color
balance menu description . . . . . . . . . . .147
border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
matte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
picker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140, 150
use of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Comm setup menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Communication
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
type, router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Company address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3, 358
Composite sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Configuration
center justified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
DVI-I connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
HD/SDI inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
left justified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
multiple processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
save system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
single processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Encore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Connecting program and source links . . . . . . .93
Connection
cable, null modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
cable, straight through . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
charts, blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
charts, sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
ext comm pinouts, router . . . . . . . . . . . .377
router, Lantronix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Connector
AC, controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
AC, processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Clip
387
Index
analog 15-pin D pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
analog input A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
analog input B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
controller ext comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
controller keyboard port . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
controller tally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
DVI input A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
DVI input B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
DVI pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
DVI-I pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Ethernet pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
genlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
HD/SDI input A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
HD/SDI input B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
M/E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43, 45
preview out analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
preview out DVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
program 1 out analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
program 1 out DVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
program 2 out analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
program 2 out DVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
program link in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
program link out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
program out HD/SDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
serial pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
source link in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
source link out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
tally pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
unit ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Console lighting
section, controller LC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
section, controller SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
section, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Console port
controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
setup menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Contact information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
CONTRAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
analog background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Controller
AC connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
console port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Ethernet port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
ext comm connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
keyboard port connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
multimedia card slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
rear panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
tally connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
to router connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
USB B port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
388
use of color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Controller LC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 33
alphanumeric keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
console lighting section . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
destination bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
group control section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
joystick section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
layer control section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
layer function section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
layer/aux control section . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
live switch section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
machine control section . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
preset section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
program preset section . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
source selection bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
system keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
touch screen section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
transition function section . . . . . . . . . . . .100
transition section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
user key section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 134
Controller SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 33
console lighting section . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
destination bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
group control section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
joystick section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
layer control section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
layer functions section . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
layer/aux control section . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
live switch section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
preset section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
program preset section . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
source selection bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
system keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
touch screen section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
transition functions section . . . . . . . . . . .102
transition section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Copy
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170, 262, 273
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35, 191
PIP or KEY parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
setup menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Crop
background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222, 223
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Ctrlr IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Current
backup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
Index
Custom lockout code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Cut
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Cut + Fill
how to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
a
D/A setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Data
bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
doubling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Deactivating destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Default
IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364, 365
lockout code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
output patch table, stack destinations . .252
output patch table, standard destinations 251
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 343
Delete
applies to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
frame from memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
frame grab menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Deleting frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Description
alphanumeric keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
console lighting section . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
destination bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
group control section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
joystick section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
layer control section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
layer function section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
layer/aux control section . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
live switch section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
machine control section . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
preset section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
program preset section . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
source selection bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
system keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
touch screen section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
transition function section . . . . . . . . . . . .132
transition section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
user key section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 140, 150
activating and deactivating . . . . . . . . . . .293
aux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
aux setup notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
based effects menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
bus, controller LC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
bus, controller SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
bus, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
flexibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
ImagePRO aux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26, 373
menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
PresentationPRO-II aux . . . . . . . . . .26, 372
route sources to aux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
ScreenPRO-II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
ScreenPRO-II configurations . . . . . . . . .367
ScreenPRO-II, external router 369, 370, 371
ScreenPRO-II, internal router . . . . . . . . .368
setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166, 257
setup Aux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259, 260
setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
setup overview, Aux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
setup PrePRO-II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
setup ScreenPRO-II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
setup standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
setup, ImagePRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
single screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
wide screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
working with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293, 367
Destinations
activate and deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
pend aux route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
route aux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
view aux route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
DHCP
client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Diagnostics
setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
setup menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Dialog, Ethernet connection . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Direct Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
input patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Documentation
conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Download
code, setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
software, via FTP site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
software, via web site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
389
Index
Downstream key (DSK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
DPI router support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 35
adjustment menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
adjustment menu description, color . . . .235
adjustment menu description, luma . . . .234
analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120, 130
clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
DVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
fill source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
frame grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
input setup menu description . . . . . . . . .237
invert mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
LOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
luma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
luma key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
none . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
opacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235, 236
priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
working with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Dual mixer effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
DVI
background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219, 222
connector pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
program outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
router name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
router output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
DVI-I
connector pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
DVILink router support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
b
Edge
butted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
feathering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Edge blending technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
content creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
high definition image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
multi-head graphics boards . . . . . . . . . . .90
video processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
EDID
DVI Input menu description . . . . . . . . . .183
format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
390
Effect combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
EFFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
dual mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37, 108
menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
single mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
triple mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
EMPTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Encore
configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
controller LC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 33
controller SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 33
controller to router connections . . . . . . .376
event management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
integration with routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
output flexibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
product differentiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
scaling and keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
single screen installation . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
single screen stack installation . . . . . . . . .72
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
triple screen installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
video processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
wide screen installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
wide screen preview installation . .68, 69, 70
wide screen stack installation . . . . . . . . . .76
Equipment marking terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Erase
frame grab menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
ES option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
frame grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226, 232
Ethernet
connection dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
connector pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
port, controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Event management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Events Manager software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Ext
comm connector, controller . . . . . . . . . . .50
trigger button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
trigger, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Extended
display identification data . . . . . . . . . . . .183
frame grab option . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226, 333
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
Index
External trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Extron router support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
c
Factory default, return to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
FCC statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Feathering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
gamma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Athena scaler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
background channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
frame grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
PIP effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
video delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
video processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
FG_1, FG_2, FG_3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219, 224
DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
File
mapping, understanding . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Fill
source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205, 207
source, DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Filter, flicker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Fine Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 196
Firmware files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Flash
loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362, 364
memory backup, setup procedure . . . . .278
memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
memory, restore from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Flicker
filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
reduction, interlaced formats . . . . . . . . . .37
Force acquire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140, 142
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140, 150
background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222, 223
EDID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
setup output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Frame grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 34
background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219, 224
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
capture format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
capture from background input . . . . . . . .334
capture from layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
capture overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
delete menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
erase and delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
erase menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
menu description, functions . . . . . . . . . .226
menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
name a saved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
name menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
recall menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
save frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
save in permanent memory . . . . . . . . . .336
save menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
sub menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
working with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Freeze
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Front panel
controller LC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
controller SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
video processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
FTP site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Full screen
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
d
Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205, 206
DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Gamma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141, 152
feathering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
General operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Genlock
connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
source and type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Global rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Go / - button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Go / + button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Grab frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Green
color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
matte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207, 221
threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Group
activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
adding destination to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
control section, controller LC . . . . . . . . .100
control section, controller SC . . . . . . . . .102
control section, description . . . . . . . . . . .127
learning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
391
Index
notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
remove destination from . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
unlearn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Guarantee and compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
e
H Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
H Pos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
H Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146, 195
input source adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
H Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195, 210
input source adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
shadow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
H Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Hardware
installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
requirements, upgrading software . . . . .360
video processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
HD/SDI
inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
High definition image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
History, change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Home menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
How to
activate a group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
activate and deactivate destinations . . .293
add destination to group . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
adjust raster box size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
apply user keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
back up system to flash memory . .278, 330
calibrate touch screen . . . . . . . . . .247, 282
capture frame from a layer . . . . . . . . . . .335
capture frame from background input . .334
change layer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
clear a group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
clear all layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
clear destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
clear layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
connect program and source links . . .93, 95
delete a saved frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
delete presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
disable controller lockout . . . . . . . . . . . .329
download code from controller . . . . . . . .245
download software from FTP site . . . . . .361
download software from website . . . . . .361
enable controller lockout . . . . . . . . . . . .329
enable or disable tallies . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
enter values numerically . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
erase a saved frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
install single screen Encore . . . . . . . . . . .56
install single screen stack . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
install triple screen Encore . . . . . . . . . . . .59
392
install wide screen Encore . . . . . . . . . . . .63
install wide screen preview . . . . . .68, 69, 70
install wide screen stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
learn a group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
learn a group button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
live switch aux destination . . . . . . . . . . .295
modify keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
modify layers on program . . . . . . . . . . . .306
modify PIPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
name a saved frame grab . . . . . . . . . . .337
patch inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
pend aux route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
pend move on preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
pend move on program . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
perform a cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
perform a mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
perform a wipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
perform background transitions . . . . . . .298
perform DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
perform manual transition . . . . . . . . . . . .321
power up peripherals, check status . . . .244
prepare ImagePRO aux destination . . . .373
prepare PrePRO-II aux destination . . . .372
program EDID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
program move on preview . . . . . . . . . . .313
program move on program . . . . . . . . . . .314
program/preview switch aux destination 295
recall presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
remove destination from group . . . . . . . .291
restore from flash memory . . . . . . . . . . .249
restore system from flash memory . . . . .331
return to factory default . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
route aux destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
save frame in permanent memory . . . . .336
save setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
set up Aux destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
set up background sources . . . . . . . . . .269
set up D/A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
set up DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
set up genlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
set up ID and remote enable . . . . . . . . .242
set up ImagePRO Aux destination . . . . .261
set up inputs, comprehensive . . . . . . . . .271
set up inputs, quick start . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
set up output format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
set up PrePRO-II Aux destination . . . . .261
set up single screen projectors . . . . . . . .266
set up sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
set up wide screen projectors . . . . . . . . .267
set user preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
setup routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
setup ScreenPRO-II destinations . . . . . .258
setup stack destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
setup standard destinations . . . . . . . . . .257
store presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
store user keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
switch sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
Index
toggle backgrounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
troubleshoot Ethernet connection . . . . . .365
unlearn a group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
upgrade software via Ethernet . . . . . . . .364
upgrade software via serial . . . . . . . . . . .362
use alphanumeric keypad . . . . . . . . . . . .288
use black preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
use clone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
use copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
use cut + fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
use destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
use ext trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
use freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
use full screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
use join mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
use Keys in mix mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
use Keys in split mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
use layer and aux control . . . . . . . . . . . .326
use live switch program/preview . . . . . . .317
use live switch source mode . . . . . . . . .318
use move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313, 314
use next and previous . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
use PIPs in mix mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
use PIPs in split mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
use reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
use source preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
use swap z-order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
use this guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
view aux route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
work with layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Hue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Hyperlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
f
ID
all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
color balance menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
mapping, video processors . . . . . . . . . .185
remote enable setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
sizing menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
unit connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Image
effects menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
overlap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
ImagePRO
aux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167, 169, 294, 373
aux destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26, 259
destination setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169, 170
Information, cables and adapters . . . . . . . . . .53
INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
configuration menu description . . . . . . .143
connection type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
file mapping, understanding . . . . . . . . . .287
flexibility, analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107, 138
menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
menu functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
notes, M/E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
patch table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
patch, mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
patching, setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
resolution specifications . . . . . . . . .352, 353
setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
source adjustment menu description . . .214
source adjustment menu functions . . . . .215
source joystick functions . . . . . . . . . . . .216
source patch menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
source patch menu description . . . . . . .172
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
sub menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
sync type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
VP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Installation
connecting program and source links . . . .93
hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
single screen application . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
single screen Encore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
single screen stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71, 72
site preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
triple screen application . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
triple screen Encore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
unpacking and inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
wide screen application . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
wide screen Encore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
wide screen plus preview . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
wide screen preview . . . . . . . . . . .68, 69, 70
wide screen stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75, 76
Integration with routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Interface notes, routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Interlaced format flicker reduction . . . . . . . . . .37
Interval (frames), strobe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Invalid video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Invert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205, 206
mode, DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
IP
address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
address, default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364, 365
port number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
393
Index
g
i
Join mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36, 120
using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Joystick
input source functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
PIP functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
section, controller LC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
section, controller SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
section, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Justification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Lantronix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
connection to router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
model UDS200 Device Server . . .56, 60, 64
setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
and aux control, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
aux control section, controller LC . . . . . .100
aux control section, controller SC . . . . . .102
aux control section, description . . . . . . .130
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
change mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
control section, controller LC . . . . . . . . . .99
control section, controller SC . . . . . . . . .102
control section, description . . . . . . . . . . . 118
function section, controller LC . . . . . . . . .99
function section, description . . . . . . . . . .121
functions section, controller SC . . . . . . .102
functions, working with . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
how to change mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
how to clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
how to clear all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
join mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
working with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Layout
monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
monitors, single screen application . . . .281
monitors, wide screen application . . . . .282
LCD
calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
settings, menu description . . . . . . . . . . .186
Learn
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113, 128
group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
LED
red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113, 117
status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Left justified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Leitch router support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Link diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Live Switch
aux routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
mode timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
program/preview mode . . . . . . . . . . .34, 124
program/preview notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
program/preview, using . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
section, controller LC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
section, controller SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
section, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
source mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34, 124
source mode, notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
h
Key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
adjustment menu description . . . . . . . . .208
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
cut and fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
detect menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
frame effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196, 209, 215
functions, color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
functions, cut + fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
functions, luma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
joystick functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
menu functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
source adjustment menu description . . .214
sub menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
using with mix mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
using with split mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Key frame
effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
effects for moves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
motion type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Keyboard
port, controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
PS/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Keypad
alphanumeric, controller LC . . . . . . . . . . .99
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
system, controller LC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
system, controller SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
394
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
Index
source, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Lockout
code menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Lookahead preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 284
LOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
loss of signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
scaler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Loss of signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Luma
DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
key functions, DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
j
M/E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
analog input A connector . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
analog input B connector . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43, 45
DVI input A connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
DVI input B connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
HD/SDI input A connector . . . . . . . . . . . .45
HD/SDI input B connector . . . . . . . . . . . .46
input notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
source link in connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
source link out connector . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
MAC Addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Machine control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
section, controller LC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
section, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Manual transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Manufacturer, router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Marker Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Markers
center justified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
left justified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
wide screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Matte
background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219, 220
color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
1-1 sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
background input setup . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
BG matte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
comm setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
crop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
download code results . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
DSK adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
effects, destination based . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
frame delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
frame erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
frame grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
frame recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
frame save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
functions, key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107, 138
key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
machine control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107, 179
name frame grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107, 148
PIP adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
preset recall options . . . . . . . . . . . .108, 137
presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
source adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107, 156
user keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
widescreen link diagnostics . . . . . . . . . .162
Menu description
aspect ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
aux setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
background input setup . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
backup/restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
clone setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
color balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
console port setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
copy setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
current backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
diagnostics setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
DSK adjustment, color . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
DSK adjustment, luma . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
DSK input setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
EDID DVI input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Ethernet setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
frame grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
genlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
image effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
input configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
input source adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
input source patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
key adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
key detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
key source adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Lantronix setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
LCD settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
lockout code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
matte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
395
Index
miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
network setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
output patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
oversample sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
PIP adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
rotary encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
router setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
RS-232 setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
shadow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
sizing menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
TBar and Joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
test pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
user key copy setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
user keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
user preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
video processors ID definition . . . . . . . .185
wide screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
widescreen link diagnostics . . . . . . . . . .162
Menu functions
analog background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
DVI background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
frame grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
frame grab background . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
input source adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
matte background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
PIP adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Menu tree
background input setup . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
frame grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
PIP adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
source adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Mirror, clone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Misc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107, 137
Miscellaneous
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107, 179
menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
sub menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Mix
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120, 299
mode, understanding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
mode, working with Keys . . . . . . . . . . . .303
396
source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
source button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 21
layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173, 178
Mode
aspect ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
monochrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
shadow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Modify
keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
layers on program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Monitor
layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
layout, single screen application . . . . . .281
layout, wide screen application . . . . . . .282
Monochrome mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Motion type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Move
and presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
keyframe motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
pend on preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
pend on program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
pending and triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
program move on preview . . . . . . . . . . .313
program move on program . . . . . . . . . . .314
programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196, 215
rate, key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
setup button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Multi-head graphics boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Multimedia card slot, controller . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Multiple processor configuration . . . . . . . . . . .47
k
Name
frame grab menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
saved frame grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Network
DHCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
setup menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
New Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228, 230
Next button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Notes
application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
Index
move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Number
of inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
of outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
l
Offset, clone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Opacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205, 206
DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235, 236
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
a word about resources . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
activate and deactivate destinations . . .293
background transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
backup and restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
change layer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
clear layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
clearing destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
controller lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
deleting presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
erase and delete frames . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
join mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Keys in mix mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Keys in split mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
layer functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
learning a group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
modify key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
modify layers on program . . . . . . . . . . . .306
modify PIPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
pend aux route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
pend move on preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
pend move on program . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
PIPs in mix mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
PIPs in split mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
recalling presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
route aux destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
storing presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
switching sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
understanding split and mix modes . . . .299
using black preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
using clone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
using copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
using cut + fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
using ext trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
using freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
using full screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
using layer and aux control . . . . . . . . . .326
using live modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
using move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
using next and previous . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
using reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
using source preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
using swap z-order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
view aux route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
working with DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
working with frame grabs . . . . . . . . . . . .332
working with layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
working with presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
working with tallies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
working with transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
working with user keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
safety summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Orientation
controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107, 137
DVI program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
flexibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
format setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
HD/SDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107, 148
menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
menu functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152, 153
notes, program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
patch menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
patch table, stack destinations . . . . . . . .252
patch table, standard destinations . . . . .251
program 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
resolution specifications . . . . . . . . .352, 355
router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
sub menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Overlap
images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Overlapped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Oversample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
sizing menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Overview
destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
edge blending technology . . . . . . . . . . . .89
frame grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
frame grab capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
software upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
397
Index
m
Page button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114, 134
Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Patch
inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255, 256
table, output, stack destinations . . . . . . .252
table, output, standard destinations . . . .251
PDF
file usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
file usage, navigating and searching . . . .19
hyperlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Pend
aux route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
move, auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Permanent Frame Stores . . . . . . . . . . .226, 333
Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Picking colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Picture-in-Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
analog 15-pin D connector . . . . . . . . . . .348
DVI connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
DVI-I connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Ethernet connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
serial connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
tally connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
PIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
adjustment menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
adjustment menu description . . . . . . . . .195
adjustment menu functions . . . . . . . . . .195
adjustment menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
adjustment sub menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
how to modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
joystick functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
using with mix mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
using with split mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
working with mix mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
working with split mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Please Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
controller console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
controller Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
controller USB B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Power
connector, controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
connector, processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
PrePRO-II
aux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167, 169
aux destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
destination setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
398
Prerequisites, operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
PresentationPRO-II
aux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
aux configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
aux destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
auto pend move feature . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
recall options menu . . . . . . . .108, 137, 324
recalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
section, controller LC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
section, controller SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
section, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
working with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
and moves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
to Program button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
using next and previous . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Preview
lookahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 284
OSD button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
out analog connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
out DVI connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
program move on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
wide screen configuration . . . . . . . . . .34, 68
Previous button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Priority
background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
M/E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
PIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
AC connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
air intake ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
analog input A connector . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
analog input B connector . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
chassis handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
DVI input A connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
DVI input B connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Ethernet connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
genlock connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
HD/SDI input A connector . . . . . . . . . . . .45
HD/SDI input B connector . . . . . . . . . . . .46
M/E connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43, 45
preview out analog connector . . . . . . . . .41
preview out DVI connector . . . . . . . . . . . .41
program 1 out analog connector . . . . . . .42
program 1 out DVI connector . . . . . . . . . .42
program 2 out analog connector . . . . . . .42
program 2 out DVI connector . . . . . . . . . .42
program link in connector . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
Index
program link out connector . . . . . . . . . . . .42
program out HD/SDI connector . . . . . . . .42
rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
re-define IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
serial connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
source link in connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
source link out connector . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
stacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
unit ID connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Product differentiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Program
1 out analog connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
1 out DVI connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
1 outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
2 out analog connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
2 out DVI connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
clear layers from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
link connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89, 93
link in connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
link out connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
modify layers on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
out HD/SDI connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
output notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
preset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
program move on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Program Preset
section, controller LC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
section, controller SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
section, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Program/Preview
aux routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Programmable
controller lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
raster box size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Programming
EDID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
moves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Projector
setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92, 266
setup, single screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
setup, wide screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
PS/2 keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37, 136, 289
Pulldown Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
o
Rack-mount installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Raster Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37, 152
understanding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Rear panel
controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
video processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Recall
frame grab menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Red
color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113, 117
mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
matte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207, 221
threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Red, Green, Blue
color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Re-define video processor IDs . . . . . . . . .35, 43
Remote control/DHCP, enable, disable . . . . .242
Remove destination from group . . . . . . . . . .291
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
rotary encoders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Resolution specifications
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
input and output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Resources, a word about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Restore
and backup utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
system, from flash memory . . . . . . . . . .331
Return material authorization . . . . . . . . . . . .357
RGB sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
RMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Rotary
encoder menu description . . . . . . . . . . .163
knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Router
cable connections, Lantronix . . . . . . . . .380
cable connections, null modem . . . . . . .379
cable connections, straight through . . . .378
communication type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
connection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
connections to controller . . . . . . . . . . . .376
connections, ext comm pinouts . . . . . . .377
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
interface notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
name, aux setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168, 178
setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
399
Index
setup menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
specification menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
support, DPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
support, DVILink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
support, Extron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
support, Leitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
support, Sierra Video Systems . . . . . . . .383
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Routing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
RS-232 setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Rules, global . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
p
Safety
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Sales contact information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Sample connection charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Sampling Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
captured frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
frame grab menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
frame in permanent memory . . . . . . . . .336
setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
system configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Saved Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
SAVED_FG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Scaler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
LOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Scaling and keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
ScreenPRO-II
configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
external Ethernet router configuration . .370
external serial and Ethernet . . . . . . . . . .371
external serial router configuration . . . . .369
internal router configuration . . . . . . . . . .368
setup destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
SDI Router
name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Section
console lighting, controller LC . . . . . . . . .99
console lighting, controller SC . . . . . . . .102
group control, controller LC . . . . . . . . . .100
group control, controller SC . . . . . . . . . .102
joystick, controller LC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
joystick, controller SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
layer control, controller LC . . . . . . . . . . . .99
layer control, controller SC . . . . . . . . . . .102
layer function, controller LC . . . . . . . . . . .99
layer functions, controller SC . . . . . . . . .102
layer/aux control, controller LC . . . . . . . .100
layer/aux control, controller SC . . . . . . .102
400
live switch, controller LC . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
live switch, controller SC . . . . . . . . . . . .102
machine control, controller LC . . . . . . . . .99
preset, controller LC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
preset, controller SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
program preset, controller LC . . . . . . . . .100
program preset, controller SC . . . . . . . .102
touch screen, controller LC . . . . . . . . . . .98
touch screen, controller SC . . . . . . . . . .101
transition function, controller LC . . . . . . .100
transition functions, controller SC . . . . . .102
transition, controller LC . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
transition, controller SC . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
user key, controller LC . . . . . . . . . .100, 134
Sections, controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Seqs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Sequence, system setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Sequences menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Serial
connection via Lantronix UDS200 56, 60, 64
connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
connector pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
software upgrade method . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Set user preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Settings menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Setup
Aux destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259, 260
Aux destination, overview . . . . . . . . . . . .259
background sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
backup to flash memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
D/A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
downloading code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
genlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
ID and remote enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
ImagePRO destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
input patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255, 256
inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
output format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
peripheral power, status check . . . . . . . .244
PrePRO-II destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
programming EDID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
projector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
projectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
restore from flash memory . . . . . . . . . . .249
return to factory default . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
save system configuration . . . . . . . . . . .277
ScreenPRO-II destinations . . . . . . . . . . .258
sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
single screen projectors . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
stack destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
standard destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
Index
sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
touchscreen calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
wide screen projectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Shadow menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Sharpness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Shift button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Shuffle button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Sierra Video Systems router support . . . . . . .383
Single
mixer effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
processor configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
screen application, installation . . . . . . . . .55
screen destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
screen stack, installation . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Site preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Size
raster box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
specified in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Sizing menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Software
downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
events manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
requirements, upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
upgrade overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
upgrade via Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
version menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
version menu description . . . . . . . . . . . .160
version mismatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
SOG / Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Source
adjustment menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
adjustment menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 117, 124
link connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89, 93
map, input patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168, 169
number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
preview button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122, 310
preview, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
RGB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
selection bus, controller LC . . . . . . . . . . .99
selection bus, controller SC . . . . . . . . . .102
selection bus, description . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
setup background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
SP
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
input is mapped to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
to add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
to remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
input and output resolutions . . . . . . . . . .352
input resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
output resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
physical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Split
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120, 299
mode, understanding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Stack
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
destination setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
installation, single screen . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
installation, wide screen . . . . . . . . . . .75, 76
video processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Standard destination setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
LED, processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Still frame capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Store user keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Strobe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Sub menus
frame grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
PIP adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Support, technical information . . . . . . . . . .3, 358
S-Video sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Swap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Z-order button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Z-order, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Switch sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Sync
out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
slice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21, 107, 137
back up configuration to flash memory . .278
backup to flash memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
keypad, controller LC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
keypad, controller SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
keypad, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107, 156
401
Index
menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
reset menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
restore from flash memory . . . . . . . . . . .331
setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
setup prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
setup sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
sub menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
q
Table
analog input cable combinations . . .48, 348
cables and adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
input patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
router connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Tally
connector pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
connector, controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
working with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
TBar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
& Joystick menu description . . . . . . . . . .164
Technical support information . . . . . . . . . .3, 358
Temporary Frame Stores . . . . . . . . . . . .226, 332
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
equipment marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Test
LED Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
pattern menu description . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Test pattern
alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153, 155
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Timing, live modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Toggle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Top Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Total
H Res . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
projectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
V Res . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247, 282
setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Touch screen section
controller LC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
controller SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Transition
backgrounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
402
edge width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
functions section, controller LC . . . . . . .100
functions section, controller SC . . . . . . .102
functions section, description . . . . . . . . .132
manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
perform background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
section, controller LC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
section, controller SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
section, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
wipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
working with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Transparency, shadow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Trigger, external . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Triggering a move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Triple
mixer effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
screen application, installation . . . . . . . . .58
Troubleshoot Ethernet connection . . . . . . . . .365
Type
background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
clone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197, 198
destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
r
UDS100, UDS200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
UDS200 device server, Lantronix . . . .56, 60, 64
Understanding
file mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
raster boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
split and mix modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Unit ID connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Unlearn group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
UNSAVED_FG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Upgrade
software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
software via Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
software via serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
USB B port, controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Use of color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
User
copy button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
effect button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
key section, controller LC . . . . . . . .100, 134
keys menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
keys, menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
preference, menu description . . . . . . . . .187
preferences, set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
trans buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
User Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36, 108, 137
applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
Index
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
copy setup menu description . . . . . . . . .192
functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
working with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Using
alphanumeric keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
clone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
controller lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
cut + fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
live switch program/preview . . . . . . . . . .317
live switch source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
PS/2 keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Utility, backup and restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
s
V Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
V Pos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
V Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146, 195
input source adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
V Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195, 210
input source adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
shadow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
V Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
VER x.xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Video
advanced processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
invalid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 91
processing, edge feathering . . . . . . . . . . .92
processing, image overlap . . . . . . . . . . . .91
processing, projector setup . . . . . . . . . . .92
processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
processor hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
processor ID, redefine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
processor stacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
processor, front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
processor, rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
processor, re-define IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
processors ID definition menu . . . . . . . .185
View aux routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
VP
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173, 178
input is mapped to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
to add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
to remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
VP/SP
backed up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
to Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide
t
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Web site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
What’s new in the User’s Guide . . . . . . . . . . .34
Wide screen
application plus preview, installation . . . .67
application, installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
definition flexibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
link diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
link diagnostics menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
link diagnostics menu description . . . . . .162
markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
preview configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .34, 68
stack, installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Wipe transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Working with
destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293, 367
Keys in mix mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Keys, split mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
layer functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
PIPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
PIPs, mix mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
u
X-Axis Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
v
Y-Axis Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
YPbPr sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
w
Z-Axis Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
403
Index
404
Encore Presentation System • User’s Guide